Home

procedure - Pro-face America HMI Store

Contents

1. Editing a Tool Bar DSFICIIDC EE OCS CRCIEOOnEE Mark To iolmiolelnlie ele parma oxa T ml ar Drawing njis z drawing Tool Bar 3 area of 48 x 2 Origin s 48 dots Indicates the P w s This area is size of the D A a composed mark loaded E 2 Of 6 verti onthe base a cal x6 screen 1x1 amp Z x w horizontal 3 blocks z Each block 8 x 8 Displays the dots current cursor a T G8 And LINK ae coordinates based on the origin 0 0 Screen capacity E Drawing Tools The Drawing Tool Bar icons and their corresponding drawing objects are as follows Specify the ON OFF status of each dotby clicking on each dotor dragging the mouse within a specified area Specify the startand end points of a line and draw a line Line S by clicking on desired points Draw a square or rectangle byclicking and dragging to Filled square __ the desired size on a diagonal axis Filled rectangle eCie ia Draw a circle or oval by clicking and dragging to the Filled circle desired size on a diagonal axis Filled oval aama LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATI
2. h Tool Bar bl oa 881412 5060K RSF fa il haz Li f Fl E j Selection Ei A c Pull down Pats Fi Tool Box Menu 3 i Zoom Box d Drawing My Pats We Objects an Dele Area L Link Select fe Change Order i k Screen e Screen Sw NO_BORDER Swi 3D0N H Data List Center Mark Parts Palette f Grid Points Sw_SD005 Sw_SDO008 23 Bit Switch E Word Switch Ai Function le g Status Bar ia OMRON NEO Fon g h Tool Bar h Tool Bar a Title Bar Displays the project file name screen number and title b Menu Bar Displays the menus used to operate LT Editor When you select a desired menu using the mouse or keypad the pull down menu c appears c Pull down Menu When you select a desired menu from the menu bar the pull down menu appears This menu includes various commands d Drawing Area Here you can create a screen for your LT unit The size of the screen you see here is designated via the Display Type setting you entered when you first created the project file Depending on the size of your PC s display the screen s entire display area may not be displayed In this case simply scroll up or down to view the entire screen e Screen Center Mark Indicates the center of the screen This mark is not displayed when the data is sent to the LT unit f Grid Points Used as reference points when you draw or paste an obj
3. me Data Sampling List Data Sampling List shows data sampling settings created in the edited project file You can confirm the status of each data sampling setting there You can also change the data sampling settings on the list Usage Pattern When editing or deleting Select Desired Item and View Data Sampling List Fator Deloite the key The following is the Data Ssampling List local screen example The edit method of this list is the same as that of the Parts list 2 7 5 Parts List All tab Usina Devi Opens the selected oe m List x Data Sampling an Setting for editing Here the device Deletes the selected comment that l corresponds to a a Data Sampling an device ad Setting dress is auto Tea matically written _ ee eet Sam in the Descrip Ta ping setting tion field Pastes Data Sam pling Setting Click on cos _ to close the Data Sampling Setting Moves Data Sampling Setting one position higher on the list List screen Pressing the Esc z E Moves Data Sampling key will also close Settingone position the screen lower on the list LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 251 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 252 Setup Channel tub All Setup Channel Trigger Bit Addr Top write
4. o x JO sa olm aal gt ml xmels LGIso xXx eelin i m aa para oe IRL IORPaHRUGS SOR EER w b EA 2 156 nate OA ee ANA ow A Sno Chonges to Rung ON _ FAO Ee P A a 100 Sea ee ere ee Cua Cirle eo at ry tae ek eS e a 3 Paste Cle Eh ER en athe aie F 56 132 r204 Ready m Edit View Search Insert Data Controller Help Moy EN DN 4000 IM QUT Fill_Timer PT o Yal1 O14 edium_pushbuttor JPH IPI EN DN Off BOOO IN OUT Fill Timer PT 0 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 3 Select the Screen Editor Edit menu Paste Com mand Data 2 command or click on the icon Edit View Seach Inset Data Controller Help EB kK RA k Firat foe Je PA e ee ok paAramgpgpgumAA 1x1 0 3 mM Small_pushbutton IN OUT Fill_Timer PT Medium_pushbutton Bar Graph Number of Srralls C Pie Graph Number of Sroalls C Half Pie Graph Number of Sroalls C Number of
5. E Drawing Tools Icons contained in the Draw Tool Bar and their corresponding drawing objects are as follows Icon Object Types _ of w TEL eroe E se E sete O creo O ee Ca E Selecting Line Types 10 selections are available for straight and poly lines and for graph divi sions 6 selections are available for rectangles circles arcs and pie sections fe fy Polyline pi DY Select one of these SSS patterns Fo Ps ee oe Bo ne me ek E Selecting Colors For color and blink attribute settings use the procedure same as for Parts 2 1 Parts Part Attributes Selecting Colors 2 118 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Tiling Patterns Nine different tiling patterns are available These patterns can be selected for squares circles filled squares and polygonal objects When combining foreground Fg and background Bg colors a variety of filled patterns can be drawn Select a pattern fo eee __ When a square or circle is drawn only the line type will be displayed 1in1 tially To display the pattern selections check the Fill check box check mark will appear i D gt Fo Pee ek Fo Pee ek fo Be me eK e Bee eK Circle O val Circle O val Dots can be drawn in 1 2 3 and 5 dot units To draw a dot simply click on the desired point E Dot Attributes Select the dot unit
6. n Select BCD BCO 3 Select a Part Shape that has graduations from the hea P 2 1 Parts Se 1 ore E can enter Alarm settings and select Colors 1 lecting a Part Shape esired If the Bar Graph s Alarm value is specified as Variable a pointer showing levels will be displayed This pointer s position will move according to the specified Alarm BG 3D001U BG 3D002U value Shape Browser Level pointer BG_3D003U BG_3D004U 2 34 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Graph Settings tab select the graph s dis The area to enter the number of the play direction and input the number of Axis Divi divisions will appear only for a graph sions type which has axis divisions Bar Graph Settings BA_001 Left i Enter 10 here Select Up 5 After all of the graph s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Bar Graph s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Bar Graph s top left To cancel the placement click on corner is to be placed the icon If necessary use the Bar Graph s handles to adjust its To change the size Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes
7. Limitations exist regarding the display of the following addresses with the global cross reference that was designated when the LT System was set up To set up the LT system settings select Sum from the Project Manager menu and configure the settings in the LT System Settings dialog box The Watch Dog address designated on the Extended Settings tab will not be displayed when the Time is set to 0 seconds As for the System Start Address designated on the Mode Settings tab only the designated System Start Address will be displayed regardless of the total number of words used in the system area and the reading area size Usage Pattern et Global Cross Utility Reference List or Start address search _ lt a i Or Select either Word or S Canine Bit Address the key edit address Convert Addresses to change addresses The following is the overview for the global cross reference screens 2 254 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques List Display For local settings which screen is used and for global settings function type will be displayed respectively Selects whether setting conditions are dis played for Bit Addresses or for Word Addresses Global Cross Reference List Erreser Changes the display a start address to be i displayed Addtesses t Used Se
8. PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select objects to be registered as Library items 2 3 1 Selecting o Objects Registering Library Items 2 Select the Library menu Register Library com If the Library Browser is already mand or click on the a icon showing click on either or icon 1n the screen editor drawing area and the icon in the Library Browser which will 3 Enter the Library s registration number and descrip perform the function of step 2 tion In the Cell Number area the smallest of the currently The following procedures will open Library file s unused numbers will be automati differ depending on the Library cally displayed To change it simply enter the desired file registered lt A When registering a new Library item to the currently open Library file gt number e When registering a new Library Save Library Ex item to the currently open cna umber o Librar y file e When no Library file is dis Cancel J Description Geet played switch o ooo e When registering a Library item to a new Library file e When registering a Library item to a Library file other than the currently open one 4 Click on the button to register the number The registered Library will then be displayed in the Up to 200 Library items can be Browser registered in one file 3 100 switch F tIf 50 Numeric Input 100 switch 2 186 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation
9. Trend Graph Settings TR_001 E nter 20 General Settings Graph Settings Channel Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings t Normal 9 Pen Recorder t Block Display Data Samples Enter 1 9 Display Direction ae ae Scroll Enter 1 0 i Down Sampling Time i Right 2 Enter 10 Enter 10 Place Select Right 5 In the Channel Setting area enter the Number of If the more than one channel is Channels then enter each channel s Word Address used be sure to enter the Word and select the desired colors Address and select the Color for In this example since the Number of the Channels is each channel before placement 1 you only need to enter one Word Address Trend Graph Settings TR_001 E ___General Settings l Graph Settings Important Channel Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Enter D001 02 A Trend Graph s channel No of Channels Word Address TE E Word Addresses should not Current Charnel be the same as other Part ad dresses otherwise it will Fo MN a O e ARR K O 6 cause a LT error Up to 20 channels can be desig nated for a Project file including the Data Sampling frequency num 6 After all of Part s attributes have been entered or ber selected click on the button The Trend Graph s outline will appear in the Base screen next to your cursor Up to 8 Trend Graph display areas can be placed on a single screen 7 Click on the point where the Trend Graph s top left To canc
10. X important for the horizontal type and Y for the vertical type in the figure below is a multiple of 4 for color data or a multiple of 8 for monochrome data Otherwise the fractional data will be deleted from the right edge of the screen after conversion z LT r E E E LT aT E gt ag gt 0 X Horizontal X Horizontal If the longitudinal dimension of the original image data is less than 4 for color data or less than 8 for monochrome data the image data cannot be converted E Converting Placing an Image Source Specify the image file to be converted The information on the specified bitmap file will be displayed Enter the name of Used to select the image file to Convert Images to Image Screens x be converted or Source Effects Destination J Lace 9 select the image image File file from the file J list by clicking on Eisai the Browse cme button Displays the i eie image of the fle po il No image image file to be colors e g 16 Dimensions ene colors 256 However this colors image is different from the image Displays the size that will be of the image file displayed on the LT series Displays the dimensions Used to register the above settings to execute the horizontal x Image conversion If you save the converted Image vertical of the data the Image screen of the screen number specified image
11. CSV file format for character string tables CSV file format Header Required for importing the file data Taleban PP Table 1 _ Table Name 1 15 17114 Abnormal pressure hbk A Abnormal pressure intank A X index Charac 324 ainormapressure nek ter String Index No Number of Number of Font Language characters lines 0 Japanese 1 Chinese 2 Taiwanese 3 Korean 4 ASCII LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 55 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 5 3 Entering Settings via the Screen Editor E Selecting the drawing table From the menu bar in the Screen Editor select the table to use for drawing When a table is changed the character strings used in the Screen Editor also change E Selecting the index character string Entering the index character string Click on the Index to switch the screen to the one used to enter the index character string Select the desired index character string from those shown in the Table Editor To add a new index character string click the adajrqe button to start the Table Editor 4 5 2 Table Editor Index Character Strings Index Char acter String Registration Text 7h Direct 1 Alarm Add Index T Son te Normal t Horizontal 1 Vertical i Bold Place a check mark here to sort the Index character strings displayed in the pull down menu in th
12. j When the character string setting mode is changed all previ TAT ously registered alarm messages are deleted Then click 7 in Message Summary Text to view the list of Index char acter strings specified in the Table Editor Select the desired Index Text from the Index Texts registered on the Text Table Editor Basic Alarm Settings Manufacturing System_lte Alarm Edit View Help Print if EEE UTH O Bik L L Automatic Address Increment pana Tagen Tiie Ci Fecameny Tiie Ba Oe i ea Blk og Jumpe to the designated line 1O Hi __ eit e _ Type Message Summary Text aa PEELE acsscceeceenscceeeeeeny Summary i ann lt aa A D c DS T a a c E Index character strings can also be selected by choosing Add Alarm s in Edit Add Basic Alarm Stat Address OD000 are Ainte Number of BitstoAdd f6 8 Alarm Summary i Alarm Message Add Offset i I Message 21 TANKA F 4 58 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings If you want to add a new Index click the button to start the Table Editor 4 5 2 Table Editor Index Character Strings Index Character String Registration Pd Basic Alarm Settings A Manufacturing System Ite Alarm Edit View Help Print s 5 Fo Cie Oe CQ EST Address Incremen m E meste O mweye OPO ep Pana Jumps to the designated line Jump Bit Type
13. E Trend Graph Graph Settings Attributes Select a Trend Graph Settings TR_001 g ra p h type General Settings Graph Settings Channel Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings 2 Pen Recorder i Block Display Data Samples Avis Scale Display Direction th Up Data a Y Ass Divisions mH Enter the a cr AMIS Divisions 10 Select the ei _ srovor EI number of X i Down Sampling Time p data display 8 Fight and Y direction divisions Enter the No of Samples Scroll value and Sampling Time Graph Settings Using Normal The specified Word Address s data changes are dis played over time in a Trend Graph Display data always starts at the 0 point As each time sampling period elapses the latest data 1s added in the specified display Direction When the graph s poly gonal line reaches the limit of the Trend Graph the graph is shifted in the display Direction for the number units specified in Scroll LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 51 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E g Display Direction Right Scroll 4 Enter screen scrolls at this point i JL JL I I JB Bgn Using Pen Recorder A specified Word Address s data changes are displayed over time in a Trend Graph The data s display always begins with 0 As each sampling period elapses the graph s poly gonal line is shifted one division opposite the
14. E Using LT Editor Manuals The following manuals have been created for the LT Editor software CD Jacket Describes LT Editor s installation procedures and system requirements Drawing Operation Manual Provides detailed explanation of operating procedures for all LT Editor s commands except those for logic program development Logic Programming Operation Manual Provides tutorials to help you to learn operating procedures of Logic Program Editor Also describes operation of the LT main unit as well as instructions and variables used in logic programs Parts List Describes the LT Editor s pre made Parts and symbols Device PLC Connection Manual Describes the methods for connecting the LT to the external devices of various manufactur ers and system requirements E Using the Help Feature If you have any problems or questions during LT Editor operation you can view the explanations for each feature and setting via each window s Help button or from the main menu s Help feature The Help explains settings of each window and dialog box instructions and functions of a logic program as well as each driver s setting E Using the Tips Screen The Tips screen displays one point descriptions of the new features upon the startups of the LT Editor E Using the Home Page You can obtain the latest LT Editor information by addressing the Digital Electronics Corporation Home Page on the LT Editor screen 1 26 LT Editor Ver 2 0
15. ES Screen Data Displays the object placed on the currently displayed screen Designates the type of the object to be displayed in the Screen Data ans w ECIS List Deletes the object Edits the object selected from the Screen Data zal Ord selected from the List Link Select ia a a Screen Data List Highlights an Changes the order object selected on of drawing objects the screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 247 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Screen Data Display The designated type of object s data is displayed If a grouped object contains at least one object whose type has been designated it is displayed as an grouped object The Screen Data List displays the following information Drawing 008 Type and coordinates of a drawing object PRU EE ID Number and Address Grouped object Grouped object s coordinates and each grouped object s information as Note D Scripts are displayed all the time Each D Script shows ID and description 2 information E Selecting an Object The object selected from the list will be displayed with handles i e se lected in the Screen Editor To select multiple objects from the list Left drag them or hold the or key down and click on desired ones Link Select Normally when any object is selected with the Screen Editor it will not be displayed on th
16. Index Select or add the Index Text Two or more lines of messages can be dis played 4 5 3 Selecting the index character string Entering the index character string No of Messages The number of the messages number of states can be selected from 2 4 8 and 16 Display Characters The maximum number of characters that can be displayed in a message can be set only when the text type is set to Direct Up to 40 characters can be input If the number of a message characters exceeds the specified value characters that do not fit in the area will be truncated Message According to the No of Messages designate a message for each state Operation Mode Bit Designate a message for each state ON and OFF Operation Mode Word OHB As many buttons as the number of the specified messages will be displayed Designate a message for each state Selected Message Message can be input only when the text type is se to Direct After entering a message the message will be displayed in the selected color s The default value setting is Undefined To select the Index option refer to 4 6 3 MSelecting the index character string Entering the index character string Color Here each message s display colors can be selected 2 1 Parts LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 101 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Message Display The Message
17. Tips screen Multi language tables allow you to easily switch between different languages M Show at Startup 1 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide L2 Fania inish Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals PROCEDURE REMARKS When 256 colors is selected on the Display Properties screen of the Control Panel the display of the Project Manager may change but its functioning will not be affected Iya Creating Selecting Saving a Project A project file LTE file normally contains multiple screens and a logic program intended for the operation of a certain system LT Editor creates one project file for the operation of one system enabling system manage ment by project file units After you have transferred a project file and set up an LT you can transfer updated logic programs individually to the LT E Creating a New Project When you create a new project you must designate the LT and Device PLC information according to your current application LT Type Select your type of LT LT Series If your LT will be installed vertically instead of horizontally be sure to select a vertical type LT The Screen Editor will automatically create a vertical drawing area for you LT machine type LT type of project Type Al Type A2 Type B Type A Type B B Type B Type H1 Type H Type H2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 5 Chapter 1 L
18. y Reference as 2 4 Libraries LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 111 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Delete The selected Library item is deleted and the display will disappear No of Lib Displays only when Type s Word is selected The number of Library images number of states to be displayed on the Picture Display can then be input Select any of 2 4 8 or 16 Library Here the Library item used for each state is specified Settings will differ depending on the Type selection Mode When selecting Bit Specify a Library item s ON and OFF states respectively Mode When selecting Word The n umber of buttons will match the designated number of Library items Specify a Library item for each state ote Changing the state via the Parts State Change Tool Bar after placing a Part X allows you to check each state s Library display condition Color The background square colors Clear Fg Clear Bg and pattern Pattern are selected The default settings are black The square colors can be selected so as to match the Picture Display placement area background s color lt Back Ground Square gt The Library item to be displayed while the LT is running needs the filled square for the background to be the rearmost so that the items images do not overlay each other when they are switched When designating a Library item the LT Editor program will draw this colore
19. B efore transferring screen data to the LT unit and connecting the LT unit to the Device PLC you can check the LT panel operation by running a simulation of your LT Editor program This chapter describes the program simulation procedure ra PA E IN IIIA AA N AENA IE EA AENEAS Overview LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 1 8 1 Overview Chapter 8 SIMULATION 8 1 Connect the LT unit to your personal computer via the transfer cable Turn ON OFF bits on the LT Editor program s Simulation screen and change the data corresponding to the specified word address Even if no external device is connected you can check the operation in the LT unit and the data changes resulting from the Part functions Ee Note The Simulation function can be used only when the LT is Type C operations on a PC For this is only a simulation its perfor Important mance such as processing speed may differ from the actual one which is performed when the LT unit is connected with a Device PLC ura The Simulation feature is provided for simulating Device PLC Connecting method between your personal computer and the LT is the same as the one for data transfer 7 1 Prior to Transferring Data Personal Computer PC LT Screen transfer cable Dsub 9 pin socket To the PC s serial port an AP a a E E T To errr iar ee if Pe a a a F A ye ee ae To the Tool C
20. Cause Unable to convert file Please check disk The destination disk does nothave sufficientfree Space Prepare a disk thathas sufficientspace and re try Unable to read current project information The projectile is corrupt Use the LT Editor rebuilding tool to repair the file and then read the file again Unrecognizable Bitmap The selected bitmap file is either corrupted or File may be corrupted unusable by this sofware E Screen Editor Errors Error Message Cause Solution C Can t edit Insufficient memory The memory area is insufficient for editng Quitall other applicatons and resume editing Cannot place screen on itself You cannotcall the screen being edited a ie screen editor can have up to 20 screens a a fC change will exceed the P arts upper limit number of Parts C hanges canceled er Current C olor Depth Not Supported Only bitmaps created with 256 colors or less can Convert to 256 colors or less Device address out of range When the specified command is performed the device address exceeds the upper limit Specify an address within the allowable range E Exceeded maximum screen size Changes This change will exceed the screen size upper limit 1 5 Screen E ditor screen screen Exceeds screen size limit The screen size exceeds the upper limit and you Cannot create any more graphic data The last data created will become invalid Store the screen data and then open a new screen and call the Stored scr
21. Display Format Select the desired time date display for mat LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging Se te There are two types of settings in the Date Time settings i e date settings and time settings Time is expressed only by the 24 hour system e For date mm dd yy mm dd yy mm dd dd mm yy e For time hh mm hh mm ss General Info Column Type Value Value Selecting this option displays actual logging data in the Display Settings eneral Info Data Format Size Style Alam Settings Column Mo 2 Column Type pValue Date Time 2 Char Col Data Type Display Format area Input nen Alam Settings Display Style No of Display Digits 9 Decimal Places Absolute Peat Sew en Sete ___ Displays Logging Address area Address 7 Relative d ata Data Logging Address pooo j Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the iia offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words 1s 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 Display Data Format Select the desired data format from Dec Hex and BCD Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when selecting the Dec data format LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 49 Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Data Format Relative Column Settings General Info Data
22. Mo of Display Digits Decimal Places Display Style 4 Shift Right il Zero Suppress i2 Shift Left LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 2 Logging Display Range Min Value Max Value Designate the range of values displayed in the N tag The possible ranges vary de pending on the Display Format and Code settings Display Format No of Display Digits Designate the number of digits for the dis play within the range of characters desig nated in the Display Setting area usually 1 to 14 digits The length designated here includes digits after the decimal point but not the decimal point itself No of display digits I No of data char Code Decimal places Decimal Places Designates the number of digits displayed after the decimal point usually as 0 to 16 This setting is valid only for Dec and BCD formats You can designate the value from O to 16 Enter 0 when not displaying decimal place numbers Decimal Places 0 No of display digits 1 No of Char Col Designates the cell size Enter a value ina range from to 32 digits Display Style Shift Right Shift Left Select either shift type Data is displayed from the selected position The default setting is Shift Left Zero Suppress When 0 suppression check box is checked all unnecessary Os are not displayed When this check 1s removed Os are added to the front of numbers to match the Display Le
23. Name Comment ID number of a Part or any comment is displayed To switch the ID number or comment display mode select Name of Comment from the View menu Function A general description of the device function for each specified Part is displayed Address The device specified for each Part is displayed and you can change their word address settings Status The current status of each device bit ON OFF status or word address setting is displayed and you can change their word address settings Alter You can change each device status bit ON OFF or the word address settings Every time you click on the E icon the bit ON OFF status is switched When you click on the icon the following Keypad will appear en abling you to change the data a aon Dag LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 5 8 1 Overview Chapter 8 SIMULATION E Selecting a Display Type Select the types of Parts used to display device information Select the Options menu Display Type Settings command Specify the Parts to be displayed When you select All Type information on all Parts will be displayed Display Type Settings All ype I Trend Graph Bit Switch I Keypad Display 7 word Switch I Alarm Display C Function Switch T Numernc Display C Lamp T Me age Display C Bar Graph im Picture Display Pie Graph I Filing Display C Half Pie Graph I Lagging Display J Mete
24. Program Editor Creates a screen with the Creates alarms with Screen Editor the Alarm Editor Transmits screen and Quits the LT Editor logic program to the LT LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 19 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 4 Logic Program Editor 1 20 Logic Program Editor Logic programs are created with the Logic Program Editor The online help provides you with detailed information on the Logic Pro gram Editor Also the Logic Programming Operation Manual explains procedures using tutorials It also explains instructions and settings required for combin ing the LT main unit with the LT Editor 1 4 1 Logic Program Editor ltem Names and Functions Here basic item names and functions of the Logic Program Editor main window are explained SEG For details refer to online help a Title Bar c Pull down Menu ae Logic Program Editor A Manufacturing System mi b Menu Bar Insert Data Contyoller Help Unstyetionn las gt ey e as al d Tool Bar bah Cb Sa o PP Aung Ctrl F Label Sybroutjie ef Program Descr 1 START 2 END F 3 PEND e Programming Area Status Bar a Title Bar Displays the project file name screen number and title b Menu Bar Displays the menus used to operate LT Editor When you select a desired menu using the mouse or keypad the pull do
25. The Input range the range of data stored in the Word Address varies depending on the Input Sign setting The Display range the range to which the data is converted and displayed varies depending on the cardinal number of the data and Code setting Make sure that the Display range will not exceed the Input range otherwise the entered data may not be displayed due to an error processing the function lt Minimum and Maximum Range Values gt inputange Display Range Code Input No Code 65535 32768 32767 0 65535 2 s complement 32768 32767 a 32767 65535 _ 32767 32767 aT 32767 65535 Zs compemen 3268 326r 0 FFF ms eT a o C mocos e o e o TO Zs complement 3268 326r 0 ITTO me rer sare o TO EA eee The Round Off operation rounds off the values in decimal places that are generated in the range conversion of relative values When this option is not selected the fractions will be discarded LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 65 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 66 Text Text data can be processed The data will be written to the PLC in ASCII code or Shift JIS code Specify the maximum length of the text to be stored Designate the maximum number of characters for the No of Display Characters setting Up to 80 characters single byte can be displayed One word of the data storage address is able to store two single byte char
26. ay O Please wait until the LT confirms the status of the control bits i e whether they are 0 or 1 For Direct Access communication either the communication cycle time or 50ms whichever is longer A delay of up to 1 second may occur from the time of data import start to actual data sampling E Deleting Data Sampling Settings Here the registered Data Sampling Settings can be deleted Select a Data Sampling to be deleted from the list When the Deete button is clicked on a dialog box will appear to confirm your command If you click on the button the Data Sampling will be deleted 1f you click on the button the deletion will be canceled E Editing Data Sampling Settings Here the registered Data Sampling Setting attributes can be changed Select a Data Sampling to be changed from the list When the Est button is clicked on the Add registration dialog box will appear If you click on the button the Data Sampling setting attributes will be changed and if you click on the button editing will be canceled LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 239 2 6 Data Sampling Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Setting Up Data Sampling The Data Sampling setup procedure is shown below Data Sampling samples data stored in D0102 and stores it in the LSOO20 LS area PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select Data Sampling from the Special pull down menu 2 Click on t
27. e The expressions specified in f t Expression becomes Non Zero or t f Expression becomes Zero must be held for longer than the Tag scanning time stored in LS2036 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 203 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script 2 204 e When the bit used for the D Script Trigger Condition is set for l touch and that bit turns OFF during D Script processing the Important timing used when pressing the touch area repeatedly can prevent the detection of the bit s rise e The D Script trigger will compare the previously read out value to the currently read out value to determine if the trigger is now True However during a single scan the value that Is stored in the bit address used during the Trigger operation is kept the same even if the value is changed during execution The new value is read out only after the next scan begins Ex When Touch is used to turn trigger bit LSO010000 ON and D Script turns the value OFF Trigger Leading Edge of Bit b LS010000 Execute clear b LS010000 D Script Processing Timing Chart Tag Scan Tag Scan Tag Scan Time Time Time Condition a condition Ud CD Trigger Trigger Trigger Detect Detect Cannot Value stored Detect during operation sages Read out Read out b LS010000 Read out See store b LS010000 b LS010000 b LS010000 value of 1 and store and s
28. fele M mene Relay sery OLO ofo e fefe tm jelejel o o feje Timer come ete 2 ele Counter mng O fo e e fefe Data Register smaa O olojo e ejo System Area Before Conversion H Toho Electronics TTM Series After Conversion Aea TS ojlojojo lo c ke Bs gt c O O O Ga am O ojlo ojo oj ojoj ojolojo ojojojojolojo Ke Kod Kod Ke Kod Ko Keo Kod Kod Kod Kol Kol Kod Kod Kei Kel Kel Kod 5 jo ojolojolojojo ojo ojolo ojo ojo o LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 27 Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables APPENDICES E SHIMADEN SR253 SR90 SR80 MR13 FP93 SD16 EM70 Series Before DataAddess O o E Matsushita Electric Industrial MINAS A S Series All Devices Conversion LS Area LS E Yasukawa Electric G7 F7 Series and VS mini V7 J7 Series Vari able Speed Inverter Varispeed After Conversion Bit Register B BR eo ofa in ME a gt fo Conversion LS Area o i jojo Appendix 28 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 4 Software Trouble Report Aw Software Trouble Report E When problems continue after following Troubleshooting advice If following the steps outlined in the troubleshooting section does not solve your problem please make a copy of the next page s Software Trouble Report fill in any relevant info
29. i Important After replacing the screens you must re enter all Parts de vice addresses To subsequently copy any other screen in the same project file re peat the procedures starting with step 3 4 11 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT wap Project Editing This feature allows you to delete a project file PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Delete command 2 Select the project to be deleted from the screen list To select a project located in a dif or enter the desired project s file name Then click ferent folder change the directory on the Delete button to that folder 1 2 2 amp Selecting an Existing Project When you double click on the project name selected in step 2 you can skip the Deleted com mand Pietas detere Device PLC Type 3 Click on the button to delete the project Important Once the Delete command is performed it cannot be un done 4 12 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing 4 2 2 Backing up Project Files When a Project file is saved a backup file bak of the most recently saved Project file data is created The backup file is created in the same folder in which the selected Project Manager is stored To open and edit Backup files as Project files change the filename exte
30. on the icon 2 Enter character s and select either 8 x 16 dot font or Windows font 9 Windows Font Select io 3 To use the Windows font click on the Select Font and click on the ox button Font style Bookman Old Style F Bookshelf Symbol 1 F Bookshelf Symbol 2 F Bookshelf Symbol 3 F Comic Sans MS Sample AaBbYyzZz Script Westem ia 4 Click on the Oo button An outline corresponding to the entered character s will appear Anal Black l 3 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Move the box to the desired position where the char If you move the character pattern acter pattern will be displayed to a position where another char The character pattern is displayed in the position where acter pattern has already been cre you click A Mark can be created using this pattern ated the new pattern will overwrite SUTERTERTERTESETEETERTERTERTESTTSTTESTEnTERTERTS the existing pattern and the exist ing pattern will be deleted LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 11 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 2 Editing a Mark To edit a Mark you can use the following editing functions This section describes the operating procedure for each function E Cutting a Mark The Cut command dele
31. 1 Select the pull down menu File s Exit command Clicking on the Library Browser s If a newly created Library file has not been saved yet a top right mark can also be prompt asking whether the new Library file should be used to quit saved will appear When the button is clicked the Save As dialog box will appear and when the Saving a Library button is clicked the Library file will not be File Under Another Name saved and the Library Browser will quit Then a Li brary file creation or selection screen will appear Library Browser 2 Do vou want to save changes 7 2 198 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Yay D Script Global D Script The LT Editor provides a special feature that enables you to create a pro gram to execute functions in addition to Parts This feature is given by D Scripts Global D Scripts The display load on the Device PLC can be reduced significantly by creating and registering a program with D Scripts Global D Scripts D Scripts are used on each screen and serve as programs that are only effective on that screen Global D Scripts serve as programs that are effective on all the screens Using D Script you can program describe separately the trigger used and the action it performs Then when the trigger conditions are satisfied the script is performed The procedures for writing a progra
32. Automatic Address Increment After entering and registering a message in a line and moving to the next line an address that is one bit larger will be automatically entered for the new line LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS Important When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address the automatic address increment function must be turned off Other wise the correct addition will not be performed Jump to the designated line Specify a line and click to jump to the line Print a Important 5 4 An Alarm Message like a bulletin board can be printed out when the alarm is triggered and when recovered Specify if the Alarm Message is printed out at the triggering of the alarm and at the recovery from the alarm respec tively When Summary is selected this setting becomes ineffective Trigger Time Prints out the time when the Alarm Message started Recovery Time Prints out the time when the Alarm Message is finished Printing Example Trigger 10 15 16 07 No 1 error Recovery 10 15 16 30 No 1 error Trigger 10 21 11 25 No 1 error Trigger 10 21 11 28 No 3 error Recovery 10 21 15 45 No 1 error e Upto 1 000 Alarm Message triggering and recovery events can be stored in the LT When the LT is not connected to a printer up to 1 000 events will be stored in the LT which enters a printing stand by mode When the nu
33. E Symbol Editor Errors Cause Solution Addresses cannot be used as symbol names E nter a standard address in the address column a OA Disk space is insufficient The disk in which the data is stored has no free LP PRSee Eee ince abnor teespiceandty ah T This Symbol Name is already in use A symbol of the same name has already been This is not a symbol file Please choose the The chosen file is nota file that can be used for correct format file symbol import Please choose a file that is this format or modify the chosen file so that it becomes this format This is not a device comment file Please The chosen file is not a device comment import choose the correct format file fle Please choose a file that is this format or modify the chosen file so that it becomes this format This symbol name is already registered as alY ou attempted to change an existing symbol Logic symbol Please choose another name name Be sure that your symbol name used is not one of those designated in the Word Symbol area s Logic Word or Real areas The total number of Logic symbols is over The maximum number of symbols has been 2048 and a Save cannot be performed Please exceeded Afer deletng unneeded symbols delete all unneeded symbols please retry saving the data Some data is incorrect and all data cannotbe The format of CSV data to be imported is incorrect Data in and below the line with the incorrect data will not be imported Check Alarm
34. Ge re For the labels and messages of more than one line use as the carriage A return RESET ao n m BUTTON E eseti Button E Deleting Items from the Part Reference List Parts can be deleted directly from the Part Reference List Click in the middle of a Part to be deleted and it will be highlighted Then click on the button and a dialog box will appear Clicking on the button will delete the Part from the Part Reference List To close the box without deleting the Part click on the button When multiple Parts are selected all the Parts will be deleted by clicking on the vea button and by clicking on the Noar button the box will be closed Confirm Delete Are vou sure you want to delete BS O01 E Copying a Part on the Parts List Any Part can be copied on the Parts list Select the left most number for the Part being copied by clicking on that number The selected Part will be highlighted After this selection click on the button and then the button The Part will be copied to the bottom line of the list E Reflecting a Device Comment on the Parts List The device comment corresponding to an entered device address can be entered on the Parts list by clicking on a specified button This can be done in either of the following two ways 1 Select the address setting field and click on the Apply De vice Comment button The device comment corresponding to the selected address w
35. Polding down the or The selected alarm data will be copied to the clipboard key BitAddess Type Message 1 xom Summary Tank A temperature UP 2 xo SUMMA Tank B temperature UP a xio OO O O aren Tank C temperature UP a e an 3 Select the destination line Bit Address Type sd Message fi 00010 Summary Tank A temperature UP 2 ASO0050 Summary Tank B temperature UP 3 foo Buletin 4 xo0052 Summary 5 x005 Buletin e x00054 Summan 00055 Summary e xose J 00057 SUMMA 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the A icon to paste alarm data to the destination from the Clipboard If the same data already exists the system asks if each file item must be overwritten If you select l the desired file will be overwritten If you a the desired file will not be overwritten and the system will ask the same question for the next alarm If you select vestoai_ all existing alarms will be over written If you select Notoai you will return to the menu screen 5 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS Confirm Alarm Replace Alarm Mo 5 already exists Overste The selected alarm data is copied to the specified line s l W aa ee he ee a I rir mn a 4 5 ral gt a wm Tomo Serer ory E U
36. Se eee Le lc im a E NON forage aber E E E E a E dat e am E E T Le pi E a a T a aii E T Seine E a a E ee When using the pattern shown above the maximum number of value col umns and data display rows are as follows No ofValue No of Data cums nmgr Pa The maximum number of characters thatcan be entered per row is 160 Therefore when 8 characters are entered for each column the number of value columns available will be 17 When the No of value columns number of logging words Is the maximum 16 columns 189 When the No of value columns number of logging words Is the maximum 8 columns When the No of value columns number of logging words Is 4 683 the maximum 4 columns When designating the columns as the block name display and entering characters in each column the file size will become jportant extremely large Depending on the number of characters en tered and other items designated several hundreds rows can be used for the pattern shown above 10 68 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES l his section contains a list of error messages and corrective actions as well as address conversion tables PCG AL sestesinkiccdvecesssiniainestansncsteveiacssaseusatanass Error Messages APPEN Z 9 aeaseccicavsveneceseceseasessstesescccsssverscisteseeess Troubleshooting Appendix S Zasersssextesecssesevenscenesasnsees Address Conversion Tables Appendix 4
37. The Bar Graph s sizing handles are located inside the graph LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide pre Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts rmn Pie Graphs Pie Graphs create an area where a Device PLC s Word Address data is displayed as absolute values The graph s display will change to reflect changes in the designated Word Address data E Pie Graph General Settings Attributes lt When displaying the data using absolute values gt Select Absolute or Relative display pa brii Pie Graph Settings PI_001 Enter the General Settings Graph Settings Shaped olor Alarm Settings Wo rd Description Ad d ress The currently Word Address used to selected Pie mT E pon Fe I Display Mode store graph Graph s image oon data appears here cies in Select the Calls up the Part desired Shape Browser Data Format Parts can be selected directly from the Browser Absolute Data stored in the designated Word Address is displayed in absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Here the Word Address location data is entered to show where the desired data is stored Data Format Select either the Bin and BCD display formats Display Mode With this check box W checked and the Bin data format is selected a negative numeric data can also be displayed 2 36 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Sc
38. Type PR20 F Print Method a Monochrome i Color Print Direction 2 Horizontal 1 Vertical Reverse Color Print Initial Screen Sethngs Extended Settings Communication Settings Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS ote The setting items may differ depending on the LT type or Device PLC being System Setting Items Designate the arbitrarily specified password 0 9999 or select the ON OFF setting for the common password setting 1101 Touch Panel Settings Printer Settings 6 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Mode Settings System Setup A Manufacturing System Ite 1 0 Settings Mode Settings Device PLC OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings System Setup System Start Address cooo0d HEE Machine Number Read rea Size Link Protocol Type Node Setup Mode Number Transmission Status cooo IEE Catia Initial Screen Settings System Setup A Manufacturing System Ite System Setup 10 Settings Mode Settings Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings a Initial Base Screen Number C E Alarm Character Size Ayd H LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Operating Environment Settings Node Information Settings Customizing command n 1 Operating Envir
39. Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Not selected The example does not turn the Device PLC Transfer Completed Bit Address ON when the data transfer 1s completed between the LS area and Device PLC and SRAM and Device PLC No in formation is sent when data transfer is completed When using the Transfer Completed Bit Address after the Bit ON condition is detected turn the corresponding Bit OFF on the Device PLC Also when the Transfer Completed Bit Address is used the special relay LS2032 s bit 10 will turn ON when data transfer is not completed normally between the Device PLC and LS area or between the Device PLC and SRAM Device PLC Connec tion Manual Chapter 1 Device PLC Transfer Completed Bit Address Not designated Since this example does not use the Trans fer Completed Bit Address this Address does not need to be designated When us ing the Transfer Completed Bit Address designate an Address that will be turned ON when data transfer is completed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe ID No 0 In this example where only one Filing Data Display is placed the ID No does not need to be entered Keep the de fault setting When placing two or more Filing Data Displays on the currently displayed screen be sure not to use the same ID No for multiple Filing Data Displays File No 1 Enter the previously entered filing dat
40. Used to reverse the Used to reverse the whiteblackarea ofa Mark area ofa Mark Transparent ee dots are turned ON ina block 8 x 8 dots this block Background color becomes transparent LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide oe 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Mark Drawing Area Structure The mark drawing area has the following structure When you edit a Mark you can use this for your reference Rotation Genter Point gt Mirror Y AKIS Mirror X AXIS 3 1 1 Drawing a Mark When drawing a mark you can use LT Editor s standard drawing functions Here the procedures for using each function are described E Drawing with Dots You can draw a Mark by turning ON OFF each dot When you click the left mouse button in the Mark drawing area each dot turns ON white When you click the right mouse button in the Mark drawing area each dot turns OFF black A Mark is created with dots and displayed in a block 8 x 8 dots If at least one dot is turned ON in a block the whole block is displayed when the Mark screen is loaded onto a Base screen In this status the ON dots are displayed in the current display color Fg and the OFF dots are displayed in the background color Bg al ERE fe Veale Mell Tete This dot is ON A tL 3 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS
41. When duplicating with the settings shown below orizontal Di i al Add Offset FT EY if He ical Apply Device Comment Alias addresses are not increment ed Apply Device Comment When the Apply Device Comment check box is marked with a check the device comment corresponding to an address assigned by the automatic address increment will be reflected in the Description Field For Parts designating multiple Addresses however the device comment correspond ing to an Address designated as the Reflected Description Address is re flected The Reflected Description Addresses for different Parts are shown in the table below lt Reflected Description Address Table gt Automatic input address Bit Switch Operation bit address Word Switch Word address Function Switch BarGraph Word address Pie Graph Word address Half pie Graph Word address MeterGraph __ Word address Trend Graph Channel 0 word address Keypad Keypad Input Disp Word address Alam s Worrd address t Word address Address Graphic Display _ Address Window Parts _ _ Word address Sampling Address ispla la Data Logging Display Block number designated address a la a ime Displa LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Duplicating PROCEDURE REMARKS lt When Duplicating a S
42. Word Switch Settings 5S_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Description Word Address poooo0 FE Constant Function i Word Set 2 Add Sub 9 Digit ADD 4 Digit SUB Enter 34 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser Specify settings for Shape Color Label and Extension Settings if necessary Shape Browser SW 3DO01 SW_3D004 Curent PDE File cc program fles pro face It pdb pdb p Title Sw_ D001 FF 4 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Switch s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS 2 1 Parts Select ing a Part Shape 2 23 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the point where the Switch s top left corner To cancel the placement click on is to be placed the lal icon If desired use the Switch s handles to alter its size To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Here a touch panel with special functions can be created E Function Switch General Settings Attributes Enter Comment Function Switch Settings FS_001 data here General Settings Shape Color Label Emera OOo Select the Description Functi
43. e When using the Loop and performing real time printing the Total section will not be printed e When using Loop and performing real time printing if the logging frequency is not very high or a printer has not yet been connected printing cannot be performed at the speed the log ging data is created thereby causing a difference between the two In this case only part of a single cycle s logging data will not be printed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 67 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES E Print Settings Maximum File Size The print settings file size capacity is limited Therefore depending on the specific setting the user s file size may exceed this capacity The setting file contains the print header print footer and print data areas settings The maximum number of characters that can be entered per row is 160 The following is the standard print setting size e Enter the Block Name in the Ist column and then up to 8 single byte characters in each column e Enter the Block Name in the 2nd row and then up to 8 single byte charac ters in each row e Four rows are available for totals Total Average Max Min No of value columns Char Col Date Time Value Value Value Border a Ee mo Char Col RBCOEFGH RICOEFGR Border a as Data display ecr Data display cora Vo ofdaa Datadisplay acor O oo display rows a patel ore a coe ee eee
44. 00 15 30 and 45 with 15 second inter vals When designating data logging time data logged from the start to end times is handled as 1 block Read Count Designate the frequency of data logging between the Start time and End time Based on the frequency set here the End time is determined Block Count Designate the number of data blocks Data logged for the number of blocks designated here is handled as a file When designating data logging time data for a block is logged per day 1 lt Times x Blocks lt 2048 Data Logging Auth Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON and it becomes the designated logging time data logging is performed Device PLC to LT Block s Finish Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When data logging is completed one time the Bit Address designated here is turned ON LT to Device PLC After the Device PLC detects that the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF File Full Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When data logging is completed for block the Bit Address designated here is turned ON LT to Device PLC After the Device PLC detects the Bit Address is turned ON turn it OFF Data Clear Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON data stored in the backup SRAM is deleted After th
45. 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES E Managing Groups of Logging Data Logging data is grouped into files and blocks Up to 32 words can be logged in one time These logged words are called data A group of data is called a block and a group of blocks are called a file Be aware that the number of pieces of data in each block is considered to be the same E Backup SRAM s capacity Backup SRAM s capacity is limited Approximately 95KB and all blocks and records set up must be within these limits The capacity of Backup SRAM to be used for logging setting is calculated by the following formulas The formula varies depending on whether loop operation is performed or not 10 2 1 Logging Function Loop Operation Without Loop Operation Used backup SRAM capacity byte 128 20 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces X Frequency of data logging X Number of blocks With Loop Operation Used backup SRAM capacity byte 128 20 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces X Frequency of data logging X Number of blocks 12 2 X Number of logging data pieces For example when loop operation is not selected the number of block 1s 1 and the number of logging is 2048 the capacity available is approximately 32 KB assuming that the logging data consists of 2 words If the number of pieces of data is 32 the maximum the memory required becomes approxi mately 153 KB which is too high
46. 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging General Info Column Type Char Col Char Col Prints out the text Column Settings Data Format SizeStyle 1 Column Type Value Date Time 8 Char Coli 2 Border General Info Column Ho Data Type eee Display Format Input Size Style Column Settings No of Char Col Designates the cell size Enter a value from 5 to 16 digits General Info Size Style Display Format No of Char Col i Display Style oa ahihi M Zero Suppress 2 General Info Column Type Border Column Settings General Info Data Format Size Style 1 Column Type 7 Value A Date Time i Char Col fey Border Border Prints out the borders Column Mo Data Type eee Display Format wee Input LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 63 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 2 Row Settings Print E Attribute Settings To set up row attributes select Border String Char Col Data Value or Total and click on the Settings button Print Settings E B ci General Info Row Settings The General Info page provides informa tion about the current settings for Row Settings Row Type Select the desired print item from Data Char Col and Border With the real
47. 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 87 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 88 rA RCS Data Logging Display Data created in the data logging settings can be displayed and edited on the LT unit iz After the data logging settings place the Data Logging Display Important For registering logged data refer to 10 2 Logging Function SP ter Ne Only one Data Logging Display can be placed on each screen The Data Logging Display cannot be set simultaneously with Keypad Input Display Data that could not be logged due to a read error is identified with in a cell Data that is not logged is not displayed E Data Logging Display General Settings Attributes Enter a comment Rahm etn Using a word if necessary General Settings Data Type Color _ Switch Seting Switch Sharee address Description specify the eee block number Specify whether 1 ME of data being the data edit displayed function is L Data Edi enabled or A SADIE E E Using a bit address Specify whether re cra specify the p y interlock the interlock a address function is enabled or disabled Block Number Address On a block basis specify the data being displayed The logged data for the block number stored at the word address specified here will be displayed The block numbers that can be entered are between 0 and 2047 but the maximum of the effective range is Number of Blocks specified in
48. 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 329 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Converting Placing an Image Destination Import Image Select the number ee Effects Destination of colors of the Image Color Seren Title Enter the title of converted image the Image screen file i 8 Color TOE i 256 Colar First Screen f Screen Layout Enter the screen Displays the size number of the of the converted Image screen screen Select a destion to save the MAJEE Pe J cares comen Hee Screen Color Select the type of the converted image file Monochrome or 8 colors The screen size and the number of screen divisions vary depending on the se lected type First Screen Enter the screen number of the Image screen If no screen number is speci fied an Image screen of the currently displayed screen number will be created Screen Title Enter the title of the Image screen Even if the converted data are divided into several screens only one title can be specified for one original file Size Displays the size of the converted screen 3 26 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen E Converting an Image Convert an image file into Image screen data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Utility menu Convert Image command of the Project Manager 2 Click on the
49. 2 9601 00 E D wu T2 gt AN 293 237 382 22 Numeric Displap N Sol 0 0 Light a _Prograrnming Made oao LT TypeC LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 159 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E Dragging and Dropping Copying and pasting of an instruction or a Part can be performed by the drag and drop operation Before dragging and dropping an instruction or a Part you have j aA to allocate a variable to the instruction or the Part Instructions ponant or Parts without a variable allocated cannot be dragged and dropped Dragging and dropping of a Logic Program Instruction to a Part By dragging a logic program instruction created with the Logic Program Editor to the Screen Editor you can place a Part that corresponds with the instruction xi Before dragging and dropping an instruction be sure to save the logic program Important amp Logic Program Editor Soda File Edt Wiew Search Insert Data Controller Help peo 24 oa Hoe e Ie lee EN DON 4000M QUT Fill Tirner PT 2000 ae ee ee ee Medium pushbutton MOW 7 F EN DN af BOOO IM OUT Fill Tirner PT Dragging and dropping of a Part to a Logic Program instruction By dragging a Part placed on the screen to a Logic Program you can place an instruction that corresponds with the Part Drag the Part while holdin
50. 8 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 SIMULATION 8 1 Overview 8 1 2 Transferring Simulation Protocol To simulate the LT panel s actual operation using the LT Editor program transfer the screen data created with the LT Editor program along with the simulation protocol to the LT unit MEEK 7 2 Transferring Screens Usage Pattern Check fj the Project Manager Transfer Setup Transfer Use Extended or or Settings Program area s Simulation Click on i Click on Check Box Compile the Project Click on the icon File with the LT Editor to transfer the screen Transfer Prepare program so that itis gt data and simulation formatted for the LT protocol to the LT unit used for the unit simulation E Simulation Protocol Before executing the simulation you must first transfer the simulation protocol to the LT unit regardless of the Device PLC specified for the project file Check the Use Extended Program area s Simulation Check Box in the Transfer Settings dialog box so that when screens are transferred the simulation protocol will be transferred to the LT unit 7 2 1 Transfer Settings Qe re When a simulation is executed you need to transfer the simulation protocol NY only for the first screen transfer LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 9 8 1 Overview Chap
51. Browse button and select a image file to be converted The color type data volume screen size and image data of the image file will be displayed Convert Images to Image Screens Source Effects Destination Image File Computer picture bmp Source Image Colors 25 Size bytes 153 141 3 Specify the conversion parameters If the data volume is too large to be displayed in one screen the image data will be divided into several Im age screens Convert Images to Image Screens If the original data are mono chrome these conversion param eters cannot be specified Dither Method birror Dithering ted Crude if None 1 Simple i Vertical Complex Horizontal ol Blink jm Compress LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Fl 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen PROCEDURE 4 Enter the screen number and title of a new Image and designate Screen Type If you do not set a title the title of the original BMP file will be specified Convert Images to Image Screens Source Effects Destination Screen Title Size F450 e ee 5 Click on the Convert button to perform data con version The image data conversion starts Then the converted image will be displayed Convert Images to Image Screens Source Effects Destination Image Color Monochrome 1 8 Color 1 BA Eala Size Screen Title F450 6 If the displayed image
52. CHAPTER 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS This chapter describes the initial setup procedure required to use the LT display unit For details please refer to the online help or the users manual for the LT main unit CHAPTER 7 TRANSFERRING DATA This chapter describes the procedures for sending screens and logic pro grams created with the LT Editor to an LT display unit CHAPTER 8 SIMULATION This chapter describes the procedures for simulating the operation between an LT and LT Editor CHAPTER 9 PRINTING This chapter describes the procedure for printing created screens CHAPTER 10 ADVANCED FEATURES This chapter describes the procedures for using the LT Editor s advanced functions such as filing data recipe and logging functions LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE APPENDIX e Error Messages Lists the error messages causes of the errors and solutions that will be displayed during operation of LT Editor e Troubleshooting Provides information for diagnosis and corrective actions for dealing with errors or abnormal operation e Address Conversion Tables Lists the addresses for each manufacturer s product e Software Trouble Report This is a form in which you can write down any trouble you might have with the LT Editor and your LT Editor s operating conditions that can then be sent to us by facsimile If you have any inquires about the LT Editor please use this form LT
53. Check this check box in order to register 2 or more folders Write Settings From Filing Data To SRAM In response to a trigger filing data stored in the LT s internal memory screen data is written to backup SRAM This prepares for filing data transfer In order to tranfer data to the Device PLC you need to first write data to backup SRAM Only 1 item of filing data can be written to backup SRAM ve When using filing data be sure to enter the Write Settings data NG LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 9 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Control Word Address Filing Data gt SRAM Designate a Word Address to use as a trigger or designate the mode to use when writing to backup SRAM This trigger controls the data write timing When using multiple filing data items designate the folder numbers The Control Word Address will be as follows When Using Multiple Folders When Not Using Multiple Folders Trigger Mode Trigger Mode Folder No 1 to 64 lt Trigger Mode gt 15 0 Reservation All OF F Write Completed Bit Address Filing Data gt SRAM Trigger ON Write OFF Notwrite Designate a specific Bit Address to be turned ON when the data write to LT backup SRAM is completed Si ote If data cannot be transmitted to backup SRAM due to insufficient memory XX 1LS2032 s Bit 9 will be turned ON When data is transmitted to backup SRAM a
54. Column Type Select the desired display item from Value Date Time Char Col or Border General Info Column Type Value A A Value Column Settings Date Format esye When this option is selected numeric data is printed out General Info Column Mo 1 Colunn Type fe Value Date Time 2 Char Col 2 Border Data Type Absolute DOOO00 Display Format Data Format Absolute Data Format Size Style Data stored in the Address displayed in the Logging Address area is directly printed out This data is handled as an absolute value Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 1 Relative Address Offset 0 Data Logging Address DOO000 Display Data Format 16 Bit t Dec t Hex 2 BCD JO Code LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 59 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES TEETI Display Data Format General Info Data Format Size Style aml uo Select the desired data format from Dec Address Offset p Data Logging Add Hex and BCD Code Display Data Format 16 Bi Check this check box when printing nega on ile tive values Only available when select J aco ing the Dec data format Column Settings Relative General Info Data Format Size 5tyle 2 Absolute is Relative Add
55. D Script Toolbox Example statement clear b LSO1O0000 In the above example the 00th bit of LSO100 is changed from to 0 Statements Operators oe oop l krest lt Toggle Bit gt D 5 cript ToolB om Bit toggle invert toggle ee Changes the specified bit address from 1 Bit Ups to 0 or from 0 to 1 Clear Bit Set Bit Toggle Bit 2 Example statement toggle b LS010000 In the above example the OOth bit of LS0100 is changed from 1 to 0 or from 0 to 1 folie EE oP freak oe ll Statements Operators LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide co Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script lt Set Bit gt D 5 cript ToolB Dx Bit set set Changes the specified bit address from 0 to 1 Example statement set b LSO10000 In the above example the OOth bit of LSO100 is changed from 0 to 1 Statements Operators mal sez SF Di i bil im 2 224 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yee D Script Global D Script Limitations Limitations on BCD format operations If a value which cannot be converted into BCD format is found during operation the program stops running These values include A to F in hexa decimal format Do not use such values If the program stops due to non BCD values bit 7 in common relay information LS2032 in th
56. E Simulation Errors ErrorMessage _Cause Solution fle Quitother functions and re execute Cannot write simulation information data The system cannot write the data to the simulation Unable to start simulation information file Check that the simulaton file TAGDATA CSV is not used in other applications and that the directory in which EXE exists is notwrite protected Not enough memory Please close other Retry this acton afer closing other actve applications applications Extemal Device Data File cannot be found The External Device table file does notexist in the Specified directory The External Device table file is deleted or itis not for the LT S elect the E xternal Device file from the master disk and reinstall the file Simulation start failed The LT does not respond to the simulation start command The LT may be in another mode or data transfer may have failed Check the communication port setings cable connectons LT unitpower supply and then retry the simulation data transfer Simulation data file cannot be found The simulation information fle TAGDATA CSV does not exist in the specified directory Check turn on the Transfer menu Settings area s Simulation selection then retry the Simulation E Filing Data Errors te itor Message _ Cause Solution Cannot import CSV file Data is out of range The number of blocks or data amounts is or format is incorrect inappropriate in the CSV file
57. File Name Display com mand or click on the I icon 2 In the General Settings tab enter the File No of E File Name Dis filing data to be transferred and the File Name play General Settings Attributes Display s ID No Here since File No 1 s data is transferred enter 1 for the file number The File Name Display s ID No is 0 To transfer Filing Data via the LS area mark the check box for Use LS Area in the Use LS Area File Display FD_ 001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Description Use LS Area a Diese Top Write Word Address mason IE External Device Transfer TL Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Transfer Completed Bit Add ID Mo ranster Completed Bi less l m coo0000 el EA FieNo p E E Enter 1 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 85 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 In the Display tab specify the No of Display Lines No of Display Characters Direct Selection and Cur sor Position Control If necessary specify the display color in the Style Color tab File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color Mo of Display Lines 3 et E nte r 3 I Mo of Display Characters io S Enter 10 E Cursor Position Control oe e 4 In the Switch Settings tab select the function
58. Grid Points are not shown on the LT unit s display Select the pull down menu Option s Grid Snap command E Grid Snap Settings dialog box Turns the display Grid Snap Settings of the Grid Points ON or OFF spacing Designates the eag Eo Grid Point Y 3 199 ES display s being joi drawn on top of or under screen objects Grid Shift Start Point Turns the Snap j pa jg function ON or OFF Registers a Grid pattern aE 4 Dot 3 Line Registers the grid pattern that has been designated in Spacing to the position high lighted in the Grid Spacing List Designates the grid display style i e as dots or grid lines Display 1 Touch Area ed Enters the desired Grid Point spacing Sets up the grid to the optimal 20 x 20 dot size Enter the coordi nate for the start point Set the start point in a center area that is to be the start point for calling up the screen The start point is set as the default value Sets the Grid Point display state displayed or not displayed Grid pattern display can also be changed in the Grid Tool Bar s grid pattern selection list box Snap When the Snap check box is checked the cursor will snap to the grid objects can only be drawn on points start amp end along the grid LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 241 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CRE
59. I Regardless whether loop operation is designated or not when the number of logging data items is an odd number add I to the above calculation For example when the number of logging data items is 7 it is considered as 8 Words 10 28 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging Backup SRAM usage priority order 1 Data sampling 2 Trend graph 3 LS Area backup 4 Logging data 5 Filing data Memory area is used starting from 1 To check the amount of memory available 4 4 1 Project Information Data stored in backup SRAM is erased at the following times e When initializing LT memory Important When transmitting screen data from your PC to the LT e When setting up the LT system and protocol e When performing LT s self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area E Loop Operation Loop operation can be designated in logging mode With loop operation selected when data logging capacity becomes full logging data will repeat edly be overwritten from the Ist top data area loop operation Also the LT s backup SRAM storage area becomes one large storage area that has a linked buffer like structure lt Without Loop Operation gt Block 0 Logging Data 1 Each logging data item uses the same Logging Data 2 number of Words The range of the number of Words is from 1 to 32 Se Logging Data n Block 1 Logging Data 1 Logging Data 2 Pa
60. Memory Info command The receiving of memory information begins 2 After confirming the displayed information click on the button to close the memory informa tion window Max Block Size Displays the LT unit s allow able memory capacity LEC wecvesscccsctcsssceasasesens Displays the data volume cur rently used in the LT unit LETEC csecdendsseseessveencvecsess Displays the amount of Free or remaining memory Memory Information Max Block Size 952416 Used 35420 Free 916996 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS Number of banks provided in the LT is 32 The capacity for each bank 1s 59526 bytes A single screen file cannot be stored in several banks Therefore the sum of the remain ing memory capacity for each bank is not always equal to the transfer rable screen data volume 7 3 Options Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS E LT Version Information This feature displays the LT unit version information PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Options menu LT Version command The receiving of version information begins 2 After confirming the displayed information click on the button to close the version information window Check Yersion Display Type GLC150 Version Date LT s Project File A Manufacturing System te Date 0209 25 9 32 7 18 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide sam SIMULATION
61. N special relay LS2032 Bit 10 will be turned ON 2 82 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E File Name Display Display Attributes File Display FD_001 x General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color Enter the No of Display Lines A mj number of Mo of Display Characters an E names being Specify the name displayed Direct Selection selection method C Cores Pesica Ursor r OON CONTO Enter the number of Specify the characters cursor position used for the retention names being es J ea e displayed No of Display Lines Specify the number of Filing Data rows displayed on the LT A maximum of 50 rows may be specified No of Display Characters Specify the number of Filing Data characters used on each row A maximum of 100 characters may be specified Direct Selection Select a File Name Display being placed on the LT by directly touching its border If Direct Selection is not used select the file name using the data scroll switches Roll Up Roll Down E File Name Display Switch Settings Attributes Cursor Position Control Even when the screens are changed on the LT the current screen s cursor position can be retained When turning the LT s main power switch ON or resetting the LT however the cursor will appear in the first line Sr The cursor position will be stored for e
62. On Delay Timer TOF OffDelay Timer TP Pulse Timer BitToggle Switch Keypad Input Display LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 155 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E Pasting a Logic Program Instruction to the Screen Here the procedure for copying and pasting a logic program instruction to the screen is explained When pasting the instruction the type of Part to be converted to needs to be selected from the list e Before copying an instruction you have to allocate a variable to the instruction Instructions without a variable allocated Important cannot be copied to the screen e Before pasting an instruction be sure to save the logic pro gram PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired instruction on the Logic Program 1 2 3 Creating Editor pe Editing Saving a Logic Program Te Logic Program Editor A Manufacturing System File Edit View Search Insert Data Controller Help ald 0 3 Small pushbutton 6 _ P ola O14 7 P Mediurn_pushbutton Mov EN DWN Off BOOO IN GUT Fill Tirner PT D Z MEPEEEE ooxi Of 4000 2 Select the Logic Program Editor Edit menu Copy To cancel the Copying click on the command or click on the icon a icon E Drawing Board Soda Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Libr The selected instruction will be copied to the Clipboard
63. Sampling Address Data Format Sampling Designates the Word Address to be Sampling Address es Dogo ia aaan sampled Trigger Bit Address eM fxoooo FE Trigger Bit Address When the bit address stored here turns ON the sampled data will be stored into the LS Area Ste The address to be entered varies XN depending on your LT and external device Note that the sample screen in this manual is just an example Top Write Address EAE No of Sampl Addr 1 El Synehanaus blade ok Cancel Hep Top Write Address Specifies the LS Area s data storage start address LS0000 to LS0019 can not be used since they are the system area The Start address Sampling data count 1 must not exceed LS2031 No of Sampl Addr Designates the number of sampled data items to be stored A When a variable Logic Symbol ts used as a Top Write Address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an Important appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated 2 236 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 6 Data Sampling Data Format Sampo Sampling Address oo I Trigger Bit Address poo I Top White Address sis i No of Sampl Addr 1 BackUp Data Backup The sampled data will be backed up in the LT s backup memory Synchronous Mode With this mode selected when the LT s power is turned ON data will be samp
64. Screen Creation Guide 2 209 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Regular Circle Filled Regular Circle e Filled regular circle s border will be converted into CIRCLE and its filling will be converted into SOLID Oval Filled Oval e Any lines will be converted into POLYLINE e Filled oval s border will be converted into CIRCLE and its filling will be converted into SOLID Arc Pie e Pie s straight line section will be converted into POLYLINE Divisions e When the divisions are marked on a straight axis their coordinates will be calculated based on their start and end coordinates direction and the number of divisions and will be converted into LINE e When the divisions are marked on an arc axis their coordinates will be calculated based on their start and end angles external circle s radius internal circle s radius number of divisions and will be converted into LINE Filled Polygon e Fill will be converted into SOLID However if the number of vertices is more than 5 Fill will not be converted and only its trace will be con verted into POLYLINE CONTINUOUS Load Screen e The screen will be retrieved from its attributes and screen number and if it exists and each drawing data will be converted e The called up screen s data will be converted in the same layer as other drawing data e Only Base screen will be converted TEXT e Characters written horizontally will be converted
65. The addresses listed on the Global Cross Reference dialog box all ad dresses in the Project and GP system addresses excluding the addresses registered as symbols can be converted into different addresses in one operation simply by clicking on the button We 7 2 3 Converting Addresses and Device Codes The Global Cross Reference display is automatically updated after the Address Block Conversion operation ite e Among the tags and parts the ones corresponding to both bit addresses and X word addresses are cross referenced with both of those addresses on the Cross Reference List even if they were placed by specifying their bit ad dresses Example A tag part placed at bit address XOQOOF is displayed as word address X00000 e The addresses displayed in the sample screen are an example Note that the address actually displayed on your screen varies depending on your LT and PLC type LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 257 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 258 E Changing Display Addresses For cross reference and global cross reference list display when selecting Used addresses that have been used for the Parts and other items used in the currently open screen or Project will be displayed When selecting All Addresses all the addresses beginning with the Start Address will be displayed To change the Start Address click on the button and the Dial
66. Trigger Settings in the data logging settings If Number of Blocks specified in Trigger Settings is 4 the block numbers are 0 to 3 BIN values only e If any block number that does not exist is specified no data will be dis Ne played When the loop function has been designated via Trigger Settings of the data logging settings the Block Number Address will become ineffective LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Data Edit Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS The logged data can be modified by directly touching the frame of each item in the Data Logging Display placed on the LT If Data Edit is enabled touching the cell of data that can be modified in the table will cause the buzzer to sound and allow you to enter data If Data Edit is disabled this touching will be invalid and the buzzer will not sound logged The data that can be modified is only Date and Value that have been If a block or logged data is selected by changing the block number during on screen modification of data the data edit mode is canceled If the cell is moved beyond the display area using the scroll keys during the data edit mode the data edit mode is canceled Interlock The interlock can only be activated when the data edit capability is enabled If the interlock is enabled data can be modified only when the bit address for the interlock is ON If the interlock is disabled data ca
67. a form drawing press the J key to designate the start and finish points To cancel the drawing click on the ja icon g it ty Creating a Curved type scale 8 divisions Specify the area of division lines using double circles 3 Use the mouse s cursor to create a circle on the draw ing area i e left click to indicate the curved scale s start point a LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 133 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Click on the radius point b which is of a scale s outer circle 5 Draw another circle inside the circle drawn in step 4 to decide the width of the scale Click on this in ner circle s radius point c 6 Rotate the displayed segment and click on the scale start point d or on its elongation 7 Then rotate the segment again until you reach the When using the keyboard to draw desired end point e and click to designate the end of divisions press the 4 key after the scale s divisions moving the cursor to the division Division lines appear inside the area surrounded with circle s center point to the other the double circles and the two segments They will be point on its circumference radius drawn clockwise from the start point to the end point point and then to the divisions start and end points oy To cancel the drawing click on the E icon D
68. data CSV format Symbol s number of characters is over Y ou attempted to import a symbol with a name 20 and cannot be imported over 20 characters long Please reduce this name b less than 20 characters s cannot be found or cannot be performed The file s required to perform this action cannot be found P lease re install the application sofware E Screen Transfer Errors CE rorMessage Cause Solution A different Extended Program is present in This extended program can only be sentto a LT the LT The LT s setup cannot be performed containing the same program Please change the LT type or install the extended task s program in the LT A different Extended Program is present injA differenttype of Extended Program is presentin the LT Do you wish to continue the LT Press OK to overwrite this program or Cancel to stop the transfer Selectng OK will change the LT s internal Extended P rogram Cannot transmit data at 115 2Kbps used ajThis error occurs when the speed of 115 2K bps Slower speed Change Data Transfer Speed cannotbe used Change the Data Transfer S peed to 38400 when sending data seting to 38400 and re try Appendix 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 1 Error Messages E Screen Transfer Errors from previous page Error Message Cause Solution C Command Parameter ERROR Retry data transfer to the designated LT using Auto Setup
69. p Aligns on the X l axis Resets the Y Aligns below the l axis settings gA ac Hep X axis Aligns to the left Aligns on the Y Aligns to the right of the Y axis axis of the Y axis E Aligning Object Positions PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select all the desired objects to be aligned 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Align command or click on the icon 3 Select the type of alignment from the Alignment dia While an individual label can be log box aligned groups of labels cannot In this example select the icon X axis Bottom Click on an object to select its handles and then click on its Label to select the Label s handles Text characters on both Numeric or other and do not select any vertical Y axis position ox types of Displays can be aligned in EA the same manner TO To align objects combine the se lections shown below aion Hee _ Horizontal position Up Center Bottom 4 Click on the button to align the objects pornoa position Left Center 1g To cancel the alignment click on the icon LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 165 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 11 Rotate Left Rotate Right With this command an object can be rotated in 90 increments However loaded Screens and Marks and grouped objects cannot be rotated E Rotating an Object Counterclockwise Left PROCEDURE 1 Select an ob
70. s top left corner is to be placed Here the Picture Display s border dotted line or filled square and the Library item will appear At this time the Library item corresponding to the state currently se lected in the Dialog box is displayed on the Picture Dis play Regardless of whether the Picture Display s border is scaled up or down the Library item s size will not change The border size is common through all the Li braries The Library item s size and position can be al tered by clicking directly on its inside border REMARKS To delete a Library item click on the button To cancel the placement click on the icon Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings Also switching the states allows you to view the Library display status 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Changing the state via the Parts State Change Tool Bar after plac ing a Part allows you to check each state s Library display condition ote Every time the screen is opened the state will be reset to 0 If a state with no Library registered is designated nothing will be displayed on the Picture Display For example when the number of messages is 16 and only states 0 to 3 actually have a message registered designating states 4 to 15 displays only background square frames LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 115 Chapter 2 CREATI
71. switches which are being placed automatically and specify the number of lines being rolled up or down File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ypeColor Automatic Switch Placement Method Select SRAM gt External Device O Sheth bs th ese two Extemal Device SRAM Ly LS gt SPAH switches L Roll Up Dy Erena beviee 2 L5 D i owr Ly LS gt Estemal Desie 5 Specify the border colors for the function switches in the Switch Type Color tab 6 After setting all the attributes click on Pie h The frame of the File Name Display size will be dis played in the drawing area 2 86 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Click the mouse button where you want to place each To cancel the placement click on attribute the icon 12348 arole z4 TA 8 Select the placed File Name Display Then select the The File Name Displays are Edit menu Ungroup command or click on the grouped To change any attribute icon to ungroup the File Name Display and alter first ungroup the File Name Dis each item s position and size plays and then change the attribute 2 3 13 Group Ungroup 2 3 15 Changing Attributes If Use LS Area is selected the address for the LS area can be SRAM ELH changed after ungrouping the File Name Displays LT Editor Ver
72. symbol Setup Editor symbol name data Symbol Editor Select a desired File Edit Wiew Help symbol or com Zetia le Bllgele Pop up Keypad ment Ward Symbols Enter the address es corre sponding to the symbol s or Enter a symbol description s name name of up to twenty characters LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 21 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Symbol Editor Types There are five types of symbols the Word symbol corresponding to a word address the Bit symbol corresponding to a bit address the Logic Integer sym bol the Logic Discrete symbol and the Logic Real symbol which are used in a logic program Word Symbol Logic Bit Symbol Logic Discrete Symbol Logic symbol Logic symbol means variables used in a logic program A new logic sym bol cannot be registered with the Symbol Editor When a logic program is saved global variables registered on the variable list will automatically be registered with the Symbol Editor Only global variables are registered as logic symbols Variables are registered as one of the following three logic symbols de pending on the variable type Logic Integer symbol Logic Discrete symbol Logic Real symbol As for an array variable each element is registered as a symbol An array of size 5 is registered as five logic symbols Element Number representing elements in an array will be
73. use the Logic Symbol Keypad that will be displayed by clicking the Logic button in the Address Keypad window Bit Switch Settings B5_001 Shape Color Label Extend Description Operation Bit Address mpo Fe C Monitor ferniton Bik Addes Epoo IN General Settings Activates the Address Keypad To move the Address Address Keypad keypad to the desired position drag its title bar To close the pop up Bit Address x keypad click here To display the device _ names in a list click here oo0000 Display Backspace key Clear key Hexadecimal number entry key l Enter key Displays the Logic Symbol Keypad A pull down list shows Logic Designates a Logic symbols symbol by bit Returns to the Addres l PENT The Logic symbol Keypad will be accepted with a click on the Enter key A Part s specified address can be entered so that it is displayed during Base screen creation 2 7 2 Property Settings Regardless of whether addresses are designated as either displayed or not displayed during Base screen creation they will not be displayed on the LT panel after screen transfer LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Paris w Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Selecting a Part Shape Click on the General Settings Area s Browser button in the dialog box and the Shape Browser hereafter called Browser will be
74. 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide pirat Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Trend Graph An example of a Trend Graph scrolling left to right 1s shown below Data stored in D00102 is displayed on the Trend Graph Axis Settings E Scroll 19 When 34 22h is stored in j Sampling Time 10 ser D00102 the graph will look like EONS V T this Hor 10 PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Trend Graph command or click on the icon 2 After clicking on the General Settings tab select the data format Dea a DaN i Data in the range of 0 to 100 can i annel Settings apeColor amm Settings e n be displayed on the Trend Graph wath a When the data range is from 100 OE oeo Select Bin to 100 check the Display Mode a check box 3 BCD 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser You can also use the Alarm Settings area to enter Alarm 2 1 Parts Se settings and select Colors if desired lecting a Part Shape Shape Browser TR_3DO003R a Parts File Current POE File ram files pro Faceslt pdb4pdb pdb Title TA_3D001F F Help 2 58 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Graph Settings area select the Graph Type and Direction and enter the number of Data Samples and Axis Divisions Select Normal
75. 2 Data value Min n 2 Data value Max n 3 n 4 Data value Min n 5 e g When the Word Address is set to D00000 Word Addresses are automati cally allocated in sequence starting from the Address desig nated e g When the Word Address is set to Symbol Logic Symbol Alarm Range Min Value Symbol 2 Max Value Sumbaol 1 2 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Paris Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS When a variable Logic symbol is used as a start address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an ap important propriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Alarm Color Here you can select the colors used for an Alarm display 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Creating Labels Here a Label means the text characters shown on the faces of the Switch and Lamp button Parts Labels can be registered via the Part s Setting dialog box Label TN As with Parts Label display colors can be created for each of a 2 state Part s states up to 4 lines of text can be used for each state lt OFF state gt lt ON state gt When a lamp s Text Display changes This Switch s ON OFF colors are also selected Gx te The Part must be large enough to display the entire Label NG Enter the charac Bit Switch Settings BS_001 ters here When the Part has Gere Setings Shone Color Label Extend ET Co
76. 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 17 Appendix 2 Troubleshooting APPENDICES Error Cause Solution Cannot draw Is the LT Editor s screen open graphic data With LT Editor you mustselectthe projectfile and open a drawing screen before you can draw any objects Create a new a Screen or open an existing one Prepare a disk which has enough free space Is the symbol editor started The screen editor and the symbol editor cannotbe started atthe same tme Check thatthe Symbol editor window has been closed Cannotsavethe _ Is the file write protected Does the disk you are saving to have enough free space Is the proper cable being used Be sure to use the DIGITAL transfer cable option between the PC and s the LT in the Screen Data Transfer M ode or Run M ode Ifnot communications between the PC and the LT will notbe possible LogiTouch Series User M anual When receiving data from the LT does your PC s hard disk have enough space Is the communication portseting correct Does another application use the Same communication port Check whether there is competition between the LT and a modem or other applications which require the communication port If the Buzzer won t The Data Transfer cable may be loose or connected to the wrong COM port Also the stop The LT won t System Data area may be incorrectly accessed or the LT may be incorrectly setup For display data Data
77. 2 51 Label 2 10 Label Attributes 2 15 Library Browser 2 158 Library Size 2 159 Line space 2 11 Line Type Conversion DXF to PRW 2 232 Line Polyline Attributes 2 96 Link Select 2 220 List Display 2 226 List Screens 7 16 Listing Screens 4 2 Load Screen and Search Screen Settings 4 17 Loading a Mark Screen 2 118 Loading a Screen 2 116 Logging Data Read Timing 10 31 Logic Program Restrictions 10 LS Area Filing Data Structure 10 5 LT Editor Part Type Summary 2 2 LT System Settings 6 7 LT Type 1 5 Managing Filing Data in Group 10 3 Numeric Display Display Format Attributes 2 73 Numeric Display General Settings Attributes 2 73 Numeric Display Shape Color Attributes 2 74 Co Opening a New Screen 1 12 Opening a Previously Saved Screen 1 13 Operation Bit Address 2 14 Operators 2 183 Options Dialog Box 9 3 overseas products 1 Cr Pasting a Logic Program Instruction to the Screen 2 132 Pasting a Part placed to the screen to a Logic Pro 2 134 Pasting an Object 2 130 PDB File 2 6 Picture Display Description Attributes 2 88 Picture Display Library Image Attributes 2 89 Place File Name Display 2 64 Placing a Bit Switch 2 16 Placing a Date Display 2 84 Placing a Keypad Display 2 53 Placing a Message Display 2 80 Placing a Numeric Display 2 75 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 10 15 10 Placing a Part in Position 2 13 16 10 22 Manual Symbols and Terminology 3 Mark Drawing Area
78. 2 8 DXF Conversion E Line Type Conversion Screen gt DXF Base screen s line types will be converted as follows Tdotbrokentine DASHED T 2dotbrokentine DASHED The line thickness will be converted in the same thickness for all the lines regardless of the line types E Object Conversion Screen gt DXF Base screen s drawing data will be converted as follows Colors and line types will be converted as shown in the previous page s table The background colors will not be converted Tiling patterns will be converted into solid Fill DXF File on e Straight LINE POLYLINE RegularCircle Filled tciRCLE CIRCLE SOLID F S illed Polygon OLID or POLYLINE Broken down into each Part object Load Screen and converted me ooo i Load Mark POLYLINE Broken down into each part and converted Data other than the above will not be converted Straight line Continuous straight line e When the number of coordinates is 2 a straight line or continuous straight line will be converted into LINE If this number is other than 2 it will be converted into POLYLINE e When a line has an arrow at one end a solid filled triangle will be drawn at the end coordinates and when a line has arrows at both ends solid filled triangles will be drawn at both ends Square Filled Square e Any line will be converted into POLYLINE e Any Fill will be converted into SOLID LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual
79. 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Entering Text PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Text command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of the characters to be input The attributes can also be entered Select Colors and Character Size if desired and selected after entering text When Raised is selected for Character Type the border color Bd will become shadowed 1 e 3 D 3 Click on the text field to input characters via your PC s keyboard Simply clicking on the text field allows you to input char acters there Hereafter two text alignment cases will be explained one not using and one using the Centering function lt When Centering function is NOT used gt 4 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on any desired point After clicking on a point in the drawing area a text box When using your PC s keyboard the size of the selected character will appear on the screen to enter text press the J key to The top left corner of the text box is the base point used for positioning LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 137 designate a position Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Move the cursor to the desired position and left click To cancel the placement click on the mouse to place it on the screen the TEN Double clicking on any object Operation Screen drawn on the screen automat
80. 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Freehand Drawing PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Dot command or click on the icon 2 Draw a Mark by clicking on each dot or by dragging the mouse in the Mark drawing area LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 5 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Drawing a Line PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Line command or click on the icon 2 Click on a start point in the mMark drawing area and drag the mouse 3 Click the end point in the Mark drawing area If you press and hold the key A line is defined in step 2 you can draw a line at an angle of 0 45 and 90 3 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen REMARKS PROCEDURE E Drawing a Square Rectangle or Filled Square Filled Rect angle Filled Square Rectangle command or click on the or m icon 2 Click on a point a and drag the mouse on a diago 1 Select the Draw menu Square Rectangle or nal axis in the Mark drawing area Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS If you press and hold the key in step 2 you can draw a square Hoo E SSG oe eee ee Be eee ee PCC CoCr e000 00000 88 COCR LEH Ll k F T E m E E E E A square or rectangle is defined 3 Click on the end point b 3 7 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Oper
81. Addr No of Sampling Ad Data Backup 0o00 0020 Mo Saves the Data Sampling Setting List in a CSV file Scrolls the display left right up and down when the Data Sampling Setting List is bigger than the screen size Wot The tab width for each item can be adjusted by positioning the mouse pointer on the border between items and then dragging it E Changing the Data Sampling Setting Order The Data Samplings will function in the order that they have been set up the order displayed on all the pages of the Data Sampling List on the LT screen To change this order click on either the Move Up or Move Down key When multiple Data Sampling are grouped that group will be moved up or down E Exporting a CSV File The Data Sampling Setting list information can be saved as a CSV file 2 7 5 Parts List Exporting a CSV File LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques 2 7 1 Cross Reference List The Cross Reference List feature is useful when displaying the current address condition of Parts and other items Here the exact address used for each Part can be checked Cross reference will be displayed for local settings each screen s Parts and D scripts and data sampling and global D scripts registered for all the screens For the global cross reference setting dis
82. An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied are temporarily stored The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted 2 132 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS ED Copy Here the procedure for copying an object without deleting it and placing it elsewhere is explained When an object is copied it is stored in the Clipboard E Copying an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired object s 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Copy command or click To cancel the Copying click on the on the icon icon The selected object s will be Copied to the Clipboard 3 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click When pasting the Copied object on the je icon on another screen be sure to open I l that screen first Then the outline of the object copied from the previous screen to the Clipboard will appear Selecting and dragging an object to anther screen while holding down 4 Position the cursor and click on the point where the the key can also be used to object is to be placed copy the object The object stored in the Clipboard will b
83. B Screen cme Window Registration on the U Screen Call up a window that has been registered on the Window Screen U onto the Base Screen B The window can be easily called up with the window part placed on the Base Screen pasted to the Base Screen E Window Screen Usage Pattern Screen New Screen gt OK Create a window Part Window Part Specify the window Place or Ea This section describes the procedure for calling up a window display of a bar graph onto B2 following the example in the section Overview of Win dow Display in 3 3 1 PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select New from the Screen menu or click f to select Window Screen The Window Screen U opens and a window area with a square frame is dis played Screen Type window Seren Base Screen Malis Screen Window Screen Click the border of the window area and eight M will appear on the COOCOO REE screen With the mouse drag W to change the size of the window area LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide eed 3 3 Window Display Window U Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS and Base B Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 Adjust the window area so that it surrounds the bar The x coordinates for the window graph display can only be set up in 8 dot TEE intervals i e the cursor will snap
84. Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 5 Click on the point where the Switch s top left corner is to be placed If necessary use the Switch s handles to alter its size 2 1 Parts REMARKS To cancel the placement click on the icon MAAA To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen calls up that Part s At tribute Setting dialog box 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Here a lamp is created which turns ON or OFF according to the Device PLC s Monitor Bit Address state When the LT is Type C the lamp that specifies the address of _ the Device PLC will not display on the LT unless the LT has Important been connected to the Device PLC When placing a Lamp DO NOT overlap it with other objects If you do so it may not be displayed correctly E Lamp General Setting Attributes Lamp Settings LA _001 General Settings Shape Color Label Bit Address Enter comment data here Enter the desired Bit Address here Description fo State a Displays the cur rently selected Part Changes the Calls up the Part state of the Shape Browser dialog box s switch display to either ON or OFF Part Shapes can be selected directly from here Bit Address The Bit Address to be monitored is entered here 2 28 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2
85. Completed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing wee Symbol Editor The Symbol Editor enables you to assign an address to a symbol and then register that symbol and to assign a device comment to an address and then register it The Symbol is the registered name used to indicate the address of any Part Thus when you change the address corresponding to a symbol you will automatically change a Part s address es without having to re setting the Part The device comment indicates a comment assigned attached to each address When setting a Part s address es simply clicking on Apply Device Comment reflects the registered device comment to the Part s comment field 2 1 Parts Part Attributes Entering a Comment In all the address entry fields such as of Parts addresses registered via the Symbol Editor will be displayed in a pull down list together with the sym bols or device comments Addresses can also be specified here by selecting them from this list 2 1 Parts Part Attributes Entering Addresses The symbol and device comment data can be shared between multiple Projects by import and export ae The registered symbol and device comment information can be printed as a 2 symbol list 9 1 1 Printing Usage Pattern Select Word Enter a Save the Screen Symbol symbol or Bit symbol
86. Creation Guide 2 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Alarm Settings In both graph and numeric value displays Alarms can be set up First click on the Alarm Settings tab at the top of the Dialog box When checking the Alarm Display box Check mark i appears the Alarm setting items will appear Bar Graph Settings BA_001 x General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Sets the Alarm Pimia Alarm Type value s Format iain Display oom to fixed or ona _ variable T Alarm Range Mas Value 100 TH Fo eee ko Bo eee ko Sets the minimum and maximum Alarm values Sets the Alarm colors used Alarm Type The Alarm value can be specified as either direct fixed value or indirect variable value by simply clicking on the appropriate circle Alarm Range Here you can specify the maximum and minimum Alarm values When the Alarm value has been specified as indirect the maximum and minimum values can also be specified as indirect In this case the Word Address number used to store these values will be automatically assigned continuously from the Word Address currently specified The following example uses n to denote where the Word Address display data is stored lt Relationship between display data s storage address and Alarm register address gt With 16 Bit data With 32 Bit data n Display Data n n 1 Data value Max n 1 Display Data n
87. DXF Format Error line Non DXF data may be included Correct the HEADER SECTION Not Found a notfound Add the header secton LIMMIN Not Found The header section ofthe DXF file to be read does not have a LIM MIN seting Set the opton DXF size to Use EXTMIN EXTMAX and re execule the program or add the LIMMIN seting LIMMAX Not Found The header section ofthe DXF file to be read does not have a LIM M AX seting Setthe opton DXF size to Use EXTMIN EXTMAX and re execute the program or add the LIMMAX seting SEXTMIN Not Found The header section of the DXF file to be read does nothave a EXTMIN setting Set the opton DXF size to Use LIMMIN LIM MAX and re execute the program or add the EXTMIN seting EXTMAX Not Found The header section ofthe DXF file to be read does nothave a EXTM AX seting Setthe option DXF size to Use LIMMIN LIM MAX and re execute the program or add the EXTMAX seting DXF file to be read Add the EOF record the DXF file to be read Add the ENDSEC record ENDTAB Not Found line The ENDTAB record Is notspecified atthe end of the TABLE secton ofthe DXF file to be read Add the ENDTAB record 0 N W SEQEND Not Found line SEQEND to be used as a pair wih VERTEX following the POLYLINE entty is not specified Add the SEQEND record t the error line Insufficient Data line The essental data for the element ofeach entty is insu
88. Data are required to be specified for the Read Area Since this area always reads out data the time from Control bit turning On to graph display will be shorter than when using the PLC Word Address However when the Read Area size is large the entire screen display time will be slower than when using the PLC Word Address Also the Read Area size is limited up to 256 words When using the PLC Word Address When the PLC Word Address is used Control Data Count and Data are constantly read out from the PLC to the LT regardless of screen display The time from the Control display bit turning ON to graph display to read out Data will be longer than the time when the LS Area is used However when graph display is not performed time required to display data of the entire screen will be shorter than when using the LS Area This function is also useful when data for more than 256 words is required to display mul tiple graphs via the Block Display function Ste e When the PLC Word Address is used to increase the entire screen data 2 display speed to display multiple graphs via Block Display function the following method is useful Specify the Offset of all graphs displayed via the Block Display function and then designate each graph s Control Data Count and Offset with consecutive address Data Count n Data Count n First Data Unit Second Data Unit LT Edi
89. Designate the Start Address of the De E vice PLC device where data to be Data Clear Bt Adress T logged is stored No of Words Designate the desired number of words from the Start Address Up to 32 words can be designated Trigger Bit Address o0 000000 P EE a When a variable Logic Symbol is used as a logging start ad A dress an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Read Count Designate the frequency of data log ging Data is logged at the frequency designated here and then handled as a block LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Trigger Settings Time Method Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display write Settings JF Logging ON DFF 2 Bit Method Data Logging Start Address Ho of Words Start Time H M Finish Time ph fe Mp Duration H M 5 ReadCount Block Count Data Logging Auth Bit Address O0 000000 fee Block s Finish Bit Address File Full Bit Address Data Clear Bit Address 10 2 Logging Block Count Designate the number of data blocks Data is logged for the number of blocks designated here and then handled as a file 1 lt Times x Blocks lt 2048 Trigger Bit Address Designate a Bit Address to be used as External Device s trigger Device PLC to LT LT_ACK Bit Address Designate the Device PLC Bit Address
90. Device SRAM Rall Up Fall Down Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color SRAM gt LS LS gt SRAM External Device LS Send To Device PLC From SRAM Not Selected Send To SRAM From Device PLC Not Selected Roll Up Selected Roll Down Selected Send To LS From SRAM Selected Send To SRAM From LS Selected Send To LS From Device PLC Selected Sending To Device PLC From LS Se lected LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe E Place Click on the Place button to display the Filing Name Data Display Change the size of placed Part if desired Settings Display must be placed to corre spond with the storing address of the filing data To change the Filing Name Display s layout or attributes first ungroup it SP te Xe 1 Writing filing data to SRAM All filing data is written to SRAM when the Trigger Bit is turned ON Trigger Bit Address ON p00200001 ed OFF Write Completed Bit Address e M0001 OFF i i Write Filing data to SRAM Data processing LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 25 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 2 Selecting a file name Select the desired setting by touching Block 2 s LT screen data 3 Backup SRAM gt LS Area Touching the SRAM gt LS key will transmit data from SRAM to the LS Area 4 Data Editing Touch the K
91. Display setting procedure is shown below When using a Word Address in Direct Text mode Message No 0 None Message No 1 Signal A Operation Message No 2 Signal B Operation Message No 3 Signal A amp B Operation A message from those listed displays in response above allocated to the specified to changes in the Word Word Address Address data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Message Display com mand or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings tab input a Word Address If the message is displayed on more Select the message s Border Color Text Alignment and than one line with the Index char Character Size 1f desired acter strings the characters are al ways aligned to the center Hessage Display Settings M4 _001 General Settings Messages Enter M0064 Description Address E Border Color EET mm C e Alignment Character Size 2 Word ba F 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select ing a Part Shape Shape Browser x Farts File Current POE File o program files pro facelt pdb pdb p Tite MO 30001 FJ He 2 102 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Enter the number of pecan and nee of Dis If selecting the In play Characters with the Direct Text option se lected in the M dex Text option refer to 4 6 3 ected in th
92. E icon 2 Select a Keypad Data Format Type Keypad Settings General Settings Keypad Type AMR 8 Decimal Select Decimal ie fe fe dee 1 Hex eied maag fed ted Pad Color Bee a m e 3 Select a Keypad Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select a color from the Shape Color area ing a Part Shape C 7 02 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 11 Keypad Display Here the area used to display Pop up Keypad data is created When the Keypad Display is touched a Pop up Keypad appears allowing you to enter a value When not using the pop up keypad place an additional keypad separately from the Keypad Display e When the Keypad display is placed the Pop up Keypad will automatically be set You don t have to place a new keypad for entering numerical data e The Keypad Display cannot be set up simultaneously with the Logging Display E Keypad Display General Settings Attributes Enter the Enter comment Sails Input Display Settings KD_O01 Word Address data here General Settings Display Format ShapeColor Alarm Settings Extend used to store Description Word Address d i 4 isplay data The currently f play selected Part s corsa image will appear F 0 coooooo0 Pes Enter the here Trigger Bit Calls up the Part Use Pop up Keypad aaah 7 Shape Browser a oe ae A Parts can be Ss man
93. Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS ye Object Editing Parts objects and text previously placed or drawn hereafter called Ob jects can be edited using various functions such as Copy and Delete To edit an object first use the cursor to select the object and then select the type of edit operation Usage Pattern Select an Edit Select the type of Perform the Object gt or gt editing to perform editing Tool Bar E Types of Editing Functions Icons contained in the Edit Tool Bar and their corresponding edit operation are as follows Teme BST nmr m A e E e E a e a Te e R e Bw e fm e Temmer FSD seve soe TE ein oe a tm eee vomne a a ye ee ee Note The tools shown above can also be used from a menu by right clicking the mouse LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 143 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 1 Selecting Objects Two methods are available for selecting objects 1 clicking on an object directly or 2 dragging the mouse to enclose and select single or multiple objects Also you can select individual objects that have other objects either on top of or overlapping them When the tool bar s icon is clicked on active an object can be se lected To activate this icon click on it directly or select the pull down Edit menu s Select command Also while drawing objects right clickin
94. Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 PREFACE PRECAUTIONS E CD ROM Usage Precautions To prevent CD ROM damage or malfunctions please observe the following instructions Do not remove the CD ROM from the CD ROM drive while the drive s operation lamp is lit Do not touch the CD ROM recording surface Do not place CD ROMs in a place where they may be exposed to extremely high or low temperatures high humidity or dust E Product Usage Precautions To prevent program malfunction or accidents be sure to observe the follow ing instructions AN Touch panel switches should NOT be used for a Warning device s Emergency Stop Switch Generally speak ing all industrial machinery systems must be equipped with a mechanical manually operated emergency stop switch Also for other kinds of systems similar mechanical switches must be provided to ensure safe operation of those sys tems Do not turn off your personal computer s power switch during the execu tion of a program Do not change the contents of this product s project files using the Text Editor software 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE Drawing e The LT Editor s display screen and descriptions used in the manuals are based on the color display when the LT main unit is in the REVERSE LCD mode Please note that white black color on the LT Editor screen and LT main unit screen will
95. Format Size Style Alarm Settings Ch Absolute GIR Address Offset eS Data Logging Address D00000 Bit Length 1 16 16 Input Code fo No Code Ct 2 s Complement JA Code i Round Up Display Range Min alue Max Value E5535 ml Relative Data stored in the Address entered in the Logging Address area is converted according to the Input Range area s val ues and the converted data values are displayed Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes 0 to 3 Bit Length 1 16 Enter the Enabled Bit length of data to be stored in the Logging Address Input Code No Code Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express nega tive values Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when selecting the Dec data format Round Up The decimal point numbers created dur ing relative value range conversion will be rounded up or off When this option is not selected those numbers will be rounded off Input Range Min Value Max Value Designates the range of values stored in the Logging Address The possible ranges vary depending on the Input Code Format Display Range Min Value Max Value Designates the range of values dis played in the N tag The possible ranges vary depending on the Dis
96. From OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Convert To MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES tart Address Before End Address Before Start Address s Sare Pakene Load Patterns Select the Address Type option and designate the Refer to the list of available devices available Start Address and End Address of the of your PLC PLC before the conversion as well as the available Start Address of the PLC after the conversion and click on the Ooo button Edit Address Convertion Pattern Address Type Bit Address fe Word Address Convert From Convert To Start Address Start Address ocom ES 00 0003 E End Address momo CER 4 32 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS The new conversion pattern is added to the Address Table PLE Type Change Convert From OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Convert To MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES oor e Edit Patten Delek Pattern Load Patterns Added conversion pattern lt Editing a conversion pattern gt Select the conversion pattern you want to edit from the Address Table and click on the Edit Pattern button PLC Type Change Convert From OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Conve te MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES Load Patterns Designate the conversion pattern with the procedure described in Step 4 of When Device conversion pat terns are set Edit Address Convertion Pa
97. G mg 1 12 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 12 From Sar toT h Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals E Opening a Previously Saved Screen PROCEDURE 1 Select the Screen Setup menu s Editor com mand or click on in the Project Manager The Screen Editor s opening screen will appear 2 Select the Screen menu s Open command or click on E 3 Use this screen to select a screen name from the list or select the screen type and enter the screen number When checking the Preview check box the selected screen image can be viewed in the dialog box Open Screen Project File A Manufacturing Ite Screen B 1 Run Made 2 Operation Monitor Copy 4 Error Screen 11 Keypad Input Change Open Screen Type Base Screen Open Screen Project File 4 Manufacturing lte Screen B 1 Run Made 2 Operation Monitor 4 Error Screen 11 keypad Input Preview Screen Type ase Screen Preview Check Box LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS When the Screen Editor has already been started skip step 1 When you double click on the de sired screen number in step 3 you can skip the operation of the button If you enter a screen number that has not been registered in the list a new screen will be opened and that number will be assigned to it When selecting multiple screens a screen with the smalles
98. If this message appears again the PC has a command related problem Or there may be an error inthe cable or in the PC Check both and retry data transfer If the problem persists the cable may be damaged If necessary contactyour local LT distributor Connected Device is not correct LT A device other than the LT or one that is not Supported by LT Editor is connected Check the model ofthe connected device Core ID Command failed An error has occurred during data transfer from the PC The cable may be disconnected or the LT is OFF Retry data transfer Data Transfer Port initialization error Initalizaton of the communication port has failed Check the transfer serial portsetings and transfer cable connecton Do you want to download the simulation When you wantto transfer the simulation protocol protocol click OK Otherwise click cancel ERROR Incomplete Transmission Screen transfer to the LT has been aborted Refer to the error message code ERROR No Configuration File The file required for setup was not found in the Specified folder Re install the system from the M aster disk or check the transfer path setings Transfer S etings area ERROR Cannot Transfer Data A communication error has occurred and transfer has failed Reset the LT and PC and retry data transfer ERROR Cannot open Screen The system is trying to transfer the screen to the roncar Thacamotopen he Pragati ooe Handshaking ERROR LT not The LT power s
99. LT use the function switches to scroll the data 2 1 3 Function Switches Logging display LG_001 Select the func General Settings Dale type Color Switch setting Switch Shape Color E i i tion switch type Select Place Switch nter e io be placed Wlup at number of TAn paee Ml Down rows columns Right scrolled Zt E Data Logging Display Switch Shape Color Attributes Specify a color border color of each function switch 2 18 Selecting Colors E Placing the Data Logging Display The procedure for setting the Data Logging Display is described below The logged data for the block number stored at the block number desig nated address is displayed uy pate ime Data D0100 a O gt F 15 0 mom ro If 3 is stored at D0100 The logged data in block No 3 will be displayed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 91 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 1 Select the Parts menu Data Logging Display com mand or click on the gg icon 2 In the General Settings tab specify the block num ber designated address data edit and whether the interlock is enabled or disabled Specify D0100 for the block number designated address Logging Display LG_001 General Settings Data Type Color Switch Setting Switch Shape Coler Enter D0100 Description Block Number Address E im Data Edit T bateak Interlock Address k pooo lEs 3 In the Data Type
100. List 2 222 State 2 11 Reflecting Device Comments 5 11 States 2 8 Reflection of a Device Commen 2 3 Status Bar 1 18 Reflection of a Device Comment 2 3 Structure of the Manual 5 Reflection of Device Comments 2 138 Style 2 112 Registering a Home Page Address 1 29 Style Font 2 11 Registering a Password 7 7 Switching Library Files 2 160 Registering D Script Editor 2 177 Symbol Editor Types 4 20 Registering D Script Settings 2 177 Registering Data Sampling Settings 2 208 Registering Symbols and Device Comments 4 22 Text Attributes 2 111 Rotating an Object 2 142 Text Color ON OFF 2 11 Tiling Patterns 2 95 Time Display General Settings Attributes 2 86 Safety Symbols and Terms 3 Tips for using the Pop up Keypad 2 54 Sampling 2 210 Title Bar 1 18 Saving a Library File Under Another Name 2 173 Tool Icon Display 1 25 Saving a Logic Program 1 11 TRADEMARK RIGHTS 2 Saving a Project 1 8 1 9 1 11 Trademark Rights 2 Saving a Project File under a Different Name 1 9 Transfer Settings 7 4 Saving a Screen 1 15 Transferring a Screen to the Clipboard 2 153 Saving a Screen under a Different Name 1 15 Transferring a Screen Using a Password 7 11 Scaling An Object 2 127 Transparent Background Color 3 20 Screen Data Display 2 220 Trigger 2 178 Screen Data List 2 219 Troubleshooting advice 25 Screen Editor Item Names 1 20 1 23 Turn Counterclockwise 3 18 Screens that can be loaded to other screens 2 115 Types of Editing Functions 2 119 Searching for a
101. Logging Data n Block m 1 Logging Data 1 Logging Data 2 Logging Data n Ste e When data logging is performed for the designated number of blocks the XX LT will turn the File Full Bit Address ON and data logging will stop e To resume data logging turn the Data Clear Bit Address ON from the Device PLC The LT then clears all logging data and will start data logging from the beginning LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 29 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES With Loop operation When data logging is performed to the end of a loop cycle data logging repeats from the beginning and overwrites the existing data Only one block is used which has a linked buffer like structure and is similar to the link buffer After data logging is completed and control jumps from the end of the block to the beginning the LT will turn the File Full Bit Address ON Turning this Address ON simply indicates that data logging has been per formed from the beginning to the end one time and that data logging will continue Logging Data 1 Using loop operation each logging Block Logging Data 2 data item also uses from 1 to 32 Single Logging Data 3 words Logging Data n e After the Device PLC detects the File Full Bit s turning ON turn the Bit OFF important When the Data Clear Bit Address turns ON from the Device PLC the LT clears logging data and repeats data logging from
102. Logic Programs ED Passwords E Registering a Password You can enter a password to restrict user access to the data transfer function ny e Be sure to keep a copy of the password in a safe place If you forget the password the Transfer function cannot be executed Important e The password is limited to 24 characters and only alphanu meric data no symbols can be used PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Setup menu Password command 3 Enter a password Register Password Please Enter Password Please Confirm Password po Warming Please remember to write down your password IF You forget your password screen transfer cannot be performed 4 Enter the same password again for confirmation and Ifa password has already been reg then click on the button istered the Change Password dia log box will appear Register Password Please Enter Password Please Confirm Password Warming Please remember to write down your password IF You forget pour password screen transfer cannot be performed Change Password Please Enter Password Please Enter New Password jo Please Re enter New Password Coe LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide i
103. Op sp0 pdb in summary form all the hm01 i Pdb pdb PDB files in this folder Filename T S A Files of type Cancel Shows the soio a S Hep currently Z selected PDB file s Shows the name of the currently selected PDB file comment A name can also be entered here to select a file LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Kote When the LT Editor software is first installed all Part Files will be included Sl in a folder named PDB and automatically installed in the same directory folder as the LT Editor program If desired these Part Files can be moved to other folders and to find a Part File that has been moved use the Look in area to display Part Files located in other folders E Selecting Colors Specify Part colors using the Shape Color setting screen The setting items will differ depending on the Part i e the border type ON OFF states graphs and label colors Tiling patterns can be selected for some of the Parts Lamps and Graphs Word Switch Settings 4 5_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Border Color DETINE OOE F Color Fo B E E L EN e Fy Bo W OENE F Pattern for ce a Colors There are 8 colors available in the color bar Use this bar to select the foreground Fg background Bg and other colors Note On a monochrome LT screen black blue green and cyan will be displayed el as black
104. Page Address The registered home page address or title can be changed When you select the home page address to be edited and click on the button the address setting dialog box appears same as for the home page addition procedure enabling you to change the title and address of the home page If Digital Electronics Corporation s home page address is changed in the future please edit the currently registered address E Connecting to the Home Page PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Help menu Connect to Home Page command in the Project Manager 2 Select the target home page address Home page Home page 3 Click on the button to start connection 1f a browser has not been specified The browser is started and you will be connected to the ag one Eiatoe Doman beats Specify a browser and re start the home page connecting procedure Project Manager Internet browser Not Selected yet Please select a Browser 1 30 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals E How To Register a Home Page Address PROCEDURE 1 Select the Help menu Connect to Home Page command in the Project Manager 2 Click on the button Home page Home page Digital s Homepage 3 Enter a home page title and address to be registered and click on oox h The specified home page address will be registered Ho
105. Programs Control Data Check this box if you wish to send logic programs along with other data to the LT unit When transferring system programs or protocol programs however logic programs are always transferred regardless of the setting of this screen Communication Port Select a serial port to which the transfer cable is connected and a transfer speed Transfer Method Transfer Method 23 Send All Screens Automatically Send Changed Screens 3 Send User Selected Screens Send All Screens Transfers all screen data in a Project File to the LT unit Automatically Send Changed Screens Any screen data that have been updated in the current Project File are automatically transferred to the LT unit This transfer mode is only La effective when screens have been previously transferred to the LT unit Note When Automatically Send Changed Screens is used screens that have been Ne deleted not just updated from the Project File in the LT Editor program will not be automatically deleted from the Project File stored in the LT unit To completely replace all screens of the Project File stored in the LT unit be sure to use Send All Screens Send User Selected Screens When transferring a screen to a Project File stored in the LT unit you must specify the screen type gt No Filing Data and logged data can be specified to transfer them NG To select screens click on the names of desired screens while holdi
106. Select the desired Index character strings Index No from those specified in the Table Editor To add new Index character strings click on the button to activate the Table Editor SETTER 4 5 2 Table Editor Index Character Strings Index Character String Registration Message Display Settings HAW _00 1 Messages J Direct i Index ee P Selected Message t DE C Addindex Z Sor Place a check mark here to sort t Bold Raised the Index character strings displayed in the pull down menu in the order character code Single byte and double byte characters are discriminated Message Style MEIE E Normal Color Text Color Mill COM Hoe e Plate Color HI I O IF oer I tres tee Note The frame size of the Part will be displayed according to the Index character string Number of characters x Number of lines of the specified Index No The frame size of a Part remains the same even if the Table is switched LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 57 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Selecting Alarm Editor Messages First select Text Method in Alarm in the Alarm Editor and change the character string setting mode to Index Place a check mark here E to sort the character i Direct ig Indes strings in the order of character code Single byte and double byte characters are discrimi nated Text Method
107. The screen below appears on the screen Enter the Index Text for each Index Number Specify the message size Characters x Lines for each Index No Specify the number of charac ters in a line 1 to 100 single byte characters z foe SS gt SEF a a ina BE I Ok Cancel Help a Specify the number of lines 1 to 40 li Character Entry Area 1 to 40 lines Ce e The number of characters used in the index character string is determined ss by Characters x Lines Max 1 200 Characters x Lines lt 1 200 e Multiple display lines can be used for Character string and Parts Label only For other features do not specify an index number for which multiple display lines are set If such an index number is specified only the first line will be displayed i The index characters for each index number Characters x a Lines are available in all tables Important 4 52 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings E Index Character String Registration PROCEDURE 1 In the Project Manager select the Screen Setup menu Text Table command 2 Put a check mark in the Text Table Editor checkbox in the Text Table ON OFF dialog box icon and enter the Control Ad 4 Select a font from the Font Setting menu Select a table from m on the right of the Table 1 field and
108. Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 5 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES E Library Item Placement Save Errors Error Message Cause Solution Grouping Nesting Limit Reached You are attempting to nest grouped objects more Unable to group more than these objects than 10 tmes Only 10 levels of nestng are allowed Not a library file The library fle selected in the library browser Cannot be used in this system Selecta file with a CPW extension Out of memory Memory is not sufficient to execute the operation mee fa other applications re allocate memory and then restartthe operation System error An error occurs when the library fle is being ee Reserve Sufficient free disk space and restart the operation Unable to convert memory block into cell The memory is not sufficient to execute the operation Quit other applications re allocate memory and then restartthe operation Unable to create cell list The library file is corrupt for some reason Use the provided rebuilding tool to repair the fle and then restartihe listcreation E D Script Errors el Error Message Cause Solution C Constant value out of range The preset constant value exceeds the specified range Enter a correct value D Scnpt function name has not been Do not click OK without entering the functon entered name you must first specify the functon name Please type the function s name in the Enter the function name descripti
109. Word D00100 Line A 6 to 10 Word DOO101 gt One line feed Line A 1 to 5 Bit X00100 Line A 6 to 10 Bit X00101 lt Device Comment Data CSV Format gt GP_COMMENT Word Address Device Comment Name lt Give one line feed between a word address and a bit address gt Bit Address Device Comment Name Example GP_COMMENT DO0100 Machine A stops D00101 Machine A is now operating gt One line feed X00100 Pump B X00101 Pump B GP_SYMBOL and GP_COMMENT are identifiers indicating they are Symbol and Device Comment Data respectively important Give a line feed only between a word symbol and a bit symbol If an unnecessary line feed is given in any other place data cannot be imported LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 25 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS Import symbol data To import a device comment se lect the Import Device Comment 1 Select the File menu Import Symbol command command or click on the icon 2 Select a file LBE or CSV to be imported or en ter the file name and click on the Gren button ura Important pe A To import a device com sai Plant Project LBE ment select the Import Device Comment com mand Fie none HER Files of type LBE Files LBE a Cancel ly a If the same symbol name already exists the system
110. Word Address where the data will be stored Data Format Select the display data format from Bin and BCD Display Mode When this check box I is checked and Bin data format is selected nega tive numeric data can be displayed 2 41 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 42 lt When displaying the data in relative values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Enter the data here Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 3 Word Ad General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Ala m Settings dress used to The currently store graph i word Address selected Half Pie Bpo FE Display Mode data Graph s image E Bit Length je f appears here iia Input Code Selects the nvas p E e desired Data Calls up the Part Max Value j E e mse Format Shape Browser Soeciiesih 7 pecities the dhe rae re coe 1 tee P selected directly p from the Browser 7 o Code Specifies the data s Specifies the data s effective Bit Length Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address Data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used to store Half Pie Graph data Display Mode When this check box iW checked negative number data can be displayed Bit Length Specifies the Bit Length of all data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code With No Code s
111. a browser to view the home page and subscribe to an Internet provider Please understand that Digital Electronics Corporation can not respond to any questions about your Internet connection Operating procedures Heip Connectto _ Add Edit Delete _ button E Important Click on the Overview of the Home Page Connection screen Used to add a home page address Home page Home page Used to edit a regis tered home page l address and title Displays the registered home page address title Used to delete a registered home page address Used to connect to the specified home page Connect home page E Registering a Home Page Address The address of Digital Electronics Corporation s Home Page has been preregistered in your LT Editor software When you click on the button the address setting dialog box appears E How to Register a Home Page Address E Deleting a Home Page Address Any registered home page address can be deleted When you select the home page address to be deleted and click on the button the confirmation dialog box appears If you click on the button the selected home page address will be deleted If you click on the button the deleting operation will be canceled Are you ure you want to delete Cancel LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 29 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help E Editing a Home
112. adding the spline curve vertex will be converted When the number of vertices exceeds 100 data will be divided every 100 vertices and converted When the converted data s coordinates are repeated at the same point the following coordinates will be omitted When a polyline has curved sections they will not be converted There fore donut shaped lines and curved polylines will be converted into con tinuous straight lines connecting each coordinate point VERTEX Top coordinates of a polyline e A polyline s width will not be converted E Converting DXF File Data to Base Screen Data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down menu Utility s Convert DXF command 2 Click on the 0x gt PRw button M DXF lt gt Screen Converter x DoF Screen Screen gt DAF 3 Designate the source DXF file and the destination To designate a folder click on the Project File and enter the Base screen number Select button File Convert DXF gt Screen From OF File C Program Files Pro face LT datab Select Ta Project File C Program Files Pro face LT datab Select ScreenNo B 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 265 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 Click on the Option button and enter the conver sion conditions File Convert DXF gt Screen From DKF File C P
113. again from step 3 Project File FilesPro facesLT database stest lke Select To Converting 1002 Writing DF 530line Mumber OF Mot Convert Fill 1 DF gt Screen Screen gt DF 2 212 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide lt gt DRAWING APPLICATIONS CREATING and USING SCREENS i T Editor provides various screens for specific purposes for example for creating marks and images in addition to the Base screens which are the fundamental screen used for all drawing modes Other screens can then be loaded onto Base screens as libraries This chapter describes the procedure for creating these screens and their applications o E Creating a Mark the Mark Screen DEL EES Creating an Image the Image Screen 3 3 Window Display Window U Screen and Base B Screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 1 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 2 lt 4 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Create a mark dot pattern on a Mark screen Using the Draw menu Load Mark command you can load the created Mark onto a Base screen Usage Pattern Draw a Mark byturningon off each dot Click on to open a Mark screen Save the Mark Screen New ai screen General description of the Mark screen
114. area are performed Edge Bit Address GN ap l FIE 1 taf 2 202 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS f t Expression becomes Non Zero When the LT detects true of a given condition in a triggering program the statements described in the Action area are performed only one time at the detection t f Expression becomes Zero When the LT detects false of a given condition in a triggering program the statements described in the Action area are performed only one time at the detection Trigger _ Simple Edge Expression iy FEJ P g P me AN ox o o o fei fot fa tof e The bit designated for the Bit Rising Falling option must be held ON or OFF for longer than the Part scanning time stored in LS2036 e Printing or drawing operation may cause a timer delay e The Timer feature when a screen change is performed will reset to 0 with D Script When using Global D Script the timer continues the current counting e The timer may produce designated time or Part scanning time errors Device PLC Connection Manual 1 1 4 4 1 3 Special Relay e Writing on the external device must be performed at an inter val longer than a cycle time If writing on the external device is frequently performed using a part scan counter of the special relay inside the LT as a trigger communication errors may occur
115. asks If the same symbol name exists as if you wish to replace the symbol name a Logic symbol name Import as Import as command imports the symbol name Enter the symbol name to be replaced with a number added The symbol If no symbol name is entered the original symbol name name cannot be overwritten plus sequence numbers will be imported Replace The same symbol name will be overwritten Do not import The same symbol name will not be imported 3 Select an import method and execute it To import the specified symbol according to the current settings click on the ox _ button To import the cur rent Project file s all the symbols according to the cur rent settings click on the DoFwai button To cancel the import click on the stop _ button Symbol Import Word symbol Line 1 15 ord2 is already defined word symbol Line 11 15word2 3 Replace ta Do not import EX te e Amount of the Symbol data created or imported via the Symbol Editor is 2 not limited However the number of device comment characters is up to 20 e Items with an inappropriate device name are not imported 4 26 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing E Exporting Symbols and Device Comments Data registered via the Symbol Editor is exported and saved as an LBE or CSV file By importing this data the Symbol Editor data can be
116. assigned in WORD 10 if else endif if condition Process 1 else Process 2 endif If the condition is true process 1 is executed If false process 2 is executed E g if w WORD20 lt 5 w WORD10 1 w WORD10 0 endif If the data in WORD20 is smaller than 5 1 is substituted in WORD10 Otherwise 0 is substituted in WORD10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 291 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Ym Application Example 1 In this example we create a program for a temperature management system which checks an error bit in the host Device PLC to detect the temperature 70 or above and 30 or below If an error is found the LT displays alarm messages accordingly This system also counts the detected errors Error bit M0001 Temperature information D200 Error counter 70C or above LS300 Error counter 30C or below LS301 Alarm message screen number storage address LS302 1 From the Special menu select the D script option Special D 5 cript Global D 5cript Data Sampling 2 When the D Script List appears click on the Add button The D Script Editor will appear D Scrpt List O Sccript J D Script Editor Untitled e7 ON fabs ty fet ter 222092 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 3 Enter
117. at the end point of the line ge te When drawing if the Keyboard s key is pressed instead of clicking XV on the mouse right button the start and end points of a polyline object will be automatically connected You can draw a line that looks hand drawn by holding down the mouse s left button when drawing a polyline LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 121 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing ye Square Rectangle To draw a square click on and designate the diagonal two points To draw a regular square perform this operation while holding down the key By selecting a pattern before drawing a filled square also can be drawn Both normal non filled and filled squares can be beveled E Square Attributes Check this check box when draw ing a filled Square Rectangle S quare Rectangle x Displays the Selects the type of ol il currently se Square Rectangle lected Square 9 Solon ae Rectangle type Selects a line border type r es EES JI When selecting Corner this Select a Color and Fo Pe eek number desig blinking if desired 8o iiJIM m e nates the num ber of dots used lt Filled Square Rectangle Setting Screen gt S quare Rectangle 5 I Fil oe Comer 8 Select one of the tiling patterns H MERN AR Fo eee __ Square Shapes and Beveling types Square shapes and beveling types are as shown below Not beveled Al
118. automatically calls up that filled object s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2129 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing Yea Filled Polygon To draw a Polygon either Left click or press the ql key to indicate the Polygon s vertices To complete the Polygon either right click or press the to automatically connect the beginning and end points Holding down the key while drawing a Polygon will snap the polygon s segments to 45 degree angles E Polygon Attributes Filled Polygon Displays the currently Select one of selected Polygon the tiling patterns Sets the Color oes e and blinking if Bg E U E Blk desired E Drawing a Polygon PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Filled Polygon command or click on the icon 2 Set attributes of a polygon to be drawn Select Colors and Tiling Pattern if desired Filled Polygon Fo DN N a ll E Eo p a a _ E 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on the start point a 2 130 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 Left click to designate the positions of the Polygon s vertices Repeat this for as many vertices as needed Here points b and c are also shown 5 After defining the final vertex c right click or press to complete and fill the Polygon P
119. be greater E nter a copy to screen number that is greater than screen number to copy to than the copy from screen number Selected project is the same as current Y ou cannotcopy data within the same projectile Specified address is not used for screen properties that can be displayed System error System file is corrupt System open error System write error Be sure to specify a project fle other than the Current projectile When opening the screen via the Global Cross Reference List designate an address within the valid range of screen addresses The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The fle may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The fle may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The fle may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened and read or the file s data is not correct The fle may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file Appendix 3 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES
120. be reversed when the LCD is in the NORMAL mode LT Series User s Manual e When arranging characters on a tiling pattern the dot patterns of character may overlap with the tiling pattern as the result the characters will not be displayed properly on the LT when the same color is selected for the characters and the tiling pattern In such a case re arrange the characters by displacing the position by dot e When an LT unit is vertically installed the panel s coordinates will differ from those used on the screen editor software Therefore when you enter screen coordinates using tags or D Script please consider the LT s orientation 0 0 on the screen editor software 0 0 on the LT series panel Functions and Settings e Certain functions and settings supported by the LT unit are not supported by the LT Editor program and vice versa Setting and functions set via the LT unit Not by LT Editor Language Font selection LT Date Time settings LT Self Diagnosis Function Functions and settings supported by LT Editor only Not by the LT unit The following settings are included in the LT System Settings area Checksum Verification settings Screen Change Order in hierarchical display mode Screen Change according to standby mode time Shift to OFFLINE mode settings Setting the frequency of Keypad Display processing performed per scanning time LT unit s internal memory LS area
121. capacity pieces blocks of all files 1650 5949 1 640 59136 a Usage priority of backup SRAM 1 Data sampling 2 Trend graph 3 LS Area backup 4 Logging data 5 Filing data SRAM Memory is used starting from item 1 To check the LT s available usage capacity 4 4 1 Project Information e Data in backup SRAM is erased when e The LT s memory is initialized e Data is transmitted e The LT system and protocol are set up e LT s self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area is performed e As the number of Addresses increases the more time is required for writing data to the Device PLC Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe e When data is being written screen displays such as for Parts may not be updated refreshed or may appear slowly Screen changes may also be performed slowly If screens are changed at this time screen data such as for Parts will also be read out and data writing to the Device PLC will be per formed at a slower than normal speed e DO NOT perform any of the following operations at the same time e Data transfer between the LS area and the Device PLC e Data transfer between SRAM and the Device PLC via the File Name Display e Data transfer between SRAM and the Device PLC via the Control Word Address using T
122. changed or the power is turned ON X Operation is not performed right after the screen is changed or the power is turned ON When the timer is operating the timer starts counting right after the screen changes When using Global D Script the operations mentioned above are performed only when the LI s power is turned ON When the LT screen changes however the operation mentioned above will not be performed and the monitor operates using the trigger conditions that have been set When a Global D Script includes a timer the timer starts counting right after the LT s power cord is connected ote Do not use the touch panel key to set the trigger bit or to operate the start bit Nel ina program because the timing of the touch input may not be correct resulting in the bit being improperly entered e When a value is assigned to an address for switching screens while a D Script command is being executed the screen switching operation is pro cessed after all D Scripts have been processed Example ID 00000 Data Format Bin Data Length 16 bits Code No Code Trigger Leading bit b M0000 Processing w WORD10 0 1 w LS0008 30 2 Switches to Base screen No 30 w WORD 11 1 3 w WORD 12 2 4 When the above D Script is executed processing of the screen switching 1s performed after 3 and 4 have been processed 2 226 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5
123. changes via the LT s touch keys 3 Click on the button to quit the simulation During simulation screen data can not be transferred Click on the icon and stop simulation before transferring screen data 4 Click on the button to quit the simulation mode 8 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 PRINTING A printed copy of created screens and Part setting conditions is often useful when debugging This chapter describes the printing proce dure and print settings Dll E E E E Print Settings LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 1 Chapter 9 PRINTING 9 1 Print Settings a Print Settings This section describes the procedure for printing created screens or a list of designated Parts and options available when printing Usage Pattern Project _ Print gt Manager Select the data to be printed from the dialog box Select the appropriate items in the dialog box Specify the printing Click on the range dependingon gt ak button to the selected function Start printing When you select the Project menu Print command the Print screen will be displayed E Printing Print Tab Specify the printer type and other print settings on your personal computer Only Windows compatible printers that can be connected to your personal computer can be used to print with LT Editor for Windows Displays the Displays the printing rel
124. click on the icon 2 Set the Arc s attributes Select Colors and line type 1f desired LI Fo Pelee e MEMME O E 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on the In step 3 if the key is held oval s center point a down you can draw an oval which contacts a specified area 1 e the side s of a square This function is useful when drawing an inscribed circle and can also be used in step 4 together with the key 2 126 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Click on the oval s radius point b In step 4 holding down the Ctrl An oval will appear and the arc s base line will be dis key draws a circular arc played gt 5 Click on the arc s start point c or on its elongation When using the keyboard to draw an arc use the arrow keys to move the cursor first to its center point then to another point on its circum ference radius point and then to its start and end points Press the key after specifying each of these points 6 Click on the arc s end point d The arc will be drawn registered To cancel the drawing action click on the ja icon E d Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set h tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes E Drawing a Pie Sector Follow the same
125. converted object locations or shapes will also be different from the original Conversion from DXF File to Base Screen DXF Screen DXF file data is converted into Base screen data DXF file gt gt Base ahaa Convert E Requirements and Restrictions when Converting Data DXF Screen Grouped objects Blocks can be nested up to 10 layers levels deep The DXF file data format is ASCII Both CR LF and LF can be used as line feed characters and will be converted correctly During conversion when the resulting output file s size reaches 16Kbytes the conversion will quit and subsequent data will not be converted Three dimensional data cannot be converted If the X Y coordinate screen boundaries LIMMIN LIMMAX are not set up correctly in the DXF file after the data created in the DXF file is converted into Base screen data it may go beyond the Base screen s display area LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 261 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e After DXF file data is converted into Base screen data the DXF file name is used as the Base screen s description e When a layer s attribute has been turned OFF that layer s data will not be converted and only ON layer data will be converted into Base screen data e Fill and Oval Arc data cannot be converted E Option DXF Screen Here select and enter the color and si
126. data in Screen Setting will be created 3 24 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen E Converting Placing an Image Effects Specify the brightness resolution blinking compression and mirror func tions for the converted image data Used to set the Convert it to Image Screens brightness and Souce Etec Desimaton displav qualit tise Bers Feds Used to manually auiomaiically janie set the individual options of the brightness and Dithering a m oa d isp ay q ual ity When 256 colors ae Mi Complex Horizontal are selected Blink cannot L Blink Co Compress be selected Ci Brightness Use Default Effects When you specify Use Default Effects the original data will be automati cally converted into the image data with the optimum brightness and display quality Brightness Used to convert bitmap data according to the brightness level The reference value can be changed between levels 0 and 15 A larger value indicates a brighter image and a smaller value indicates a darker image Dithering Used to set the converted data s display quality Blink Used to make the converted data blink Compress Used to compress the original image data during conversion Mirror Used to replace the original image data symmetrically relative to the X axis or Y axis during conversion LT Editor Ver
127. data is reduced In this case Note the displayed screen data may be different from the actual data We recom mend you to use a 100 or larger display area ieee Tool icon Display The Parts tool box tool bar status bar and parts palette can be designated as either shown displayed or not shown not displayed Each time you select the View menu s Screen Data Box Status Bar Zoom Box or Parts Palette as well as the Tool Bar command s Main Edit Draw Op tion Grid Snap Parts Parts State Change or String Table sub commands these View Hide settings will toggle ON or OFF view Option Draw Parts Special Library Window Pata Sapppliing Ligh Parts Ligt load Sepeem List Load Sereen Hestjan Cross Reference List Prey lel Tool Bar w Status Bar w oom Box w Parts Palette w Edit w Draw w Option v Grid Snap w Parts w Parts State Change wv String able LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 25 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help im LT Editor Manuals and Help While you are learning how to use the LT Editor software please refer to the following learning aids Related User Manuals On line Help Topics Tips Screen Digital s Home Page For the help concerning the operation of the Windows operating system see the Windows software s manuals and help screens
128. details see the nextpage s Appendix 2 2 transfer fails The printer does Is the OS s Windows printer seting correct not run hard copy Check the printer setting using the Control Panel s printer property is not printed The desired Did you selectthe required E xternal Device and LT type when installing LT E ditor External Device and Custom Installation LT type are not When customizing the system installation you can selectthe External Device and the LT listed when types Y ou cannotinstall an E xternal Device or a LT type ifithas notbeen selected creating a new previously Re install the system with the desired External Device and LT type project Simulation cannot Possible causes are thatLS area data is being backed up to the LT via the System be performed Setup or thatan LS area S pecial Relay is being used by D S criptstartup bit Ifany of these are true the simulation cannotbe performed Deselectthe 0 ption menu S etings LS Device S imulaton Appendix 18 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 2 Troubleshooting Wye Buzzer will not Stop No Display on the LT Transfer Disabled E Error Pattern by Symptom Buzzer Sound Symptom ProbableCause C ProbableCause Pip pip pip Blank There is no startup program or the startup Continues to heap intermittently or Black program has been corrupted When the LT is beeps every second powered on 2 None Norma
129. displayed The Browser s Part Shapes are stored in a Part File PDB file separate from the main Project File LTE file Searching through different pre made Part files allows you to easily find useful Part Shapes for almost any applica tion Click on a Part number and then the button or double click directly on the Part number to select a Part Shape Browser disappears Part File and Part Shape lists for each file are included in the LT Editor Parts List Manual Shape Browser Clicking here scrolls The ID number of the Part Shape is dis played here Reverse video highlighting indicates it is through the Part Shapes in this file Calls up a list of the selected SW 3DOOS Sw 3D006 Curent POE File c prograrn fles pro face Ipdh pdb p Title S w_3D001 FI other Part files Shows the ID number of the currently selected Part Shape Shows the Path name of the currently open Part File Parts Files Click on the button and a list of the Part files will appear After clicking on a Part File the information displayed will change to reflect that file Next click on the button and the selected PDB File s Part Shapes will appear in the Browser Moves to the next higher Creates a Shows the file directory level new folder eum Displays file open folder EGA wes d detail Voki aed panies AMES s FO 4 301 pdb Op4 scO pdb Lists the Ea Op4 sm1 pa Displays file names names of fa
130. distributor LT distributors will answer to your technical inquiries and provide you with technical consultation Software Trouble Report If you have any question about your personal computer or Microsoft Windows please contact your PC distributor or manufacturer LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 PREFACE E Chapter Breakdown This manual contains 10 chapters and an appendix The following is a general description of each chapter CHAPTER 1 LT EDITOR FUNDAMENTALS This chapter describes the operation of the LT Editor from start to finish It also explains the overall structure of the LT Editor Project Manager Logic Program Editor and Screen Editor areas CHAPTER 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS This chapter describes the basic operations and terminology used for draw ing functions such as Part Library and D Script CHAPTER 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS CREATING AND USING SCREENS This chapter describes the procedures for creating and using various screens such as the M Mark Screen and I Image Library screens which enable you to create high quality images and provide advanced level functionality CHAPTER 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT This chapter describes the procedures for editing and saving created screens and project files and information management procedure CHAPTER 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS This chapter describes the alarm creating and editing procedures
131. enabled for Keypad Input Display The Keypad Input Display that has been touched becomes active and is displayed in reverse video call ing up the pop up keypad for dis play on the screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 75 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Press the Pop up Keypad s Keys to input the desired value When Cancel 1s touched the Pop up Keypad closes without register ing the input value 6 The registered value will then be stored in Word Ad dress D0050 which was designated in KD_1 Then the Pop up Keypad disappears Notes for using Pop up Keypad Do not rotate the Keypad Input Display when you position it Otherwise the Pop up Keypad will not appear in the proper orientation Restictions for using Pop up Keypad e If the trigger bit for the Keypad Input Display is set to ON the Pop up Keypad will not appear e The Pop up Keypad will appear to the right of the Keypad Input Display If there is insufficient space to the right of the Keypad Input Display to display the Pop up Keypad the Keypad automatically appears in a position either above below or to the left of the Keypad Input Display e If there is insufficient space in each of these positions the Keypad will appear in the lower right corner of the screen In this case the Pop up Keypad and the Keypad Input Display may overlap so that you cannot see the input valu
132. four types of commands Drawing Mathematical calculations Boolean operations and Bit operations e Syntax check is available during program creation e Syntax auxiliary function provides a pop up keyboard for address settings to enhance programming efficiency e Programming commands can be entered via icons AN NEVER use the D Script Global D Script function for the control of machines or actions which have Warning the possibility of resulting in either operator injury or damage to equipment e D script and Global D script cannot be registered as Libraries ae an To select Global D Script open any Base screen in advance 2 5 1 D Script Settings D Script can be added edited and deleted on the D Script list D Script is programmed with the D Script Editor For details of the D Script s com mands please refer to 2 5 2 D Script Commands Usage Pattern D Script Add Modify or Coe Jor Special gt or Global gt Delete ie D Script key An example of the D Script dialog box the initial screen is shown below Adds a D Script D Script List D Sccript Deletes a Lists the D registered D Script ID ectpt numbers and Allows you to descriptions edit the con tents of a D Script Copies the contents of a D Script Pastes the copied contents of a D Script 2 200 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE S
133. from a CSV file only the specified type of alarm can be imported from all the registered alarm PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Alarm Editor s Alarm menu Import command 2 Click on the button Alarm Editor Thiz operation may take a very long time for a lange number of messages Continue 3 Select a file ALA or CSV to be imported or Overwrite enter the file name Then specify an import method All current alarm registration num bers 1 to 8999 will be overwrit Open si a Gl lel E ee Add to End Imported messages will be added af ter the last message line If there are any gaps between the current regis tration numbers the sequence num File name bers will be re assigned to fit into Files of type all existing lines and the imported Description Overwrte messages will be added after the last Add to End line di 4 When selecting CSV file as imported file type specify When selectin g ALA file as im the type of alarm to be imported ported file type skip step 4 Only the type of alarm specified here will be imported Open Look in 8 My Documents r A oe Add to End LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 5 15 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 After entering all the necessary items click on the button Kz If the selected Device PLC 1s different between the cur rently open
134. in the clipboard Unlike the Cut com mand the original screen data will not be deleted To copy a Mark into the original screen use the Duplicate command Important PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the original Mark screen to be copied This description assumes that several screens have al ready been opened X 2 Select the Edit menu Copy command or click on the icon to store the mark in the Clipboard 3 Select the Mark screen destination to which the se lected Mark screen will be copied 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Data will be copied from the original Mark screen and pasted onto the destination Mark screen 3 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Copying a Specified Range Duplication A specified range in the Mark drawing area can be duplicated by dots PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Edit menu Duplicate command or click on the icon 2 Specify the copy range in the same manner as draw ing a square rectangle A box appears indicating the specified copy range i Important 3 Move the box to a desired position where the data in If you copy a mark into the the specified ra
135. ing that this Bit Address is turned ON Control word Adress pom YEE Lerman E E perform the next printing E EE Left Margin Designates the left margin size to be used when printing out the data The space for the number of the characters designated here is saved as a blank This setting con trols only the data print area Note For dialog printing settings refer to 9 1 Print Settings For hardware printing settings refer to LT Series User s Manual e When using loop operation and performing real time printing the Total section will not be printed e When using loop operation to perform real time printing if the logging frequency is not very high or a printer has not yet been connected printing cannot be performed at the speed the logging data is created thereby causing a difference between the two Please note that the first cycle s logging data will not be printed out when data logging is performed to the end of a loop cycle and then repeats from the beginning overwriting the existing data LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 41 10 2 Logging E Write to LS Data Logging Settings 4 Perform Data write On Off Control Word Address Write to LS Address Write Complete Bit Address Write Settings T otal Control word Address Write to LS Address Write Comolete Bit Address 10 42 o0 0000 PEE o0 LS0020 FE oovoo0000 Flee 00 0000 gt eee oo LSo020 ae y paa oO
136. into BIGFONT Those written vertically will be converted into TATEGAKI vertical type of BIGFONT e 1 4 sized characters will be all converted into half sized characters e Haltf sized 1 4 sized characters written horizontally will be converted with a relative scale of 1 2 in the X direction and other size characters will be converted with a relative scale of 1 e Both half and full sized characters written vertically will be converted with a scale of 1 for their height and width Therefore the half sized characters will become the same size as the full sized characters e Character types of Bold and Raised will not be converted e Due to font difference and other elements text will be different from the Base screen after conversion Load Mark e The Mark screen will be retrieved from the screen number if that screen exists the dot pattern will be converted into POLYLINE CONTINUOUS Part e Each Part s data will be converted into drawing data 2 210 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion E Converting Base Screen Data to DXF File Data PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down menu Utility s DXF Conver sion command 2 Click on the PRW gt 0xF button M DXF lt gt Screen Converter x DF gt Screen 3 Designate the source Project File and Base screen To designate a folder click on the number and d
137. is correct click on the Save button An Image screen 1s created Image Screen Preview 7 Click on the button to quit the conver sion mode Image Convert Image gt Image Screen conversion completed successtully 3 28 Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS REMARKS The number of colors specified for Screen Color must be equal to the number of display colors supported by your LT series If the number of colors 1s differ ent the display speed will be low ered Any colors that are not supported with your LT series cannot be dis played If the same screen number already exists the system asks if you want to replace the existing screen with the one you are attempting to save If so select f ves otherwise Image Screen Conflict A Do you wish to overwrite existing Screens To cancel conversion click on the Discard button When an image is converted by se lecting the Convert Image com mand from the Draw menu on the Screen Editor pressing the Place button allows the converted image screen to be placed 2 4 18 Convert Im port Image Select the Load Screen command from the Draw menu to place the converted image 2 2 10 Load Screens LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen xww Compressing Decompressing an Image Screen If the size of the Image screen is
138. left side is larger than the right side in the above formula the Parts corresponding to the surplus addresses will be assigned to the final address of the same device 4 17 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE 4 Select the type of screen to be replaced Address Conversion Device Type fet Word Address I Bit Address Before Start Address End Address creen ype Base Screen Window Screen Alan Massage Sampling Data Data Logging Settings Global D Sccript O Serpt Function toner After Start Address cooo ee i Selection Screens From Hh To Line Mo From To e 5 Enter the screen number to be changed Enter the line numbers used in the Alarm Editor All the addresses between the initial screen number and the final screen number or the addresses between the initial line number and the final line number will now be changed Address Conversion Device Type fet Word Address Bit Address Before Start Address End Address Screen Type Base Screen Window Screen Alam Massage Sampling Data im Filing Data Data Logging Settings Global D Script D cript Function re tee After Start Address mco Be 6 After confirming that all the settings are correct click on the Covet button 4 18 Address Conversion Device Type fet Word Address Before Start Address End Address Screen Type Base S
139. lt Element Number gt as a Logic symbol and an array of size 5 ALLM will be represented as below Array variable ALLM 0 ALLM lt Q gt ALLM 1 ALLM lt 1 gt ALLM 2 ALLM 2 gt ALLM 3 ALLM lt 3 gt SX te For details of variables please refer to the Logic Programming Operation 2 Manual or online help E Device Comment Types There are two types of bit device comments the word device comment corresponding to a word address and the bit device comment corresponding to a bit address Word Device Comment Bit Device Comment 4 22 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing E Edit Commands To edit symbols you can use the following commands ll dB Used to delete a symbol s line of data and store it on the clip board The Paste command allows you to then move that symbol to another line amp Used to copy a selected line of data to the clipboard RA Used to insert the line of data temporarily stored on the clip board into the desired row after the Cut Copy command has been performed aca Used to cancel the command previously performed and return to the previous condition However an edited symbol character cannot be restored E Using the Cut Copy Paste Commands Cut Copy Paste commands can be used to move data between different Symbol Editor files To do this simply open another LBE fi
140. menu Change Attribute command the same type objects can be hanged at the same time When or click on the 7 icon caang Grouped Parts have been selected only their addresses can be changed 2 3 15 Chang aa ing Attributes Confirming Ad ee aek dresses 3 Select a new attribute from the dialog box Here a dotted line is selected Fo Pee oo icki ro s m Ko Instead of clicking on the gT icon simply double click on the object 4 Click on the button to register your change When selecting it to display the At tribute Settings dialog box skip quare Rectangle x step 2 E Ori i op olan Cemer Cancel ZZEE Fo Pelee Ko om _ j Je You can reverse the attributes changes only for the most recent change by clicking on the x icon To cancel the attribute changes click on the button in the dialog box GX re You can select more than one object of the same type and change the at X tributes of each at the same time With all the desired objects selected click on the Tool box s button then proceed with step 2 2 3 1 Selecting Objects How to Select Multiple Objects Selecting Objects by Type from a Multiple Selection LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 171 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E Confirming Addresses If a Part that requires an address has been grouped the Confirm Device Address dialog box
141. on the 1 2 4 Saving a button LT Editor saves the updated data If Screen under a Different Name you click on the button LT Editor quits the Screen Editor without saving the updated data Drawing Board D save changes to Screen Untitled 1 16 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish E Quitting LT Editor PROCEDURE 1 Select the Project menu Exit command or click on exit in the Project Manager 2 The Project Manger will quit If you attempt to close the Project Manager without sav ing the currently opened screen s updated data LT Edi tor asks if you wish to save your project s data If you click on the button LT Editor saves the up dated data If you click on the button LT Edi tor quits closes without saving the updated data Saving the screen Drawing Board Do you want to save the changes to C Program Files Pro facesLT databasens Manufacturing System Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals iyey Quitting LT Editor REMARKS When you are working on the Screen Editor or the Logic Program Editor quit the Screen Editor or the Logic Program Editor or select the Project Manager 1 2 4 W Quiting the Screen Editor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 17 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 3 Project Manager im Project Manager All LT Editor system level settings and functions ar
142. project and the imported ALA file the system asks if the preset addresses should be overwritten If the preset addresses must be overwritten select lp they must not be overwritten select Open important Once you complete the Import command it cannot be undone Fle name ann Files of wpe alal ia Cancel Add to End Alarm Editor The source is of a different External Device type than the current project Imported addresses may be invalid Do vou want to continue 6 Click on the Since you selected Add to End in this example the 1m ported messages were added after the last line Processing Alarm Messages Processing Alarm Messages Done 5 16 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing When alarm data does not have an identifier Block for the T first 4 lines which indicate Reserved 1 to 4 the alarm will not Important be imported _ If the address es registered in the alarm data to be imported are incorrect set correct addresses via the Symbol Editor 4 2 6 Symbol Editor When the number of message characters exceeds the limit the message is imported only for the effective number of charac ters When data is imported from a file in which only a message is registered the initial value is used as an address LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 5 17
143. read data may be partially written e Unless data write is completed for the designated number of Addresses screen displays such as tags will not be updated or refreshed e Although this function designates Address es they are not counted as D Script Address es e When writing data to the LS Area with the Memory Set memset function the data can be written only into the User area Data cannot be written into the System Data area LSO000 to LS0019 Special area LS2032 to S2047 or Reserved area LS2048 to LS2095 Zaid LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e When using device addresses for the Assign operation the L write values will not be assigned immediately due to the LT to Important PLC transmission time The addresses entered below are just a few examples The actual address entry varies depending on your PLC type E g memset w D0100 0 10 Initializes D100 to D109 as 0 w D200 w D100 Assigns D100 data to D200 In this case value 0 written to D100 as the operation result has not been assigned to D200 yet e When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Bit Control lt Clear Bit gt Clear Bit clear Changes the specified bit address from 1 to 0
144. rotating angles and the number of lines and columns can be converted lines and columns of the objects over the limit will not be converted their ratio scaling will not be converted The grouped object created in Layer 0 will be converted based on the inserted layer s colors and line types however a grouped object created in an other layer level will not be converted based on the inserted layer s colors and line types In this case if BYBLOCK is specified to the grouped object the inserted layer s colors and line types will be used Simulated object sectioning hatching data cannot be converted since when the Block section s hatching data pattern is converted into each drawing object that data size can exceed the LT file capacity If another file s grouped object has been inserted or another file is re ferred that grouped object will not be converted ATTRIB attribute ATTRIB attribute data is part of INSERT data 2 264 Attribute data will be converted in the same manner as TEXT conversion LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion POLYLINE polyline donut shaped oval polygon rectangle ePOLYLINE data will be converted connecting the following VERTEX s coordinates with a continuous straight line Only data whose polyline flag is either O default 1 closed polyline 2 adding the fit curve ver tex or 4
145. screen Edi View Option Draw Tags Pars Special Library Window Help JE co l from one 8 dot unit to another You SHPal elQale oie fo SB Blo DGBSoRK i 00o ani e e aN w neil pora F can set up the Y coordinates any TANE T where you wish 4 Save the Window Screen U Select the Save As command from the Screen menu or click 2 Project File Plant 1 screen Type Window Screen i Screen 300 Description Bar Graph Enter the Screen Number and Title Click the button 5 Open the Base Screen such as B2 to be used for the window display 6 Select Window Parts from the Parts menu or click EA Joz LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 3 Window Display Window U Screen 7 Select the window to be displayed from the Win dow Number field Specify the Window Control Address as well e The address to be entered varies depending on DAN your LT and PLC type Note that the sample screen in this manual is just one example 8 Click the Place button after setting all attributes The border of the window area is displayed on the draw PROCEDURE Window Parts Setting WOOT General Settings Description Window Humber E Window Control Address SL HE Bit ON OFF Mit Display Order Fae J coe ee ing area 9 Click on t
146. screen s Y axis border that portion will not be displayed on the LT screen When the Image screen is placed over the Base screen laterally however any part that extends over the Base screen X axis border will be squeezed onto the LT screen i e not cut When using LT Editor When using the LT Example panel display Drawing Areas LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 139 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing E Nesting Screens can be nested up to 10 times 11 layers However if your PC s system memory is low a loaded screen object may not be displayed Later however when the data is transferred to the LT the display will appear normally E g Nesting Objects Twice 3 layers B100 B10 B1 C c o D o Do g i c 6 Load Screen B100 Load Screen B10 e The load screen nesting condition can be viewed via the load screen nesting XVX display function 2 7 9 Display at Screen Level Change Structure E Loading a Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Load Screen command or click on the icon 2 Select a desired screen from the list or enter that Only screens in the currently used screen s number directly on the Screen No field via Project file can be loaded Screens the keyboard and then click on the button in other project files can not be Then the screen s outline and center point will appear in loaded the drawing area next to your cursor
147. service marks of their respective companies This product omits individual descriptions of each of these rights Trademark Trade Name Right Holder Microsoft MS MS DOS Windows Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me Windows NT Niece E EE E Windows 2000 Windows XP Windows P Explorer Microsoft Excel 95 ntel Pentium Intel Corporation USA Digital Electronics Corporation Pro face Flex Network P in Japan and other countries Ethernet Western Digital Electric Corporation USA IBM VGA PC AT te aul Business Machines Corporation IBM USA The following terms differ from the above mentioned formal trade names and trademarks icrosoft Windows 2000 Operating System Windows 2000 M Windows XP Microsoft Windows XP Operating System S DOS Microsoft MS DOS Operating System Windows NT Microsoft Windows NT Operating System LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE Version Upgrade Information The LT Editor Ver 2 0 features a range of new functions upgraded from the LT Editor Ver 1 0 including Multi language Display function Extended Function of Keypad Input Display and Parts Palette function The following briefly describes each function Parts Palette The parts are displayed in a palette on the Screen Editor The desired part can be set up on the screen simply by selecting it from the Parts Palette and positioning it at the desired point using the drag am
148. setup mode Displays the currently specified destination type Displays the current Displays the Displays the Displays the status of the data current project s transfer prepara progress of the data transfer operation comment data tion status transfer operation The tool bar icons provide the following functions Send screen data Cancel l and logic pro Transfer Quit Transfer Tool T h e Send logic Receive screen Transfer Setting program only data from LT unit Do not turn OFF the PC or the LT unit nor disconnect the trans L fer cable during the transfer of screen data This can cause an important error when the LT is started LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 3 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 7 4 IFAD Transfer Settings This section describes the parameter settings necessary for screen data transfer between your personal computer and the LT unit These parameters must be reset if your personal computer has been disconnected from the LT unit if the LT unit has been shut down or if a nonstandard system or proto col program has been used with the LT unit E Transfer Settings Select the Setup menu Transfer Settings command or click on the icon Then a dialog box to perform data transfer settings will appear Specify the kind of information to Select the PC serial transfer with the ae port that will be used screen data p fen
149. shared among Projects Rate Logic symbols cannot be imported with the Symbol Editor PROCEDURE REMARKS Export symbol data To export a device comment select the Export Device Comment 1 Via the Symbol Editor select the File menu Ex command port Symbol command or click on the icon 2 Specify the name and type LBE or CSV of the file to save the exported data with and click on the save button If the same file name already exists the system asks if the existing file must be overwritten If it must be over written select If you do not wish to over write it select Linel word LBE File name Line word Save N ancel Save as type LBE Files LBE i C V Export symbol 2 File already exists A Okay to replace Yes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 27 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Calling up Device Comments All the comments that have already been registered with Parts can be called up on the Symbol Editor as device comments For addresses corresponding to each Part s comment refer to the Input Description Address Table 2 3 8 Duplication PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the File menu Get Device Comment From Project TAT 2 Select a device comment calling up method and click Multiple addresses may be onthe oK button given to a Part depending on its type In this case device comments
150. shown below will appear whenever its attributes are changed the Part addresses are changed here Allows you to view either the Bit or Word Addresses of all the Parts in the currently selected group of objects Confirm Device Address Part Addresses are displayed here Parts Name Part ID Description Check this box to automatically change all the addresses of the Parts in this group that have the same Device Address Address Each Part s address 1s displayed To change an address click on the inside of each cell As shown above any Switches selected that have state changes will have both their Operation Bit and their Monitor Bit addresses displayed Address Range Conversion ot ote NG 2 172 When an address is changed and this check box is checked any other Part with the same device address will be automatically changed The address conversion is not performed in the case of symbol Logic symbol In the example above if the first bit address is changed from X00000 to X00010 the following bit addresses will be changed as below Confirm Device Address Bit Address Address Function Parts Name Part ID Description Clicking on any cell other than the changed one will show the changed address LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yey Changing Coordinates Object positions and sizes can be changed by
151. specified display Direction The latest data is always displayed at the very limit in this example the right side of the Trend Graph s display area E g Display direction Right ALAN Begin Display E Block Display Mode All the data in consecutive word addresses are sampled at the designated time then graphed as a single trend line Data changes in multiple word addresses can be monitored as a single block by the graph Enter address numbers to control the ON OFF display of the graph Status 1 Status 2 Status 1 Status 3 displays deletes displays clears old the graph the graph the graph graph and displays Control Status address for controlling display new one 2 Number of address data to display 22 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS To perform Block Display keep the areas for the number of addresses specified below beginning from the specified Word Address E Block Display Word Address The LS Area from LS0020 or the PLC Word Address is specified There is speed difference between when the LS Area is used and when the PLC Word Address is used Refer to the following When using the LS Area When specifying the LS Area designate Read Area Size The Read Area constantly reads out data from the external device to the LT regardless of screen display status For Block Display Control Data Count and
152. sssssssssssssecceeccssossssssssosoo Software Trouble Report LT Editor Ver 1 0 Operation Manual Appendix 1 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES ay Error Messages E Project Manager Errors This section describes error messages that will be displayed during operation of the LT Editor and how to solve these problems If malfunction still occurs after the measure is taken describe the problem in the attached Software Trouble Report and send it to us by facsimile Cause S olution an Because of the change in PLC type a part of This warning message is displayed every tme an the device address used in the project may atemptis made to change the Device PLC type be converted into a device address that and addresses Double check all device cannot be used with the current PLC addresses used in the projectand modify as Double check all device addresses used in necessary the project and modify them as required C Can t edit Insufficient memory The memory area for editing is insufficient Quit other applicatons then begin editng your file again Cannot edit the files because the filing mode When the fling mode setings Use Multple Use Multiple Folders setting is not Folders was notselected you attempted to open selected Click on Use Multiple Folders 2 or more kinds of filing data directly from the Project M anager having nesting screen display by double clicking S elect Use M ultple Folders Cannot start up In
153. tab specify the display settings If necessary select a clear color in the Color tab Logging Display LG_001 x General Settings Data Type Color Switch Setting Switch Shape Color Enter 7 Border Type Row 7 M Column oF Spacing Enter 4 Ce De ID 2 1 Parts REMARKS 2 1 13 Data Logging Display General Set tings Attributes Block Number Address 2 92 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Switch Settings tab select the function switch type that is to be placed automatically and specify the number of rows columns scrolled If necessary select a color for the special switch in the Switch Shape Color tab Logging display LG_001 General Settings Data type Color Switch setting Switch Shape Color Select Place Switch T Up TF Down I Right I Left 5 After entering and selecting all the attributes click To cancel the placement click on on the button the a icon The border of the Data Logging Display size will be dis played in the drawing area 6 Click on the point where the function switch will be placed The Data Logging Displays are grouped To change any attribute ungroup the Data Logging Displays by clicking on the icon before hand 2 3 13 Group Ungroup If you double click on the function switch placed on the screen the ad ee ee ee ee dr
154. the Paste command from screen editor while a copied image is in the clipboard will display the Paste Image dialog box on the screen The Source tab will not be displayed on the screen When images cannot be pasted with this procedure convert the images into bitmap files or JPEG files with other image processing software before copying and pasting it to the screen editor The clipboard is a storage location where copied or cut data is temporarily stored The data stored on the clipboard can be copied or moved by pasting it 2 176 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS rA Transferring a Screen to the Clipboard The current screen is transferred as an image to the clipboard The trans ferred screen can be utilized by pasting it to other drawing software The screen types that can be transferred to the clipboard are the Base B screen Mark M screen and Window U screen E Transferring a Screen to the Clipboard PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Screen to clipboard command from the Edit menu The current screen will be transferred to the clipboard 2 Paste the screen to other drawing software a untitled Paint File Edit View Image Colors Help Culi EH Capu Ltj lE Paste Cr Clay Selection Del Select All Ctrl 4 Cope a Paste From An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied ar
155. the 6 SW_3D004 ON 5 SW_3D005 ON 3 SW_3D006 OFF 10 SW_3D006 0 sedan item s registra tion number and title Status Bar 2 182 11 SW_3D007 OF 12 SW_3D007 ON 13 Sw_3D008 OF 14 Sw_3D008 ON 15 SW_3D009 OF LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Editing Library Items Three Library Item editing functions are available F Cuts a Library item which is then moved to the Clipboard the d Library item can then be moved to another screen using the Paste function Copies the selected Library item to the Clipboard Pastes the Library item Cut or Copied and temporarily stored in the Clipboard to another screen The Library item can also be Pasted to another Library file You can remove a Library item using the Delete function To do so select the Delete command from the Library dialog box s pull down Edit menu 2 4 3 Editing Library Items E Changing the Library s Display The Library s image display size and type can be changed Also you can change from one Library file to another Library Size When either the gi a 1 or a icon is clicked on or the pull down View menu s either Normal Adjust to Fit or Full Screen command is selected and the Library display size can be changed When Normal is selected each Library size will be displayed relatively allowing you to check the relationship
156. the beginning When logging data Is cleared the LT turns the Data Clear Bit Address OFF 10 30 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging ye Logging Data Read Timing R re e All the charts shown above are the basic image of LT s logging data read NY timing They do not show the exact time intervals of logging data read e If a communication error occurs during logging data read is displayed on the Logging Display representing that there is no data E When designating a Bit Address Logging data is read only one time for each trigger When designating a Bit logging data is read out if the Device PLC Trigger Bit has been turned ON when the main power is turned ON Trigger BitAddress External Device to LT Pa x LT ACK BitAddress LT to External Device Data Read Logging data read External Device to LT 1 Data is set to the Device PLC Word Address 2 The Device PLC Trigger Bit Address is turned ON 3 The logging data is read out one time 4 The LT_ACK Bit Address is turned ON 5 Device PLC detects the LT_ACK Bit Address is turned ON and the Device PLC Trigger Bit Address is turned OFF 6 LT detects the Device PLC Trigger Bit Address is turned OFF and the LT_ACK Bit Address is turned OFF 7 The Device PLC confirms that the LT_ACK Bit Address is turned OFF Prior to performing steps 1 and 2 with the Device PLC be sur
157. the image data you must use the original file and then convert this file into Image screen data The Image screens can be checked on the screen list 4 1 1 Listing Copying Deleting Screens e This command can convert image data of up to 800 x 600 dots Note that any portion that does not fit into the LT screen will be cut off before conver sion EAD Image Conversion Convert image data bitmap BMP file and JPEG JPG file created with other editor software or read with an image scanner into an Image I screen for the LT series 2 it 16 a 256 is 16 bit 24 bit Number of colors black amp gray gray color color cian Windows BMP DIB Windows BMP DIB See BMP DIB RLE4 BMP RLE8 JEG JPG With a color Image screen when the data volume becomes large the LT series display speed is increased With a monochrome Image screen the LT series display speed is slightly lowered but the data volume can be re duced Select a color or monochrome Image screen according to your pur pose If the data volume is too large to be displayed on one screen the converted data will be divided into several screens up to nine screens of 50 Kbytes each LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 323 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS A Compressed BMP files cannot be converted Make sure that the original image data s longitudinal dimension
158. the number of scale divisions If Linear is selected as the type select the orientation direction by clicking on the Vertical check box x Type Divisions 2 Curved a Diner K Vertical as See eee Fo eee Ba eee ek 2 132 Saas H oo eK Enter the number of divisions desired x Displays the cur rently selected object s image Only with straight line Scales Changes the scale s orienta tion to vertical default is horizontal Select the Color and blinking if desired REMARKS lt Number of Divisions gt When the number of the divisions is specified as 8 a total of 9 divi sion lives will be displayed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS The following explanation is divided into two parts first when creating a linear type scale and second when creating a curved type scale Creating a Linear type scale Vertical with 8 divi sions Specify the area of division lines by a rectangle 3 Use the mouse s cursor to create a rectangle in the drawing area i e left click to indicate the linear scale s start point a 4 Complete the rectangle by left clicking on the Scale s Holding down the key while end point b performing step 4 will draw a per The rectangle shape will disappear and be replaced by fect square division lines When using the keyboard to per
159. there is data the graph does not display When 2 is entered to the Control Status word bit O1 turns ON and the new graph display is cleared When clearing then displaying the graph again Word address Display again 3 Contol Status o 02 ol Bit Clears the previous 16 Control Status PESENE graph display then uses the current data to display the graph again When 3 is entered to the Control Status word both bits 00 and 01 turn ON and after the graph display is cleared the current data is used to display the graph again Data Samples Data Samples The number of data units to be displayed in a single Trend Graph Up to 638 can be used Scroll The number of data units to be scrolled when the polygonal line reaches the limit of the Trend Graph s display area The field is enabled when the graph type is set to Normal Sampling Time The data read interval from the host Device PLC is input in seconds The field 1s enabled when the graph type is designated as Normal or Pen Recorder This option cannot be specified when the graph type is designated as Block 2 56 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Display Direction Select the Trend Graph s display direction either Up Left Down or Right Ge te If Display Direction is changed for a 3D part its shade is rotated along with that part To l
160. to be imported Enter the correct value s Data is larger than designated data range Data from outside the Filing Data s range is Please check the data settings present Check the designated data range settings and change them ifnecessary Exceeds folder addition limit Up to 64 folders can be stored in the internal memory and up to 8999 folders can be stored in the CF card Any folder cannotbe added because the number of folders will exceed the limit Intemal memory is not sufficient to save data The current setings will overfow the LT s Please reduce the block or data settings memory Please reduce either the block or data setings Please enter a Block name Nothing has been entered for the Filing Data s Block data P lease enter a name The currently selected data range exceeds P lease reduce either the amount of data copied or the maximum amount allowed Paste cannot the number of blocks copied be performed W When using 32 bit data settings the When using 16 bit data up to 40 items can be A maximum number of data items is 20 OK to used with 32 bits maximum is 20 Be sure the delete items over 20 data type fts your data needs LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 15 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES sin Data Errors Cause Solution Address Entry limit reached No enna lalla Character size is too iarge Please use ajDesignated character is larger than LT fT Cananea tracer
161. to create other tables 11 Select the File menu Save command or click on Up to 16 tables can be registered the icon to save the setting 4 54 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings E Importing Exporting CSV files You can export the contents of a table created using the Table Editor as a CSV file or you can import a CSV file created using another table editor software into the Table Editor To edit data exported into a CSV file or edit data that has been L previously exported use an operating system that supports Important the font specified in Font setting of Table Editor Character Strings Importing CSV files Select the File menu Import command Use the following dialog box to select the desired file e When a CSV file is imported the existing index character string is overwritten e When Characters Lines is selected If the imported Characters x Lines of the CSV file setting values are lower less than the index character string values set in the Table Editor any excess remaining characters in the Table Editor will be deleted during import e When Characters Lines is not selected If the imported CSV file s setting values are higher greater than the index character string values set in the Table Editor any excess characters in the imported data will be deleted during import Important
162. transmission s Control Word Address D00200 is turned ON all the filing data is written to SRAM Trigger Bit Address a 1 to D00200 OFF Write Completed Bit Address ae ee M0001 OFF 1 SRAM gt Device PLC When the 0 Bit of the data transmission s Control Word Address D00201 is turned ON the designated filing data is written to the Device PLC To designate filing data prior to transferring filing data a file number is stored in D00202 and a block number is stored in D00203 directly follow ing the Control Word Address Trigger Bit Address on 1 to D00201 OFF Write Completed Bit Address a ee ee M0002 OFF 1 pane PIOGe se lt more Y written into PLC s D00100 to D00102 D00201 D00202 D00203 0 3 J 55 202 30 J 56 6 D00100 62 D00101 Transfer D00102 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe ime Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 The following explains how to transfer data by selecting the desired screen setting Manual Transmission 1 The same filing data as in 10 1 4 Automatic Filing Data Transmission is used E Screen Example In this example data from File No 1 s Block No 3 is sent by touching the LT screen 21 g TS SRAM DEV DEV SRAN E Filing Setting Example When Device PLC Controlled Transfer is not checked manual transf
163. used Displays the currently for drawing selected dot s image i 2Dots i Dots ta SDots Fo O90 Kn Select colors and blink ing if desired LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 119 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing E Creating a Dot PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Dot command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of a dot to be drawn Select a dot type and colors if desired Dot type fe 1Dot i 2Dots i Dots i SDots Fo OOO Ko 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area A dot will be When using the keyboard to draw drawn at the point clicked on a dot move the cursor to the de sired point and press the J key To cancel delete the dot click on the a icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s Attribute Set tings dialog box 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 2 2 Line Poly line In order to draw a line simply click to designate the line s start and end points A continuous straight line can also be drawn holding down the key allows you to draw lines at precisely 0 45 or 90 angles E Line Polyline Attributes When drawing a polyline check this box Lx Selects a line type imal with or without arrows The currently selected line s image appears l here Selects a line type Fo Oe E JE Pee ko Select a color a
164. will be called up for all the as signed addresses Overwrite The device comment is called up after the already assigned address is deleted Merge The device comment is called up in addition to the already assigned address Get Comment File From Project Save Options f Overvrite i Merge Hl Include Alarm Files a To call up an alarm message from the Alarm Editor mark the Include Alarm Files check box 4 28 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing wee Changing a Project s LT Type AN You can change the LT type of your current project Note After changing the LT type you can save the current project using the DN Project menu Save As command 1 2 2 E Saving a Project Under a Different Name PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Change Display Type command porns The drawing area com OO mands and memory used by a this change will vary de Tobba Portai 5 pending on the selected LT type Be sure to check these items before changing the LT type to be sure that your change s will be compatible with your existing project s data Type CY peL Portrait Display Type Typed When a vertical type LT unit is replaced with a horizontal type or l vice versa the displaye
165. 0 is smaller than 8 ON False OFF LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2229 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script rA Bit Operation Examples E This section gives examples of bit operations w WORD20 lt lt 4 Result The data in WORD 20 is shifted 4 bits to the left w WORD20 gt gt 4 Result The data in WORD 20 is shifted 4 bits to the right 12 0000Ch is stored in D301 using the BIN format w WORD20 w WORD30 gt gt w WORD31 Result The data in WORD30 is shifted 12 bits to the right and assigned to WORD20 Bit AND 0 amp O Result O QO amp I Result O 1 amp l Result 1 0x1234 amp OxFOFO Result 0x1030 BitOR 010 Result O Oll Result 1 1 1 Result 1 Ox 1234 0x9999 Result Ox9BBD Bit XOR 0 0 Result O 0 1 Result 1 1 1 Result O Bit One s complement NOT When the data format is Bin16 O0 Result Ox FFFF Result OxFFFE 2 230 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 7 Conditional Branches E Control Branches Using if endif and if else endif if endif if condition Process 1 endif If the condition is true process 1 is executed If false process 1 is ignored E g if w WORD20 lt 5 w WORD10 1 endif If the data in WORD 20 is smaller than 5 1 is
166. 00000 I EEE s 1 asain ie Write Completed Bit Address M00001 Write Completed Bit Address ov ecooooooo prer ice PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings A caiaiane Device PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Cono wordaddess pe EE Transmission Setting Transmit Completed Bit Address Jarco E EE Device PLC Controlled Transfer Not selected 10 22 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe E Filing Name Display Settings When manual data transmission is performed you must place the Filing Name Display 2 1 12 Filing Name Display General Settings File Display FD_OO1 Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Transfer Completed Bit Address 01 c000000 FE Display File Display FD_001 Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchT ype Color Ir No of Display Lines 5 r No of Display Characters 15 J Direct Selection Jil Cursor Position Contro Description Heat Control Use LS Area Use LS Area Selected Filing data 1s first transferred to the LT s LS area before being transferred to the Device PLC While filing data is being transferred from SRAM to LS and LS to SRAM the LT internal special relay LS2032 s bit 11 will be turned ON Device PLC Transfer Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Not Selected Enables disables the Transfer Com pleted Bit setting ID No 0 In this example wh
167. 000000 Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Write Settings When Writing to LS Area Stores logging data in the LS area Dis plays logging data items in combina tion with Keypad Display Perform Data Write On Off Although all logging data can be dis played at a single time via the display settings using the LS Area allows each piece of logging data to be displayed separately together with Keypad Dis play Click on this check box to use this setting Control Word Address Designate a Word Address that is the trigger or mode change for writing data to the LS Area This Trigger Bit is turned ON or OFF by the Device PLC When writing backup SRAM logging data to the LS area logging data trans fer 1s performed by designating a Block No when using loop operation set to 0 and turning the Trigger Bit OFF and then ON 10 Reservation All OFF p Block No Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted Control Word 0 1 Write to LS Address Designates the LS Area Address where data is written to Write Complete Bit Address Designates the Bit Address that will be turned ON when data write to the LS Area is completed After turning the Bit Address ON is detected use the Device PLC to turn it OFF When there is no designated Block No the Perform Data Write Bit Address is not turned ON LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging Write Se
168. 01 General Settings Display Format ShapeyColor Alarm Settings Description word Address Enter D00100 2 96 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Part Select If desired set an Alarm and Colors from the Alarm Set ing a Part Shape tings and Shape Color area Shape Browser CEE ND 30002 ND 3D003 ND 3D004 ND 3D005 ND_3D006 jFj Pars Fie Current PDE File o program files pro faceitypdb pdb p Tite ND_ 30001 F vee 4 In the Display Format area specify the Data Dis play Format and input the No of Display Digits and the Decimal Places Specify the Character Size if desired Numeric Display Settings ND_O01 General Settings Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings E nter 1 0 Data Display Format jm radia No of Display Digits p 16 Bit 32 Bit Decimal Places 2 A E nte r 2 i Decimal Decimal Character Size i Hex t3 Hex R16 Fi CypcD yBCD 9 Octal Select 32 bit Decimal fe Shift Right JF Zero Suppress iA Shift Left J Zer Display 5 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Numeric Display s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 97 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Par
169. 03 Operation Example Pressing the SETUP and OK keys in that order turns the RUNNING lamp ON The host PLC uses M0003 as the trigger bit Program Example Trigger b M0002 Execution if b M0001 amp b M0002 bit set set b M0003 else bit clear clear b M0003 clear b M0002 endif 2 234 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 6 Data Sampling Yas Data Sampling Designated address data is sampled and stored backed up in the LT unit When using this function for a graph Part s channel Trend graph data can also be stored backed up Up to 20 sets of Data Sampling can be entered including the number of channels the setting attributes can also be confirmed in the Data Sampling Settings of the View menu 2 7 6 Data Sampling List E Overview e The specified Word Address data is sampled each specified time or with a desired time cycle and stored it into the LS Area via the trigger bit e Data can be sampled per word and data for up to 640 words can be stored in series e Sampled data can now be backed up The backed up data can be stored in the LS Area via the Trigger Bit e Decide a channel name for each piece of sampling data e The number of channels that can be set is up to 20 for the entire system including trend graph channels When more than 20 channels are set channels
170. 2 Email proface proface com tw e Pro face America North and South FAX No 1 630 351 1102 Email support profaceamerica com Digital Japan FAX and Email Information e Digital Electronics Corporation FAX No 81 6 6613 5982 Email support digital co jp Also if you require instruction about the correct usage of your LT Editor software please use the above information to contact your local LT Editor distributor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 29 Appendix 4 Software Trouble Report APPENDICES Software Trouble Report Company name Department TEL Your name FAX Company Address Software SerialNo _ J We cannot respond to any questions without your software s serial number Software name LT Editor Other Ver Your LT model Type of Device PLC PC Manufacturer Model Printer Manufacturer Model Driver version Describe the details and how to reproduce each problem Also please include a list of any related documents Prepare one report sheet for each problem Error message details This area is for Pro face use only Processed by Received by Appendix 30 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide index INDEX Adding Alarm Data 5 9 Address Conversion Table List 19 Address Increment 2 137 Address Map Display 2 226 Address Range Conversion 2 148 Address Registration 8 6 Alarm Style Color Att
171. 2 displays on the Semicircle Graph When data 34 22h is stored in D00102 the Half Pie graph will appear as follows PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Half Pie Graph command or click on the am icon 2 In the General Settings area input the Word Ad dress and Data Format Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Calor Alarm Settings E nter D001 02 ipti Descri tion 3 Absolute 9 Relative Word Address E z Gen Select BCD i BCD im Display Mode 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser You can also use the Alarm Settings area to enter Alarm settings and select Colors if desired 2 1 Parts Se lecting a Part Shape Shape Browser HG_3D001 HG 3D002 HG 30003 HG 30004 lf PatsFie Current POB File c program files pro face stypdb Title HG_ 30001 al Hep 2 44 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Graph Settings tab input the number of axis The area to enter the number of the divisions divisions will appear only for a Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 graph type which has axis divi General Settings Graph Settings ShapeColor Alarm Settings sions Display Direction i Clachuise E n ter 1 0 5 After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected cl
172. 27 mA Display of Screen Level Change Structure The nesting of Load Screens that have been set up on the currently edited screen is displayed In this way a multiple nesting condition can be viewed 2 2 10 Nesting Select the View menu Load Screen Nesting Display command Load Screen Nesting Each screen will be displayed via the following symbols Screen Type Symbol Basescreen B8 magescreen Window screen 2 260 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion 2 8 DXF Conversion This feature allows you to convert DXF Drawing Interchange File file data into Base screen data and to convert Base screen data into DXF file data A DXF file is on Auto Cad drawing file Important 2 8 1 DXF filenames must be alphanumeric DXF can be used for the Release 12 program If a newer version s data is used that data will not be converted When each object s coordinates are converted errors may occur thereby slightly changing them Once a DXF file data is converted into Base screen data even if the Base screen Is again converted back into the original DXF file or vice versa the resulting data my be unusable When converting data be sure that the screen s width and height ratio will be the same for both the Base screen and the DXF file Screen size settings LIMMAX LIMMIN If this ratio is different after data is
173. 4 S E i 15 Changes Telte haz Ci Link Seect z Change Order r Doui MBE Ready Cs Ce 1 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish E Saving a Screen PROCEDURE 1 Select the Screen menu Save command or click on in the Screen Editor The current screen will be saved overwriting the previ ous one Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals REMARKS After the screen is saved it will re main open When you attempt to save a new screen the Save As dialog box will appear 1 2 4 Saving a Screen under a Different Name E Saving a Screen under a Different Name PROCEDURE 1 Select the Screen menu Save As command in the Screen Editor 2 The type number and title of the current screen is displayed You can change the setting of a desired item however the screen s type cannot be changed Project File Manufacturing Systern tte Screen Type Base Screen Screen Descriptions Operation Monitor Operation Monitor Aggregate Summary Trouble Keyboard Input Cancel 3 Click on the button to register the above settings If a screen with the same number exists the system asks if you want to replace the existing screen with the screen you are attempting to save If so click on the button If you do not wish to overwrite the existing screen click on the but ton Screen Already Exists Do you wi
174. 7 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 41 4 3 Project Compression Decompression Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the button If the same file name already exists the system asks if The compressed project file will be the existing file must be overwritten If you select stored in the same folder as the the existing file will be overwritten If you original project file select the existing file will not be overwrit ten and you will return to the previous dialog box Pack Project File File Hame O Prograrm Files Pro face LT database Browse Separate File 1 44 ME ia iN File C Program Files Pro faceLT databaser Manufacturing System OLT already exists Okay bo overyrite this file 6 Select the Action menu Exit command or click on the icon 4 42 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 Project Compression Decompression 4 3 2 Decompressing a Project File A compressed project file OLT file cannot be edited To edit the com pressed project file you must first decompress it i UnPack Packed File Enter the file name of the project file to be decompressed or select the desired file name from the list by clicking on the Browse button Used to locate the project file to be decompressed Cancel PROCEDURE REMARKS 1
175. 7 In the case of LT Type C if the LT is not connected to the exter m nal device when the screen data are transferred to the LT and Important the Change State function is set to Yes bit switches toggle switches lamps and objects will not be displayed on the LT panel after data transfer PROCEDURE 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the i icon Oth erwise via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Transfer menu Send command or click on the icon If the currently open Project File has not been prepared for data transfer the Project File has not been compiled then the system automatically compiles the Project File before transferring it to the LT unit To transfer a screen to the LT unit for the first time set up the LT unit first and then transfer the screen data The number of screens transferred is displayed in Trans fer Status If the external device designated in the project file to be transferred is different from the LT s existing internal data the following message will appear When you click on the button the system starts setup opera tion and then transfers the screen data Protocol Download l External Device type is Different OK to Continue Sending All Files After set up is completed the LT panel screen is automati cally switched to the OFF LINE mode
176. 7 J7 Series e Yokogawa M amp C UT100 Series e Matsushita Electric Industrial MINAS A S Series e RKC Instrument CB REX F LE100 Series e SHIMADEN SR253 SR90 SR80 MR13 FP93 SD16 EM70 Series PLC Manual LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE MANUAL SYMBOLS AND TERMINOLOGY This manual uses the following symbols and terminology E Safety Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and terms to identify important information related to the correct and safe operation of this product Symbol Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that could result in serious injury A N or death WARNING AE A N equipment damage CAUTION Indicates a potentially damaging action or dangerous situation that could F Careful correct product use A E General Information Symbols and Terms This manual uses the following symbols and terms for general information Symbol Provides hints on correct product use or supplementary information Indicates an item s related information manual name page number Refers to keys on the computer keyboard m Keyboard Compatibility List Indicates an external device temperature controller inverter etc connected via serial communications Does notinclude External Device devices connected via the F lex Network or DIO Generic name for the LT Graphic Logic Controller made by Digital Electronics Corporation Indicates LT Ver
177. 8 bits 00 to 02 are used E Message Display Messages Attributes Operation Mode example When using Word Address Select the text type for the message entry Enter the number of messages states here Enter the maxi mum number of characters only when Direct Text is selected The state indica tion buttons appear according to the No of Messages 2 100 Enter the message s text here Deletes the currently selected message and specifies the message and its color as unde fined Hessage Display Settings M4 _001 ot EDs d ata pelected Message Delete Bigi gfi EL we Direct wale Mo of Mersages Display Characters DZ Undefine l m e nei woa Ht Copies all the of f2fa S characters in aa the Selected i Raised Message field Test Color IZ a O a E e ioallslales Plate Color B iim jC ek oO only when B Direct Text is Pisce cancel He N selected Select the message s display Color opies the char acters in the Description field to the Selected Message field only when Direct Text is selected Select the Character Type LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Direct The text entered in the Selected Message field is placed directly as fixed character strings The message is displayed in a single line Up to 16 types of messages can be displayed in each Message Display
178. ATING BASE SCREENS Za Turning the Snap function ON or OFF can also be performed via the Grid Snap Tool Bar s icons DFR and DHII S P Ti ai Spacing The Grid Point intervals are entered here The unit is a dot Input the interval value for the X and Y axes respectively The default value is 20 dots When clicking on Touch Area a 20 x 20 dot spacing will be automatically designated which is most suitable for the touch panel Select a desired grid pattern in Spacing and click on the button Then the selected grid pattern will be reflected to the current screen and will also be displayed as the 6th selection of the Grid Tool Bar s grid pattern selection list Grid Spacing List Clicking on the Change button changes Grid Spacing List s highlighted set value to Spacing s set value and registers it The grid patterns registered here will be displayed on the Grid Tool Bar s grid pattern selection list box A grid pattern selected from the grid pattern selection list box will be reflected to the current screen Grid Shift Start Point The Grid Shift Start Point is entered here The default setting has the start point in the center of the screen Pressing the button returns the start point to the center of the screen Grid Shift Start Point x po 2 242 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Style Sele
179. Address Conversion Start Address Start Address oT COO000 ee mco Ee End Address mco eee Screen Type Screen Range Base Screen ih All Window Screen Selection Alarm Massage Screens From ao ji Sampling Data To Filing Data z LineNo From aof Data Logging Settings Global D 5 cript D Sccript Function To 3 Enter the address conversion range and the updated initial address Before this step is performed be sure that the first and last device codes used are the same You cannot specify an address conversion range for a different device Address Conversion art Address Base Screen Window Screen Alarm Massage Sampling Data Filing Data Data Logging Settings Global D 5 cript D Sccript Function e LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS In word address conversion mode Part addresses specified by a bit ad dress can also be changed within a specified range When using any of the following External Devices specify the De vice PLC number as well FACTORY ACE 1 n communica tion Yokogawa Electric Corp SDC Series Yamatake Electric Corp THERMAC NEO series OMRON When converting addresses be sure that the address settings meet the following condition Final address before conver sion Initial address before conversion lt Final address af ter conversion Initial ad dress after conversion If the
180. CED FEATURES 10 2 Logging E Display Data Logging ae x Display ON OFF Trigger Settinge Display write Settings A P n Click on this check box to display data Column Settings 1 1 1 _ JF Display Block Name JF Display Block Name oe the Logging Display OF when aay No of Block Hame Rows No of Char ltem Ing data to a CF Card No of Data Rows No of Data Col No of Calc Rows ih Row Settings Data Char Size 6x16 rr Mo of Char Diata Preview Display Block Name Check this check box to display data together with its Block Name No of Block Name Rows Enter a value here to display block names in multiple rows Up to 3 rows can be set up No of Data Rows Set up the number of rows in the data display area No of Calc Rows Set up the number of rows in the calcu lation area Up to 4 rows can be set up Column Settings Display Block Name Check this check box to display data together with its Block Name No of Char Item Designate the maximum number of block name characters No of Data Col Designate the number of data display columns in the data display area Data Char Size Designate the character size for each data in the data display area No of Char Data Designate the number of characters in the data display area Preview The setting contents can be preview LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 37 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Maximum Number of R
181. CREATING BASE SCREENS E Lamp Shape Color Attributes Here border colors for both ON and OFF states and Lamp s colors and tiling pattern in each state can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on each lamp shape E Lamp Label Attributes Here the text characters shown on a Lamp button s face are entered 2 1 Parts Creating Labels E Placing a Lamp The procedures for creating and placing a Lamp are shown below se When X00017 When X00017 the Lamp is ON lights up is OFF turns off PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Lamp command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area enter a Bit Address Lamp Settings LA_001 Enter X00017 here Stake 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select Select Colors and input a Label if desired ing a Part Shape Shape Browser oe LM 3D002 LM 30003 LAMP NO Bd LM 3D005 LM 30006 e Parts File Curent PDE File c program files pro face Ipdb pdb p Title LM_3D001 FI Hee LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2229 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 Switch the state of the lamp with the On Off but tons and then select Colors and input a Label Lamp Settings LA_001 General Settincs Shape Color Label Descriptiar Bt Address State Switches the lamp On Off Ercws
182. CREENS E Registering D Script Editor Here additional D Scripts can be registered When the A button is clicked on the D Script Editor will appear Enter the D Script s ID No from 00000 to 99999 Enter a wit D Seript Editor Untitled description D E Trigger here Description hy Timer Duration Displays the jo os 1 Trigger D Script s Show Toolbox vil pet tts area command Formula Functions tool box E Displays Tne pro defined me function commands e of the D DataType Bin F Data Length jem F Codes O Call Script Enter an expression Press HELP for examples Copy Paste Message area ed window OK if Care Onis Hem ID Each D Script program is uniquely identified by an ID number Enter an ID number in the range of 00000 to 99999 Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered here as a description about the D Script you are to create Show Toolbox When checked the tool box appears that contains the Operators Statements and Operands used to create the D Script program Data Type Designates the D Script data format as either Bin or BCD Data Length Designates the D Script data bit length as either 16 bits or 32 bits Code Please refer to the following table when entering negative numeric data LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 201 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Scri
183. Click on the Windows desktop s Start button Then point to the Programs Pro face LT Editor menu and click on the 4 Pack Tool menu 2 Select the Action menu Decompress Project File command or click on the icon a Pack Tool Action Help Status num LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 43 4 3 Project Compression Decompression Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE 3 Select a folder and Project file to be decompressed or enter the file name and click on the button If the same file name already exists the system asks if the existing file must be overwritten If you select the existing file will be overwritten If you select the existing file will not be over written and you will return to the previous dialog box UnPack Packed File File Name Factory 6 Olt Cancel Pack Tool AN File Factory B lte already exists Okay to overvrite this file Cancel 4 Select the Action menu Exit command or click on the icon REMARKS To select a folder click on the Browse button importa To decompress a com pressed project file that has been divided into several files make sure that all divided files are available However when you specify the file name to be decom pressed the system dis plays the first file name OLT only The decompressed project file will be stored in the same folde
184. Completed Bit Address ID No Transfer Completed Bit Address Enter the File No of filing data Fie No ca Set up the i Device PLC to be displayed mair Proce cancel J He Completed Bit Address Description Enter a description using a maximum of 20 single byte characters IDNo The File Name Display is linked to its function switch File Name Key Specify the number to identify this link is here This number is available up to 255 File No Enter the file number registered in the Filing Data list 1 to 2047 The names under this number are displayed when the file is opened 10 1 1 Filing Data Recipe Function Use LS Area When Filing Data is transferred between backup SRAM and the Device PLC it can be modified on the LT screen by routing it via the LS area the data is stored temporarily in the LS area If data transfer via the LS area is used specify the LS area s start word address where Filing Data will be stored from The address where the data can be stored is from LS0020 to LS2031 and LS2096 to LS4095 Device PLC Transfer If set this bit will turn ON when transfer of filing data to the Device PLC is completed Since this Bit does not turned OFF automatically to use the Device PLC Transfer Completed Bit again turn it OFF beforehand AN When the Device PLC Transfer Completed Bit Address has been entered in Note the case where filing data cannot be transferred to the Device PLC the LT s
185. Conditional Branches SP te DAN LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 209 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Statements loop loop endloop Loop repetitive processing is repeated according to the number stored in the tem porary Addresses designated in the brack ets y re The loop format is as follows important E g loop number of loops lt Designates the temporary Address where the loop repetition number is designated Mode equation break lt Stated when escaping from the loop halfway can be omitted endloop lt Stated at the end of the loop e Only a temporary Word Address can be entered in the paren theses e g loop t 000 e loop cannot be used for a trigger equation e The temporary Word Address value used to designate the infinite loop will decrease every time loop operation Is performed When the value changes to 0 the loop s operation is finished If the temporary Word Address value designated for the infinite loop is modified the loop will become end less Also the temporary Word Address used is designated as Global Therefore simultaneously using this temporary Word Address for another item means the loop s operation may be performed forever e Until loop operation finishes screen displays of tags etc will not be updated refreshed e loop can also be nested When it is nested the inner
186. Confirm the initial setting on the LT panel and adjust the settings as required REMARKS Make sure that the LT unit is in the Transfer Screen Data mode or RUN mode LT Series User s Manual sold separately CHAP TER 6 INITIALIZE When transferring logic programs you must first select Control Data in the Transfer Settings dialog box 7 2 1 Transfer Settings To cancel the data transfer mode click on the icon Data transfer mode will automati cally quit when the LT unit s inter nal memory capacity becomes in sufficient LT setup means to download the system program and protocol program from LT Edi tor to the LT unit so that the LT unit can operate in the specified environment LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 After screen data transfer is completed select the Transfer menu Exit command or click on the icon E Transferring a Screen Using a Password If a password has been registered you must enter it to transfer data to the LT unit PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon icon 2 Select the Transfer menu Send command or click If you enter an in
187. Corpora 2 tion CPW file cannot be used Shows the currently Look in Ga cpw displayed file s EEE folder OpS objc cpa OpS objd cp Lists all the T files in the currently selected folder Files of type Windows Library Files cpw i Cancel dt Displays the currently selected nee Currently selected file s Description data if any file s name lf Currently selected file s desired can be format type entered 2 184 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Modifying Library File Names Titles Library filenames can also be changed Simply select a library from the file list then select Property from the Edit menu and the Property screen will appear Type in the filename title that you wish to use and click on OK Description Sstabe SW word Cancel E Displaying the Browser at the Top of the Normal Screen If the Always on Top option is selected from the Window menu when ever the Library Browser is called up it will be placed at the top of the current window If this option is not selected selecting another screen will place that screen over the Library screen hiding it from view LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 185 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items 2 4 1 Registering Library Items Here the procedure for registering a Library is explained
188. D J acket Is your personal computer hard disk s free space amounts uficient Double click on the Windows icon Double click on the drive in which LT Editor has been installed Use the File menu s P roperty feature to check the amountoftree disk space If the free disk space Is insufficient empty the trash box or delete unnecessary files from the hard disk Is the PC s RAM memory capacity sufficient Memory of 16 M byte or more is required Click the Windows 95 S tart button first and then click on the S ettings Control P anel and System selections Click the virtual memory button in the system property dialog box and check that Auto S eting recommended is selected If M anual S eting is selected change the seting to Auto S eting recommended Restartthe P C and then restart LT E dibr Some applications do notwork well with LT E ditor and such an application may interfere with the startup of LT E ditor Quitall running applications and delete them from the Startup menu S tartup in the Windows 95 P rogram menu Restartthe PC and then restartLT E ditor Do the trigger commands Config sys Autoexec bat etc operate correctly Restartthe PC Press F8 when Starting windows appears When the menu appears select S t p by step Confirmation to check thatthe commands all operate normally Ifan error message appears correctthe error For details refer to the PC s operation manual LT Editor Ver
189. D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Limitations Specific to Global D Script When the LT s power is turned ON the actions shown in the table on the previous page are performed At the screen change this table is not applied and the trigger conditions are continuously monitored Global D Script operation is suspended during screen changes or other LT operations After the LT s power is turned ON Global D Script actions are not per formed until all data reads are completed for the initial screen However after the initial screen changes Global D Script actions may be performed before the data reads are completed The maximum number of addresses in Global D Script is 255 When this number exceeds 256 the D Script does not function Since these addresses always read data regardless of the screens be sure to use only the minimum number of device settings in your D Script Otherwise operation perfor mance can be degraded The maximum number of Global D Scripts available is 32 The currently used function also counts as one Global D Script When the number of the Global D Scripts reaches 32 any new Global D Scripts are ignored LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide ie Pe Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script yao Notes on Operation Results E Overflowing Digits Overflowing digits resulting from operations are rounded E g When performing an operation o
190. D300 D200 Assigns D200 data to D300 In this case D100 s value to be written to D200 as the operation result has not yet been assigned to D300 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 421 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script lt Memory Set gt Memory Set memset D Script Toolbox Functions This feature initializes all devices at once Memory Ops Setting data for the number of Addresses een ac is taken from the Set Word Address The Memon Set 2 allowable range of Addresses is from to Offset Address 640 Format memset Set Word Address set data number of Addresses Example statement When 0 is set to addresses WORD10 to WORD19 memset W WORD 10 0 10 atatements p Uperatars 4 lt Memory Set memset gt farm As the number of Addresses increases the more the time is mportan required for writing data to the external device Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes e If data to be written exceeds the designated device range a communication error occurs In this case you must turn the LT s power OFF and then ON again to reset the LT from the error e Although it will depend on the number of Addresses to be copied data will be read from the original copy data then divided into pieces and copied to the copy destination There fore even if a communication error occurs during data
191. Data Transmission 1 Completed Manual Data Transmission 2 Completed 1 Filing Data Registration via Filing Data Filing List 2 Setup of Write Settings Send Filing Data to SRAM via Filing Data Filing Setting 3 When performing automatic data transmission setup the Device PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings via the same dialog box Automatic Data Transmission is completed here 4 When performing manual data transmission type 1 setup the Filing Data Display and designate its placement Manual Data Transmission type 1 is completed here 5 When performing manual data transmission Type 2 setup the Keypad Display and designate its placement Manual Data Transmission Type 2 setting 1s completed here 10 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe me Filing Data Setting Use the following setting items to create multiple folders and a trigger for transferring data Select Filing Setting from the Screen Setup Filing Data menu Filing Setting Filing ON OFF ol Use Muliple Folders Write Settings Fram Filing Data To SRAM Control word Address 01 coga F NEES Write Completed Bit Address tn Cooo0000 F TE Control word Address o1 CO0000 al pee Transmit Completed Bit Address p1 C0000000 F TE Filing ON OFF Check this check box in order to use the filing data Use Multiple Folders
192. Deleting a Mark 3 16 Deleting D Script Settings 2 181 Deleting Data Sampling Settings 2 211 Device Address 2 217 Device Comment Types 4 20 Display Area 50 100 200 1 25 Display in Load Screen Object 2 216 Display Settings 10 44 Dot Attributes 2 95 Dragging and Dropping 2 136 Drawing 9 Drawing a Circle 3 8 Drawing Functions 1 2 Drawing Tools 2 94 3 2 Drawing with Dots 3 4 Duplicate Setting Dialog Box 2 137 Duplicating 2 139 Editing a Home Page Address 1 30 Editing a Library Item 2 168 Editing an Object 2 220 Device PLC Type 1 5 File Name Display Display Attributes 2 62 File Name Display General Settings Attributes 2 61 File Name Display Style Color Attributes 2 62 File Name Display Switch Settings Attributes 2 63 File Name Display Switch Type Color Attributes 2 64 File Types 1 7 Filing Data List 10 12 Filing Data Setup Procedure 10 8 Filing Data Transfer Flow 10 3 Filing Data Transmission Methods 10 6 Filing Name Display Settings 10 23 Filing Setting Example 10 17 Fill 2 216 Fill Point Color 2 218 Filling a Mark 3 9 formal trade names 2 Freehand Drawing 3 5 Function Buttons 1 19 Function Switch General Settings Attributes 2 20 Functions 2 15 2 180 Functions and Settings 9 General GP Restrictions 9 General Information Symbols and Terms 3 Global Cross Reference 2 226 GP Settings 6 4 GP Type 1 5 Editing D Script Settings 2 175 2 178 2 180 2 GP PRO PBIII for Windows Part
193. E SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 2 Moving Objects In this section the procedures for moving objects are described E How to Move an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Click on the desired object The object s handles will appear showing that it has been selected 2 3 1 Selecting Objects The keyboard s gt and keys can also be used when the object s handles are displayed 2 Place the cursor over the object away from the fap object is too small to select handles and after the cursor changes to drag it and move i e it is only scaled up to the desired location or down click on and drag the ob ject while holding down the key gt Also you can move the object by zooming out the screen or using the keyboard 1 5 2 Display Area 50 100 200 To cancel the movement click on the icon Q te To move an object horizontally or vertically do so while holding the Shift X key down In this case the object will be moved in either the horizontal or vertical direction where the moving distance is greater To move and scale up down an object designating its coordinates can be used 2 3 16 Changing Coordinates 2 150 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Scaling means changing the size and proportion of an object This function allows you to easily scale an object up larger
194. EMARKS In this example a circle has been accidentally deleted 1 Select the Edit menu Undo command or click To cancel the Undo operation on the icon click on the E icon The circle will reappear and the screen is displayed as it 2 3 23 Redo was prior to the deletion Redo 2 3 23 With this function an operation previously undone with the Undo command can be redone 1f performed immediately after the Undo command is used E Redoing the Previous Undo Command PROCEDURE REMARKS In this example the undone circle deletion will be re done 1 e deleted again 1 Select the Edit menu Undo command or click on the a icon The circle will reappear 2 Select the Edit menu Redo command or click on To Cancel the Reds operation click the icon on the icon The circle will disappear 2 3 22 Undo LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 181 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items ya Library Items The objects you created can be registered These registered objects are called Libraries You can call up and use the registered Libraries when ever necessary Like a pre made Part Shape the objects registered in these libraries can be viewed and selected using the Browser function Multiple objects can be combined and registered and Marks created on Mark screens can also be registered 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen These items a
195. External _ gt gt le Filing data Device 1 Device PLC Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address Filing Data SRAM 2 Device PLC Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address SRAM lt gt Device PLC e When a single folder is used designate the folder number as 1 important If the designated number s folder does not exist data will not be transferred to backup SRAM Also the Write Com pleted Bit Address will not be turned ON e When data is not transferred to backup SRAM the LT internal special relay LS2032 s bit 9 will turn ON 10 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Manual Transmission type 1 Filing data is transmitted to the Device PLC by touching a LT screen touch key Use the Filing Data Display to transfer data to from the Device PLC using the SRAM Device PLC touch key and the Device PLC gt SRAM touch key r External Internal memory Backup SRAM Filing data Device 1 Device PLC Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address Filing Data SRAM 2 Screen Touch Keys 10 1 5 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 1 E Filing Data Transmission Flow Sr _ When filing data is sent back to the Device PLC from backup SRAM the Note newly sent data will overwrite the old In order to prevent this beforehand create anothe
196. File location AE Production Process lke k B Manufacturing System tte LF Schedule Control lke To type a file name via the keyboard Filename Manufacturing Systeme f on nee Festnpe WieoeFopeietie FF tee Fiona bewin Fety id here Device PLC Type OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES 3 Click on the button to open the selected When you double click on the file file name selected in step 2 you can skip the command To create a screen refer to 1 2 4 Opening Closing Saving a Screen E Saving a Project When the data of an existing project file is changed the changes will be automati cally saved However if you attempt to create a another new project file without first saving your current project file the LT Editor will ask if you wish to save the current file If you click on the button the Save As dialog box will appear 1 2 2 W Saving a Project File under a Different Name 1 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals E Saving a Project File under a Different Name You can save an existing project file under a different name or with different LT type Device PLC settings PROCEDURE 1 Select the Project menu Save As command in the Project Manager 2 The comment LT type and Device PLC of the cur rently opened project file are displayed Enter the desired file name and enter the items t
197. G BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items PROCEDURE REMARKS 8 Click on the button A maximum of 200 Library items The newly registered Library item will appear in the Can be registered in each Library Browser file Gull cpw production Ele Eee en eee LEP After creating a new Library item a if you attempt to create or select another Library file without first saving the item via the Save As function a prompt will appear asking whether the newly created Library item should be CS saved or not EE eee eee lt D When registering a Library item to a Li For the proce brary file other than the currently open one gt dures for saving a Library item re fer to 2 4 4 Saving Libraries and 3 Click on the button Quitting Save Library Cell Number Cancel Description WwW nied 4 Via the Library Browser select the File menu Se lect File command or click on the icon 5 Select the desired Library file from the list or input 2 4 Libraries W the Library file name in the file name area Switching Library Files Select wanae He When selecting a Library file in an Borso com other directory use the Look in fa O1p5 objc cpw fa Op5 0 bid cp Op5 obje cpw window Fle atype Windows bray Fes ope Description 30 template switch parts 6 Click on the Oren button to display the selected In step 5 simply move the cursor vaca file to the desired Library file name and doubl
198. GS 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Mode Settings Device PLC Displays the name of the host Device PLC connected to the LT panel Mode Settings Option Device PLC Connection Manual Extended Settings Keypad Display Priority Designates the Keypad Display processing mode Standard mode executes the processing of the Keypad Display once per scan time and Twice mode executes the processing two times per scan time Extended Settings Backup Settings Used to back up the LT panel s LS area data Specify the initial address of the backup range and the number of words used Extended Settings Delete Error Display Only for programless type Displays an error message when an communication error occurs with the LT unit panel and deletes the error message when the communica tion error is reset System errors however cannot be reset regardless of this setting Extended Settings Watch Dog Monitors the communication status between the LT panel and Device PLC The LT unit sends OOFF to the External Device s word address at a specified time interval The Device PLC ladder program etc checks whether the communication is performed normally by confirm ing the OOFF command at the specified time interval The data that is checked should then be cleared to 0 in order to detect new data writes from the LT unit However if the LT s internal common relay special relay data LS2032 s bit 2 is
199. Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS lt B When no Library file is displayed gt Enter the file name when the oe er Library file is saved 3 The New dialog box will appear ALEAK 2 4 4 Saving Li ae braries and Quitting Saving a Library File Under Another Name When registering a Library item to a new Library file A comment of up to 60 characters lt C When registering a Library to a new Library file gt s can be entered step 5 When registering a Library item to an existing Library file Click on the button lt D When registering a Library item to a Library file other than the currently open one gt s step 4 lt C When registering a Library item to a new Library file gt 3 Click on the button Save Library x Number Cancel x Description mooo 4 Via the Library Browser select the File menu New command or click on the icon 5 Enter a comment and click on the button Enter a description up to 60 char acters Description Enter the file name when the Li brary file is saved Hep 2 4 4 Saving Li braries and Quitting Saving a Library File Under Another Name 6 Via the Screen Editor select the Library menu Register Library command or click on the Cl icon 7 Enter a Cell Number and Description Save Library LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 187 Chapter 2 CREATIN
200. ITING ALARMS 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing goss ccevcesecscccsesccsecessunessuesesevasssercocsescasiaessaveserees 5 2 5 1 1 Alarm Editof sence sae seesacetencseesennedsannctts sacmespara data ames auteddesydahvaenetedueatssaxevenevenserseddovoeo soe 5 2 IA CAMO Al 2 ARH a E E 5 4 PE JOT ie Far a ea E EE E 5 5 S14 Alarm Import EOE accosted pe devt endo saamenn estentcenaesha Gicaieetiaaimseadawiansamaseniteester 5 12 CHAPTER 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup scceeseccecdeyessecsecesseceseceseesssesseusenssevecesessersevsesvsuess 6 2 CHAPTER 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS Tel Prior t Transferring Data sj ceecesssecessvsscnccevesesesiessseecevssecesterssesceuesssesteisesessvssens 7 2 ole LI Screen A tae RCo ONG seners eE Enesi 7 2 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs ssscssssssceccocccssssccecocoosssseceeoossssoe 7 3 ee a e S E E 7 4 T MASS OES cise eects ee eee A een ene sees eee eet 7 7 TASo Taer Pie CAO ae cheat yee E EN A A scencces 7 9 7 2 4 When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT a 7 10 T23 Wet Senet Logio RTO 2 TANS orsica aai a aE e ea 7 12 1 2 6 When Receiving Data From the acs insnsastescacetctmeatsndsscetocdsnsteontasaidddoncitunecsanstencens 7 13 7 2 7 Sending Programs with the Logic Program Editor cccccccceeecececeeeeeeeeeeaeaeaes 7 14 Wad ODON S eene A REEERE EEEE EEEE 7 16 Tol CI Internal Screen Data Information ec series occrnnsac
201. LT Editor program is first compiled before it is transferred to the LT unit Select the Project menu Prepare command to compile your data I Transfer Transfer Setup View Options Help Project File Transfer Method 1 Sondre Transfer Status Prepare Status ci E Overall Progress pd Ready NUM ine e To prepare the transfer about the 3 times the project file size is required in your computer s hard disk e After the Prepare command is finished you can check the LT unit s current memory capacity with the Project Information feature ALAA 4 4 1 Project I nformation e Once you use the Prepare command you do not need to use it again for the same data unless the data has been updated e If the Project File to be transferred is stored on your PC s floppy disk copy it to your PC s hard disk prior to using Prepare to reduce transfer time LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 9 7 10 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS L When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT To display screen created with LT Editor and to run created logic programs on the LT panel you must first transfer data from the LT Editor to the LT unit The Al Send command transfers the screen data and logic programs at the same time You can also send logic programs alone 7 2 5 When Sending Logic Programs
202. Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Filing Data to SRAM All the filing data is written into the SRAM when the Trigger Bit is turned ON Control Word Address M 1 to D00200 3 OFF ON Write Completed Bit Address a ee re M0001 EE Data processing K Filing data to SRAM gt SRAM gt Device PLC Filing data selected by the LT s touch key is written to the Device PLC E Actual Process 1 Select an item Here select Block 3 36 C 21 G5 TS SRAM DEV DEL ERAN 2 Touch SRAM gt PLC Key SRAM LS gt PLC 3 Filing data is transmitted from SRAM to the Device PLC Block 1 Block 2 Block 3 Device PLC D00100 D00101 D00102 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 21 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES WARS Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 Here select an item using the File Name Display from a screen and fine tune minutely adjust the data via the LS area and then transfer the data manual transfer 2 E Screen Example E Filing Setting Example When the check box of Device PLC Controlled Transfer is off manual data transmission 1s performed Write Setting From Filing Data To D Use Muliple Folders SRAM Write Settings From Filing Data To SRAM Control Word Address D00200 antral wor Ss 01 0
203. Memo 5 1 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide a LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS Y ou can select many of the LT unit s initial settings through the LT Editor for Windows program This program area is called System Settings When System Settings data is sent to the LT unit you will not need to manually perform the initial setup of the LT unit A description of each LT unit setting item 1s provided in your LT Series User s Manual sold separately For details refer to that manual Gl E E A E Menu Setting Items LT Setup LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 1 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS me Menu Setting Items LT Setup In the System Settings mode you can easily select the LT unit s initial settings By doing this you don t need to manually set up the LT panel since the System Settings data is sent to the LT panel automatically After the System Settings data is sent to the LT panel you can also change those settings via the LT unit itself LT Series User s Manual sold separately Chapter 6 INITIALIZE Usage Pattern Screen LT Setup Entereach Click onthe Setup i parameter button to register the LT click on fem system settings Some setting commands are supported by the LT unit but not by LT Editor for Windows or vice versa 1 e are supported by LT Editor for Wind
204. Message fsummary Text 1 Summary i ummar e When messages are registered with the Alarm Editor Direct g Text and Index Text cannot be mixed important Do not set up an Index Text with two or more lines Only the first line will be displayed even if two or more lines have been set up LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 59 Memo 4 60 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide lt a CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS his feature allows you to register text data to be displayed as alarm mesages This chapter describes how to create and edit these alarm messages e E E EE Alarm Creation and Editing LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide J l 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 2 mm Alarm Creation and Editing With this feature you can register the messages to be displayed in the Alarm Summary Part menu s Alarm Display and Alarm Message right to left scrolling display You can also set up a monitor bit for each message According to the monitor bit s ON OFF status the specified messages are then displayed in the Alarm Summary or Alarm Message mode The Alarm Summary lists messages in the Alarm Display Part 2 1 12 Alarm Display With Alarm Message text the horizontal and vertical size of the text is specified in the Setup Area s Initial Setup screen menu
205. NG BASE SCREENS p EUG A E E E TA OT 2 2 21A BESNI e E E A E EN EE T EE 2 17 LL WO N O E A E E S E E 2 21 ZN UMC TOMS wi DEE sei E E E 2 24 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 13 PREFACE 14 BM AUS eaa E E E S 2 2 ZAN DEN E a E E N E O E A E E E 2 14 LE Wa OE a E E E O EAE A A E EE 2 17 ZA e E E E A E E E 2 20 DM G e ta tca a nuda aabpentenoeaaiamcaescceuccaswiansasaigsneteuesseaatakess 2 23 2a Wea Col ANS spaeerexcascecccasccs E 2 26 PES til on 12 0 bh eee ee enn ae ne ne ene E N wn ree rrr eee Te Te Tan rrr arent 2 31 Deed Har PS GaGa cece eset sen eesies es cearsaa E E E S 2 36 Dah NTC ate eeaer E E E E E E E A co naebee 2 41 P E E a teases cctv E A T E E E A A A E T E E 2 46 RE E D OA ENE E E EE EEE E E E T phases 2 51 2 1 11 Alarm Display os inncnonsseanenseaseroceasendsasiesdivannetvanenedscabbeteensbsr seaysdseiinusadissaseutiohoenbectiabes 2 57 Pe EAS IN me DI y e E 2 61 PAA EDB r AES D o i A E EE EE AAEE E 2 67 DM Mb N merne Display Soncini a e e a ee eda arar 2 73 LLAS Messa e DA ea A EE 2 71 ZAAD abe D D e E E 2 83 A Doe DEDI a E 2 86 DMD Pr oe D OV AY a E E E E E A 2 88 2l Droni erran EE E EEE EE N E N 2 94 Dilly DO E E E E E E E E E E 2 95 Da Doo TO I e E E E 2 96 Dio Sae Ra E E aE EEA E E EAA E AE E 2 98 LA E A aE E E T E E AE T 2 100 DD AO 6 e E saa eaneesteoeseteesusesstceacaaseas 2 102 Ze WPI EE E R 2 104 Dink Ae EUs EO O e E E E 2 106 DDS S E E E E E stg eeu uneceet eceraapeas
206. NG BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Enter comment data here This displays the Window Number of the window registered on the Window Screen U Select the Win dow Number you want to call up onto the Base Screen B 2 116 ya Window Parts Calls up the window onto the Base Screen B Register the windows to the Window Registration via the Window Screen U This operation is easier than using the U tag For the details of Window registration refer to 3 3 Window Display Window Screen E Window Parts Attributes Window Parts Setting WI_001 General Settings Specify the ti i one Window Control Address Window Control 1 Address Bit0 ON OFF Bit Display Order Preview the window associ ated with the selected Win dow Number in this area Window Control Address Enter the address to control the Hide Show status of the windows 15 02 0l 00 Bits z Show 0 Hide the window Changing the order of window layer 1 Show the window 0 Touching the window will change the order of the layer 1 Touching the window will NOT change the order of the layer 3 7 1 Overview of Window Display 3 7 2 Window Registration on the U Screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing Window Parts Procedure for placing Window Parts will be shown below Show window Window Display O F lt F Place a window
207. NG BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 78 ranr Alarm Display When the External Device s Monitor Bit has been turned ON messages registered in the Alarm Summary by the Alarm Editor can be displayed in a list 5 1 Creating and Editing Alarms Message display order is decided according to which Monitor Bit is in the lowest position in the Alarm Summary display area It is recommended that Monitor Bit assignment begins from the message with the highest priority Be sure to input only one message per line The characters of a message that exceed one line will be truncated The number of the characters that can be displayed in one line will vary depending on the character size and LT type When the size is 1 x 1 the maximum number of characters that can be displayed per line for each LT model is 40 single byte characters E Alarm Summary General Settings Attributes Enter the start address for Alarm Summary Settings AL_OO1 Enter General Settings Display Format Style Color each message s Co mment Description Word Address i j jin Monitor Bit Jeo re Border Type Select the E No Border Ho of Monitor Words 1 Enter the display area L number of rder 2 sonal Words allocated for a Monitor Bit Border Type The display area frame types are No Border Outside and Outside Inside Word Address The Monitor Bit s first address for the messages specified by the Alarm Editor is input Input this address in word u
208. NG BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Select a state to register an item as and then click on the button Here perform settings for state 0 Picture Display Settings L _007 General Settings Library Image Erase Color one meek Bo E C ek O Pattem JE 7 ERS Select 0 S Select a Library to be displayed for state 0 from the 2 4 Libraries Browser To select a Library from a file dif File Edt View Window Hel Tear ferent from the currently displayed Ou one click on the Library Browser s icon 6 Drag the selected item to the Dialog box s black item 2 4 Libraries display area Select foreground or background Colors if desired Picture Display Settings L _002 General Settings l Library Image No of Lib 2 114 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE Picture Display Settings L _002 General Settings Library Image F 7 Mo of Lib E _ ey ES Erase Color re _ Ik Cok 7 For States 7 and 2 repeat steps 4 to 6 Since State 2 is used to delete Library item from the screen nothing is specified for it 8 After all of the item s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Picture Display s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 9 Click on the point where the Picture Display
209. O0003 Spiay a ie device informa i tion of Parts a Z _ IIN placed on each screen Changes the Changes the Displays the current device status system status status of the system The toolbar icons have the following functions Starts a simulation Registers the address za a Stops a simulation Quits the simulation function 8 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 SIMULATION S 1 Overview Chg Scr When the Check Box is marked the LT panel screen is changed accord ing to the Simulation screen When this Check Box is the LT panel screen can be separately changed independent of the Simulation screen Displayed Function Selection The function used to display the simulation can be changed In addition to the settings of each screen the devices show in the following figure that have been set with the screen independent global functions can slso be displayed window Screen Alarm Data Sampling Global D Sccript Filing Data Logging Registered Address Format The data format of the device status displayed in the Status cell and the device data displayed in the Change cell can be selected for Dec decimal Hex hexadecimal or Oct octadecimal format O Marking the check box adds a minus sign to the displayed values if the word address settings displayed in the Status cell are nega tive values
210. ON the LT will be unable to write Communication Settings Send Wait If the LT unit sends a command to the Device PLC immediately after receiving a response from the Device PLC the Device PLC cannot receive the command which will cause a communication error de pending on the Device PLC In this case enter a value for the trans mission wait time If a transmission wait time has been entered the LT unit waits for the preset time duration after receiving the External Device s response and then sends the next command to the Device PLC LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 3 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup E Tab Setting Items Each tab s setting items are described here Sie used LT Settings System Setup A Manufacturing System Ite System Setup 10 Settings Touch Buzzer Screen Mo Data Type a Bin L Screen Level Change Flow Password Settings Standby Mode Time Minutes Change To Screen Mo Com Port Start Up Delay T O Settings System Setup A Manufacturing System_lte Initial Screen Sethings Extended Settings Communication Settings System Setup 10 Settings Offline Mode Top Left Comer Forced Reset Mode Contrast Adjustment Ml Brightness Adjustment Touch Input Mode 1 Point Touch p 2 Point Touch Same Time 2 Disable Slide Outside of Tag Burnout Refresh Rate Printer Print From Tool Connector Unused Keyboard SIO Speed 9600bps F
211. ONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Drawing Tool Drawing Tool Description o Fillin an area with a desired color by clicking In the area enclosed within lines and shapes fat ae Enter the text to be displayed in the mark drawing area Call Up Mark anm t Selecta M ark from the M ark Library Register Mark Registera created Mark as a Mark Library E Editing Tools The Editing Tool Bar icons and their corresponding functions are as follows icon sativa Toot venton Used to delete an entire Mark screen and store itin the wl fee Using the Paste command you can then paste the Mark screen onto another screen clipboard Used to paste the aag temporarily stored in the S ean Ble Used to Used to duplicate a Mark screen s specifed area a Mark screen s specified area Delete eee to delete a mark tren je to cancel the command executed a el before and return to the previous condition Undo Used to redo the command canceled with the Undo eal Redo command Redo Used to move the dot pattern symmetrically relative to A Mirror X the vertical axis The symmetry axis is the vertical line that divides the screen into two equal sections Used to move the dot pattern symmetrically relative to db Mirror Y the horizontal axis The symmetry axis is the horizontal line that divides the screen into two equal sections Turn i Used to turn the Mark counterclockwise by 90 Used to turn the Mark clockwise 90 E
212. Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 1 Browsing Help Topics To display the help screen select the Help menu or click on the button in the dialog box When multiple screens are loaded or many Parts have been registered on the screens the PC s system memory may not be Important sufficient to display the help screen If you jump from one topic to another on the help screen an error message may be displayed When this happens simply quit and then re start help E Searching for a Topic and then Display Help Select the Help Topics command from the Help menu or press the F1 key A list of help topics will be displayed You can search for a topic by either trying to find it from the table of con tents or entering a keyword for that topic Searching for a Topic from the Contents Menu To select a topic from the contents menu double click on the Contents tab Follow the screen instructions to search for a desired topic Help Topics GP PRO PS lor Windows 95 Contents Index Find _ Click opic and shen cics Disp ay Orehek anathe tak suchas Index Proj ck Hanager LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 27 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help Searching for a Topic by a Keyword To enter a keyword click on the Index tab Search for a desired topic according t
213. PREFACE Thank you for purchasing the LT integrated development software LT Editor Ver 2 0 hereafter referred to as the LT Editor Please read this manual carefully in order to use this software properly and be sure to keep this manual handy for future reference 1 The copyrights to all programs and manuals included in the LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide hereinafter referred to as this product are reserved by the Digital Electronics Corporation Digital grants the use of this product to its users as described in the Software Operating License Conditions documenta tion included with this product s CD ROM Any actions violating the above mentioned conditions are prohibited by both Japanese and foreign regulations 2 The contents of this manual have been thoroughly inspected How ever if you should find any errors or omissions in this manual please inform your local LT Editor representative of your findings 3 Regardless of article 2 the Digital Electronics Corporation shall not be held responsible for any damages or third party claims resulting from the use of this product 4 Differences may occur between the descriptions found in this manual and the actual functioning of this product Therefore the latest infor mation on this product is provided in data files 1 e Readme txt files etc and in separate documents Please consult these sources as well as this manual prior to usin
214. Pease seta smalere D Display file data size is over maximum Reduce the size ofthe designated display Paste failed The currentpaste setings range et are notthe same as the paste destnaton Or the paste acton may delete a column or effect another data item s settings Printer file data size is over Reduce the size of the area amount of data to be eee T Time settings cannot exceed 24 hours Please Change the settings so that the tme value is 24 The no of times x no of blocks should be Be sure the number of tmes and number of Appendix 16 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 2 Troubleshooting Mw Troubleshooting This section describes how to solve problems generated when using LT Editor Before you begin troubleshooting please check the following items again If you answer Yes to all the questions start troubleshooting If you answer No to any one of the questions set the required item and then start troubleshooting If the error still occurs after troubleshooting fill the details of the error in the provided trouble report sheet and follow the directions stated in Appen dix 4 po ttem Check Is your personal computer s OS Windows 95 98 Me NT4 0 2000 or XP Is the memory capacity greater than 32Mbytes Is your PC hard disk s amount of free space sufficient LT Editor Are all the environmentsetings correct will notstartup AAAA LT Editor C
215. REENS 2 3 12 Mirror X Mirror Y An object can be moved symmetrically around its center line with respect to the X or Y axis The display position of Parts Text Load Screens and Load Marks can only be moved symmetrically E Moving Symmetrically along the X axis PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object 2 3 1 Selecting Center Objects Pail The center point of the object is where two lines connecting the opposite handles other than the 2 Select the Edit menu Mirror X axis command corner handles cross L nter or click on the g icon oo The object will move symmetrically with respect to the X axis If an object is moved outside of the drawing area by using the Mirror X function the part of the object outside the drawing area will not be displayed on the LT screen To cancel the change click on the icon E Moving Symmetrically along the Y axis PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object MOANA 2 3 1 Selecting Objects m Center The center point of the object is lt I where two lines connecting the opposite handles other than the corner handles cross 2 Select the Edit menu Mirror Y axis command Center Line or click on the a icon The object will moves symmetrically around the Y axis If an object is moved outside of the drawing area by using the Mirror Y function the overflowing part of the object will not be displayed on the LT screen To cancel the
216. Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 2 1 Parts E Entering a Comment If desired a comment can be entered for a Part Up to 20 alphanumeric single byte characters can be entered Bit Switch Settings BS_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Extend _ lt lt Applies the Description Operation Bit Address device com CA Merits ment Tohii Hantar Bit dite Function fe Bit Set i Bit Reset I Momentary i Bit Invert Reflection of a Device Comment If you click on the Ki Apply Device Comment button after entering an address the device comment entered using the Symbol Editor is automati cally searched for and the comment corresponding to the entered device appears in the Description field 4 2 6 Symbol Editor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Entering Addresses Here Addresses that are operated for Parts functions and that are monitored are designated A variable to be used in a logic program Logic symbol can be designated as a Part s address 4 2 6 Symbol Editor When a function requires consecutive addresses and a variable J Logic symbol is used as a start address an integer array must impotant be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecu tive addresses needs to be allocated Bit Switch Settings B5_O01 Ge
217. Script function setting screen will appear Displays the D Script command tool box when this check box is checked Enter a function name B Script Function Untitled Function Hame Show Toolbox Y a Enter the D Script s action program to perform Displays defined func tion names Message area window Function Name Enter the name of your Function here Once a Function is created that Function name is displayed in the Function area Up to 20 characters can be used for a Function name Alphabet characters numbers and _ i The following function names are reserved DO NOT use these E Important names IJ Gk IJ kh IJ kk rise fall rise_expr timer set clear toggle if else endif b_call Beall dsp rectangle dsp_line dsp_dot dsp_circle dsp_arc Call and or not memcpy memset loop break IO_READ IO_WRITE _memcpy_EX _memset_EX IO_READ_EX lIO_WRITE_EX lIO_READ_WAIT databuf0 databuf1 databuf2 databuf3 _strset dicopy _hexasc2bin _decasc2bin _bin2hexasc IJ Gh IJ kh IJ kh strlen _strcat _strmid _wait return IJ kk E Deleting D Script Settings Here existing D Script settings can be de
218. Smalls C Number of Smalls C Keppad Input Display Number of Srre 5 Change the size and attributes of the Part as neces sary and place it on the screen Numeric Display Settings ND_O01 General Settings Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings Description Ward Address Lcd Ki Mumber_ot_Small Pe E REMARKS To cancel the Pasting click on the a icon A list of the Parts to which the cop ied instruction can be converted will appear If there is only one Part that corresponds to the instruction the step 4 is omitted 2 1 Parts LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 157 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E Pasting a Part placed to the screen to a Logic Program Here the procedure for copying and pasting a part placed to the screen to a logic program is explained When pasting the Part the type of instruction to be converted to must be selected from the list Before copying a Part you have to allocate a variable Logic _ symbol to the Part Parts without a variable allocated cannot be importan COpied to a logic program Ste A variable will be registered with the Symbol Editor as a Logic symbol when Nel the logic program is saved PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired Part on the Screen Editor T amp E Drawing Board Plant H GEE 1 2 3 Creating Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library Window Help ses Editing Saving a Logic P
219. Status Menu Bar Tool Bar Total Job Idle o Num PROCEDURE 1 To rebuild a file click on the Windows main menu s Start button Point to the Program Pro face LT Editor menu and select the Rebuild command Accessories Startlp ME MS DOS Prompt Microsoft Word 28 Favorites ee Documents Settings Eind Help 2 Select the File menu Open command or click on the icon 3 Select the file to be rebuilt or enter the file name Then click on the Den button Open Look in dts I A H LTT Manufacturing System Ite EE Manuracturing System Ibe EF Production Process Ite Aik Schedule Control lke File name Production Process Ite Bren y Files of type Project Files Ite H Cancel LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 2 Project Editing Displays the selected file s name Displays the status of the rebuild operation Displays the progress of the rebuild opera tion REMARKS 4 15 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 After confirming that the file name is correct select the Actions menu Start command or click on the icon The selected file will then be rebuilt 3 Rebuild File Actons Help Rebuild File E Program Fies Proface LT database Production Process ke Status Total Job P Rebuild To c
220. Structure 3 4 Placing a Picture Display 2 91 Placing a Time Display 2 87 Placing an Alarm Summary Display Area 2 59 Maximum Number of Automatically Created Part LibraPlacing the Data Logging Display 2 71 2 12 Memory Information 7 17 Menu Bar 1 18 Message Display General Settings Attributes 2 77 Message Display Messages Attributes 2 79 Mirror X Mirror Y 3 18 PLC Type 1 5 Precautions 8 2 PREFACE 1 Preparation 1 3 Print Preview Screen 9 6 Printing Print Tab 9 2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Index 3 index Printing Project Information Tab 9 4 Selecting an Existing Project 1 7 1 8 1 9 1 11 Printing Screen Tab 9 5 Selecting Colors 2 7 Product Usage Precautions 8 Selecting Line Types 2 94 Programming Functions 1 2 Sending Logic Programs 7 14 Project Manager Areas and Functions 1 18 Setting Bitmap File Name 2 154 Project Manager Errors 2 Setting Screen Property 2 215 Pull Down Menu 1 18 Setting Screen Property Color 2 218 Setting Up Data Sampling 2 212 CQ Setting up the Device Memory 8 5 Quitting LT Editor 1 17 Simulation Protocol 8 8 Quitting the Library Browser 2 174 Software and GP Setting Controls 9 10 Quitting the Screen Editor 1 16 1 17 Spacing 2 137 CRY Specifying Items to Be Copied 4 7 SRAM Information 4 36 Rebuilding 4 13 Starting GP PRO PB III for Windows 1 4 Redrawing a Screen 2 156 Starting LT Editor 1 4 Reflecting a Device Comment on the Parts
221. Switc h S The Function operation Switch s image 4 Reset Display Unil appears merg we ee When Go To Calls up the Part RA Screen is 2 Of line Shape Browser Parts can be selected directly from the Browser selected the Go To screen s number and data format must be entered Function Switch Operation The Function Switch s attributes are as follows Previous Screen When the Switch is pressed the currently displayed screen on the LT will change to the previously displayed one Go To Screen When the Switch is pressed the currently displayed screen on the LT will change to the specified screen Input the screen number to be changed jumped to The Data Format can be either Bin or BCD Se If a screen number is specified in the BCD data format to place the corre XXL sponding screen it is still displayed in the BIN data format when the screen is closed and then opened 2 24 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Reset LT When the Switch is pressed the LT will be reset to the save status as when the LT s power was turned ON Resetting the LT turns the I O signal off Consider this when TE designing your system File Name Key This is a function switch corresponding to the File Name Display and is the same as the one that is automatically placed together with the File Name Display Designate the same ID number as the one
222. T Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish Device PLC Type Select the type of Device PLC to be connected to your LT unit This setting is required only when the LT is a Type C Device PLC Connection Manual PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Project Manger s Project menu New command or click on i When entering a description you 2 Enter a description and select the LT Display and can use up to 60 single byte char Device PLC Then click on acters TE To set the Device Ea PLC refer to LT Editor Device Display Type PLC Connection Manual 1 2 3 Creating 3 The LT Editor will then ask you if you wish to create Editing Saving a Logic Pro a alpen program or a screen If you click on the gram 1 2 4 Opening Closing i button the Logic erogtan Editor Saving a screen will start If you click on the button the Screen Editor will start If you click on the button you will go back to the Project Manager Screen Edit Screen 1 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide L2 From varto uh Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals Ee No te If you attempt to create another project file without saving a newly created NSS project file the system asks if you wish to save the current file If you click on the button the Save As dialog box appears If you click on the button the system opens a new screen without saving the current proj
223. Terminology cccccccccssssssssssssesseeseseeceeeeccceceeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaaaaaaesseeessseeees 3 MT CTU eects cece EE N cence ecco E E A ace oom eee E AE E A E T FO Wy Tos seis M a eea E A A E EE E A E 5 PRECAUTION sna E E E E A E O OE 8 TABLE OFLCONTEN T S eeraa EE 11 LL OVE ooie E A 1 2 Lee Pio OOpa eL e E 1 3 L2 Fiom Start to Finis issernida anaa aaa aaan iaaah 1 4 For Cee S tae cats E A TE E E EE ET E E 1 4 1 22 Creating selecime Saving a Projeti erari veauatseusdacdsnedicesenmice 1 5 1 2 3 Creating Editing Saving a Logic Program ssssessssssssssseesseseterrerssssssssssssssssssessss 1 10 L24 Open CIOS i Say A Cle C0 secere iinan EEEa 1 12 Lo AQP ETE O a ea eteeceatans cea A EAEE EA 1 17 ES Proe WEA GCL e E E 1 18 1 3 1 Project Manager Areas and Functions sccssscosseiceseustusrausesusensessinsaradebsanesebemadelauesesits 1 18 14 Logic Programi Editor sssssrsorsrioresssreriianersoda rororo SEESE 1 20 1 4 1 Logic Program Editor Item Names and Functions seccssivscstriconssepedussepsiencedansaastsiawnns 1 20 LS CE CC ON enaA 1 22 1 5 1 Screen Editor Item Names and Functions peters ccrcscenitcaiversauecesisasenstsestaneteatieatsnsinsin 1 23 Me TVK D Spey a A E E E eects 1 25 L32 Disliv Ara 0 T00 ZO seise nn E E 1 25 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help eesscssssssseeeoccccsssscccoccossssseccocssssssseecosssssssseee 1 26 Lot Browsing Help TODICS ecssccnpeneanecen nan a 1 27 LOS Bows Tie Hm Pio Eein R N E 1 29 CHAPTER2 CREATI
224. The area to enter the number of the divisions will appear only for a graph type which has axis divisions To cancel the placement click on the icon To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Yana Half Pie Graphs This graph displays a Word Address numeric data received from a Device PLC as absolute or relative values in a Half Pie graph The graph s display will also change to reflect Word Address data changes E Half Pie Graph General Settings Attributes lt When displaying the data in absolute values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 data here Enter the General Settings Graph Settings Alarm Settings Description i i Wo rd Ad The currently dress to selected Half Pie Graph s image appears here store graph data T Select the desired Data Format Calls up the Part Shape Browser Parts can be selected directly from the Browser Absolute Data stored in the designated Word Address is displayed as absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Enter the
225. The current selected Screen can not be loaded on to itself Load Screen screen No 11 Operation Monitor 13 Trouble 14 Keyboard In 2 140 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 Click on the point where the Screen s top left corner A loaded screen cannot be edited is to be placed while it is being used on a different The image s center point is left top corner of its border 1 e loaded screen You will need and for other objects the screen center mark will be the to open the original screen to per placement point form any editing oe a ce Soe OPERATION MONITOR j To cancel the loading click on the ja icon TEMPER RUN CONTROL MONITOR TROUBLE ote When calling up a filled object When the current screen s graphics overlap loaded filled painted graph ics depending on the color used unfilled areas may be created To correct this add a fill to the current screen s unfilled area 2 2 6 Fill B100 Bit ys B10 Load B100 onto B10 Add a fill in the unfilled area If a background color is selected for the screen used for screen call up the object placed on the screen will not be displayed on the LT E Important To call up the screen for which a background color has been selected specify the center of the screen as the ca
226. Topic and then Display Help 1 27 Searching for a Topic by a Keyword 1 28 Searching for a Topic from the Contents Menu 1 27 Used Hairline Cursor 2 217 Selecting a Display Type 8 5 Using a Pop up Keypad to Input Values 2 55 Selecting a Part Shape 2 6 Using GP PRO PBIII for Windows Manuals 1 26 Index 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide
227. Type Summary 2 2 181 2 182 Editing Items on the Part Reference List 2 221 Editing Library Items 2 159 Editing Tools 3 3 Editing via the Load Screen List 2 228 Entering a Comment 2 3 Entering Addresses 2 4 Entering from a keyboard 2 4 Entering from a pop up keypad 2 5 Entering from a pull down list 2 4 Entering from the Address Keypad 2 5 Entering Text 2 113 etting Screen Property Display 2 215 Exporting a CSV File 2 223 2 224 Index 2 Grid Snap Settings dialog box 2 213 Grouping Objects 2 144 Ca How to Move an Object 2 126 How To Register a Home Page Address 1 31 How to Select a Single Object 2 121 How to Select Multiple Objects 2 122 2 132 2 134 How to Use This Manual 5 GQ I O Settings 6 4 ID Numbers 2 11 iling Setting Example 10 17 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Index Importing Symbols and Device Comments 4 23 Mode Settings 6 5 Modifying Library File Names 2 161 Modifying Library File Names Titles 2 161 Monitor Bit Address 2 14 Moving Symmetrically 2 143 n Pasting Other Software Bitmap Data 2 152 Nesting 2 116 No of Display Digits 2 51 Number of Copies 2 131 2 136 2 137 Numeric Display Alarm Settings Attributes 2 74 Initial Screen Settings 6 5 Interlock 2 15 Justification 2 112 Keyboard Compatibility List 4 Keypad Display Color Shape Attributes 2 52 Keypad Display Display Format Attributes 2 51 Keypad Display General Settings Attributes
228. When creating currently se Htionitoy TE a Bit Switch lected Part Shape mpoo Ee with two states Function check this box aa and enter the Calls up the Part Browser Bit Reset i Shape Browser 9 Momentary alternate Bit Part Shapes can below be selected Sets the switch s function Operation Bit Address Here the Bit Address data controlled by the Switch 1s input Monitor Bit Address Only after the Monitor check box is checked can the Monitor Bit Address used to change the Switch s display setting be entered The Switch s state ON OFF display can be specified so that it will change according to changes in this Bit Address Addresses input in the Bit Address area can also be done here Bit Switch Settings E5_001 Shape Color Label Extend Operation Bit Address General Settings Description Appears only when creating a Bit Switch a with two states Ce ee Toggles the switch s fe ooo state either ON or OFF allowing you to set the attributes of each state LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS After entering the Bit Address if you attempt to perform another area s operation before entering the Monitor Bit s address data the dialog box shown below will appear Clicking on the button automatically inputs the Bit Address s data into the Monitor Bit Address To enter a different
229. When data logging is completed one time LT turns ON the Bit Address des ignated here LT to Device PLC File Full Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When data logging is performed for the designated number of blocks the Bit Address designated here is turned ON LT to Device PLC After the Device PLC detects the Bit Address 1s turned ON turn it OFF Data Clear Bit Address Designate the External Device s Bit Ad dress When the Bit Address designated here is turned ON data stored in the backup SRAM is deleted After the backup SRAM data is deleted LT turns OFF this Bit Address Device PLC to LT LT to Device PLC Loop Selecting this feature means when data logging is completed it will begin again from the top most data address and overwrite the existing data Time Method Select this option when performing data logging by triggering logging start at the designated timing Data Logging Start Address Designate the Start Address of the De vice PLC device where data to be logged is stored No of Words Designate the desired number of words counted from the Start Address Up to 32 words can be designated LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 33 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Start Time Designate the first data logging start time Duration Designate the time period that data log ging is performed periodically S sec ond setting options are
230. a number Display File Display FD_O01 No of Display Lines 3 No of Display Characters 10 Direct Selection Selected Cursor Position Control Selected No of Display Lines No of Display Characters 10 E Mj Direct Selection lt Cursor Position Control gt e Even when the screens are changed on the LT monitor the current File Name Display s cursor position can be preserved e Cursor Position Control can be designated when setting up the File Name Display e When the LT s main power is turned ON or the LT is reset the cursor will appear on the first line e The cursor position will be stored for each ID No The storage area of an ID No and its cursor position correspond to each other To retain the cursor position be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos do not overlap each other on any of the screens For more detailed information about the File Name Display 2 1 12 File Name Display Style Color File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Border Type Display color NoBorder Fo MMC COMI No bk IF al 6 BOOS COM N e F oH Eras e Color Be O88 Oe Border Type Outer and inner borders Display Color Select desired colors Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink Erase Color Select the desired color Select the display area color to use when a Filing Data Display is cle
231. a volume that will be occupied in the LT unit panel relative to the current project file This item indicates the case where upload information is sent to the LT panel and the case where upload information is not sent to the LT unit separately The ratio of the current total data volume to the LT unit s total memory capacity is displayed in Referring to the LT unit s total memory capacity you can calculate the approximate number of screens that can be accepted by the LT panel When the data volume is indicated as select the Project s Trans fer menu and then select the Prepare command 7 2 3 Transfer Preparation LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 45 4 4 Information Display Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Use this value only as a guideline Depending on the size of the memory stored in the LT a screen of allowable size may not be entirely transferred Extended Screen Count Displays the number of screens that will be created in the LT unit relative to the current project file Since this value includes the LT unit s internal screens it is larger than the number of screens that have been created with LT Editor for Windows 95 To display this information set up the current project file in the Transfer Preparation mode If the project file is not in the Transfer Preparation mode the number of screens is indicated as sad er a i E Screen Information This
232. aa selected directly m o A from the Browser e Reypa Select this option to display a keypad when Word Address the LT screen s Keypad Input Display is touched The Word Address is used to store the keypad display s data Trigger Bit Address When not using the Pop up keypad feature When this bit is turned ON the Keypad s data entry area becomes active Use Pop up Keypad When this option is selected touching the Keypad Display will automati cally display the pop up keypad on the screen When this option is selected the Trigger Bit Address is disabled When Text is selected on the Display Format tab the Use pop up keypad option is disabled LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 63 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Keypad Display Display Format Attributes Keypad Input Display Settings KD_O01 elect the data to Dy Code Display amp Write Data Format be displayed Enter the No Sess Siem ona a cts o Select the Data ae A Length and Data The decimal Bin T Float Format here point is not included in the display nae Sad Character size Enter the No Decimal Places 0 can be selected of Digits after here the decimal pon Absolute 16 bit or 32 bit data can be processed Configure the Data Display Format and Code parameters When Dec is selected checking the Code checkbox will enable the display of data with
233. aan 15 gt 87 0 sol cote Fag L Read flag 0 Data read incomplete 1 Data read completed Read Error Code 0 Normal finish 1 Read error Word Data Enabled Disabled Bit 15 0 5 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 6 Each Bitin a Word represents a data number When a Bitis 0 the Bitis Disabled When a Bitis 1 the Bitis Enabled When using loop operation logging data is transferred starting with the oldest piece of data Logging Data Process in Backup SRAM Here 1 to 6 represent logging data In this case logging data is written to the LS area in the order of 1 2 and 3 When using the Loop feature logging data is written in the order of 3 4 5 and 6 10 44 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging If a data block s size exceeds the LS Area size that data block cannot be transmitted Logging Data for each block LS Area LS 20 Not transmitted LS 2031 Insufficient Space Display Setting Example for Writing to LS Area The following is an example of the display settings used when writing each logging data column s total value data to the LS area block units lt Total Value Data and Average Value Data Display gt e ae eer Pese Ce fea bate Tire vatue value vatue e ose pa Data bata pared paa parr e e When using the above display settings the Tot
234. ach ID No To retain the cursor posi Note tion be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos will not be overlapped 2 through all the screens E File Name Display Style Color Attributes Specify a color display color Fg for characters in the Filing Data display area and a color display color Bg of the Filing Data display area 2 1 Selecting Colors LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 83 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E File Name Display Switch Settings Attributes Set the function switches that are placed automatically 2 1 3 Function Switches File Display FOD_001 Switches to General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color _ Switches to transfer Filing Automatic Switch Placement Method transfer data Data between the via the LS backup SRAM O samat area These and the Device External Device gt SAAM ol L e Spi i switches are PLC Roll Up DF Erena Denize gt LS valid when RallDown M E C L5 gt Eemal besite Use LS Area witch i i Switches to is selected in scroll and select General items i Settings SRAM gt External Device Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the backup SRAM to the Device PLC External Device gt SRAM Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the external device to the backup SRAM Roll Up Places the Roll Up key used to scroll through a list of items Touc
235. acters or one double byte character When the No of Display Characters exceeds 2 a sequence of contiguous word addresses will be automatically occupied in the specified data storage address by the number of the words that store the excess characters e The possible number of display lines and characters is determined by the LT screen size and orientation and the text size setting e If the number of characters entered is less than the number designated for No of Display Character spaces 20H which will balance the number will be stored lt When No of Display Character is 6 and 4 characters are entered gt eTeTeTeTstsy e If the No of Display Character cannot be divided by 2 When PLC s one device is 16 bit length or if the No of Display Character cannot be di vided by 4 when PLC s one device is 32 bit length NULL 00H will be stored at the end lt When No of Display Character is 5 and 4 characters are entered when PLC s one device is 16 bit length gt SSS Caa No of Display Digits Here the number of digits displayed to the right of the decimal point is input LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Decimal Places Here the number of digits to the right of the decimal point is input Each data format available is listed in the table below Display Decimal ae aes im B Values _ Ool olio o so ME E a Ch
236. address click on the button and input the desired ad dress Do vou want to use the same Bit Address for the Monitor Bit Address Function The Bit Switch functions are as follows Bit Set When the Bit Switch is pressed the Device PLC s desig nated Bit Address is turned ON This state continues 1 e remains ON even after the switch is released Bit Reset When the Bit Switch is pressed the Device PLC s desig nated Bit Address is turned OFF This state continues i e remains OFF even after the switch is released Momentary Only while the Bit Switch is pressed and held is the specified Device PLC Bit Address turned ON Thus when the switch is released the specified Bit Address is turned OFF Bit Invert Every time the Bit Switch is pressed the Device PLC s designated Bit Address state is changed from ON to OFF or from OFF to ON E Bit Switch Shape Color Attributes Here the Switch s border color Frame ON OFF state colors On Color Off Color and pattern can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on the switch s settings E Bit Switch Label Attributes Here the text of the Label to be displayed on the Switch button is entered 2 1 Parts Creating Labels LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 17 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Bit Switch Extend Attributes Set up the Interlock a
237. ade Check this box to 9 1 Print Settings Check this box to print a company name on the cover page Check this box to print a name on the cover page Enter the name here include a Bit map on Click on this button to preview the cover page the cover page layout When Bit map printing is selected the placement of the Bit map on the cover page can be changed Comment Information Dialog Box Comment Information Enter a comment of up to 40 lines 80 characters per line Options Dialog Box Settings in the Options dialog box allow you to format the pages of the document to be printed You can specify the range of page numbers to be printed the screen color and margin size Prints the black white reversed screen color Check this box to print the page number on each page of the docu Margins ment Top 20 00 mm Left 20 00 mm eT Bottom 20 00 Fight 15 00 When printing page anari id numbers specify if be numbered LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Enter the initial page number to be printed on the first page of the document Specify the upper lower right and left margin sizes 9 3 9 1 Print Settings E Printing Project Information Tab Chapter 9 PRINTING You can check the created screens and Part designation status through printer output Prints a project Print info rmation Print Project Information Screen S u m ma
238. ae ee ee ee E end 1 paomo summary J ank A temperature increase N i LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS Entering data in the Alarm Editor only does not activate the Alarm Summary mode To activate the Alarm Summary mode you must place the Message Display on the Base screen where the message 1s displayed i Important When designating an Alarm summary s bit address be sure to select a device that can use word designated units Device PLC Connection Manual 3_ _3 4_ _3 Supported Devices Si The address to be entered 2 varies depending on your LT and PLC type Note that the sample screen in this manual is just one example Up to 160 alphanumeric characters can be entered for one Basic Alarm message After selecting several messages by dragging the mouse you can use the Copy and Paste commands 5 5 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS PROCEDURE 4 Select the alarm type Alarm Message or Alarm ere Tait an ype Wessage sumery Text Tank A temperature increase eo i 5 After entering all the necessary items select the Alarm menu Save command or click on the icon The specified alarm data will be stored in the currently opened project file REMARKS Up to 512 alarm messages can be registered However set the moni tor bits within 128 words If a message has not been e
239. after 20th will be disregarded according to the following rules Data sampling will be given priority over trend graphs Data sampling channel numbering will begin from those set previ ously 2 6 1 Data Sampling Settings Add Edit or Special Data Sampling Delste 5 se An example of the Data Sampling Setting dialog box is shown below Data Sampling Settings Registers additional Data Sampling Settings Lists the l Changes the Data registered Data Sampling Setting Sampling attributes Settings Channel name and description Deletes the regis tered Data Sampling Settings LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2393 2 6 Data Sampling Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Registering Data Sampling Settings Additional Data Sampling Settings are registered When the cd _ button is clicked on the Data Sampling Setting screen will appear E General The General page provides information about the current channel settings for the Trend Graph Display Channel Setting Tag Name General Data Format Sampling Must be no more than five Single byte Tag Name o or two Double byte characters long and Description DoS E composed of letters and or symbols Sampling Address 0000 Description Up to 20 Single byte or 10 Double byte characters can be entered as a descrip Trigger Bit Address OOOOO0 Top Write Address o020 tion E Data Format
240. al Screen Creation Guide 2 169 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing yee Bring to Front Send to Back When graphics and Parts overlap each other you can change the order of the layers with these two commands E Changing the Order of Overlapping Objects PROCEDURE REMARKS In this example you will move the oval partially hidden 2 3 1 Selecting by the rectangle to the front Objects Bringing an Object Forward 1 Use the cursor to select the filled oval 2 Select the Edit menu Bring to Front command To cancel the movement click on or click on the icon the icon Sending an Object Behind 1 Use the cursor to select the black rectangle 2 Select the Edit menu Send to Back command or To cancel the movement click on click on the icon the icon 2 170 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS rA GS Changing Attributes Here you can change any of an object s attributes 1 e its color address etc Also with objects of the same type you can change the same attribute of all the objects of that type at the same time E Changing Attributes PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 First select an object to change its attributes O20 Selecine In this case an unfilled rectangle drawn with a solid line Objects While the attributes of Grouped ob jects generally cannot be changed 2 Select the Edit
241. al value data will be written to the LS area as follows The Total values Total Average Max and Min are all written as 32 bit data Also the Total values will be written from the left column All values except Data and Item will be automatically shifted to the left in a column Write to LS area 0 Ist column s 1stcolumn s values Ist column s i 4 2nd column s i 2nd column s values 6 2nd column s i 8 3rd column s 9 total value 10 3rd column s 11 average value 3rd column s values Se Note If the size of the Total value data exceeds the LS Area size that data cannot XVX be transmitted LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 45 10 2 Logging Si o Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES WEY gt Display Settings E Display Settings In the Display Settings dialog box the settings made in the Display tab can be viewed and edited Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display write Settings M Display ON OFF Row Settings IY Display Block Mame Display Setting dialog box Column Settings IY Display Block Name No of Block Name Rowe No of Char ltem No of Data Rowe No of Data Col No of Calc Rowe No of Char Dats 78 a Preview l Display Settings Data Char Size Option Add Copy Paste Cut OOOO meen fate Tin Value Item E i ee e te When using lo
242. ams Pro face LT Editor menu Then click on the Readme selection For detailed information on LT series of operator interfaces please refer to the LT Series User s Manual Separately sold LT Editor Describes the operating procedures for the LT E ditor and Operation Manual all functions exceptfor Logic Program development this manual provided as a PDF file Describes logic program development The manual LT Editor consists of two parts Programming which focuses on the tutorial lesson to help users to learn the operation Included on procedures and Functions which explains the sofware CD Rom Manual setings required for the combination of the LT main unit and the LT Editor provided as a PDF file Programming Describes the LT Editor s pre made P arts and symbols alsin provided as P DF data Device PLC Connection Describes the methods for connecting the Device PLC of various manufacturers provided as a PDF file Manual Available on Describes the methods for setting the LT Editor s windows the LT Editor Online Help and dialog boxes instructions and functions of logic screen programs as well as how to seteach driver La e Address settings described in these manuals are for explanatory purposes Note only Appropriate addresses must be set according to your requirements Na Device PLCs Connection Manual e If you have any questions about the contents of this manual please contact your local LT
243. an ID number and Description In this example enter 00000 in the ID field and enter Alarm Display in the Description field o m Descriptiory Alarm Display 4 Select a trigger type In this example select the Bit Rising left side option and designate a bit address M0001 Edge Bit Address 7 ON oF a FE iet itf 5 Create a program in the Action area by clicking the buttons in the Opera tors Statements and Operands areas Action if i w p0200 70 wi L00304 100 w L00300 w LS00300 1 i endif Program Example if w D200 gt 70 If 70C or above w LS 302 100 70C or above alarm message screen No 100 assigned w L 300 w LS300 1 Count up errors endif if w D200 lt 30 lf 30C or below w LS 302 101 30C or below alarm message screen No 101 assigned w L 301 w LS301 1 Count up errors endif LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide yey ee Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script 6 Click on the OK button The ID number and description you have entered will appear in the D Script List window D Scrnpt List D Sicript yam Application Example 2 In this example we create three interlocked switches as shown below Screen SETUP Bit switch Address M0001 Bit operation Set OK Bit switch Address M0002 Bit operation Set RUNNING Lamp Address M00
244. ancel file rebuilding click on Fille Actions Help the icon Rebuild File IC sProgram Files Pro faceLT database Production Process ke Status Total ob MEE inum 5 Select the File menu Exit command or click on the icon and finish the rebuild operation Note When Parts or Tags set up on the LT Editor screens are not displayed on the LT 2 screen or displayed in shapes different from the designated shapes the screen data and part data are not related properly rebuilt the data and then transfer the data again Click on ie and select Transfer Prepare to display the Transfer Settings dialog box Then select Send All Screens option from the Transfer Method field 4 16 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing w Converting Addresses and Device Codes This feature allows you to change a Part s addresses This address conver sion can be performed on either word or bit addresses This command is useful for changing both addresses or an address device code Ee Note When assigning a variable Logic symbol to the address do not perform the Nel Address Block conversion otherwise the operation will fail PROCEDURE 1 Via the Project Manager select the Utility menu Convert Addresses command 2 Select the type of the address conversion to perform Word Address or Bit Address
245. anguage and parameters of the items displayed on the screen easily 4 3 Text Table Editor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 PREFACE Print Function Connect the LT Tool connector to the serial printer using a transfer cable and conversion cable Alarm messages Logging data and hard copies of screens can be printed with the Print function 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup PLC Manual 1 1 4 Content and Range of System Data Area LT Series User s Manual Address Conversion with the Global Cross Reference The desired address can be converted via the global cross reference that lists the address allocation status of the entire Project file 2 9 7 Cross Reference Global Cross Reference List Project Backup Function When saving a Project file a backup of the most recently saved Project file is saved in a backup file bak 4 2 2 Backing up a Project Address Conversion when changing the PLC When changing the PLC types selected in a Project file the conversion pattern can be specified for the available device of the destination PLC The addresses belong to the specified pattern can be converted by one operation The conversion pattern can be edited and appended 4 2 8 Changing the PLC and Addresses E New PLC Protocol e Fenwal Controls of Japan Temperature Controller AL Series e JT Engineering Moisture Meter JE 70 Series e Yasukawa Electric Inverter Variable Speed G7 F7 Series VS mini V
246. ansferred The desired project file does not display as a LTE file during project selection or an existing screen s number is not displayed when you try to open that screen You cannot select a project file when you try to perform the Select Project command i e the LT Editor program cannot recognize the project file as a LTE file When you try to open a file an error message appears indicating that the file 1s damaged 9 Parts placed on the LT Editor program screen cannot be displayed on the LT unit or a different screen than desired is displayed on the LT unit i e the relationship between the screen data and Parts data is not correct If this error message is displayed LT Editor program cannot read the target file until this file is rebuilt If a file s data cannot be completely restored with the Rebuild tool the system treats this data as abnormal data and deletes it In this case you must edit this LTE file using LT Editor program after the Rebuild command is performed Ties File Rebuilding requires approximately three times the hard disk space 2 occupied by the Project file 4 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Rebuilding General description of the Rebuild screen is as follows a2 Rebuild File Actions Help A p gt EM e Rebuild File D ProPBWinkdatabase Process prw
247. aph Settings Attributes Pie Graph Settings PFI_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Enter the Select the Pie graph s 5 Display Direction Axis Divisions Graph s data ie number of display CI kus From Bottom divisions Direction Display Here the graph s data display start point either Clkws From Top or Clkws From Bottom can be selected La If Display Direction is changed for a 3D part its shade is rotated along with Note that part To let the shade displayed properly click on the button and select the part again from Shape Browser Axis Divisions The number of segments the Pie Graph will be divided into is entered here If the number of Axis Divisions is specified as 10 10 division lines will be displayed When no divisions are necessary simply enter 0 E Pie Graph Shape Color Attributes A Pie Graph s border color division line color Axis Color data display color Graph Color Fg and Bg and data display pattern can all be selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Pie Graph Alarm Settings Attributes Clicking on the Alarm Display check box will call up the Alarm Settings 2 1Parts Setting Alarms 2 38 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Pie Graph The procedure for placing a Pie Graph is shown below Data stored in D00102 displays on the Pie Graph sd
248. arco No of Char 180 When using 32 bit data the relationship between the top and bottom of the Word Address will differ depending on the Device PLC used Device PLC Connection Manual Se When the No of Display Digits is set to 5 and the Decimal Places is set to 2 a value appears on the Keypad Input Display as shown below Character Size The label s character size is selected here 2 2 9 Text E Keypad Display Color Shape Attributes The Keypad Display s border color data display color Text and interior color Plate are selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Keypad Input Display Alarm Settings Attributes Set up alarms if necessary 2 1 Parts Selecting Alarms LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 67 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Keypad Display Extend Attributes Use this tab to designate the Input Style Display Style and Interlock func tion Keypad Input Display Settings KD_O01 2 Auto Clear ON 0 Auto Clear amp Input Check Preview fe Shift Right Zero Suppress 4 Shift Left Zero Display ele H Interlock Display Style Specify the Display Style mieie dakjes Epon FE Specify the ON OFF status Touch available eonaltion of the Interlock function a oe This function can be set up only when the pop up keypad is used Input Style e Auto Clear OFF The previous input is not cleared and displayed
249. ared When using a monochrome LT select Black LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 19 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Switch Settings File Display FD_001 Send To Device PLC From SRAM Se General Settings Display Style Colarl Switch Settings SwitchT ype Calor lected Automatic Switch Placement Method Send To SRAM From Device PLC e Se SRAM gt Estemal Device METETE lected Extemal Device SRAM LI LS gt Sete Rat up I Exemalbevieeo Us Roll Up Not selected L L5 gt Evenal Devin Roll Down Not selected Send To LS From SRAM Not selected Send To SRAM From LS Not selected Send To LS From Device PLC Not se lected Sending To Device PLC From LS Not selected Switch Type Color File Display FD_001 Border Color Select the desired color Select the desired color for the Filing Name Display s border General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings Switch T ype Color Border Color BOOB Noek E Place Click on the Place button to display the Filing Name Display If desired change the Part s size via its sizing handles E 1234567890 or 2 TA J DEW ora kd To change the Filing Name Display s layout or attributes first ungroup it re E Filing Data Transmission Flow LT E xte rnal Device Internal memory Filing data 10 20 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation
250. arts Function Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS The Word Switch s functions are as follows Word Set Add Sub Digit ADD Digit SUB E Word Switch When the Word Switch is pressed constant data is written to the Device PLC s designated Word Address Fixed or default values will be written to the timer counter etc Every time the Word Switch is pressed the Data value is added to the data currently in the Device PLC s designated Word Address and the result is then written to the Device PLC s address If a Data value is positive the function will increment and if it 1s negative it will decrement Every time the Word Switch is pressed the designated decimal place s data will be added by the Constant s value The result will not be carried up to the next digit so 9 simply rolls around to 0 Select the data format from Bin and BCD Every time the Word Switch is pressed the designated decimal place s data will be subtracted by the Constant s value The result will not be carried down to the lower digit so 9 simply rolls around 0 Select the data format from Bin and BCD Shape Color Attributes Here a Word Switch s color and pattern can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on the Switch s settings such as its shape and Change State condition E Word Switch Label Attributes Here the te
251. ary items Cut Copied or Pasted between the screen and the Browser Simply select the desired Library item and perform the com mand 2 Select a Library Item to be read out from the Browser When calling up an item from a file different than the currently dis played file click on the icon to bring up a file list 3 Drag the Library item to the desired position in the 2 4 Libraries drawing area E Switching Library files The Library item can be placed on any open screens and will be displayed in the drawing area If desired use the sizing handles to alter the item s size The Library item s top left corner is the placement point Parts Special Library Window Help To cancel the placement click on the screen editor s icon TUM S 11 operation To change a Li brary item s size refer to 2 3 3 p Scaling Up Down ats Special Library Window Help gt l my Ba Items called up are automatically grouped They can be freely edited after ungrouping them by clicking on the icon 2 3 13 Group Ungroup Grouped library items containing Parts cannot be scaled up or down 2 190 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS When a Library that contains Parts is called up the Confirm Device Address screen will appear After entering each Part s address click on the button To cancel these settings click on the
252. as been newly created when you attempt to create or select another Library file a prompt will appear asking if whether the new file is to be saved or not When is clicked on the Save As Dialog box will appear E Saving a Library File Under Another Name Here the Library File will be saved under a different name PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Save As command from the Library Browser s File menu 2 The currently selected Library file name and its com The file name can be input within ment data if any will appear 255 characters including a path and Input a new file name and change the desired settings extension Save As savein Blew MAE Op5 objb cpw Op5 objc cpw Op5 objd cpw Cp Op5 obje Productic File name Production cpw Swe Save ag type Windows Library Files cpw i Cancel Description Production Process Library Parts 3 Click on the Seve button to save the Library When a project with the same name already exists a prompt asking whether the new name should overwrite the old name will appear to do so click on the button When you do not want to overwrite click on the button AN C Program Files Pro face LT cow Production cpw already exists Do vou want to replace it LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 197 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items E Quitting the Library Browser PROCEDURE REMARKS
253. ated printer name Property dialog box If this box is pece Oyon checked instead personal com of pilnling a purer hard copy the Click on this Lexmark Optra S 1620 data is saved as button to display Type Lesmark Optra 1620 a RTF text file the Cover Page Where pro 93F6 pr_ pt RTF and dialog box a can be edited _ with other text Me editing software Humber Of Copies Comments on the data printed can Cover Page eae ee Comment Info oea be entered to be Enter the printed out along oa dE number of with the data To copies to be print comments printed the check this box default setting Click on this ial ene display A cover page with a title company name a a Text il ani date time name and a bit map can be able to be itai adati included with the document printer R re The printing setting information can be saved by clicking on the NG button e The printing orientation is Vertical Portrait e Only A3 BL or AJ paper can be used for printing LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 9 PRINTING Cover Page Dialog Box Check this box to Cover Page print a title on the cover page Enter a title ora company name of up to 3 lines 40 charac ters per line T Date amp Time C Name a a oe Check this box to include the date and L Bitmap time of printing on CDC Browse Laow E COVER P
254. ation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Drawing Circle Oval or Filled Circle Filled Oval PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Circle Oval or Filled Circle Filled Oval command or click on the or icon 2 Click on a point a and drag the mouse on a diago nal axis in the Mark drawing area 3 Click on the end point b If you press and hold the Ctrl key in A circle or oval is defined step 2 you can draw a circle mr BEEEEEEEE Bee BERR EEEEEE BERR Be BEREEREEEEEE SERRE BP se BERBER dB P te Fy TT TT BERR hve SERRE eee ptt T tee eT 3 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 E Filling a Mark PROCEDURE 1 Select the Draw menu Fill command or click on the icon 2 Click inside the area to be filled The specified area will be filled LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Creating a Mark the Mark Screen REMARKS If you click on a line the filling mode cannot be executed Be sure to click inside a completely en closed area if you do not the en tire Mark screen may be filled 3 9 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Entering Text The Text mode allows you to enter text on a Mark screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Text command or click
255. backup function settings Error Display Reset settings Watch Dog settings Communication monitoring between the LT and the Device PLC Communication Monitoring Period settings Designate transmis sion wait time Printing settings Settings for printing functions with Tool connec tor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 PREFACE 12 Logic Program Restrictions Variables Logic symbols are processed in 32 bit order Values different from the input values may display during monitoring due to the difference in the real number accuracy between a personal com puter and the LT If the LT s logic time scan time becomes too long the sampling time designated for the trend graph may not be accurately maintained All LT Retentive Variable data is retained by SRAM backup memory that uses a lithium battery The battery s back up period lasts approximately 60 days in its initial condition fully charged and approximately 6 days when the battery life is almost finished If you need to back up data for a longer period you need to either use back up data in your host computer or configure the Editor system so that the Editor can back up data LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE TABLE OF CONTENTS PREFACE cave seacoscawaaysaeevsonedesaves vadessernsessaus sacevsceseussues voceseceeses E I EE 1 MT AG CTA Ri OCS era veesa nce N E N A A E N E 2 Manual Symbols and
256. be placed on the drawing screen simply by selecting the desired part from the palette and placing it on the screen with drag amp drop opera tion The Parts menu s commands are effective only on Base screens Usage Pattern Decide on Select the specific Place it Specify its Parts gt atypeof Part from the gt Attributes on the Part Browser Screen or Select a desired icon from the Parts Tool Bar Place the part on the Screen with drag amp drop operation Select the desired part Specify the eParts Pal arts Palette Attributes E LT Editor Part Type Summary Each of the Parts used in LT Editor is listed below Icon Name Function Reference i al a Address data E ea Montane Address data Used to go back to the previous screen E to switch screens and to reset the LT Lamp Tums ON or OFF according to whether 2 1 4 Lamps aa the Extemal Device s Monitor Bit is ON or OFF Bar Graph Displays the External Device s Word Peemot istnae dana berger o Pie Graph Displays the Extemal Device s Word 2 1 6 Pie Graphs eee liainasdaminaphgngh ne Half PieGraph _ Displays the Extemal Device s Word Displays the Extemal Device s Word 2 1 8 Meters Address data in a Meter graph Trend Graph Displays the Extemal Device s Word 2 1 9 Trend Graphs Address data as absolute values ina trend graph i Keypad Used to enter a Extemal Device s W ord Address data AkO Keypads B il
257. between Libraries for their size When the Adjust to Fit function is selected the Library item will be enlarged until it fits inside the Library window s borders When Full Screen is selected the Library item will be displayed in its actual LT screen size Library Type When the pull down View menu s All Objects Part Objects or Graphic Objects is selected the Library type s shown on the Browser can be selected All Objects Displays all the Library items in the selected Library file Part Objects Displays only those items that are Parts in the selected Library file Graphic Objects Displays only those items which are not Parts in the selected Library file LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 183 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items E Switching Library Files Creating a New Library File When the icon is clicked on or the pull down File menu s New command is selected the Dialog box shown below will appear When a Description is input and the button is clicked on a new Library file will appear Selecting Calling Up another Library File When the icon is clicked on or the pull down File menu s Select File command is selected the Library file list will appear By selecting dragging the desired Library file from this list other Library files can be called up SP te Library files for GP PRO PBIII for Windows Digital Electronics
258. button 2 3 15 Changing Attributes Address Confirmation When the Library placed on the screen is double clicked on the Confirm Device Address dialog box shown below will appear allowing you to change the Part s previously entered addresses Confirm Device Address Bit Address x00042 Bit Set C ema TL Address Range Conversion E Using the Cut Copy and Paste Functions Library items can be Cut Copied and Pasted from the screen drawing area to the Browser First select the desired Library item in the drawing area and Cut or Copy it then Paste it to the Library Browser LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 191 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items 2 4 3 Editing Library Items Library Items can be Edited Deleted Copied Cut or Pasted E Editing a Library Item Here a registered Library item is edited PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select and double click the Library item to be edited In order to call up a Library item from the Browser from a Library file which is differ ent from the currently displayed aj file click on the z icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files When double clicking on a Library item s title the title editing screen will appear Prop erty Screen L Important 3 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Save Once an item is edited it command or click on the icon on the Main Tool C2NNOt be Undone Ba
259. cates that this Part is a Bit Indicates the placement Switch creation order of the Part in Varies according to the Part this case it is the 10th The ID number is displayed in the title bar at the top of the Setting dialog box Bit Switch Settings B5_001 Se ee General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Description Operation Bit Address a FE A L Monitor konitan Bik ddiess R re The ID number can be entered so that it is displayed during Base screen w drawing 2 7 2 Screen Property Settings Even if the ID number is entered to be displayed during Base screen draw ing it will not be displayed on the LT panel after screen data transfer lt ID Number List gt gt PartName ID Number Bs ws Lamp Pecah e HatPieGaph eooo O SSC Kya ooo i e Keypad Input Display o AlamDispay a File Name Display om Data Logging Display L67 Numeric Display me Message Display Operation Mode Word MW WindowPats O w LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 13 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Maximum Number of Automatically Created Part Libraries When a Part is used in a project a Part Library will be automatically created in preparation for data transfer The number of Part Library items are limited to 6000 per project If this number exceeds 6000 all Parts in excess of 6000 cannot be transferred to the LT To avoid this please remember the following 1 Auto
260. ch 3 Open a desired Library file and via the Library To register the Library item to a Browser select the Edit menu Paste command new Library file click on the or click on the icon icon To register the Library item to a Li The following steps are the same as those used for a brary file different from the cur Library Item registration rently displayed one click on the 4 Input the Item s Cell Number and Description icon In the Register Number area the smallest number in the currently open Library file s empty numbers will be au tomatically displayed To change it input the desired number 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files Cell Number Description zw 2 194 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the button to register the Library Item The registered Library will be displayed on the Browser Gull cpw production File Edit View Window Help E Copying a Library Item Here a previously registered Library item will be copied PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Open the desired Library Item s Library file and se In order to call up a Library item lect the Library item from the Browser from a Library file different than the currently displayed Library file A 100 switch click on the icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files 2 Via the Library Browser s
261. ch 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS E Changing a Password The registered password can be changed or canceled PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Setup menu Password command 3 In order to change a password you must first en ter the currently registered password Change Password Please Enter Hew Password Please Re enter New Password 4 Enter a new password Change Password Please Enter Password Please Enter New Password Please Re enter New Password 5 Enter the same password again for confirmation and To cancel the password after en tering the currently registered pass word in step 2 DO NOT enter a new password in step 3 and sim ply click on the button Change Password Please Enter Password Please Enter Mew Password Please Re enter New Password then click on the ox __ button Change Password Please Enter Password Please Enter New Password Please Re enter New Password 7 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs ex Transfer Preparation The Project File LTE file data created with the
262. change click on the lal icon LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 167 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing yee Group Ungroup This function can be used to group multiple objects enabling you to manipulate the group as a single object even after changing screens or using a different editing function E Grouping Objects PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the objects to be Grouped 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Group command or click To cancel the Grouping click on the on the 3 icon icon Ge te When a Load Screen is included in a group its handles appear as _ so that NY the objects cannot be scaled up down Thus you must first ungroup the objects in order to scale any individual object When a Part is included in a group double click on the group to bring up the Confirm Device Address dialog box where address changes can be made 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 168 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Ungrouping Objects This function changes a Group of objects to a selection of multiple objects PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select a group of objects 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Ungroup command or click To cancel the ungrouping click on on the 82 icon the a icon LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manu
263. change the Device PLC type click on the desired external device Change Device PLC Type Device PLC Type FUJI INVERTER FUJI TEMPERATURE PsA MEMORY LINE SIO T When no Device conversion patterns are set The conversion operation applies to 3 Click on the COo button all addresses in the selected Project except for addresses that have been Change Device PLC Type registered as symbols Device PLC Type MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES TL Convert Address 4 Click on the oK button to exit the setting dia Once you change a project s De log box vice PLC type you must re enter that project s device addresses for PLC diff t Es 5 d chained Na Es Tags D script and alarms Save Save As Ple Type different fram previous each screen separately again when type Address conversion may have produced invalid addresses the Function Switch set up with the Change Screen function is used on the screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 31 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS When Device conversion patterns are set The conversion operation applies to 3 Put a check mark in the Convert Address checkbox all addresses in the selected Project and click on the ok button except for the addresses that have registered as symbols Change Device PLC Type Device PLC Type MITSUBISHI FREGROL SERIES Convert Address Convert
264. com mand 2 Click on the cow button D Script List D Script 0000 Pumo ON 3 When the button is clicked on the D Script This D Script can also be copied to copied in step 2 will be added The D Script s ID another screen number will automatically be assigned to the small est number currently available B Scrpt List O Sccript 2 208 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yaw D Script Commands You can enter D Script commands Statements and constants using D Script tool box E D Script Tool Box The D Script tool box contains icons for D Script commands and State ments and constant input icons When the tool box check box is checked the following tool box will appear Word Address Ea E D Script Toolbox Statements ements iF E jiro else if if endif When a condition enclosed with brackets becomes true the process following the if statement is executed The As sign character cannot be used in a con ditional expression if else if else endif When a condition enclosed with brackets becomes true the process following the if statement is executed When the con dition is false the statement after else is executed The Assign cannot be used in a conditional expression loo r For details about the execution path refer to 3 1 8
265. correct password on the 43 icon three times or more data transfer can not be performed In this case repeat the transfer procedure from step 2 3 Enter the registered password and click on the l button to confirm it Invalid Password The data transfer operation will start Please Retype password Cancel Password Entry Enter Password To cancel data transfer mode click Ce on the icon 4 After screen data transfer is completed select the Transferring Data and Logic Programs menu Exit command or click on the icon LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 11 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS IRA When Sending Logic Programs You can also send logic programs alone to the LT that has been already set up Logic programs can be transferred from the Logic Program Editor as well 7 2 7 Sending Programs with the Logic Program Editor a Before sending logic programs alone be sure to select the All important Send command 7 2 4 When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT PROCEDURE 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Oth erwise via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Only Control Send command or click on the icon If a password has been registered enter the pa
266. creen Image Screen Window Screen eee eo oa atem niormaiorn Filing Data a Overvrite Merge Overwrite t Merge Data Loging Settings D Script Functions Text Table data Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT REMARKS 4 10 g Destination Image screen number 1 exists Oo you want to overwrite A S Yesai p No all LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE 7 Click on the Coo button to exit the screen copy mode The number of screens copied will be displayed in the dialog box Screen Copy Base Screens Copied 0 Mark Screens Copied 0 Image Screens Copied 0 Window Screens Copied 0 System Information Copied 1 Data Sampling Information Copied 0 D Sicript Functions Copied 0 Global D 5cript Coped 0 Data Logging Settings Copied 0 Data Text Table Settings Copied 0 Filing Information Copied 0 Screen Copy Source Evenierre e 1 All a Screens From jE r E Screen Type HAI 1 Base Screen Mark Screen Image Screen ten Window Screen System normato Data Sampling fo Overvnite 9 Merge Script Functions fe Ovenwite 2 Merge Global D Script fo Overatite ty Merge LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Destination 4 Manufacturing System Start From i i Filing Data e Overnvite 2 Merge Data Loging Settings Text Table data 4 1 Screen Editing REMARKS
267. creen Window Screen Alan Massage Sampling Data L Eiling Data Data Logging Settings Global D 5 cript O Serpt Function Bit Address After Start Address ocon Ee Screen Range ie All Selection Screens From i To Line Mo From To REMARKS important Do not convert addresses on 2 000 screens or more at a time Otherwise the memory capacity might run short af ter this conversion If this memory shortage occurs re start the LT Editor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Click on the Start button The progress of the address conversion will be displayed Conversion Status Converted Screens alo Ld 8 To stop the address conversion prior to normal completion click on the Close button Conversion Status Converted Screens 4 2 5 Convert Load Screens This feature allows you to convert the currently loaded screens to different ones via the Load Screen command all at once E Load Screen and Search Screen Settings Here specify the screens to be converted Enter the numbers of the Search Screens on which Load Screens have been called up and called up Load Screens Specify the Load Screen Conversion range of Load Load Screen Hos Convert t Screens before Betre Screen Type conversion StatNo I _ End Mo L Mark Specify the Top ames Help Spec
268. creen change priority is higher the data being input will be ignored so please use with caution e Ending data write causes the System Area s Status 03 bit to reverse Using this you can figure out the data write timing Display Style e Shift Left e Shift Right Select the display style from the Shift Left and Shift Right The data will appear starting from the side designated here The Shift Right is selected by default e Zero Suppress Select this option to omit the leading zeros of display data E g When the Display Length is 4 and the Zero Suppress is NOT selected 25 appears as 0025 e Zero Display When this option is clicked and the host PLC data is 0 the value O will not display Interlock Only when the pop up keypad is used Only when a bit designated via Interlock Address is in a state that has been selected via Touch available condition the pop up keypad becomes effec tive Whether the pop up keypad is effective in ON state or in OFF state is selectable here Touch Available Interlock Address Touch Available Condition e oo NotAvailable BItON Touch Available Available 59 ree Not Available ON _ fT ouch Not Available BLOF OF Touch Available LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 69 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Keypad Display 2 1 Parts The Keypad Display s placement procedures are shown below PROCEDURE 1 Select the Parts me
269. creens created with the LT Editor on the LT unit or to run the created logic program on the LT unit you must first transfer data to the LT Conversely you can also transfer the data stored in the LT unit back to the LT Editor This chapter describes how to transfer data to and from the LT unit UM E A E Prior to Transferring Data e E N Transferring Data and Logic Programs pA E E N A A E A A Options LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 1 7 1 Prior to Transferring Data Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS fam Prior to Transferring Data 7 1 1 LT Screen Transfer Cable You must first connect the Data Transfer Cable to the LT unit and your personal computer before you can transfer screen data Personal Computer PC or Lap top Screen transfer cable Dsub 9 pin socket To LT s Tool Connector e To transfer LT Editor data to the LT unit the optional screen transfer cable GPW CBO2 is required This cable does not Important Come with any interface conversion adapter for the personal computer Supply a connector conversion adapter compatible with the interface of your personal computer e File Transfer requires approximately three times the hard disk space occupied by the Project file te e Use a pin adapter that fits your personal computer s serial port NG e If a serial mouse is used be sure to connect the cable from the LT unit to a differ
270. ct Editing PROCEDURE Excluding Objects From A Multiple Selection 2 When multiple objects are selected to de select an object while preserving the selection of the other ob jects first move the cursor over the object then while holding down the key left click on the object When the object s handles disappear that object is no longer selected Repeat this process as many times as desired Adding Objects To A Multiple Selection 2 When multiple objects are selected to add an object either left click on the object or Left drag over it while holding down the key The imaginary box that encloses the multiple selec tion represented by its own handles will expand to in clude the added object which now has handles Using this process you can add as many objects to the multiple selection as you want _ LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 147 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS Selecting One Object in a Multiple Selection 2 First make a multiple selection then click on the Selection Tool box s icon All the objects in the multiple selection will become de selected except for one If you wish to re select all the objects originally in the multiple selection click on the Selection Tool box s oar button 3 Use the and gt icons to scr
271. ct grid pattern display style from Dot and Line lt When selecting Dot gt lt When selecting Line gt me Screen Property Settings Here the screen display s environment is set up which effects both the method used to draw screens and displaying the Part addresses The user s work environment can be modified whenever necessary helping to reduce the time required for drawing Select the pull down menu Option s Screen Property command E Setting Screen Property Display The display state displayed or not of the items such as object Fill and setting information on Parts can be selected on the screen Editor Check the box of the items to be displayed When a box is not checked that item will not be displayed The settings on this screen will be applied to all the screens Properties cannot be set up for individual screens Screen Property Fill Point og Multiple open with nestpresy Display in Load Screen Object Load Screen Double Click fe Change Attribute Edit Screen Window Parts Information Data Information Data Size Parts ID m i f Nomal i Small LT Device Address ol Used Hairline Cursor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 243 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 244 Se te The display state of ID numbers and Addresses can also be changed via the w Option tool bar icons Fill a Importa
272. cted Select the directly from the Operation Browser Select a Mode Character Size Address Enter an Address to be monitored Select either Bit Address or Word Ad dress according to operation Mode Border Color The Message Display s Border color can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors Alignment Here the text s alignment can be selected Center Left Mode There are two methods to change messages displayed on the Message Display 1 e via Bit s turning ON OFF and Word state changes Here select either mode Mode When selecting Bit Messages will change according to the specified Bit Address changes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide a Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Mode When selecting Word Messages will change according to the state changes of the desig nated bits consecutively from the specified Address s OO bit According to the number of the messages either 2 4 8 or 16 a bit is automatically assigned from the specified Address s 00 bit Numbers of Messages Number of Bits Used When the value set in the No of Messages is 16 bits 00 to 03 are used The remaining bits can be used for other purposes When the value set in the Nee No of Messages area is 4 bits 00 and 01 are used 03 02 01 00 When the value set in the No of Messages area is 2 only bit 00 is used When the value set in the No of Messages is
273. ctes 10 27 10 2 2 Loggins Data Kead Pri oats tcosestconeasamatneeaacenesincce Sooaundassdeeunpeaaaieatantenseasaanunones 10 31 102 Daa Lons SeN erai N E AS EE 10 32 10 24 Displiy SCT OS areena a ijamranseatecatuncdbotebeseesinereetand 10 44 APPENDICES wl FPrror IVE CSCS airiran E E EEE ES A 2 A2 Tr oubleshooting 6s cccccassevescecsecascesssesseecsscncesssseaaetcsscnssessuecseeesscoceeassvesetcsvoseeeassess A 17 A 3 Address Conversion Tables ssssssssceeeecccccccccooossssssssececeecccososssssssssssssssseeeee A 19 A4 Softw re Trouble KD OLE cccescsccscescessccoscensscesetaxedossecacensceiesvestennssesstaxevesaeeassess A 25 18 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide LED LT EDITOR FUNDAMENTALS f his chapter describes LT Editor basic operations such as how to start and quit the software It also explains the Project Manager and Screen Editor areas which are used for the majority of screen creation work Also a number of tools are introduced here such as online help which provide explanations of LT Editor functions and operations LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide From Start to Finish Project Manager Logic Program Editor Screen Editor LO Saceeecessavaseceesenccssssxsevececuies LT Editor Manuals and Help 1 1 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 1 Overview 1 2 The LT provides I O control functions and can also be used as an operating swich and a display LT Editor i
274. d The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted 2 154 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 1 Pasting Instruction Data By copying and pasting to the Screen Editor a logic program instruction created with the Logic Program Editor you can place a Part corresponding with the instruction In the same way copying and pasting to a logic program a Part placed on the screen inserts an instruction corresponding with the Part E Conversion between Instructions and Parts Each instruction and part has counterparts that have been already determined Conversion from Instructions to Parts Below 1s the list of Parts to which each instruction is to be converted instruction Conversion from Parts to Instructions Below is the list of Instructions to which each Part is to be converted NO a Contact NC b Contact PT StartUp Contact NT Start Down Contact NO a Contact NC b Contact PT StartUp Contact NT Lamp StartDown Contact OUT M OutCoil NEG NM Reverse Coil SET SM SetCoil RST RM ResetCoil Numeric Display Graph Keypad Input ICTU Up Counter CTD Down Counter CTUD Updown Display Counter TON
275. d Information Communications Pot 4 Upload Information com I with the data transfer jw System Screen Baud Rate msx Fl bos cable aan RewCount E E Select a transfer j Transter Method S peed z Select the transfer 2 Send All Screens mode i Send User Selected Screens Setup sutomatoSeup seners Program YH Sends the simulation 2 Force System Setup L Simulation protocol to the LT Select the setup mode 0 Do NOT Perform Setup unit Setup CFG file MY Reference em Over Locate the setup Erstis view information file Selecion _ EXPROGRAM FLES PRO FACE UT procedi Browse Transferring Information Send Information Upload Information System Screen Control Data Upload Information Check this box if you wish to send upload information to receive data from the LT unit Upload parameter data must be included to Receive data from the LT unit If the LT unit s memory is insufficient to include the important Upload parameter data data can still be transferred from your personal computer to the LT unit However if the upload pa rameter data is omitted your personal computer cannot re ceive data from the LT unit System Screen Check this box if you wish to transfer LT system settings information along with other data to the LT unit LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic
276. d by file numbers for each project file Filing data can be stored in the LT s internal memory Filing data is stored in the Device PLC in a series of addresses Setting up filing data so that it is transmitted via an LS Area allows filing data to be edited on the LT panel and then written to the Device PLC LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe 10 1 1 Filing Data Recipe Function E Filing Data Transfer Flow Filing data is first written from the LT s internal memory then to the LT s backup SRAM and then is transferred to the Device PLC either directly or via the LS area LT Internal memory Backup SRAM lt Filing data External Device E Managing Filing Data in Group Filing data is organized into folders files blocks and data Also to use as much filing data as possible multiple folders can be used in the LT s inter nal memory to register multiple filing data items You can register multiple folders by selecting Use Multiple Folders from the Filing Settings menu Folder 1 Folder 2 When multiple folders are not used Only 1 folder is registered In this case the folder number is usually not designated however whenever it is necessary the number is designated as 1 When multiple folders are used Multiple filing data folders can be registered In the LT the folder numbers
277. d position HO wab l When the Pattern check box is checked a a filled square will be drawn When select 4 ing a beveled square a beveling dot can be i Ee ithe entered Select and enter the line type or fill pattern when selecting a pattern color a ig attributes and start and end coordinates v1 v2 2 216 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script w 5 E P Fo MN N eee E di i jm eK Cancel one Memory Control lt Offset Address gt D Script Toolbox Functions Memo Ops F Memon Set Offset Address Statements Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Polyline Draws a line at the designated position Designate the line s type color attributes and start and end coordinates Dot Draws a dot at the designated point Des ignate a dot type its X Y coordinates and its display color 2 3 and 5 dot groups cannot be selected Offset Addresses Offset Addresses can be designated Only temporary Word Addresses can be designated for offset value storage Ad dresses The offset Address format is as follows Word Address Offset Value Storage Address Format Word Address Offset Value Storage Address lt Constant Data Entry Ranges gt Data Format One enan eins OSC PO 4294967295 Bing eo o econ of _ sann00a LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 217 C
278. d screen is rotated 90 Therefore you Important must also edit the screen using the Rotate command After editing be sure to check that the displayed data is as desired Example ple ABc E C gt 9 an lt Horizontal type Vertical type LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 29 4 2 Project Editing 4 30 Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT wes Changing Your Project s Device PLC Type and Addresses The PLC type selected in the current project and the available addresses can be changed This function is enabled only when using LT Type C Nate To change the Device PLC type save the Device PLC type you have changed XVl via the Project menu Save As command MEZANI 1 1 2 Saving a Project File under a Different File Name E Changing the Device PLC type The PLC type can be changed in the following dialog box Change Device PLC Type x Add a check mark k Ei to display a screen Device PLC Type that allows you to y MITSUBISHI MELSEC amp nA LINK F Select the de configure the conversion pattern of available de vices sired PLC type from the drop l Convert Address down list ca e E Setting the Device Conversion Pattern The conversion operation of available devices is executed when the PLC type is changed The Conversion Pattern should be registered in order to convert the avail able device Ole For efficient setup operations arrange the fo
279. d square automatically Right after the Library item s is are placed the background square will match the size of the largest Library item designated After the items are placed it can be scaled larger or smaller independently from the Library items For a state with no designated Library item only a background square will be displayed and it will become the Library s deletion screen 1 e it will be overlaid on top of an existing item to delete that item 2 112 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Picture Display The Picture Display s creation procedure is shown below State 0 State 1 State 2 State 3 The 3 pictures registered as libraries as illustrated above will change in response to changes in the state of Word Address D00250 PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Picture Display command or click on the Zm icon 2 In the General Settings area enter an Address and select a Mode Picture Display Settings LE_001 l General Settings Library Image Enter D00250 Description Address Mode Select Word 3 In the Library Image area input the No of library items No of Lib used Picture Display Settings Lw_002 Enter 4 General Settings Library Image ot anes Erase Color Fo LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 113 Chapter 2 CREATI
280. ddress Address to currently se E Z Display Mode store graph lected Part Data Format Dan data here Calls up the Part tee Select the Shape Browser ron Part Shapes can be 7 scigeisd directly data format from here Absolute Data stored in the Word Address is displayed in absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Here enter the Word Address used for storing the Bar Graph s data Data Format The display data s format can be either Bin or BCD When Bin is selected negative numeric data can also be displayed In that case check the Display Mode check box LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Zi Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts lt When displaying Device PLC Word Address numeric data in relative values gt l l Select the Relative value display Enter comment Used to store the data here i Graph Settings BA_001 graph s data General Settings Graph Settings ShapeColor Alarm Settings E z n z Description Ea Absolute P elative ter the desired Displays the pooo A Word Address currently se bes a s TE I Display Mode lected Part i Bit Length Select the 7 aaa ee display data s Calls up the 7 Minvave Od ie pail format Part Shape Browser Mas Value pas G i MSE sss ae J Browser Part a Select the data s Shapes can be Input Code selected di rect
281. ddress that will be turned ON when filing data trans mission 1s completed A e Use binary numbers to designate file and block numbers e If data transmission cannot be performed LS2032 s Bit 10 is turned ON To transmit data to the Device PLC use either your standard communica tion cycle time or 150ms whichever is longer as the trigger OFF time For Communication cycle time details Device PLC Connection Manual 1 1 4 2 1 3 Special Relay Ln Transmit Completed Bit Address LS2032 Bit 10 Normal daia anan ion Data transmission error ON LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 11 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES OAE Filing Data List Filing Settings can be added edited and deleted on the Filing Data List screen Usage Pattern Screen ADD or Close Filing Data Filing List gt Egitor gt or Esc Setu Pl Delete E Filing Data List Below is the overview of the screen on which you can make filing settings When using a single folder Filing Data List Adds folder and file settings Add Edits folder and file contents Copies folder and files Pastes copied folders and files Deletes folders and files Lists registered filing settings When using multiple folders Internal Memory indicates the screen data stored in the internal memory 1 Filing Data folder indicates the File Settings Adds
282. de APPENDICES Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables E Shinkoh Technos C FC FIR GC FCL PC 900 Series ee O Before SetingValeMemoy O O oo Conversion Chame O O O O tsaeals jo ojo o E Fenwal Controls of Japan Temperature Controller AL Series All Devices _ Before All All Devices QO E JT Engineering Moisture Meter JE 70 Series After Conversion Before Conversion R olol lo o LS Area el ee E i Electric r FVR Series After Conversion EJ C P H A oj S M LS a mental remmarealsTo o ofolelololo o Control Function C mene ol ofojofofojo o ofo H c 2 d gt c O O ho O Gam aa mme ofofo olofolo loole Monitor Data M System Area LS LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 25 Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables APPENDICES E Fuji Electric Micro Controller X E Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC F gt After Conversion XY N S Tacrs Cciccics D LS meray sf ele comity e ale cae Relay Keep T T si ITS Timer C CC CS Counter D Data Register LS System Area a Oo hen cd gt c O O hm O wj aa Appendix 26 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables E Mitsubishi Electric MELSEC FX After Conversion pY M Ss TSN CSN D LS rst ofofo Tee optre 292e
283. ding to the specified file size PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 First click the Windows Start button Then click on the Programs Pro face LT Editor menu and click the 3 Pack Tool menu item You can also se lect 3 Pack Tool from the Utility pull down menu Accessories statUp 28 Favorites aey Documents Lagic Program Pro face Type Portrait MEMORY LINK SIO Type 4 40 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 Project Compression Decompression PROCEDURE REMARKS 2 Select the Action menu Compress Project File command or click on the icon 3 Select the folder and project file to be compressed To call up a menu of all the avail or enter the file name able folders click on the Browse The file name of the desired project file will be displayed Banoi in the Pack screen Pack Project File File Name C SPragram Files Pro face LT database E Separate File 1 44 ME e 4 To divide the project file during compression click When Separate File is selected on the Separate File check box and select the de and the file size is set to 1 44 MB sired file size limit as shown in the left the data will ___ be divided and stored on two or Pack Project File more floppy disks File Name C Program Files Pro faceLT databaze Browse seas rie 144MB
284. ditor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 19 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Transparent Background Color If no dots are turned ON in a block this block becomes transparent When this function is set to Background color a block without any ON dots is displayed in the background color Bg PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Edit menu Background Color com mand or click on the icon 2 Click in the block to be displayed in the background color The border line of the specified block is changed Every time you click in the block the color setting is switched 3 Click the right mouse button to register the above setting E Display When Called Up to a B Base Screen When this function is set to Transparent If at least one dotis ONina These blocks block this block is dis contain played in the background ON dots color d The block with no ON dots becomes transparent and you can see the objects on the base screen When this function is set to Background color The block with no ON dots is displayed in the background color 3 20 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Canceling a Command Undo This function is used to cancel a command and r
285. dress Statements Constant peo fE Select a constant ote To identify data via the input data s format M E g Decimal A numeric value without leading zeros 100 Hexadecimal A numeric value preceding by 0x gt 0x100 Octal A numeric value preceding by a zero 0100 e Calculation examples in hexadecimal and BCD formats Hexadecimal format only Ox270F amp OxFFOO The result is 0x2700 BCD and hexadecimal formats 9999 amp OxFF00 The result is 0x9900 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 215 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Draw D Scrpt Toolbox Circle ons Draws a circle at the designated point When the Pattern check box is checked a filled circle will be drawn Select and enter the line type or fill pat tern when selecting a pattern color at tributes center coordinates and radius value Scrn Load Screen This function is used to call up a previ ously registered Library Item The desig Statements p Operator nated screen Base screen will be called OF up at the designated X Y coordinates Landscape type display 0 0 X X Y coordinates Y Fo iO E E I i mj NEn 639 399 Portrait type display Load Screen Designate X Y coordinates Screen No Jl Al these 639 399 p coordinates Position 320 a Position 7 200 Y 0 0 y Square Rectangle Square Rectangle Ot Draws a square at the designate
286. dress Touch Available Condition Status Not Available ON Touch Available OFF Touch Not Available ON Touch Not Available OFF Touch Available Buzzer Sets the buzzer to ON OFF 2 26 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Function Switch The Screen Switching Function Switch s placement procedure is shown below Pressing this button shifts to screen B10 PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Function Switch command or click on the icon 2 Designate the Function on the General Settings tab Function Switch Settings F5_001 General Settings apeColor Labe stern Description bar TET z j Select Go To ft 0 Previous Screen A fel Go To Screen B fe Bin i BCD Screen Reset Display Unil 0 File Name Key oie Select Bin Off line Enter 10 H Help 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser Wee 2 1 Part Select Specify settings for Shape Color Label and Extension ing a Part Shape Settings if necessary Shape Browser Curent POE File c program files pro Facethpdb odb p Title SW _30001 F Hee 4 After all of Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Switch s outline will appear in the Base screen next to your cursor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Zand
287. e 2 76 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS The Pop up Keypad is displayed as a local window When two local windows are already displayed on the screen the Pop up Keypad does not appear even if the Keypad Input Display is touched In this case the Keypad Input Display will not wait for input When the pop up keypad and other windows overlap touch the desired window to bring it to the front Do not use a Keypad Input Display that uses the Pop up Keypad for Load Screen Otherwise the Pop up Keypad may not function properly or the Key pad Input Display will not wait for input The tag size of the Keypad Input Display that uses the Pop up Keypad is greater than those without the Pop up Keypad by 60 bytes When the Pop up Keypad is used the Keypad Input Display capacity 1s 276 bytes and 216 bytes when the Pop up Keypad is not used When the Touch Available Condition of the Interlock function is disabled the Pop up Keypad is not displayed When the Touch Available Condition is switched to OFF while input is being made on the Keypad Input Display the Pop up Keypad continues to function Continue the input and confirm the entry with the Enter key as usual or press the Cancel key to cancel the input However note that touching the Keypad Input Display will not cancel the input LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide as Chapter 2 CREATI
288. e 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Mode When selecting Word Library will change according to the state changes of the designated bits consecutively from the specified Address s 00 bit According to the number of the messages either 2 4 8 or 16 a bit 1s auto matically assigned from the specified Address s 00 bit Numbers of Messages Bits Used When the value set in the No of Messages is 16 bits 00 to 03 are used 03 02 01 The remaining bits can be used for other purposes E Picture Display Library Image Attributes Displays the currently selected Library image Reflects the currently selected item s designated state Browser Picture Display Settings LB_ O01 eneral Settings Library Image Library Erase Color SS 00 When the value set in the No of Messages area is 4 bits 00 and 01 are used When the value set in the No of Messages area is 2 only bit 00 is used When the value set in the No of Messages is 8 bits 00 to 02 are used Calls up the Library Browser Library items can be selected directly from here Deletes the currently selected Library item Selects the item s background and foreground colors used for clearing When clicking on the button the Library Browser Library list will appear Select a desired Library from this list and drag it to the inside of the Library image display border on the Dialog box
289. e Here these colors can be changed to remedy that Screen Property Display Color Grid Color ree le Fill Point Color ro A E Screen Background Pattern Ih ERBE E m fo E Bo E eo Grid Color Selects the grid point s color Fill Point Color Fill Points designate the point where a fill will begin this setting determines the color of the fill point Screen Background Select the Base screen s background color the color selected here is also displayed on the LT If any background color is specified for the screen to be loaded no on screen object will be displayed on the LT unit important To load a screen whose background color was specified specify the loading position at the center of the screen 2 246 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques 2 7 PreviewScreen With this feature you can confirm how an image will appear on the LT unit This image will differ depending on each LT display device type Select the View menu s Preview selection Se te Select B W black and white to view the monochrome LT screen image as Preview B1 Swaitch 1 Select the type of display used 2 7 4 Screen Data List The currently displayed screen s object locations and setting attributes are listed in the Screen Data List E Screen Data List An example of the Screen Data List 1s shown below
290. e Message area E Selecting the index character string Entering the index char Message Display Settings W _001 General Settings Messages Enter 16 acter string a Direct 3 Index Mo of Display Messages Characters Message style LEE a Normal Lol efe E Bold Enter 4 i Raised Color Text Color B IOC ek Oo Plate Color I i ek 5 Enter your Alarm Messages Select the message number to be registered and enter the message When displaying a border with no mes sage be sure to delete the words Undefined Select Colors and Character Size if necessary Example When registering the message A Unit Op erating as message Number 1 japon Any characters entered that are over the limit specified in step 4 will be cut from the LT s display Message Display Settings W _001 General Settings Messages Enter A Unit fe Direct 2 Index operation nea Display Selected Message If the text Undefined is not de leted it will be registered and then displayed as a message Messages Characters Message Style Copy from Description Copy to All o i H dah Normal Py Bo olor Lone a Select 1 Text Color I a U a o ek oO Plate Color I BORIC e 6 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Message Display s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Gu
291. e and data length are selected Choose a data format of either Decimal base 10 BCD Hexadecimal base 16 or Octal base 8 With the Code check box checked when you select Decimal negative numeric data can also be displayed te When using a Logic Symbol to Word Address or Trigger Bit Address select Nel 32 Bit data display format 2 94 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS No of Display Digits Here enter the total number of digits used not including the decimal point in the display GX re When the No of Display Digits is set to 5 and the Decimal Places is set to 2 a XVX value appears on the Numeric Display as shown below Decimal Places Here enter the number of digits to be displayed after the decimal point The types of numeric data that can be used with each data format are listed below No of Data Format Code DataLength Display Decimal Alam Range ES Places tonly Otob 65535 32768 to 32767 0 to 4294967295 2147483648 to 2147483647 SS e Oto 9999 18 O7 Oto 99999999 ee 32bit 18 OtoFFFFFFFF Octal l6bitony 16 The relationship between upper and lower position Word Addresses when 32 bit data is used will differ depending on each Device PLC Device PLC Connection Manual Character Size The label s Character Size is selected here 2 2 9 Text Display Style Shift Lef
292. e field enter the name of the text file to which the data will be saved Q Click on the Save button to confirm the destina tion file to which the conversion error will be saved Click the 0k button to exit the dialog box PLC types are different Save As Ple Type different from previous type Address conversion may have produced Invalid addresses lt Canceling the PLC and Address Change gt Click on the Cancel button 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 37 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS The PLC Type Change dialog box appears on the screen and the settings are reset to the conversion pattern settings that existed before the conversion V Click on the Cancel button to close all setting screens for changing the PLC LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 Project Compression Decompression 1 Project Compression Decompression Compressing a project file reduces the size of its data to accomodate a standard floppy disk s limited capacity A compressed project file and its screens however cannot be edited To edit the screens you must first de compress the project file Usage Pattern Start gt Programs Pro face LT Editor Pack Tool Action gt Compress Project File Designate a Project Click onthe Decom
293. e 20 0 ccccssssssssssssseesssesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 154 paie PE IRE PAW E o E E T E IE EEE A A E E A A A E T 2 156 D2 UO n A E EE EAE E EEEE 2 157 DW WCU EE E EET EE E EEE EE E AEE E O AEE T 2 157 ie Library emis saceee ce sscseecsansrstcvesccunccaseysvevescounscenssescvescounccasessvevesecunstexseseevessounes 2 158 241 Wee istenne Library enS cuence a a E E N E 2 162 2 4 2 Placing Library Items ssicistcaisceienseansentsianievadshaericessiabeanssendavisedietesresteitareinnidaieeneees 2 166 yA Wee Pane LD y eS ee E i i 2 168 244 Savine Libraries and QUINE spss soecnectenxseatardueete sadness eendet cotantecusbiensesee E 2 173 ZS D Script Global D SCripi sissssssscencsnecvsseeseticecssraseesdessessetbereetersesterssireesistarees 2 175 251 AAS CPt Senas sessirnir n piena ina aA a EE EE EE E A E i ET 2 176 23 2 D Scnipt Commands scssi Ea e SE A EAE 2 183 2 5 3 D Script Global D Script Limitations sissessssssconestactacsccevessasrwaspnevedaatiwwmennanieesinens 2 198 234 Noteson Operation Results sssrinin aSa 2 200 233 Logical Operaton Examples saison a E E 2 201 2 5 6 Bit Operation Examples siccsis cap cies davsseeseceyenhassauneamesidadihecnadshevendcedsidesezauaweesaciaeaes 2 202 Do CondHonal Branches cosis nn A E 2 203 Does AONO ERE I E 2 204 2w Da Sam NG earr E EEE 2 207 P A E BEM IAD E EE E PETE A T E E E E TE 2 207 20 1 Data Sampling Setings acces ssecctt caecancsa sean na a i 2 207 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques sssececccsss
294. e Copied to the To cancel the pasting click on the specified location icon I An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied are temporarily stored The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 159 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing Here the procedure for pasting an object that has been Copied or Cut to the Clipboard is explained E Pasting an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 First Copy or Cut an object 2 3 5 Copy 2 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Then the outline of the object copied from the previous screen to the Clipboard will appear 3 Position the cursor and click on the point where the To cancel the paste click on the object is to be Pasted FeO The object stored in the Clipboard will be Pasted to the new location When an object is copied from an other screen it will be automati cally placed at the same coordinates as its original ones To place the object at different coordinates move it after this automatic place ment I An area where text graphics or both that have been Cut or Copied are temporarily store
295. e LT turns ON This bit does not turn OFF until the LT is turned OFF or goes offline E g ws WORD20 Iw WORD30 lt lt 2 80 If WORD30 is 3 shifting two bits to the left results in OxOOOC which cannot be converted into BCD format interrupts program execution w WORD20 w WORD30 lt lt 2 If WORD30 is 3 shifting two bits to the left results in OxOOOC Unlike the above example OxOOOC 1s the result of the operation to be stored in the memory and does not cause the program to Stop Limitations of zero operations Do not divide by zero in division and remainder operations If you do the program stops and bit 8 in common relay information LS2032 turns ON This bit does not turn OFF until the LT is turned OFF or goes offline Notes on delay during assign operation Using a device address in an assign operation may cause write delay because the LT has to read the address data from the external device Consider the following E g w D200 w D300 1 1 w D201 w D200 1 2 Statement 1 assigns D300 1 into D200 However in statement 2 the result of statement 1 has not been assigned in D200 because of time consuming communication with the host Device PLC In such case program so that the result of statement 1 is stored in the LS area before it is executed as shown below w LS100 w D300 1 w D200 w LS100 w D201 w LS100 1 e As a guide for D Script pr
296. e Meter s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Meter s top left corner To cancel the placement click on is to be placed the hal icon If desired use the Meter s handle to alter its size To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 50 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 9 Trend Graphs This Part displays Word Address numeric data as absolute values on a Trend line graph The graph s display will then change to reflect Word Address data changes E Trend Graph General Settings Attributes Trend Graph Settings TR_O001 Enter comment data here Channel Sethings Shape Color Alam Settings Alarm Settings General Settings Graph Settings Description The currently selected f ae Select the Trend Graph Shape desired Data appears here Format Calls up the Part Shape Browser displaying a list of pre made Trend Graph Shapes Part Shapes can be selected directly from the Browser Data Format Here the display data format is specified as either Bin or BCD With the Display Mode check box checked and Bin data format selected negative numeric data can also be displayed Browser
297. e OR of data between word devices or between word device data and constant 1 s complement Inverts the bits For details about overflowing digits and errors and rounded decimal places resulting from a remainder operation 3 1 5 Notes on Operation Results Priority and Associativity The following table shows the trigger priorities If two or more operators have the same priority follow the direction shown by the associativity LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 213 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Comparisons Compare pnallor nor and AND Conjunction ANDs the right and left sides Value 0 zero is regarded as OFF and other val ues as ON NI and N is true if both N1 and N2 are ON and false if otherwise or OR Disjunction ORs the right and left sides Value O zero is regarded as OFF and other values as ON N1 or N is true if either N1 or N2 is ON and false if otherwise not NOT Negation NOTs the right side Value O zero 1s re garded as 1 and other values as 0 not N1 is Oif NI is 1 and 1 if N1 is O lt Smaller than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant The result is true if N1 is smaller than N2 N1 lt N2 lt Equal to or smaller than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant The re
298. e PLC device uses 32 Bit length addresses only the lower 16 Bits of data are logged e The LT s internal clock controls time using the last two digits of the year display Therefore the logging data s year is controlled by these digits e When the Start and End times are the same or when the time interval is lt 0 data logging is performed once for each block e Data stored in the backup SRAM is cleared via the Data Clear Bit Address when the Clear Bit changes from OFF to ON e When the LT s power is turned ON if the Data Clear Bit Address s Bit has been turned ON the LT deletes the backup SRAM logging data and turns OFF the Clear Bit e With loop operation and time setup designated when Data Logging Auth Bit Address is turned OFF or when the LT s power is turned OFF after the logging period elapses loop operation becomes the same status as non loop operation e g Start time 09 00 End time 18 00 Time period 3 hrs If the 15 00 logging was skipped due to the LT s power being turned OFF lt Without Loop Operation gt lt With Loop Operation gt Block 1 Logging Logging Logging at 09 00 Logging at 12 00 Read Error Logging C Reader 5 00 Logging at 18 00 Block 2 Logging Logging Data logging at 15 00 is Data logging at 15 00 is stored as a stored as a read error read error Same as withoutloop operation LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVAN
299. e click on it to openit By doing so the Step 6 but ton does not need to be used 2 188 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Via the Screen Editor select the Library menu Register Library command or click on the a icon on the Draw Tool Bar 8 Input a Cell Number and Description In the Cell Number area the smallest of the currently open Library file s unused numbers will be automatically displayed To change it enter the desired number Save Library Cell Number OF Description aah 9 Click on the button to register the item Up to 200 libraries can be regis The registered Library item will appear in the Browser tered in one file R 100 switch E Using the Cut Copy and Paste Functions Library items can be Cut Copied and Pasted from the screen drawing area to Browser First select the desired Library item in the drawing area and then either Cut or Copy it then Paste it to the current Library Browser LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 189 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 2 Placing Library Items Here items registered in a Library file are placed on a drawing area 2 4 Library Items PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Library menu Call Up Library command or click on the icon on the Draw Tool Bar Libr
300. e controlled via the Project Manager 1 3 1 Project Manager Areas and Functions Here each of the Project Manager s features is explained To begin working with LT Editor simply click on the desired button a Title Bar c Pull Down Menu b Menu Bar e Function Buttons d Status Bar a Title Bar Displays the current project s file name and title b Menu Bar Displays the menus used for the operation of LT Editor When you select a desired menu using the mouse or keyboard one of the pull down menus described below will appear c Pull Down Menu When you select a desired item on the menu bar its pull down menu ap pears These menus includes a variety of commands d Status Bar Displays LT and Device PLC as well as LT Editor operation related mes sages 1 18 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 3 Project Manager Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals e Function Buttons These buttons indicate the LT Editor program s main functions e g creating screens alarms printing etc You can start each function by simply click ing on that function s button You can also start these functions by selecting the corresponding command from the Project Manager s pull down menu Creates a new project Selects an existing project Makes initial setting of the LT main unit Monitors the logic program Displays a list Creates a logic of variables program with the Logic
301. e converted vary with the external device manufacturers See the following address global conversion table to convert the addresses correctly E How to Read the table The symbols used in the table have the following meanings Q When the address conversion device type is set to Word the system converts both Word and bit devices When the Bit setting is used only bit device addresses are changed When the selected conversion mode is Word only Word ad dresses are converted Selecting Bit will convert only bit addresses K When Word mode is selected the system converts only word addresses WE When Bit mode is selected the system converts only bit addresses Blanks cannot be converted For the timers and counters the bit indicates the contact or coil used and the word indicates the current value elapsed value or setting value E Address Conversion Table List Memory link SIO Type After conversion conversion E Mitsubishi Electric FREQROL Series After C onversion All devices except Is for parameter P arameter except for FR S 500 E500 s P r 37 swor OO 2 o 500 E 500 s P r 37 wem Olo o oO for parameter LS System Area Appendix 22 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables E Yokogawa Electric FACTORY ACE After Conversion X Y IJE M L T C TP cP ts cs b BIR Z a fafalalafale o 0 lalola ow
302. e data is deleted LT turns OFF the Bit Ad dress Device PLC to LT LT to De vice PLC 10 34 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging Loop Selecting this feature means when data logging is completed it will begin again from the top most data address and overwrite the existing data E Trigger settings with Loop operation Trigger settings will differ depending on the type of Loop operation desig nated Bit Method 1 The maximum number of logging Words in all blocks is 2048 Number of blocks x frequency lt 2048 Time Method aration Founs Fouine 1 The end time is automatically calculated using the time period and frequency 2 The maximum number of logging Words in all blocks is 2048 Number of blocksx frequency lt 2048 When using loop operation the number of blocks needs to be designated to decide the Logging area size LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 35 10 2 Logging i Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES The Device PLC monitors bits at approximately 150 ms inter vals Therefore a slight time delay may occur until the LT de Important tects the Trigger or the Data Clear Bit Set these Bit change Se te NG 10 36 intervals to the length of communication cycle or to 150ms whichever is longer e Each piece of data to be logged inside the record is only 16 Bits long When the Devic
303. e list If the check box for Link Select is marked an object selected with the Screen Editor will also be selected highlighted on the list E Editing an Object To edit an object select it from the list and click on the button or simply double click on the object If the object 1s D Script D Script Editor will be actuated Clicking on the button deletes the selected object Change Order Objects are displayed on the list in the order where they have been drawn If the order of objects on the list is changed the overlapping order of drawn objects and the executing order of Parts can also be changed Copying Any object on the list can be copied by pressing the C key or pasted by pressing the V keys Multiple objects can be copied at a time by selecting them 2 248 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 5 Part Reference List 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques The settings for each Part placed on the currently edited screen are listed here for each Part type Part settings can also be changed on the Part Reference List When either modifying or deleting s or the gt key Usage Pattern Select After selection View Parts List desired either modify or Part delete the Part SP Xe Shows a list of the Parts on the currently selected screen Simply click on the desired Part An example of the Part Reference List
304. e name and output destination and then click on the Sse button Save As File name test bmp l Save X Save as lype Bitmap file bmp ia Cancel LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2119 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing RE Redraw Screen S This command updates the current drawing area display to reflect the latest drawing data When the Auto Redraw feature is not used filling and editing objects can cause after images to remain on the screen Use this function to remove these images and show the screen as it will appear on the actual LT display E Redrawing a Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS Sometimes when removing an object s filled color only the fill point area s color will be removed resulting in a small non colored square Fill point is deleted 1 Select the Edit menu Redraw command or click on the icon The screen will automatically be refreshed and all the fill color will be removed 2 180 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS With this function an operation can be undone and the screen display returned to the previous condition Every time the icon is clicked on depending on memory previous operations will be undone in succession F The Redraw Screen function cannot be undone _ Important E Canceling an Action PROCEDURE R
305. e order character code Single byte and double byte characters are discriminated Style 17 Raised Font Size Fo MO Nobk I Bo BOOB Noek Rote The size of any text object placed on the drawing area automatically changes a according to the size specified in the Table Editor Characters x Lines Switching tables does not change the text size 4 56 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings Designating Part s label Select Index in the Part s Label area to change to the index character string entry screen Select the desired Index from those specified in the Table Editor To add a new Index click the button to start the Table Editor MEARAN 4 5 2 Table Editor Index Character Strings Index Char acter String Registration Bit Switch Settings BS_ O01 Place a check mark here to sort the Index character strings displayed in the pull down menu ee in the order character code i Aue TALIE TEE Single byte and double byte characters are discriminated te The size of any text placed on the drawing area automatically changes ac Na cording to the size specified in the Table Editor Characters x Lines Switching tables does not change the text size Designating messages for the Message Display In the Message Display Settings select the Index option in the Messages area
306. e put Displays data input via the keypad 2 1 11 Keypad Display LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide E E 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS When monitored Bits are tumed ON a_ 2 1 12 Alarm Displays list of Basic Alarm summary messages appear that have been previously registered in the Alarm Editor Filing Data Displays data registered in the Filing 2 1 13 File Name Display Display Data list by specifying the corresponding file number Logging Display Displays Extemal Device data loaded in 2 1 14 Data Logging the data logging settings by specifying Display the address for the corresponding block number Numeric Display Displays the Extemal Device s Word 2 1 15 Numeric Displays Address numeric data as an absolute value Message Display Displays a previously registered 2 1 16 Message Displays message according to Extemal Device Word Address data changes A maximum of 16 messages can be displayed in a single Message Display Teil intemal calendar intemal clock Picture Display Displays a single registered Library 2 1 19 Picture Displays image only graphic data according to Extemal Device Word Address data changes A maximum of 16 different Library images can be displayed in a single Picture Display One at a time Window Parts Windows created on the Window 2 1 20 Window Parts Screen U can be called up on the Base Screen B LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual
307. e temporarily stored The contents of the Clipboard can be pasted copied from the Clipboard using the Paste function However once the Copy Cut command is executed the data stored in the Clipboard is replaced therefore only the data from the most recent Copy Cut command can be Pasted LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 177 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing rewu Converting a Screen to a Bitmap File The current screen is converted into a bitmap file and then saved The screen types that can be converted are the Base B screen Mark M screen and Window U screen Usage Pattern Edit Screen to Setting Specify how to save the bitmap file bitmap file 2 bitmap file Screen to Screen to K a bitmap file 4 bitmap file E Designating a Bitmap s File Name Before converting the screen to a bitmap file specify how to save the bitmap file Specify a file Setting bitmap file name name and output destination to Prompt for filename when saving save the file 40 Automatically create file name Speci fy howa Automatically File Name type file name is to creates a file f Type Number BMP be created name to save the Type Number Comment BMP automatically file Output Folder C PROGRAM FILESSPRO FACESLTAD I i destination ofthe ox cee f He file when a file name is being created automati cally Specify an output Pr
308. e the trans Dogg moo ferred filing data is stored Data stor o Pas age areas will be saved in series start Door ing from the Start Address for the num OGO003 i ber of filing data items Co as The address to be entered varies DA depending on your LT and PLC type Note that the sample screen in this manual is just one example No of Data Blocks Designate the number of blocks to be registered in one file A maximum of 1 650 blocks can be designated The maximum number will change depend ing on the number of data blocks No of Data Items Designates the number of data items registered in one block A maximum of 9 999 data items can be registered The maximum number will change depend ing on the number of data blocks ULE a E a eae aa crn LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 13 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES When a variable Logic Symbol is used as a data storage start L address an integer array must be designated For an integer Important array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Data Format Select either 16 or 32 bit data Display Format Select a filing data display format Code minus display becomes effective when this check box is checked Import Other file data CSV format can be im ported and used as filing data Export Filing data can be exported and sav
309. e to confirm that the LT_ACK Bit Address has been turned OFF Also assuming that the main power may be turned OFF for some reason be sure to take appropriate countermeasures such as turning the Device PLC Trigger Bit and LT_ACK Bit OFF when starting operation LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 31 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 32 E When designating time Logging data is read only one time at the designated timing When designating time without using loop operation a Block s Finish Bit Address is turned ON when a block s data logging is completed in order to start data read at the read start time Logging data in the Device PLC Word Address is cleared by the external device Data Logging Auth Bit Address External Device to LT Designated tme Q Inside of LT Data read Logging data read out External Device to LT luy axy Data Logging Settings Set up items in the Trigger Setting Display and Write Settings tabs Select the Project Manager s Screen Edit menu Logging Setting com mand E Trigger Settings Trigger Settings Bit Method aes oe xi Logging ON OFF ager Setnes D wite Sates Check this check box when perform e a ia A a a ing data logging Data Logging Statt Address A Bit Method No of Words EE Select this option when using a Trigger Fead Count M Veik Bit to start data logging Block Coun Data Logging Start Address PEAN
310. ect file 1 2 2 Saving a Project File under a Different Name E Selecting an Existing Project Select the Project Manger s Project menu Select command or click on ba When you select a project the following setting screen appears Used to select the folder containing the target project file Select Lists the current ar Fela eB a EFTA Manufacturing System lte folder and existing L Eee System lte H H ULE Production Process lte project files iL ok Meer Displays the Beime AManufachaing Systeme L project file name rise Sites Cancel selected from the dis Tet i TOU GAN SPALI the project file by typing the file name Displays the project file s Used to select the comment and the selected project file type desired LT unit and Device PLC File Types The only project file that can be selected is the one created with the LT Editor lte Note Double clicking on the file project file Ite itself in Explorer automatically NY starts LT Editor and opens the file LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 127 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Project Manger Project menu s Select command or click on ba 2 Select a project file from the list that appears or To select a project file located in type the project file name another folder find a desired file Select Factory A from the Look in
311. ect in the drawing mode Grid points will not be displayed on the LT unit s screen The Option area s Snap function allows you to position your screen objects using a pre made grid You can also set the interval and display ON OFF status of the grid points SEG 2 7 1 Grid Snap LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 123 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 5 Screen Editor g Status Bar Displays information related to the current screen and provides messages explaining the screen operation you are currently performing Ee pee Fe Coordinates Amount of Screen Description of the of current memory currently currently selected Projects api ees mouse used Ratio of used command Device ar deni ah position screen area to entire PLC Caen non ae screen h Tool Bar The Tool Bar provides easy to use icons for drawing and editing Clicking on one of these icons performs that command The Tool Bar can either be hidden or displayed and individual Tool Bar areas can be moved freely around the Screen Editor screen 1 e top bottom left or right The following Tool Bar areas are available Main Tool Bar Edit Tool Bar Draw Tool Bar Option Tool Bar Grid Snap Tool Bar Parts Tool Bar Parts State Change Tool Bar i Zoom Box Shows the cursor s current position at three times magnification j Selection Tool Box Used to select objects to be edited Parts and figures Using the commands included i
312. ed in the CSV format lt Output Example using CSV Format gt Filing Data e F iling CSV data s Header Description ling Date This is necessary for data import No of Data Blocks No of Data Items Address Data Format 16 Bit 0 32 Bit 1 Display Format Dec 0 Hex 1 BCD 2 Code 0 fl Block0 Block2 Datal Data3 g 1000 2 2000 4 3000 6 4000 8 5000 If this data is incorrect CSV data cannot be imported E Setting up Filing Data Entering File No Description No of Data Blocks No of Data Items and Data Storage Start Address File No 1 Fie pP E No of Data Blocks Description Heat Control Description Heat Gontral No of Data Items 10 No of Data Blocks 3 No of Data Items 10 3 E Data Storage Start Address poging Data Format Bleck Bleck Blecea iat Data Storage Start Address Bock Name l Display Format DOO 1 00 Dec ia Dec IF Ll Code Geer Cony meot Eon 10 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Filing List Display lt When using multiple folders gt lt When using a single folder gt Filing Data List Filing Data List Folder r a Internal 1 Temperature Settings Add Temperature Settings 1 Filiig Data a WAR gt Automatic Filing Data Transmission Here data transmission via the external device s trigge
313. een Editing REMARKS If you select Al all screens from the current project will be copied LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 9 4 1 Screen Editing 5 Select the internal settings to be copied and specify a copying method overwrite or merge PROCEDURE Destination B Manufacturing System Select 4 Manufacturing System 2 All tp Screens From ro LIS Screen Type F 3 Base Screen Mark Screen Window Screen Sy Sten Moman Data Sarnpling fi Overwrite ii Merge D Script Functions venite 9 Menge PONN ce D S cript i Dvensrite i Merge 6 After confirming your selection and designation Start From Filing Data fi Dvernarite Merge Data Loging Settings Test Table data click on the Con button If there is any screen of an identical number or function name you will be prompted to conform whether or not to overwrite it Selecting Yes will overwrite such a screen or function name and selecting No will proceed to the next question If Yes All is selected all the screens or settings will be overwritten If No all is selected only the screens or settings that do not exist at the copying destination will be copied Screen Copy Source Enj Sec 2 All a Screens From To Screen Type Sy Data Sampling fi Dvenite i Merge Global D Script fe Ovenvrite ith Merge Destination A Manufacturing System oo Base Screen Mark S
314. een using Load Screen in the Draw menu Exceeds Part Library limit If the number of Part Libraries used exceeds the limit PartLibrary data cannot be transferred to the LT Reduce the number of P artLibraries 2 1 Pars mi Maximum Number of Automatically Created P artLibraries Filing displays with the same ID No cannot M ultple filing displays with the same ID No with be placed on a screen if Cursor Position Cursor Positon Control selected cannot be Control is selected placed on one screen Either deselect Cursor Positon Control or change each filing display ID No so thatthe ID Nos do notoverlap Appendix 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 1 Error Messages E Screen Editor Errors from previous page Grouping Nesting Limit Reached You are attempting to nest grouped objects more a than 10 tmes Only 10 levels of nesting are allowed pt pee on ossaa Reener fester from 1 to 8999 Re enter the screen number Logging Display and Keypad Input Display Check whether a Logging display or Keypad Input Sa simultaneously a Picture Display la different Screen No Screen No range E nter the correctnumber File write error This file cannot be written to the destnaton media Please check the designated drive name and oi The sum total of all the data saved by the LT The backup size exceeds the SRAM capacity s data backup features now exceeds the Reduce the number of sampli
315. ees 4 7 A2 IPE OVCCE TUG Uh Goi occcc ccc csesesauadensactenssexaeanesesotsseasssaverssotecsucsesacees sot ES 4 11 Ae Deluns Project Tiles corocon nE EEE EE T E 4 11 4 2 2 Rebuilding A Project Rebuild 0 0 ccssssssnssessssssssssseeeecceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeseeeaaeaaas 4 12 4 2 3 Converting Addresses and Device Codes sssonsssessssssssssseseteeereereessssssssssssssssseesses 4 15 Bel CONE E e E E E 4 17 4 2 5 Symbol Editor eeenneneesssssssssssssssssssssseceeerreerrerssssssssssssssssssssseeetterrereeessssssssssssssssses 4 19 A TGs Changing a Projects EI Type ersen 4 27 Ao Changing Your Projects Device PLC seas caaeesersnentaceteatuseracnternstencneabenstesonunasumusiends 4 28 4 3 Project Compression Decompression sssseccoccsssssececccccsssscececocossssceeceossssse 4 29 AS Compressing a Project FIIS siorastsxiescesstncarendceemctcoussossusuabsenss vaveetensentdnartoceeuiacosanciat 4 30 Wed Decompressins a Project File sccnsrrono r aa arr a a 4 33 4 4 Information Display sssssssssceceoccsssseseceoccossssseccoocssssssececcsssssssececosossssseeeesssssse 4 35 4At Project Wil OFM ALOU yc deatasapareduesenactdddsnetegasenauapetieraeisssiganssucedeaiehagenenon oe E ER 4 35 4 4 2 Screen Information ees ectespegsiccceeiad eeatoadisiesied suawoedeaseaacasicodceriocos esscdsec newerwtacdetont 4 37 AAD N ESIO MM a a E E erations A EE 4 37 16 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE CHAPTER 5 CREATING AND ED
316. el the placement click on corner is to be placed the icon If desired use the Trend Graph s handles to alter its size To change a Part s after placement size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 59 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 1 10 Keypads Here pre made keypads are used to enter data to a designated Word Ad dress In order to input data via the keypad it is necessary to first create a Keypad Input display 2 1 14 Keypad Display E Keypad Description Attributes Keypad Settings Displays the General Settings Select the currently Keypad Type Keypad s data selected Rude Decimi format Keypad s anag tt Hex image F Calls up the BRS Fad Color Select the Part Shape eel a Ee Keypad s Browser border color Parts can be directly from the Browser Keypad Type First a Keypad type needs to be selected that will be suitable for the data format specified To select a Keypad type simply click on the Browser and the selection of available Keypads will be displayed Pad Color The Keypad s border color Pad Color can be selected here 2 60 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Keypad Key Functions T
317. elect the Edit menu Copy command or click on the icon The Library item will be copied to the Clipboard 3 Open the destination Library file and select the Edit To register the Library item to anew menu Paste command or click on the Library Library file click on the icon Browser s icon To register the Library item to a Li brary file different than the current one click on the icon to call up a list of Library files 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 195 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items PROCEDURE REMARKS Hereafter steps are the same as Library Item Registra tion 4 Input the Item s Cell Number and Description In the Register Number area the smallest of the currently open Library file s unused numbers will be automatically displayed To change it enter the desired number Save Library Cell Number cy 2 Description shy 5 Click on the button to register the Item The registered Item will appear in the Browser Gall cpw production Fille Edit View Window Help ae 2 196 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yz Saving Libraries and Quitting When a Library file s contents are changed the changed data will automati cally overwrite the old data and be saved However if the Library file h
318. elected only positive numeric data can be entered To enter negative numeric data select either 2 s Complement or MSB LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Half Pie Graph Graph Settings Attributes Half Pie Graph Settings HP_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings Enter the The Half Pie Display Direction is Divisi graph s graph s display Ouishe 5 number of direction is divisions fixed to clock wise Display Direction Here the Half Pie graph s display direction is fixed to clockwise Axis Divisions The data entered here determines how many pieces a Half Pie Graph is divided into If the number of Axis Divisions is specified as 10 11 division lines are displayed When no divisions are necessary specify the number of divisions as 0 E Half Pie Graph Shape Color Attributes Here a Half Pie graph s border color division color Axis Color display data color Graph Color Fg amp Bg and display data pattern are all selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Half Pie Graph Alarm Settings Attributes If desired Alarm settings can be set here 2 1 Parts Setting Alarms LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 43 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Half Pie Graph The procedure for placing a Half Pie Graph is as shown below Data stored in D0010
319. en U or Base Screen B and display them on the Base Screen B Additional windows can be displayed on the LT screen when necessary Example Make the settings for displaying a bar graph by turning ON the window display switch lt LT Screen gt Turn ON the switch geo O s Turn OFF the Window Display F X switch B2 B2 Window Display ziele lt LT Editor Screen Editor gt 1 Registering a window on the U Screen Turn ON the switch rE E E E Call up the bar graph from U300 to B2 using a window part B2 U300 O Window Display E X Window Registration can be performed on the Window Screen U Specify the Window Parts to call up the windows registered on the Window Screen U onto the Base Screen B 2 1 20 Window Parts 3 3 2 Window Registration on the U Screen Global Window Display E Important Displays a single window on all Base Screens B as a global window To call up the window make the Global Window settings on the OFFLINE settings of the LT unit or on the System Setup of the Program Manager in LT Editor Each LT series User Manual Global Window Setup Trend graphs T Screen and parts Keypad Input Display and Logging Display will not function from the registered window LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 3 Window Display Window U Screen and Base
320. en Property Color To cancel the application of a Fill due to a mistake such as having desig nated the wrong Fill point press the key 2 128 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Filling an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Fill command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes Select Colors and Tiling Patterns if desired Fill spreads outward from the se lected point until it reaches a bor der with one of the colors Fg Bg Bd selected in step 2 Select the same color for the Bd border Color and boundary Fg foreground Color Ey A Ao ling Fo PPO Fills Bd color Bue t JE O O Jm N eK Bd M a a a vo amp Fg color Blue Left clicking on a line will not cause it to be filled Be sure to only 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on click in an area enclosed by lines the area to be filled The designated area will be filled in When drawing via the PC s key board press the e button to indi cate a fill point Fills and fill points can be specified to either display or not display via the drawing board 2 7 2 Screen Envi ib ronment Settings To cancel Fill due to a mistake such as designating a wrong Fill point press the key To cancel the filling click on the al icon Double clicking on a filling point of any filled object drawn on the screen
321. enccatnseccoreceetscnctsesesceumesteusesetewsoszec 7 16 Sk OVENI OW a E 8 2 8 1 1 General Description of the Simulation Screen 00sososoeoooesooeeeeeeessesessssssssssssssssees 8 3 S2 Iranstermimne Simulation Protocol cscsissocoseveesecncecncsecatnetaxsiaesocnucessneesonaseseupaedacmarenees 8 8 Geb Peronin A SUMMA E A 8 9 CHAPTER 9 PRINTING Daw e e o GS vosccecccavecesersessasesssevesecasecacecseuvesesassseasssseussccusssussvsceucevecsescosssesssvesoreee 9 2 9 1 1 Printing seserian er e e cnet soca r aeeai 9 2 PA Met N a diese voosesscosenrenaeeniaxsdacnccencnectcene 9 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 17 PREFACE CHAPTER 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 101 TAM Data CIR CCID serga rererere EENE OEE 10 2 LO Wad Filing Data Recipe Function sets ri ceseeiasessadsenartqeiabtege ti sadeatessdeenvssataninacesdeGecuacstidesss 10 3 t012 Filing Data 5 UA oaea 10 9 Er Poe Din EIS eee E 10 12 10 1 4 Automatic Filing Data Transmission secsecswsscicenstczinsssuoreesvseusbelanmneterteencarieniess 10 15 10 1 5 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example siscssscersecesevseescsseseverosesarsorsseesasnenexenreaes 10 16 10 1 6 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example ccssesseseeeeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaas 10 22 10 2 Logging Funcion sc ccscecsccceescascsssveveeconecescsesucvsceoescesssesueveeconsseessesucesessesceussesuers 10 27 10 2 1 Logging FUnCHON sec ance seentnosauaaatsdessnnenaauccadseweedeetarniane
322. ent serial port on your PC 7 2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs 1 Transferring Data and Logic Programs This section describes how to transfer screen data created with the LT Editor program to and from the LT unit Usage Pattern Project Manager Specify the Setup gt Project Transfer gt Setup H ansfer _ and Communica or or Settings tion parameters Click on E eon Compile the LT Click on the ta or Transfer Prepare Editor data LT unit icon to transfer data screen data To display a screen window to perform data transfer select the Project Manager s Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or select the Screen Editor s Screen menu Transfer command or click on the ia icon An example of this screen window is as follows Cancels Data Displays the Transfer Transfers screen Transfer mode Settings dialog box data and logic Transfer e Quits Transfer programs from mode LT Editor to the LT unit Ey Displays the Project file ae alee current project file Transfers only E e logic programs Pe tption e zA _ Transfer Status Prepare Status Displays the currently specified transfer mode Receives screen data and logic programs from the LT unit to the Displays the LT Editor currently speci fied
323. enter the mode in which Text ff Text Table Editor A Manufacturing System lte After setti ng up File Edt View Help the text specify Table Editor is the line and click enabled _ Zitexttanetonvore the Go to button ooo rete Elfen to jump to the Click here to ee specified line specify the Control Address hai Set the font a a o language for the Pos pu a E E selected table Select a table to a a Ce enter character pp ff NN strings Up to 16 a eee tab any be registered Pu fw i g Double click on this area to call up a message dialog box Up to 1 200 characters Index No Up to 3 000 character strings can be registered 1 4 50 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings E Using the Text Table Editor e When a check mark is placed in the Text Table ON OFF checkbox ON mode the Table Editor 1s switched to input mode enabling addi tional settings such as Table setting and Index Text registration e When the check mark is removed from the checkbox OFF mode the following warning message dialog box appears Clicking the ox button deletes all Text Table data registered in the project Click the Cancel button to retain the data Warning AN Allthe table messages will be deleted Do you shill want to continue J cancel E Entering Co
324. er 5 After all of the Lamp s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Lamp s outline will appear in the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Lamp s top left corner is to be placed If necessary use the Lamp s handles to alter its size 2 1 Parts REMARKS With the Blink check box checked wi and if the Bit is turned ON the Lamp will blink Lamp blinking can also be seen via the pull down menu View s Preview com mand 2 7 3 Preview Screen To cancel the placement click on the icon To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 30 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yam Bar Graphs Bar Graphs are used to display Device PLC s Word Address numeric data in absolute or relative values This graph s display will change according to Word Address data changes E Bar Graph General Settings Attributes lt When displaying Word Address numeric data in absolute values gt Select absolute or relative value display Enter comment data here Bar Graph Settings BA_O01 General Settings Graph Settings Shape olor Alarm Settings Enter the Description desired Word Displays the Word A
325. er is performed Filing Setting Write Setting From Filing Data To L Use Muliple Folders SRAM White Settinas Fram Filing Data To SRAM Control Word Address DOO200 ConolWordAddess onzcooo Frizz Write Completed Bit Address MO0001 Wite Completed Bit Address o1 C0000000 Device PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Setting Device PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings T Device PLC Controlled Transfer Device PLC Controlled Transfer Not Contral Word Address jn coom T a selected Transmit Completed Bit Address coooa TE TE LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 17 10 1 Filing Data Recipe E Filing Data Display Settings Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES When manual data transmission is performed you must place the Filing Name Display 2 1 12 File Name Display General Settings File Display FD_OO1 10 18 Top Write Word Address mon lE External Device T f ransfer Use Transfer Completed Bit Address Description Heat Control Use LS Area Use LS Area Not selected Since in this example data is transmit ted from SRAM to the Device PLC it is not transmitted via the LS Area Keep the default setting Top Write Word Address Not se lected Not designated Since this example does not use the LS area this Address does not need to be designated When using the LS area designate the Top Address of the LS area where data is stored Device PLC Transfer
326. eral Info Rom Type Color F LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 53 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Color ltem Settings General Info Color Color Settings Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore seskNene Fo MCI OWE noe ground Bg background and Blk s MS OOO roe blink ok i cancer Heo Gees The row color settings have priority over the column color settings General Info Selecting Data Row The General Info page provides information about the current settings for Data settings Row Settings Row Type Select the desired type of display from the Data and Char Col settings G eneral Info Row Number 2 Row Type t Data i Char Col Saneeeeeeeet on cance Hew 10 54 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 4 Totals Display E Attribute Settings 10 2 Logging To set up the calculation attributes select the Totals cell and click on the Settings button Display Settings Setings aa copy eects E cuz O Shem term vaue oro General Info The General Info page provides information about the current settings for Totals Settings Total Settings eneral Info Size Style Alarm Settings 3 Total G Row Number Column Humber Aow Type Data Calculation 5 etti
327. ere only one Filing Name Display is placed the ID No does not need to be entered Keep the default setting When placing two or more Fil ing Name Displays on the currently dis played screen be sure not to use the same ID No for multiple Filing Name Displays File No 1 Enter the previously entered filing data number No of Display Lines 8 No of Display Characters 15 Direct Selection Selected Cursor Position Control Selected LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 23 10 1 Filing Data Recipe 10 24 Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Cursor Position Control e Even when the screens are changed on the LT monitor the current File Name Display s cursor position can be retained e Cursor Position Control can be designated when setting up the File Name Display e When turning the LT s main power switch ON or resetting the LT the cursor will appear on the first line e The cursor position will be stored for each ID No The storage area of an ID No and a cursor position are in correspondence with each other To retain the cursor position be sure that the File Name Display ID Nos do not overlap each other on any of the screens For more detailed informa tion about the File Name Display 2 1 12 File Name Display Switch Settings File Display FD_001 General Settings Display Style Color Automatic Switch Placement Method oO SRAM Extemal Device Oo External
328. es to alter its size To change a Part s Regardless of whether the Date Display is scaled up or l size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up down the character size will not change To change the D character size and position directly select the charac Ad ters inside the border Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up ae that Part s attribute settings RTE 2 3 15 Changing Attributes When scaling up or down the dis play area if the key is pressed at the same time the characters will scale in unison with the border LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 107 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 1 18 Time Displays Time Display areas can be created based on the LT s internal calendar function Time will be expressed in 24 hour format E g 2 25 pm gt 14 25 Only one Time Display Part can be used per screen E Time Display General Settings Attributes Time Settings TD_001 Select the Enter Comment Character Size General Settings data here Description Character Size jl pas Border Color En iin oO Elk L Text Color MN M 7 e Select Border Plate Color W il liek Character and Plate colors The currently selected item s image appears here Calls up the Part Shape Browser Part Shapes can be selected directly from the Browser Color Here the Time Display s Border color character display c
329. esignate the destination DXF file Select button File Convert Screen gt DAF J From Project File FilesPro facesLT database test lke Select To 7 i i 4 Click on the Option button and enter the conver sion conditions File Convert Screen gt DAF From Project File FilesPro facesLT database test Ite Select To i 7 i LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 271 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 After all the attributes have been entered click on 2 8 2 E Option the button to registered the entered data Screen gt DXF 3 640x400 a 640x400 a 3206240 ga S00 600 6 Click on the Covet button to start conversion If the designated DXF file name already exists a prompt will appear asking whether the new File Convert Screen gt DXF J From EJ name should overwrite the old To name When the button own Af a Ea is clicked on the new name will overwrite the old one and when the button is clicked on the new name will not overwrite the old one Overwrite This OF file already exists 7 After the conversion is completed click on the Do you want to overite button The File Convert DXF Screen dialog box will reappear Cancel To convert another Base screen File Convert Screen gt DXF J DO NOT stop here rather Start From
330. ess confirmation screen for parts will appear enabling you to change the address 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 03 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 1 15 Numeric Displays This Part displays host Word Address numeric data as an absolute value E Numeric Display General Settings Attributes Enter Comment Numeric Display Settings ND_OO1 data here General Settings Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings Description Ward Address Enter the Word Displays the Eoo E A Address where the display currently se data is stored lected Part s image Calls up the Part Shape Browser Word Address Here input the Word Address where the display data is to be stored E Numeric Display Display Format Attributes Numeric Display Settings ND_001 Enter the total number General Settings Display Format ShapeyColor Alarm Settings of digits used not Data Display Format including the decimal Select the L Code No of Display Digits point in the display Data Format 32 Bit Decimal Places iE and Data Character Size Enter the number of Length me Sus mx F digits to be displayed 4 Octal after the decimal point Configure te Shift Right MH Zero Suppress _ Select the size used for the Display stiis JZ Zero Displey the label s characters Style Data Display Format Here the Data Display Format Cod
331. ess to be entered varies depending on your LT and PLC type Note 2 that the sample screen in this manual is just one example LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 7 8 1 Overview Chapter 8 SIMULATION Adding a registered address You can add a new address Click on the button and the following dialog box will appear Then enter an address and the number of addresses to be added and specify Bit or Word After entering a number of addresses to be added addresses are added from the designated number in series You can enter a desired name as a function name with up to 20 half sized characters Input Address Address 00000 TE te Bit ta Word Address Count rm re Editing a registered address You can change the registered address settings Select an address to be edited and click on the button Then a dialog box that is the same as for the adding of a registered address will appear Deleting a registered address You can delete a registered address Select an address to be deleted and click on the button Then a dialog box will appear to confirm the command If you execute the delete command click on the but ton and if you cancel it click on the button AN Selected address will be deleted Copying and pasting a registered address Select an address to be copied and click on the button Then click on the button to add the copied address at the end of the list
332. et the shade displayed properly click on the button and select the part again from Shape Browser Axis Scale Enter the number of units that the X and Y axes are to be divided into When no divisions are necessary input 0 E Trend Graph Channel Settings Attributes n Trend Graph Settings TR_001 Designates or General Settings Graph Settings Settings Channel Settings Shape Color alam Settings Enters the enters the No of Channels Word Address _ Word Address number of Ep Fi ome used to store data lines Curent Channel the current channels to channel s be displayed display data on the Trend Graph the channel color and type being of line used currently for the current selected channel Number of Channels Enter the number of channels used in the Trend Graph Use the Current Channel area to select which channel is being specified Up to 20 channels can be entered in a Project file LTE file including the Data sampling frequency number Word Address Enter the Word Address used to indicate where the Trend graph s data is stored E Trend Graph Shape Color Attributes The Trend Graph s border color division color Axis Color and Trend Graph s display area color Graph Area Color can be selected 2 1 Part Selecting Colors E Trend Graph Alarm Settings Attributes If desired an alarm s settings can be set here 2 1 Part Setting Alarms LT Editor Ver 2
333. eturn to the previous condi tion immediately before the command was made Undo is only effective for the command immediately before it PROCEDURE REMARKS After deleting a circle unintentionally 1 Select the icon The deleted circle is restored and the screen returns to the previous condition E Redo Command This function is used to redo the command canceled with the Undo com mand The Redo command is effective only for the command immediately before it PROCEDURE REMARKS After deleting a circle you have selected the icon to return to the previous condition but you realize that ac tually the circle must be deleted 1 Select the icon The screen returns to the condition where the circle has been deleted and harmony is restored LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 21 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 22 3 1 3 Registering and Placing a Mark Library Item You can register a mark created in the mark drawing area and the registered Mark can be loaded whenever required The Mark Library Item mark list can be saved as a Mark library file MRK file The LT Editor enables you to manage MRK files independent of project LTE files This function allows you to use the sameMmark for several projects since you can select a desired Mark while checking the image displayed in the browser Registration placement and other editing operation
334. euonseee 2 108 PATO A E E E E 2 111 E SGU CS E E A E E A E E A 2 115 K ALCOR ME a E E E ceeasqcasatanandyaaseestieae 2 118 De ODJECE EA rE EEEE EEEE EEE 2 119 TE VOC OCS e a E E E E E 2 120 Deed Movin DC CUS deenaa see pant acanecatesseasteiesectaaaseeteascia tan 2 126 Deo Caine Ty DON D cacececstesceasessastevanssstcaeraesencathentontccn E 2 127 DA CU a E commana E E E 2 128 DDD O e E E E E E E E R 2 129 Dic WO DPE e E E E E E paeanerecsacies 2 130 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE 2o FASC MS CLO tk AA ister rcs teen es tastiest ew sane O tennant tease sees 2 131 Fro Ao DODE oO MME Ee TTT eT eee E mere Sen TTT eee nen er E TT Cree tr ere 2 137 Die Dele Gee E sires dae Poe E E E E dawned 2 140 AN e E E E E A S 2 141 ZII Rotte Ley Roae RIE E aeoea EE E SR ERE REEE AEE 2 142 23 12 Mitror X MIOT a setae octet subenoemupnnnanetnecsnadnaneeneweratncendedieuheeascacpevtaatnersaatepsesaeeeat 2 143 23 1 Group Und OUD essre TE Ea 2 144 PAA Bme O Froni endo Ba E e E 2 146 AAS Chane me AIDU S a E 2 147 2 9 16 Changing Coordinates ssssessissreris eina aE aaa 2 149 2 3 17 Editing the Node of a Multi segment Line sj ccecsesscnsssstoncssanersssattonseaanintenpsieeesaananek 2 150 24 15 Convert dmport Bit NA seers es re teow tenet ee e seek eer patna es EEEE 2 151 2 3 19 Transferring a Screen to the Clipboard iatsersssacieesscttccosiicccussetae oercnsadsenceonuaccneie 2 153 2 3 20 Converting a Screen to a Bitmap Fil
335. evice Comment command or click on the icon 3 A confirmation dialog box appears Click on the Yes button to execute the command Alarm Editor The selected Address es will be used to search for a related Device Comment s 7 IF found the comment will be inserted into message feld Are you OK 4 The device comment corresponding to the address will be included in the messages a roores essaye REMARKS Dele LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing AES Alarm Import Export The created Alarm data can be exported to and saved as an ALA or CSV file Then by importing the saved alarm data it can be shared among Projects CSV files created via a text editor or Microsoft Excel can be imported and used on the Alarm Editor Alarm data s CSV file formats are as follows Block 0 Reserved 1 Block1 0 Reserved 2 Block2 0 Reserved 3 Block3 0 Reserved 4 Basic Alarm Message Summary settings Bit Address M0064 Function A in suspension rr 0 F 0 0 0 Message Re served 5 Fg M0065 Function B in suspension a a a a a a aes 27 sega M0066 Function C in suspension 72 0 ibe a 0 gg a li Bik Bg BIK Reserved 2to4 0 fixed Foreground colo
336. eypad Display to display the Pop up Keypad Adjust the data using the Pop up Keypad 5 LS Area to Device PLC The edited data is transmitted to the Device PLC by touching the LS DEV key Device PLC 10 26 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging WPS Logging The Device PLC data is loaded to the LT s backup area SRAM at bit based or time specified timings to display it in a tabular form on the screen or print it on the printer Logging data can be displayed via a Logging Display 2 1 13 Logging Display Logging data can be displayed with its Total Average Max and Min values which can be set via the Data Calculation Settings Logging data can be entered into a database for data analysis M __ Designated 0064 Sampling Word Addresses 0024 O z E Hi a gt Logging Function E Data Logging Flow This flow chart shows the logging data flow and each trigger condition LT External Device LS Area Logging Display 1 Logging by the Device PLC Trigger Bit Address or at designated timing 10 2 3 Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings 2 Data display and edit via the Logging Display 10 2 4 Display Settings 3 Data transmission to LS Area via the Control Word Address 10 2 3 Data Logging Settings M Write to LS LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 27
337. facturing System proj ect name selected in step 2 Display Type l you can skip the Open com a mand 4 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE 3 Enter the screen type and screen number of the origi nal screen Those screens corresponding to the specified initial screen number through the final screen number will be copied Screen Copy i Start From HO fe Screens From lt L ie to L Ie Screen Type i Base Screen h 2 Mark Screen E Image Screen inten Window Screen p System Information Filigg Data Overwrite i Merge Data Sampling Data Loging Settings f Overmite Merge D Script Functions Text Table data f Overmite Merge Global D Script fe Oversrite i Merge 4 Enter the screen type and screen number of the des tination screen The screens will be copied to the Destination project starting from the specified initial screen number onwards Screen Copy Source Destination B Manufacturing System 4 Manufacturing System All z a Start From 1 f Screens From k K_a Ta fl z gt Lie a 5 Type i Base Screen Mark Screen Inte Wir Sereen Filing Data Syaem IMimormiaticry Data Sampling fo Overwite i Merge D Sicript Functions fi Overwite ii Merge Global D 5 cript fi Overwrite i Merge i Overwite i Merge Data Loging Settings Test Table data 4 1 Scr
338. fficient Add the required data to the error line Appendix 12 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix I Error Messages E DXF File Conversion Errors from previous page Code Error Message Cause Solution LTYPE Not Defined line LAYER Not Defined line STYLE Not Defined line BLOCKS Not Defined line BLOCKS Not Found W BLOCKS Over Nesting Limit W Conversion Data is Over 16 Kbytes W Check Sum Error W Library Screen Not Found W Mark Screen Not Found The line type name specified when the entity line type is individually set is not defined in the TABLE section Add the data of the presetline name to the TABLE section The layer name setin the entity is not defined in the TABLE section Add the presetlayer name to the TABLE secton The character style name used in the entity is not defined in the TABLE section Add the character Style name to be used to the TABLE section The composite picture name which is referenced by the INSERT and DIMENSION entities is not defined in the BLOCK section Add the data ofthe preset composite picture name to the BLOCK section An unexpected data case is found in the intermediate file This does not occur normally The temporary file created during conversion may not have been written Check the free disk Space and disk condition and retry conversion The specified composite
339. fied screen 4 1 1 Listing Copying Deleting Screens You can list the number size and title of all existing screens for each screen type You can also print out this screen list 9 1 Print Settings Usage Pattern Screen list Select a Screen Type appears Copy or delete a desired screen Screen Open Screen or Click on E Listing Screens This feature lists screens for the current project PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the E icon 2 Select the type of screens to be listed By checking the Preview check The screens will be automatically listed box the selected screen image can oven Screen be viewed in the dialog box Project File Factory Alte Screen M tren Di ee E By changing the Open Screen dia log box s size the screen list dis play area can be enlarged so that more screens can be displayed To print the screen list refer to 9 1 1 Printing Project Information Tab 4 2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 1 Screen Editing E Copying Screens This feature copies a screen from the current project file PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the icon 2 Select a screen to be copied from the lis
340. folder and file settings g Fina Data Edits the contents of folder and file settings Copies folder and file settings Pastes copied folder and file settings Deletes folder and file settings Lists registered Lists registered filing folders and files settings E Registering Filing Data Here the procedure of adding Filing Data Setting is explained 10 12 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Registering Folders When multiple folders are used select Internal Memory and click oni Add to display the screen for creating a new folder Save As Folder No Filing data number Folder Type Filing Datallntemal K A value between 1 and 64 can be set Folder No 1 g Cancel Folder Title mwe o o Enter a title Commas are not al lowed Registering Filing Data When multiple folders are not used the filing data setting screen is dis played When multiple folders are used you can display the filing data setting screen by selecting 1 filing Data and click on the Add button ling Data File No men EE No ofDateBlocks PE Filing data is controlled in individual Descriptio D J NoofDatattems j0 file units Here designate the file num i FIE oaafoma bers of filing data to be registered Up mer E ON to 2 048 files can be registered OGO000 a e Data Storage Start Address ie E a Enter the first Address wher
341. g down the key Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library Window Help Jos alsjelaale gt jelf e seale ac cs vo maxa FE i E7 Uninen oA 2 by ee ensing machine i lce_Maker Pa w 5 an ed T Link Select Change Order Ei LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 8 Duplicate This command allows you to easily make multiple copies of any object The address of the copies can be set up so as to increment automatically from copy to copy or simply reuse the address of the original object E Duplicate Setting Dialog Box When this command is used the Duplicate dialog box for entering the copy specifications will appear as shown below Enter the When copying Parts that number of a require addresses clicking copies in the here will automatically assign X and Y new incremented addresses directions for each copy The device comment corre Enter the sponding to an address line spacing assigned by the automatic in dot units address increment is reflected in the Description field Alias addresses are not incremented Number of Copy Here how many times an object will be copied in the X and Y directions is entered When 1 is entered for either direction copying will not be performed in that direction The number of copies is also limited by t
342. g anywhere on a desired object allows you to select it Either a W or a mark will be displayed on the sides of the selected object These square marks are called handles Handle Types There are two types of handles those that can be used to scale the object and those that can not W Can be used to scale the object L Cannot be used to scale When an object has been be selected the Selection Tool box will automati cally appear When multiple objects are selected all the selection Tool box s functions are available Selects all of the After selecting a group objects in a group of objects selects one of that group Selection PAN Qos BLAD After selecting a group of objects selects one type of object i e squares circles etc After selecting either or clicking on either or e selects the next object or type GX re Objects may be selected using the Screen Data List instead of selecting them V on the screen 2 7 4 Screen Data List 2 144 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E How to Select a Single Object Here the procedure for selecting an object is explained PROCEDURE REMARKS Selecting an Object Directly When selecting grouped objects click on any one of the objects in a 1 Move the cursor over the object and left click group to select the group Handles display on the object
343. g area Move the cursor to where the X and Y axis lines cross and drag the cursor As the axis lines move the character size will change Click on the text block again or press the key to register enter the change Font Size 16x32 Ir 2 135 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing Style Characters can be either Normal Bold or Raised Style Normal 9 Bold i Raised SP te When text character background Bg is specified to Black Blk Blink NV transparent mode is used thereby displaying that area as transparent If an object has been drawn underneath these characters they the characters will appear transparent showing the object behind This function is useful when overlaying text on objects i e over the face of Switches and Lamps 2 2 Selecting Colors E Changing to a New Text Line and Line Settings When entering characters simply press the key to move to a new line When there are 2 or more lines of text icons will appear to allow adjust ments in line spacing and justification Controls the mal Spacing sat Size Spacing Justification Controls the performed in Bx16_F selected cea oOo Ko Eo OMe eo justification Justification Horizontal text s alignment can be changed to either Left Center or Right justified Right justified Left justified Centered 2 136 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2
344. g the Esc 2 b e an a ar Deletes a Load Screen List key will also close the screen E Editing via the Load Screen List Screen settings can be changed using the Load Screen List Clicking on the left most number of a screen to be changed will select highlight it Then clicking on the Edit button will bring up the Load Screen dialog box or the currently called up screen allowing you to edit the screen The procedure for calling up and then editing a screen varies de pending on the settings in the Load Screen Double Click 2 7 2 Screen Property Settings Display Settings Any coordinate setting can be changed directly via the Load Screen List LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 259 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Deleting from the Load Screen List Screens can be deleted from the Load Screen List Clicking on the left most number of a screen to be changed will select highlight it To delete multiple Load Screen Lists simultaneously simply drag the cursor to select the screen numbers Then click on the Delete button and the dialog box will appear to confirm the command If you click on button the screen will be deleted To cancel the request click on the button When selecting multiple screens click on the veal to delete all of them and click on Moal to cancel any dele tions Confirm Delete Are you sure you want to delete
345. g the product 5 Even though the information contained in and displayed by this prod uct may be related to intangible or intellectual properties of the Digital Electronics Corporation or third parties the Digital Electronics Corpo ration shall not warrant or grant the use of said properties to any users and or other third parties Digital Electronics Corporation accepts no liability for issues related to the intellectual property rights of third parties or any issues related to the use of the information contained in or displayed by this product 6 The specifications set out in this manual are for overseas products only As a result some differences may exist between the specifica tions given here and for those of the identical Japanese product I o o D E R a EE ee a Copyright 2002 Digital Electronics Corporation All rights reserved Digital Electronics Corporation November 2002 The LogiTouch is referred to as LT in this manual For the rights to trademarks and trade names see TRADEMARK RIGHTS LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide l Sees a A E O en ne oo A G O A i Gi Go _ Gon a a as os R cos i PREFACE TRADEMARK RIGHTS All company or product names used in this manual are the trade names trademarks including registered trademarks or
346. gain use either the designated communication cycle time or 150ms whichever is longer as the trigger s OFF time For communication cycle time details Device PLC Connection Manual 1 1 4 2 1 3 Special Relays Write Completed Bit Address LS2032 Bit 9 Normal data transmission ON a 10 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Device PLC amp SRAM Data Transmission Settings Here select the method used to transmit filing data either from backup SRAM to the Device PLC or from the Device PLC to backup SRAM Select this setting when performing automatic data transmission using the Contorl Word Address feature Device PLC Controlled Transfer SRAM lt gt Device PLC When this check box is selected automatic data transmission via the Exter nal Device s trigger is set up If this box is not checked data must be transmitted manually using the Editor area Toolbox s Filing Data Display Control Word Address SRAM lt gt Device PLC Designates a Word Address where the filing data transmission trigger and mode data are stored Control Word Address 1 10987 5 1 Reservation Reservation All OF F All OF F 1 SRAM External Device 2 Block No OFF ON External Device SRAM 0 0 Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted Transmit Completed Bit Address SRAM lt gt Device PLC Designates the Bit A
347. ge dialog box is still compressed and may appear different from the actual dis play after conversion To cancel the conversion simply 3 Click on the e _ button click on the button The bit map is then saved as an Image screen Image Screen Preview LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 175 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing PROCEDURE 4 Click on the button The Image screen s border will appear on the current screen Import Image Source Effects Destination mage File Eamputer_picture bmp r Source Image Colors REMARKS 256 Size bytes 23074 Dimensions 5 Click on the point where the Image screen is to be To cancel the placement click on placed the icon The Image screen will appear on your screen e Ifa portion of an Image screen extends over a Base screen s Y axis border 2 that portion will not be displayed on the LT screen When the Image screen is placed over the Base screen laterally however any part that extends over the Base screen X axis border will be squeezed onto the LT screen i e not cut Example When using LT Editor When using the LT for Windows panel display Drawing Areas E Pasting images with other file formats The paste function can be used for images copied onto the Clipboard Executing
348. h which has graduations the number of divisions are entered here If the number of the divisions is specified to 10 then 11 division lines are used When graduations are not necessary specify the number of the divi sions as Q Se te Whether the graduations are necessary or not will differ depending on the X Part s shape E Bar Graph Shape Color Attributes The graph s border color division color Axis Color display data color Graph Color and display data patterns are selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Bar Graph Alarm Settings Attribute If desired an Alarm can be setup here by toggling the Alarm check box 2 1 Parts Setting Alarms LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2792 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Bar Graph An example of the Bar Graph s creation and placement procedures are shown below Data stored in D00102 displays on the Bar Graph a ee ee When the value 34 22h is stored in D00102 the graph will look like this PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Bar Graph command or click on the i icon 2 In the General Settings tab input a Word Address and select a Data Format Bar Graph Settings BA_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings E D001 02 Description 3 Absolute 2 Relative nter Word Address h e re 4 Doot02 al L Display Mode Data Format in
349. hanges from 1 to 0 e The Scale value setup in the Graph Settings dialogue box refers to the number of trend line segments 6 in the Data Count graph on the previous page and the Data Count for the block display trend graph refers to the number of data points e To display the graph with the LS area setting delay Control Status setting by a time longer than the communication cycle time after storing the data count and data values e To display the graph with the PLC Word Address setting delay Control Status setting by a time longer than the communi cation cycle time after storing the data count and data values Offset The area where the data for a trend graph is stored is indicated When the PLC Word Address is used this setting is valid Data This area stores the data for a trend graph E Setting Example when the offset setting is not used When using only the display Word address Display O d i 02 o 01 o0 pi The previous graph remains and the current oms TTT TL data graph overlays it When 1 is entered to the Control Status word bit OO turns ON and the new graph overlays the previous display LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 53 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts When clearing the display Word address s control status a Data Count SP Clears the previous 02 li 00 Bit graph display Even if 16 Control Status PESENE
350. hapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script i Important 2 218 E g Read w WORD20 w WORD10 t 0000 Offset Word Address Read Write w WORD 10 t 0000 100 Offset Word Address Write This Address becomes the Word Address Temporary Word Address value For the above example when the value 2 is used for t 000 the Address becomes w 0102 lt Offset Address gt e The device designated as storing the offset value is not always read from the Device PLC It is read only when D script pro cessing is performed If a communication error occurs during device read the offset value will become 0 and the LT s inter nal special relay LS2032 bit 12 is turned ON When the data read is completed normally this bit is turned OFF Word Addresses used in the offset address format are not counted as D Script Addresses e When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address an integer array must be designated For an integer array an appropriate size required for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated lt Memory Copy gt D Script Toolbox Memory Copy memcpy Functions Copies device memory all at once Data Memory Ops for the number of Addresses will be cop ied to the copy destination Word Addresses beginning from the copy original Word Ulfset Address Address The number of Addresses effec tive is 1 to 640 Format memcpy Copy destination Word Ad dress Copy o
351. he 4cd__ button Up to 20 Data Sampling sets in Data Sampling Settings cluding Trend graph channels can be entered 3 Perform the data sampling settings After the settings Enter a Channel name of up to 5 are all completed click on the button characters Channel Setting x General Data Format Sampling Tag Name a ggj Sampling Address Trigger Bit Address OOoo00 Top Write Address o020 Ho of Sampl Addr 1 Graph Backup No Synchronous Mode Sampling Type Period Mo 60 seconds Ok N Cancel 4 Click on the ese button to quit the registration Data Sampling Settings Displays the registered items 2 240 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Ya Efficient Drawing Techniques 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques This section explains how the use of grids changing display states and the help function can all help to increase your drawing efficiency 2 7 1 Grid Snap Grid Points are placed at regular intervals on your screen and divide the drawing area into a coordinate grid pattern when the Snap to Grid func tion is enabled objects that are drawn will automatically snap be aligned on this grid pattern Use the Grid Point Spacing command to adjust the density of the Grid points and to display the grid or not Also grid points can be displayed as grid lines not as dots
352. he Parts menu Bit Switch command or click on the amp j icon 2 In the General Settings screen input the Bit Ad dress and select the Bit s Function Bit Switch Settings B5_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Description Operation Bit Address E nte r Moo 1 6 L Monitor Wianikar Bik ddai W h ent h e Function switch S state t Bit Set can change Bit Reset click here 2 Momentary P Bit Invert Select the Bit Invert function 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser Specify settings for Shape Color Label and Extension Settings if necessary Shape Browser EME nn SW 3D002 SW NO Bd SW_3D004 SW_ 3D005 Current POE File c progran fles pro tace IMpdb pdb p Tile EW 3000 4 After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button The Switch s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS When the Change State function se lected after entering the Bit Ad dress if you attempt to perform another area s operation before en tering the Monitor Bit Address the dialog box shown below will ap pear Click on the button to input the same address as used for the Bit Address To enter a dif ferent address click on the button and input the de sired address Bit Switch Do vou want to use the same Bit Address for the Monitor Bit Add
353. he global cross reference or change addresses On the global cross reference list double click on the column of the address you wish to change Or click on the opensceen _ button to open the Start Address dialog box specify the address before the change and click on the aK button Global Cross Reference List Bit Address word Address Addes cen OOOO Address Screen j fiddess Bess Steen ooo B1 Addresses teh Used i All Open Screen R Co rt Addresses _ r Address fxoo000 EE Cancel Note When selecting an address designated on the Base screen Trend Graph screen Keypad screen Video screen or Window screen open the screen by double clicking on the address or by clicking on the open sce button after selecting the desired address When the specified address is used only on one screen the screen will be displayed directly When the specified address is used on two or more screens the Open Screen dialog box appears Select the desired screen two or more screens can be selected and click on the Oren button te Close Screen Type Base Screen ia Hee Open Screen Address X00101 a The Global Cross Reference dialog box closes when the drawing screen opens 2 256 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Address Block Conversion
354. he CSV file to which the data will be saved V Click on the ee button to confirm the destina tion file to which the conversion pattern will be saved lt Loading a conversion pattern from a CSV file gt When the combination of the PLCs Click on the LoadPattems button indicated in Convert From and Convert To specified in PLC Type Change differs from the data PLE Type Change ae Fee ane ete ony ON Dale tern stored in the CSV file cannot be loaded Selecting the CSV file and clicking on the but ton will not display any data in the Address Table Select the CSV file to be loaded and click on the button to confirm the selection The content of the CSV file is displayed in the list of con version patterns LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 35 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 After setting up the conversion pattern click the comen button to perform address conversion PLE Type Change Convert From OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Convert To MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES Conversion Example time Conditions Contents of project file No of screens 1 ia No of Tags Parts placed 50 tar No of specified conversion pat terns 10 Conversion time About 10 seconds Change PLC Type The conversion time increases de creases in proportion with the num ber of screens If no conve
355. he Character Size Keypad Input Display Settings KD_001 L Code L FemdUp No of Display Digits haracter Sire Enter 4 Decimal Places Do not enter anything here i e ok Cancel Help 0 5 After all of the Keypad Display s attributes have been When placing the Keypad Input entered and selected click on the button Display do not rotate it Doing so will cause the Pop up keypad to dis The Keypad Display s outline will appear on the Base play in the incorrect orientation screen next to your cursor LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 71 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 6 Click on the point where the Keypad Display s top To cancel the placement click on left corner is to be placed the icon If desired use the Keypad Display s handles to alter its To change the Part s size refer to 2 4 3 Scaling Up Down SIZe Even though the set value display area is scaled up or down the character size will not change To change the character size or position directly select the charac ters inside the border Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 4 14 Changing Attributes 7 Repeat from step 1 to create Keypad Displays with If the Ctrl key is pressed when the Word Addresses D00051 and D00052 display area s border is scaled up Except for
356. he PLC Depending on the number of Addresses it may take from 20 seconds to several minutes e Unless data write is completed for the designated number of Addresses screen displays such as tags will not be updated or refreshed e If data to be written exceeds the designated device range a communication error occurs In this case you must turn the GP s power OFF and then ON again to reset the GP from the error e When the data are written to the LS Area with the Memory Copy memcpy function the data can be written only in the User area Data cannot be written into the System Data area LSO000 to LS0019 Special area LS2032 to S2047 or Re served area LS2048 to LS2095 However data can be read out from these areas e When the 32 bit device data is copied to a 16 bit device using D Script and the bit length is designated as 16 bits only the data for lower 16 bits will be copied LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 219 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script E g memcpy w 100 w WORD10 3 15 0 Also when 16 bit device data is copied to a 32 bit device the data for the lower 16 bits will be copied and 0 will be desig nated for the upper 16 bits E g memcpy w WORD10 w 100 31 100 1 WORD10 101 2 11 102 3 12 e When 32 bit device data is copied to a 16 bit device or when 16 bit device data is copied to a 32 bit device if the D Scrip
357. he copied object s location size the Duplicate dialog box s Spacing settings and any other related settings Spacing Enter the spacing interval of dot screen pixel units to be used when the La object is copied for both the Horizontal and Vertical directions Note When Duplicating an object its positioning will be decided based on the top XX left handle of the copied master object However if a Bar Graph s handles are located in a graph display area the object will be placed based on the graph display area not the graph s border Therefore when setting the spacing be sure to not overlap any of the graphs borders Address Increment To copy multiple Parts specify the direction of the automatic address incre ment According to the automatic address increment consecutive Addresses will be assigned in the designated direction When the original object s Address is a Bit Address the automatic address increment is performed in the unit of bit and when it is a Word Address the automatic address incre ment is performed in the unit of word If the automatic address increment is not used Parts will be copied using the same address as their original ones ae When the original object s Address is a symbol Logic symbol the automatic XX address increment is not performed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 161 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 162 E g
358. he position where the window is to be placed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide and Base B Screen REMARKS Window Control Address 15 02 01 00 Bits Changing the order of window layers 0 Touching the window will change the order of the layer 1 Touching the window will NOT change the order of the layer Show 0 Hide the window 1 Show the window A maximum of one global window and two local windows can be dis played simultaneously on a single Base screen If the specified position overlaps the objects on the Base Screen the objects are hidden while the win dow is displayed 3 33 Memo 3 34 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide gt SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT A s you use the LT Editor file management work such as copying and deleting created screens and projects will increase thereby improv ing your work efficiency This chapter covers Information Management of your data MM E E T E E E E Screen Editing cL E E AE TE Project Editing 1 e BT E Project Compression Decompression a E E A Information Display ES rE Table Editor Character Strings LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 1 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT mi Screen Editing This section describes the commands used to edit a screen such as listing screens and copying deleting a speci
359. he screen area to be copied and other settings and a copying method Screen Copy Destination A Manufacturing System Stam Fion T Source Specify the screen area to be copied Al from the project file D screens Few L E at the copying Te Specify the start screen number in the project file at the Sener Tyger source copying destination Internal Settings The specified data will be copied to this and subsequent screens Internal Settings S ec if the setti nds System Information Filing Data p y g se Saacina fo Overwite i Merge other than the i Overnite y Merge Data Loging Settings screen to be copied D Scrint Functions Text Table data from the project file is a 2 Merge z Global D Script at the copying Sica Sass source Source The project file selected as the copying source is displayed Specify the screen area to be copied and a screen type If you are not copying a screen but other settings only select Internal Settings Destination The current project file is displayed When copying a screen from another project file specify the start screen number in the project file at the copying destination to start copying the screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 7 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Internal Settings Select the items to be copied among the global settings for each projec
360. he table language displayed at the moment when the alarm is triggered or reset will print e When a table is switched while real time printing is set to print the alarm summary a tag or log alarms Q tags the switched table will be used starting from the next print job LT LT Japanese to English ALARM A T cece Switch the tables LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 49 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT e When a table is switched while log alarms Q tags are being written into the CF Card as a CSV file the switched table is used immediately e The steps for switching tables are similar to those for switching screens Therefore the Sub Display Cursor Display and Scroll Display that were displayed before the switching with the Log Alarm Q tag will not be reproduced 4 5 2 Table Editor Index Character Strings The Table Editor is used to create a table s index character strings Table Editor Index Character Strings can be exported in CSV format You can also import a CSV file to use as an index character string Operation procedures Start Screen Setup gt Text Table J Put a check mark in the Text gt Table ON OFF checkbox Assign Control Address gt Select font from Font Setting menu gt Enter index character string gt Save table data E Table Editor Features Put a check mark here to
361. he various Keypad Key functions are shown in the table below Decimal Hexadecimal Keypad Specs N gt xX c O E E O O Dec Only keys Numeric value keys for Hex the keys are 0 to F Inputs the corresponding value in the display Delete key Deletes the character above the cursor Clear key Clears the entire display If the C is pressed after clearing 0 is stored in the PLC Word Address Enter key Registers the set value and writes it to the PLC Storage Address Then the cursor moves to the next display and awaits next input Cursor keys Moves the cursor right and left within the display ump keys Moves to the next Key Display without entering the set value You can use these keys to jump to the area where you wish to enter data Negative key Only available for Dec imal and format Decimal Point key Valid when Decimal Places have been entered for Decimal and BCD numbers LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 61 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Keypad The procedure for creating and placing a keypad is shown below fo 5 When the Trigger KD _1to3 Input data Bit M0080 turns Word Address D0050 from the ON to D0052 can receive Keypad For how to create the display area for the keypad shown here refer to 2 1 12 Keypad Display PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Keypad command or click on the
362. hing the Roll Up key once will roll up by the number specified here Roll Down Places the Roll Down key used to scroll through a list of items Touching the Roll Down key once will roll down by the number specified here SRAM gt LS Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the backup SRAM to the LS area LS gt SRAM Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the LS area to the backup SRAM External Device gt LS Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the external device to the LS area LS gt External Device Places the switch used to transfer Filing Data from the LS area to the exter nal device 2 84 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E File Name Display Switch Type Color Attributes Specify colors border colors for the function switches which are placed automatically 2 1 3 Function Switches E Place File Name Display Shows how to call up the File Name Display Registered File No 1 s filing data is displayed on the File Name Display with 3 display lines o and 10 display characters By pressing a function key File Name Key filing data can be transferred from the SRAM to the external device or from the external device to the SRAM For filing data list and regis tering filing data refer to 10 1 1 Filing Data Recipe Function PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu
363. ically a calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing lt When the Centering function IS used gt Attributes 4 Move the cursor over the desired placement area and while holding down the key click on any desired point After clicking on a point in the drawing area the text box will appear on the screen in dotted line 5 Select a centering area that is the same size or larger To cancel the designated area click than the previously selected text area the right mouse button The designated size s text box will appear in the center of the selected area V7 Operation Screen 2 138 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Em LoadScreens o Graphics created on screens in a project can be loaded and used repeatedly on others with LT Editor Thus a single screen s contents can be used repeatedly elsewhere The Load Screen function is also a good way to cut down on your screen s actual size since you only need to call up items to your screen not save them on it E Screens that can be loaded to other screens The screen currently being edited cannot be loaded on to itself B Base screen B Base screen Image screen B Base screen U Window sereen B6aselscreen Image screen ot ote oe The screen currently being edited cannot be loaded on to itself D e If a portion of an Image screen extends over a Base
364. ick on the button The Half Pie graph s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 6 Click on the point where the Half Pie Graph s top To cancel the placement click on left corner is to be placed the icon If desired use the Half Pie graph s handles to alter its To change the size Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 45 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 1 8 Meter Graphs Meter Graphs create an area where a Device PLC s Word Address numeric data is displayed as absolute or relative values in a Meter Graph i e a needle moves to show the value The graph s display will change to reflect Device PLC Word Address data changes E Meter Graph General Settings Attributes lt When displaying data in absolute values gt Select Absolute or Enter comment Relative display data here mn anna l Enter the eneral Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Afarm Settings The currently Description desired Word selected Meter rd Address data z EA poon 1 2 Display Mode Graph simage APPORTS NETO t Select the Calls up the Part desired Data Parts Shapes can be selected Hep directly from the Browser Absolute Data stored in the de
365. ide 2 103 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Click on the point where the Message Display s top To cancel the placement click on left corner is to be placed on the Base Screen the lal icon If necessary use the Message Display s handles to alter its size after placement To change the The message corresponding to the message number des Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down ignated in the Dialog box is displayed on the Message Display Regardless of whether the Message Display is scaled up When the Message Display is or down the character size will not change To change scaled up larger the message char the character size and position directly select a charac acters may not be displayed in the ter inside the text box correct position In that case use the pull down menu Edit menu s Align command to adjust the position 2 3 10 Align amp Unit Operating Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s Attribute Settings dialog box Also clicking on the message numbers allows you to view the message s display status 2 3 15 Changing Attributes ote Changing the state via the Parts State Change Tool Bar after placing a Part X allows you to check each state s Library display condition Every time a part s screen is opened the Part s state will be reset to 0 If a state which has not been defined is desig
366. ify the Screen number re Load Screen of the Load Ton Sereen Na Type screens after conversion Screen Search Result l Screen Specify the p No range of the EndNo 8999 Search Screens on which Load Screens have been called up LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 19 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS Example Load Screens B100 to B105 currently loaded on Base screens B1 to B30 are converted to B200 to B205 1 Via the Project Manager select the Utility menu Convert Load Screens command 2 Specify the type and numbers of the Load Screens to be converted and the Top Screen number of the Load Screens after conversion Base screen Start No 100 End No 105 Top Screen No 200 3 Specify the range of the Search Screens and their type The Load Screen numbers specified in step 2 will be converted and called up on Search Screens specified by the Start and End numbers here Screen Search Result Screen Start Ho Start No 1 End No 30 k i 4 After confirming all the settings are correct click on the Conver button 5 Click on the Start button to start conversion The conversion status will continuously be displayed Conversion Status Converted Screens at pe Lt f 6 Click on the Close button to close the dialog Converted Screens j Start BG
367. ill be reflected in the Description field 2 Select a Part by its line and click on the Apply Device Com ment button If there are multiple address setting items for that Part the descrip tion corresponding to the address specified in the Address Table for Automatic Input of Device comment will be reflected in the Description field 2 3 8 Reflection of Device Comments LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques E Exporting to a CSV File The Parts list information can be saved as a CSV file You can also select whether the currently selected page tab s information will be exported or the entire page will be exported t winch Del FE Ele Edt view Insert Format Tools Data low Help Bar Graph Bit Switch Function Switch Trend Graph ord Switch yli amg Je P E f Al ZL m E F Ba io He 5 3 in SE El amp A u B s ge aje F Bit Switch B Part ID D i BA 001 la Test D 3 BA_003 ault Test
368. in 90 units The character size will be converted into a size closer to either 1 2 4 or 8 x magnification Special characters that will be converted are d c and 7p When text contains more than 100 characters it will be divided every 100 characters into records of data and then converted When more than 100 character text is divided into records of data groups of overflowing characters after the first 100 characters will be dislocated toward the right bottom for a few dots Tilting angles character fonts and character spacing will not be con verted Text will be converted based on the ASCII code therefore the character style Standard Bigfont etc or font file settings will be ignored When text with half sized and full sized characters mixed in vertical lines 1s converted the half sized characters will be centered DIMENSION Dimension Indicator During conversion the breaking down of a grouped object Block is performed by referring to the Block s sections which indicate the Block s component Part objects However dots will not be converted INSERT Inserting Object A grouped object defined in the Block section will be broken down into each drawing object and converted Up to 10 layers of nested data will be converted However since all the data will be converted into a single layer on a single screen the objects over the limit file capacity will not be converted Although the
369. in the input area The new input is appended to existing data To clear the existing values enter CLR from the Touch Keypad e Auto Clear ON The previous input is cleared when the first character except the cursor keys ENT DEL and BS keys is entered e Auto Clear amp Input Check When barcode input is performed in this mode the Auto Clear function is enabled and the input data are monitored so that it matches the No Display Digit If the data length is inappropriate it is not written into the word address When data is input from the Touch Keypad only the Auto Clear function is enabled e Bar Code Input Selecting this feature enables input from the Touch Keypad and barcode readers Touch Keypad input enables the entry of numeric data Barcode Reader input enables the entry of text strings Using the Bar Code reader connected to the LT data can be read then written to the data storage address setup prohibiting data input from barcode reader When inputting data using the barcode reader input e Data read using the barcode reader is written automatically to the data storage address It is unnecessary to use the ENT key on the touch keyboard I Usable barcode readers are restricted to those recommended in your User s Manual 2 68 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e If you enter a change screen command during barcode input because the s
370. ings button Settings eat copy esate ce i General Info Item Settings Color 1 This tab page provides information about the current settings for the Item Name General Info Column Mo Column Type LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 47 10 2 Logging 10 48 Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Color Block Name Color Berea Cer Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk Block Name Fo AMT YF No kr blink display s MOO OO hoon ok di cance Hee 2 Column Settings Display E Attribute Settings To enter column attribute data click on a Date Time or Value title top bar and then click on the Settings button Display Settings Ea Cony Faa Cut yyimimit ___ Total General Info Column Type Date Time This tab page provides information about the current Column settings Column Type Select the desired display item from Value Date Time or Char Col eneral Info Data Format Size Style Alam Settings Column Mo 2 Column Type t Value 4 Char Col pelin Data Type Date yy mind Display Format lapat ween Alam Settings Display Style No of Display Digits 99 Decimal Places Date Displays the date Time Display Format Ym Displays the time
371. is selected here y Reference s 2 2 9 Text The characters used for the display of 2000 s first two characters 20 are single byte characters LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 105 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing a Date Display The Date Display placement procedure is shown below Used to display the date PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Date Display command or click on the 172 icon 2 In the General Settings area select a display format Date Dispaly Settings DD_0O001 Select the yy mm dd format Border Color i II i ll i E Text Color ek Plate Color i ek 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select Colors and Character Size ing a Part Shape Shape Browser Parts File Current POE File o program fles pro facetypdb pdb p Tite DD_3D001 Filf Hee 4 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the Place button The Date Display s outline will appear in the Base screen next to your cursor 2 106 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the point where the Date Display s top left To cancel the placement click on corner is to be placed the fl icon If desired use the Date Display s handl
372. isplays the title of the current screen Size Displays the data volume of the current screen If any Parts are placed on this screen the screen data volume will be increased 4 4 3 Version Information Version Information displays the LT Editor Project Manager and Editor s version information To see this data select the Help menu About command lt Project Manager Version Information gt Seral Mo 11111111111 Version 2 0 Build Ho 2002 10350 2247 Copyright C 2001 2002 Digital Electronics Corp LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 47 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT Ee Table Editor Character Strings The Character Strings Settings and the Multi language Display Feature are described in this section e Image fonts cannot be used in the table editor character strings Important 4 5 1 Overview Multi language Display Feature Using Index Text for the text objects and part s labels allow you to easily switch the language and information displayed on the screen during opera tion the diagram below describes the steps for switching the display lan guage Switching between tables is performed with the Control Address two or more tables cannot be specified at one time Thus you can easily switch the display language or displayed text items on the screen Character strings are switched by selecting tables a group of character s
373. ivision Performs division on the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Decimal places and over flowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded Assign Assigns the right side value in the left side The left side can state a device address only while the right side can describe both a device address and a constant Any over flowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded lt lt Shift Left Shifts the data on the left side to the left by the number on the right side This fea ture supports logical shifts only gt gt Shift Right Shifts the data on the left side to the right by the number on the right side This fea ture supports logical shifts only Uperators TA RZE Ta 2212 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS SP te Example Shift Left operation Shifts to the left by one bit Before the shift 1 oj1jo 1o 1joj1joj1joj1joj1 0 After the shift OTTO TTC UIO TTC TIO TO 110 9 1 is rounded off 0 Bit wise AND amp Performs logical AND of data between word devices or between word device data and constant Used to extract a specific bit or to mask a specific string of bits Bit wise OR l Performs logical OR of data between word devices or between word device data and constant Used to turn ON a specific bit Bit wise XOR Performs exclusiv
374. ject To close LT EDI TOR for Windows refer to 1 2 5 Quitting LT Editor for Windows 1 9 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish A e When a Vertical LT unit is replaced with the horizontal type or vice versa the displayed screen will rotate 90 relative to the Important original data In this case you must edit the displayed data using the Rotate command After editing be sure to check the displayed data Example m lt Horizontal type Vertical type W Creating Editing Saving a Logic Program To create a logic program you must move from the Project Manager to the Logic Program Editor Only one logic program can be created for one project E Creating Editing a Logic Program When the Logic Program Editor is started the logic program being created in the current project file is displayed PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Project Manager s Control menu Cre ate Edit Controls command or click on The Logic Program Editor starts ea Logic Program Editor noname File Edit View Search Insert Data Controller Help Ee EA ARAM meee Fe ae oox F Pea ca een m gt om ow fea ti Program Descri ption m a Rung 1 Programming Mode l __071008 E LT Type 2 Create Edit a logic program For details on logic program devel l l opme
375. ject aoe 2 Select the Edit menu Rotate Left command or click on the icon The object will be rotated counterclockwise 90 degrees relative to its center point if necessary repeat the com mand 90 Rotation E Rotating an Object Clockwise Right PROCEDURE 1 Select a desired object aa 2 Select the Edit menu Rotate Right command or click on the icon The object will be rotated clockwise 90 degrees relative to its center point If necessary repeat the command 90 Rotation 2 166 REMARKS 2 3 1 Selecting Objects The center point of the object is where two lines connecting the opposite handles other than the corner handles cross Center To cancel the rotation click on the icon Clicking on the icon one time reverses one 90 degree ro tation If an object is moved outside the drawing area by rotating the object will not be displayed on the LT screen REMARKS 2 3 1 Selecting Objects The center point of the object is where two lines connecting the opposite handles other than the corner handles cross Center To cancel the rotation click on the icon Clicking on the icon once reverses one 90 degree rota tion If an object is moved outside the drawing area by rotating the ob ject will not be displayed on the LT screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SC
376. k the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Mirror X Mirror Y The Mirror X and Mirror Y functions move a Mark symmetrically relative to the vertical and horizontal axis respectively To execute the Mirror X and Mirror Y functions click on the icon respectively Example Mirror X H H U d E Turn Counterclockwise O Turn Clockwise N The Turn Counterclockwise Turn Clockwise functions turn the mark counterclockwise and clockwise 90 respectively To execute the Turn Counterclockwise and Turn Clockwise functions click on their respctive the 4 G icons respectively Example Turn Counterclockwise 3 18 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen E Reverse This function reverses the white and black areas In the reverse display mode all ON dots are turned OFF and all OFF dots are turned ON To execute this function click on the icon Example LT E
377. l Transfer cable was removed Display Improper COM portwas used The system for the target model has notbeen B lank None Black downloaded When the LT is powered on Blank Invalid access is made to 9 or 14 ofthe Buzzer sounds continuously Normal System Data Area Refer to Solution 1 when error pattern is observed Similarly Solution 2 corresponds to Error Pattern 2 When error pattern 3 is observed try the procedure described in Solution 3 If Solution 1 or 2 does not solve the problem with error patterns 1 and 2 try Solution 3 as well Refer to Solution 4 when error pattern 4 is observed Solution 1 1 Transfer from the PC Transfer programs and screen data from the PC LT Editor to the LT while the buzzer of the LT sounds Be sure that your PC and the transfer cable are able to transfer programs and data to the LT LT Editor has been programed to handle a variety of problems and retry data transfer repeatedly if the LT fails to respond successfully In this case LT Editor will try repeatedly to complete handshake mode it may take more than a minute in some situations After handshaking is completed LT Editor will begin to transfer the Memory Loader program system program communication protocol program expansion program and screen data Solution 2 The transfer cable is improperly connected or has been removed The improper COM port may have been selected Confirm that the cable and port a
378. l Max coer Total Min ecr When using the pattern shown above the maximum number of value col umns and data display rows are as follows 10 56 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging No ofValue No ofData Columns __ Display Rows 39 1007 When the No of value columns number of logging words is the maximum 32 columns When the No of value columns number of logging 16 1116 words is the maximum 16 columns When the No of value columns number of logging 1170 l words is the maximum 8 columns When the No of value columns number of logging 4 1197 words is the maximum 4 columns 7 When designating the columns as the block name display and entering characters in each column the file size will become Important extremely large Depending on the number of characters en tered and other items designated approximately 1000 rows can be used for the pattern shown above LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 57 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES ye Print Settings In this dialog box the current Print Settings applied in the Print screen can be viewed and edited For hardware printing settings refer to LT Series User s Manual Data Logging Settings Trigger Settings Display Print Write Settings Print QhOFF fs Block Unit ti Realtime Copy from Display Row Set
379. l corners are beveled with straight lines All corners are beveled with arcs When selecting Beveling input a bevel dot number Rounded 4 Line 4 The dot walue sets up Eoy this spacing 2 122 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Drawing a Square Rectangle PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Square Rectangle com mand or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of the square rectangle to be drawn 2 2 3 Square At If desired select the colors line types beveling type and tributes Square Shapes and dot When drawing a filled square check the Fill check Beveling types box instead of selecting line types 5 quare Rectangle JC Fil i Jatu Comer 8 2 SAnS Fo eee E E Bo D a a O E JL Select a pattern Square Rectangle I Fil 7 Comer 8 SI fo eee me _ 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area and click on the In step 4 hold down the key first of the diagonal s points a to draw a square When using the keyboard to draw a square use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the rectangle s two di agonal points and press the led key to start and finish the rectangle To cancel the placement click on the icon 4 Click on the diagonal s other point b The rectangle is automatically drawn registered Double clicking on any object a drawn on the screen auto
380. large you can compress it to reduce the data size The data is compressed to one fifth the size of the source data The compressed Image screen data can then be displayed directly to the LT series With the compressed Image screen however the LT series display speed will be slower PROCEDURE 1 Select the Utility menu Compress Image com mand of the Project Manager REMARKS 2 Select the screen to be compressed or decompressed To compress an Image screen bit from the list map data of another project select separately described as follows Compression 3 Click on the Compress button to execute data com pression The process is finished when the word Compressed appears Decompression 3 Click on the Decompress button to perform data decom pression The process is finished when the word Normal appears LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide the project an Existing Project 1 2 2 Selecting To select several screens click on the screen numbers while press ing the key To select a specified screen click l on the screen number while The compression and decompression procedures are pressing the Ctrl key 3 29 3 3 Window Display Window U Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS and Base B Screen lt 3 Window Display Window U Screen and Base B Screen Call up the windows registered on the Window Scre
381. larm Range the Alarm display appears in the desig nated colors gt COM SCOME oni eo MOUS MCCMe NEF lt Alarm Range List gt Data Format Alarm Range 32768 0 32767 t 006535 0 to 65535 0 to FFFF h so J to 9999 10 52 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging Size Style Column Settings General Info Data Foma Sizer Style Alarm Settings E Format Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink Mo of Display Digits E Decimal Places 0 i Color Settings Display Color B BOOM OM No ek Display Style Previ fi Shift Right J Zero Suppress ee E Shift Lett oo008 General Info Column Type Char Col Char Col Displays text 2 Column Type 7 Value j Date Time fe Char Col General Info Column Mo Data Type tee Display Format wee Input nen Alarm Settings Display Style No of Display Digits Decimal Place 3 Row Settings Display E Attribute Settings Select either Item Name or Data row and click on the Settings button to edit each row s attributes Display Settings aa copy Paste cue tern oe General Info Selecting Item Name Row The General Info page provides infor Bo mation about the current settings for E Item Name Settings Gen
382. lay cannot fit in a single screen only one 2 Alarm Summary display can be placed on a screen When the number of messages to be displayed does not fit on one screen create Alarm Summary displays on multiple screens so that the screens will switch to display all the messages To display all error messages continuously specify each screen s Start Line as follows The first screen The starting line The second screen The number of display lines on the first screen 1 The nth screen The number of display lines on the first screen x n 1 1 No of Display Lines Designates the maximum number of alarm message lines that can be dis played on one screen Up to 50 lines can be displayed No of Display Char Designates the maximum number of characters that can be displayed on a line The screen s limit is 100 characters per line However the maximum number of characters for each LT unit will vary depending the model E Alarm Style Color Attributes The display area color when a message is cleared Clear Color is selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 19 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Placing an Alarm Summary Display Area The Alarm Summary Display Area s setting procedure is shown below ErrorCode030 Unit 0D5 gie par NTA FrrorCode040 Unit 0D5 Emenee e041 Unit ODS ErrorCode041 Unit OD6 Appear on the screen ina 199 Aar migeeades na
383. le and select a desired line Then use the Cut or Copy command and then the Symbol Editor s Paste command Do not register the same symbol name for both a word sym bol and a bit symbol important If alphanumeric numerals are used at the end of a symbol name executing the Copy and Paste command will auto matically change the symbol s name When Chinese characters and numbers are used in a symbol name All the Arabic numbers to the right of the Chinese character s will be deleted Sequence numbers starting from 2 will be assigned after the Chinese characters When Roman characters and Arabic numbers are used in a symbol name Example ABC123 All the Arabic numerals to the right of Roman character s will be deleted and replaced by a sequence number When only Arabic numbers are used in a symbol name Only the first number is retained and all other digits are truncated and replaced with a sequence number LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 23 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Registering Symbols and Device Comments PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Screen Setup menu Symbol Editor command 2 Select symbol or device comment type In this example please select Word Symbols File Edit lew Help __ JNUMI NN 3 Enter symbol names and addresses To enter a symbol name you can use u
384. le holding down the key click on an Object to be selected That Object s handles will appear to reveal it has been selected LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 145 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing E How to Select Multiple Objects Use this operation to select multiple objects All the objects in a designated area or on the entire screen can be selected Also if necessary some of these objects can be de selected PROCEDURE REMARKS Selecting Multiple Objects by Dragging Left dragging over only a part of an 1 Left drag over objects as described in Selecting an Object will not select it The entire Object by Dragging see above Be sure to enclose object must be specified to make all of the objects to be selected completely if part of selection possible an object is not enclosed within the box it will not be included in the multiple selection Handles will dis play on the objects that have been selected When two or more objects are se lected the Change Attributes command cannot be used i The editing commands available depend on what objects have been selected Selecting All the Objects on a Screen 1 Select the pull down Edit menu s Select All Ob jects command All object handles will appear to show that they have been selected 2 146 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Obje
385. lected the color attributes designated here are used for normal display LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 55 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Display Style Shift Left Shift Right Select either shift type Data is dis played from the selected position The default setting is Shift Left Zero Suppress When O suppression check box is checked all unnecessary Os are not dis played When this check is removed Os are added to the front of numbers to match the display length designated in the No of Display Digits area e g When the No of Display Digits is 4 and 0 suppression is OFF value 25 appears as 0025 E Display Settings Maximum File Size The display settings file size capacity is approximately 58KB However depending on the specific setting combination the user s file size may exceed this capacity The following example is the standard display setting SIZe e Enter the Block Name in the Ist column and then up to 8 single byte characters in each column e Enter the Block Name in the Ist row and then up to 8 single byte charac ters in each row e Four rows are available for totals Total Average Max Min No of value columns Block Name Date Time Value Value Value Block Name Data display kacor veg Datadisplay ascoerse imine os Data Biopsy ABCDEFGH Data display w Total Total kacor Total Average ascorn T Tota
386. lects the range of al Addresses to be displayed a lt a s Click to select the screen in which the cose Hee address you want to edit is used or go directly to the desired screen Logging Filing D ata 5 ampling E1 B1 B2 864 Global Decrpt B1 52 64 Click to convert the addresses in one operation MEANE 4 2 4 Converting Addresses and Device Codes Address Map Display When selecting Word Address the table cells from Word Address Bits 0 to 15 for 32 bit device from O to 32 will all be filled When selecting Bit Address only bit cells currently used will be filled Displays the Bit location fo In i ie te ie fe re es ne re fs as Click to select the screen in which the ad dress you want to edit is used or _ go directly to the Click to convert the addresses in desired screen one operation MEARE 4 2 4 Converting Addresses and Device Codes k Selects whether earar tions are dis ma played for Bit ee Addresses or for m setting condi pooo0o Word Addresses cam f r LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 233 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Changing Addresses You may move to the drawing screen of the specified address from t
387. led following that data stored be fore the LT s power was turned OFF With this mode unselected when the LT s power is turned ON data sampling will start from the value 0 For nor mal operation select this mode E Synehanaus blade ok Cancel Hep Data stored in the backup SRAM is erased when e The memory is initialized important Screen data is transmitted e The LT system and protocol are set up e The LT self diagnosis Internal FEPROM screen area is performed Data Storage Example The following is an example of data stored from the storage start address When the trigger bit is turned ON the data is stored into the LS Area e The stored data count is stored in the storage start address e The stored data count number n is in the Bin format e When the stored data count is less than the sampling data count the Word Addresses up to that number will be cleared to 0 Storage start address Stored data count n O Q m Sampling data count LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 231 2 6 Data Sampling Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Sampling Channel Setting A General Data Format Sampling 12 Periodic During Trigger 17 Sample Only On Trigger Sampling Time E0 Word Address D00000 Tel E3 Sampling Type The method to import data from the host Device PLC is specified from the fol lo
388. leted After selecting the D Script settings to be deleted from the listing and clicking on the button the Confirm Script Delete dialog box will appear When the button is clicked on the D Script settings will be deleted When the button is clicked on the deletion command will be canceled Confirm Script Delete Do vou want to delete this script id OOOO desc wang WIE LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 207 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script E Editing D Script Settings Here registered D Script settings are changed After selecting the D Script settings to be changed from the D Script list and clicking on the modiy button an additional registration screen will appear Click on the button to change the D Script settings To cancel the Change command click on the button It is not possible to use the Project Manager Utility s Con vert Address area to modify addresses used in a D Script Any D Script program that requires address conversion will need to be edited manually E Important If the Save As function has been used to change a project file s Device PLC the D Script program will not be able to automatically change those addresses Be sure to not use D Script to perform any life threatening or possibly damaging actions E D Script Settings Copy and Paste PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down Special menu s D Script
389. lid when the display area border type is specified as No Border Draw the border line using the drawing tool Ge ia The gap equivalent to the specified display spacing is provided between the yY cell and the border line The entire cell is filled with the clear color specified in the Data Logging Display Color Attributes However the gap is not displayed in the clear color but its background is displayed If No Border is selected to draw an arbitrary border ensure that the border is drawn using the same width as the specified display interval without overlapping the cell lt Display Spacing gt Border the gap between the Draw the border so border and the cell is not filled that it does not with the clear color overlap any cell fe a L E Scroll Total With Data If the scroll data area is enabled the totaling section is scrolled together with the data section If the totaling section scroll is disabled the totaling section always appears on the screen E Data Logging Display Color Attributes Select a color clear color displayed when the border of each item is cleared 2 1 Selecting Colors 2 90 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Data Logging Display Switch Settings Attributes The number of rows and that of columns specified in Data type are dis played on the Data Logging Display If any data exceeding these numbers exists in the
390. ll up posi tion and then place the screen LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 141 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing 2 2 11 Load Mark Marks dot images created in a Mark screen can be loaded and used repeat edly on a Base screen E Loading a Mark Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Load Mark command or click on the icon 2 Select a desired Mark screen from the list or enter that screen s number directly on the Screen No field via the keyboard and then click on the but ton The Mark s outline will appear in the drawing area next to your cursor Designate its color and size before clicking on the OK button 1f desired Only Mark screens in the current project can be loaded Mark screens in other projects are not available When the screen display size is 50 the loaded Mark may not be Si displayed correctly on the LT Edi s ME e rep tor software Bo Peo oe To cancel the loading click on the 3 Click on the point where the Mark s top left corner is icon to be placed If desired use the Mark s handles to alter its size To change the Mark s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down oe 3 Double clicking on any Mark a ss loaded on the screen automatically calls up that Mark s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 142 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object
391. llowing items beforehand e Tables of available devices PLCs both before and after the device PLC types have been changed Device PLC Connection Manual Device Memory Map of the PLC etc e Printed result of global cross reference Click this button to execute the conversion accord Address Table Displays detailed information on the conversion patterns address type range of available ad dresses before the PLC type is changed and start address of the available address after the change Click this button to load the conversion patterns from the CSV file data and display the data in the Address Table ing to the data shown in the Address Table OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES MITSUBISHI FREGROL SERIES Click this button to save the conversion patterns in a CSV file Click this button to cancel all conversion information in the Address Table Click this button to register an additional conversion pattern Click this button to modify the settings of the conversion pat tern Click this button to delete a conversion patiern LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager click on the i icon or Do not open screens other than the select the Project menu Change Device PLC Type Project Manager Doing so will dis command able the selection of the Device PLC Type 2 To
392. ly from here Specifies data s Bit Specifies data Length Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used for storing the Bar Graph s data Display Mode When this check box is checked negative numeric data can also be displayed Bit Length Specifies the Bit Length of data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code When No Code is selected only positive data can be entered To enter negative number data select 2 s Complement or MSB 22 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Bar Graph Graph Settings Attributes Bar Graph Settings BA_O01 General Settings Graph Setting Shape Color Alarm Setting Only when a Display Direction Axis Divisions graph with Select the graduations graph s display has been direction ora selected will this box appear Enter the number of divisions desired here Direction The graph s display direction can be specified as either Up Left Down or Right Sr If Display Direction is changed for a 3D part its shade is rotated along with Note that part To let the shade displayed properly click on the button and select the part again from Shape Browser Axis Divisions For a grap
393. m Switch Alarme Preview Screen Type Base Screen 4 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 1 Screen Editing E Changing Screen Numbers and Titles This feature allows you to change screen numbers and titles in the current project file PROCEDURE REMARKS Changing only One Screen 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the E icon 2 Select a screen to be changed from the list and click on the Change button 3 Change the screen number and title and then click onthe OK button to delete the screen Important Hain EJ If any existing screen num Project File Digital Plant Fok Bpi 2 Screen Type Base Screen e ber IS specified It will be Scheer overwritten The currently open screen cannot be changed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 5 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS Changing Multiple Screens at a Time 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the E icon 2 Select multiple screens to be changed from the list To select multiple screens at a time and click on the Change button drag the mouse through the desired screens on the list or click on those screens while holding the Shift or key down The currently open sc
394. m with Global D Scripts are the same as those for writing a program with D Scripts Trigger Bit Rising Bit address Switch Action W WORD10 100 Trigger Bit Rising Bit address M0050 Action W D00100 100 E Overview 1 START Switch MOV 2 EN DN Off 100 IN OUT Word 0 J E Parts of Logic Program Editor s logic program can be replaced by D Script commands M0050 Parts of external device s logic program can be replaced by D Script commands e To use D Script for all of a project s screens regardless of the current screen select Global D Script To use the D Script only for the currently displayed screen select D Script while creating that screen e D Script allows you to perform Bin BCD display format changes text data changes or other functions all previously performed by the Device PLC via the LT e Since D Script is a language program debugging can be performed easily e D Script can be programmed as a trigger to sense the leading or falling edge of a bit to activate a timer or to detect true or false of a given condition LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 199 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script e There are three elements in a D Script Operators Statements and Oper ands which can be used to program conditions in the Device PLC e There are
395. main data and footer Up to 160 characters can be printed per line Header Data Footer LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 65 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Se Note The following is an example of logging data printout The Loop is not used 4 Appr Check Create 00 3236 26 DL 324A iG 0L 320Z 30 00 S210 25 DL 3219 19 00 P 00 S230 AVERAGE 3227 324A 320Z 10 66 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging When using the Loop regardless of the logging frequency the data display row will be designated as a single row Also Char Col Border and Total sections cannot be set Print Settings 10 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX 14 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX 1200 XXXX XXX XXX j XX Prints the data 13 00 xxxx xxx xxx XX 14 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX ees sone eny 15 00 XXXX XXX XXX XK __ when data logging 46 00 xxxx xxx xxx XX is performed The RR TRS L RS LRS 1 33 nee ots ana 44 60 oo ae e ies other items will not 12 00 xxxx xxx xxx xx be printed 13 00 XXXX XXX XXX XX a With real time printing when using the Loop the data display row will be D designated as a single row e When using the Loop only real time printing can be used E Important
396. matic Library creation will be performed follows per screen Switches 2 only switches with the Monitor function selected Lamps 2 Messages 2 to 16 depending on the number of states used Picture Displays 2 to 16 depending on the number of states used Trends 1 to 20 depending on the number of channels However Part Libraries using the same Parts 1 e Part s that are the same size same attributes and without labels or other items will be used commonly For example When 30 Switches Monitor function is selected and 20 Lamps are placed on a single Base screen 30 x 2 20 x 2 100 Part Library items will be automatically created Therefore 60 of these size screens can be used in one project s data 2 When using the same Parts for multiple Base screens register the Part on one Base screen and then place it other Base screens using the Load Screen function Thus when multiple Base screens use those Parts only one Part Library will be used thereby reducing the Project File s size E Placing a Part in Position After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the desired position on the screen to place the Part 2 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the Fae button The Part s outline will appear on the Base sc
397. matically calls up that object s attribute set tings b 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 123 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing 2 2 4 Circle Oval To draw a circle or an oval click on its center point and drag the mouse to the circumference point and click again Holding down the key draws a perfect circle To draw a filled circle or oval select the desired pattern E Circle Oval Attributes Check this check box if a filled Circle Oval is desired Cicle O val Displays the currently selected Circle Oval image Select a Line Border type Select a Fg and Bg color and blinking if de sired fo ee ek bo Bee eK Select one of the Tiling patterns fo ee ek bo Bee eK E Drawing a Circle Oval PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Circle Oval command or click on the icon 2 Set attributes of an oval to be drawn Select colors and a line type if desired To draw a filled oval check the Fill check box and select a pattern 1n stead of selecting a line type Cicle O val I Fo eee oe bo Bee L E J Select a Pattern 2 124 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS Cicle Oval Fo Pee Ke bo Bees Kd 3 Move the cursor over the drawing area and click on In step 3 if the key is held the center
398. mber of the events exceeds 1 000 the excessive events will not be stored When a printer becomes offline mode due to the running out of printing paper during printing DO NOT turn the LT s power OFF Refill the paper and return the printer to online mode Event information stored in the LT in the printer offline mode will be output to the printer when the printer mode returns to online If the printer s power is turned OFF during printing event information transferred from the LT to the printer while the printer s power is OFF will not be printed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing mea Creating an Alarm This section describes how to create and register alarm messages using Alarm Editor PROCEDURE 1 Via the Project Manager select the Screen Setup menu Alarm Editor command or click on the icon to open the Alarm Editor Basic Alarm Settings A Manufacturing System_lte Alam Edit View Help Print i Fg Ea Elk oO Automatic Address Increment E TE g A Bg Sec Blk d Jumps to the designated line eS ee eit Tye Message Sunmary Tet 6 2 Specify the bit address monitor bit e eee 2 Summary zs 3 Enter a message Enter the message to be displayed on the LT unit panel during alarm output Select a message color if desired eit A Type Message Sunmary Text A
399. mber will overwrite the old one and when the button is clicked on the new num ber will not overwrite the old one Overwrite This screen already exists Do vou want to overwrite Cancel To convert another DXF file DO NOT cancel here rather start from step 3 again 2 266 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion 2 8 2 Conversion from Base Screen to DXF File Screen DXF Base screen data is converted into DXF file Drawing Interchange File data a as LT Editor Base C gt O gt DXF file Screen Se Convert Can be used for CAD software for a personal computer such as AUTO CAD E Requirements and Restrictions when Converting Data Screen DXF e Only Base screens can be converted e Image screens called up on the Base screen will not be converted e Tag data will not be converted so for example M tag s Marks will not be displayed after conversion e When text is converted the character size and position may differ from the original due to font type difference and errors created during conver sion e Since Load Mark will be converted into a simple straight line 1 e no width if it has been magnified it will be displayed differently from the original after it is converted If you try to convert a filled polygon that has four peaks one of Important which introverts into a DXF file thi
400. me page address x Title Fro tace Service Shop O K N Cancel Address pl fia fa plaza com proface indexhtmil Fee Home page Home page Digital s Homepage Pro face Service Shop Connect home page LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS 1 31 Memo 1 39 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Ya CREATING BASE SCREENS commands can all be used Also Edit commands can be used to modify any Parts or objects that you have created In addition to editing these screen objects the procedures for registering Library Items and Windows are also explained T o create Base screens the Editor area s Part Draw and Menu Bar PA EE EA EA A N EI E E T Parts PAS E E AONA E Drawing pA E E A E O N Object Editing PA EE T E OOIE OEE EOE TIES EA Libraries PA E E E D Script Global D Script D E E Data Sampling Pa EN E Efficient Drawing Techniques BD E DXF Conversion LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 2 Parts such as Switches Lamps and Graphs can be placed on Base screens Each Part s attributes such as setting Addresses and colors will be desig nated via the dialog box Switches and Lamps can be selected while viewing their images via the Browser After designating all the necessary Part at tributes decide their position and size on the object drawing area Parts can
401. more Yin ost tan Beat than 10 tmes Only 10 levels of nesting are allowed Appendix 2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix I Error Messages Cave Internet Browser Not Selected Yet Please select a Browser Invalid Address Invalid Extemal Device table Incorrect Extemal Device Table Format Non LTE File Old Extemal Device table and some functions may not work properly Please use latest table An Internet browser has not been selected yet After clicking on the error message s OK button selecta browser from the dialog box thatappears Before entering the device address check thatthe value is within the allowable range and that the device is Supported by the External Device The External Device table file format is not the Same as the LT s or the file is corrupt for some reason Select an External Device from the master disk and reinstall the file The External Device table file format is not the Same as the LT s or the file is corrupt for some reason Select an External Device from the master disk and reinstall the file A file has been selected that is not recognized by LT Editor for Windows 95 Be sure to selectonly P roject lte files The External Device table fle from an old version is being used Selecta new External Device from the master disk and reinstall it Screen number to copy from must
402. most loop will be skipped via the break command loop t 0000 loop 1 loop t 0001 loop 2 break Escape from loop 2 endloop break Escape from loop 1 endloop e If loop operation is finished without using the escape com mand the temporary Word Address value becomes 0 2 210 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global E Important D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e The range available for the temporary Word Address value will differ depending on the data format Bin BCD bit length and code used If code has been designated and the temporary Word Address becomes a negative value the condition is judged at the beginning of the loop and the loop processing stops e DO NOT use a PLC device in the loop formula Instead use an address from the LT s internal LS area s user area device or a temporary Word Address For example the following de scription preforms data write to the PLC many times in a short period 100 times in the following example This can cause a system error since communication processing the time required to write to the PLC cannot be performed at this speed The addresses entered below are just a few ex amples The actual address entry varies depending on your PLC type E g t0000 100 Loop100 times loop t 0000 w D0200 w LS0100 Write data to D0200 w LS0100 w LS0100 1 Increment LS0100 e
403. n Manual Screen Creation Guide 8 3 8 1 Overview Chapter 8 SIMULATION 8 1 1 General Description of the Simulation Screen To perform a simulation first transfer the screen data created with the LT Editor program and the simulation protocol to the LT unit MGA 7 2 Transferring Screens Usage Pattern Click on the Click on the Click on the Project Simulation gt HI button i button gt E button to to start the to stop the quit the simulation simulation simulation General description of the Simulation screen Enter the Base Screen number Select a function to dis Displays negative values where device information is to play device information with a minus sign be displayed Select which to screen to be Selects the format of the displayed on the LT panel display and input data Starts Stops during the simulation the simulation CEEE Malation view Option Help Register an e Cr a a address Quits the simu lation function Ox Name Description Function ee TT 5_001 ord Set 200001 5_O02 ford Set 00002 ODOT BA_ O01 Data Address 200000 poggi Data Address 00000 Ea 02 Blinks while e the simula A 0001 J Monitor Word Address DOUO00 i z Data Storage Address DOOO00 tion IS being 5_003 ford Set 200003 executed F500 at Sepeaion Bn noO BS O03 Bit Set Operation Bit ps
404. n always be modified by touching it EX re If the bit address for the interlock is turned OFF during on screen modifica NY tion of data the data edit mode is canceled Select a Border Type of the display area Specify whether the scrolling of the total width data section is enabled or disabled Border Type E Data Logging Display Data Type Attributes Logging Display LG_001 x General Settings Data Type Color Switch Setting Switch Shape Color Border Type Rio 3 No Border o H A Place Cancel Enter a display interval the number of dots 0 to 10 Enter the number of rows for the items dis played 0 to 40 Enter the number of columns for the items displayed 0 to 25 Select a border type of the display area from among three types No Border outer border HH 1 dot lines and outer border plus inner border FAA the outer border and item use 2 dot lines while the inner border uses 1 dot lines Row Specify the number of rows used to display logged data on the LT A maxi mum of 40 rows may be specified LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 89 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Column Specify the number of columns used to display logged data on the LT A maximum of 25 columns may be specified Spacing Specify spacing at which to display logged data on the LT A maximum of 10 dots may be specified This entry is only va
405. n characters on a 48 x 48 M M 8999 dotscreen These marks and foreign characters are Approx 576 bytes Screen displayed as stll or Active images on a Base Screen Bitmap image data can be registered here as LT screen Image I 11 t data Image screens are displayed as stil or Active Approx 58 KB Screen 18999 images on a Base Screen Window Ulo This screen is used to register screens you wantt display U U89090 in the window The window is displayed on the base Approx 16 KB Screen screen Ra e Although screen files can be numbered from I to 8999 the maximum Note number of screens that can be created for and used by a LT depends on your PC s hard disk capacity and the amount of RAM memory available e The number of screens that can be transferred to the LT will depend on how much internal memory the LT has The actual screen size and total number of transferable screens can be viewed in the Project Manager window by selecting the Project menu and then Project Information 4 4 1 Project Information 1 22 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 5 Screen Editor Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 5 1 Screen Editor Item Names and Functions The names and functions of the LT Editor editor s screen items are as follows a Title Bar b Menu Bar
406. n the icon If you enter an incorrect password three times or more data transfer can not be performed In this case repeat the transfer procedure from step 2 If a password has been registered enter the password Password Entry Enter Password Invalid Password Please Retype password Cancel 3 Specify a location directory and Project file to store the received data Then click on the but To cancel data transfer mode click ton on the icon If the same Project File name already exists the system asks if you wish to replace it if so select otherwise select 4 After the data transfer is completed select the Trans fer menu Exit command or click on the icon LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide T L 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS aa Sending Programs with the Logic Program Editor The Logic Program Editor allows you to send write logic programs alone to the LT that has been already set up You can also receive read logic programs from the LT Before sending logic programs alone be sure to select Send i Together command Important 7 2 4 When Sending Screens and Logic Programs Together To the LT E Sending Logic Programs PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select Control menu Edi 1 2 3 Creating Editing Saving a Logic Program ra tor c
407. n this tool box you can select objects using a variety of methods k Screen Data List Lists the settings and layout conditions of the objects Parts and figures that have been arranged on the screen You can select a desired object from the list SLOT 2 7 4 Screen Data List l Parts Palette Parts such as switches lamps and graphs are placed on a tabbed palette except for the keypad alarms File Name Display Logging Display Picture Display and Window parts To place parts on the drawing screen simply select the desired part from the palette and place it on the screen with drag amp drop operation Only one part can be selected per operation 1 24 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 5 Screen Editor Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals ies Display Area 50 100 200 You can enlarge or reduce the drawing area by selecting a magnification reduction ratio To change the display area select the or icon on the tool bar or select the 50 100 or 200 command from the View menu views Option Draw Parts Bata Sappplingy lisk Parts List laad Sereen List Laad Sereen Hestija Cross Reference List Preview w Screen Data Bor Tool Bar k w Statue Bar w oom Box Zoom out Zoom in Zoom out Used to reduce the current display area to 50 Zoom in Used to enlarge the current display area to 200 Sr In the 50 display mode the created screen
408. n unsigned 16 bit data e 65535 1 0 Produces overflowing digits e 65534 2 2 32766 Produces overflowing digits e 65534 2 2 65534 Does not produce overflowing digits E Difference of Residual Processing The result of a residual processing depends on whether the left and right sides are signed or unsigned When a remainder is produced by a division Operation an error may be created due to round up operation E g 9 5 4 e 9 5 4 E Rounded Decimal Places Decimal places resulting from a division are rounded E g e 10 3 3 9 e 10 3 3 10 E Notes on Operating BCD data A BCD data operation which produces overflowing digits does not give the correct result 2 228 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS r gt Logical Operation Examples E Bit Operation Examples 100 gt 99 and 200 lt gt 100 Result ON 100 gt 99 and 200 lt gt 200 Result OFF 100 gt 99 or 200 lt gt 200 Result ON 100 lt 99 or 200 lt gt 200 Result OFF not 100 gt 99 Result OFF not 100 lt 99 Result ON w WORD20 lt 10 Result True if WORD20 is smaller than 10 ON not w WORD20 Result True if WORD20 is 0 ON w WORD20 2 or w WORD20 5 Result True if WORD20 is 2 or 5 ON w WORD20 lt 5 and w WORD30 lt 8 Result True if WORD20 is smaller than 5 and WORD3
409. nal Memory Data Global Window Settings Communication Param Communication Monitor Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS E LT System Settings PROCEDURE 1 Via the Project Manager select the Screen Setup menu System Setup command or click on the icon 2 Click on a desired menu tab Each tab s setting items will be displayed System Setup A Manufacturing System Ite Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Communication Settings O Settings Mode Settings Me n u Touch Buzzer Screen Mo Data Type fet Bin L Screen Level Change Flow Password Settings Standby Mode Time Minutes Change To Screen No Com Port Start Up Delay Sec ee ee 3 After entering all the necessary items click on the button System Setup A Manufacturing System Ite Initial Screen Settings Extended Settings Commurication Settings System Setup VO Settins Mode Settings Check Sum Touch Buzzer Screen Mo Data Type i Bin im Screen Level Change Flow Password Settings Standby Mode Time a Minutes Change To Screen No Com Port Start Up Delay Sec lee a LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup REMARKS To reset each item to its default value click on the Default button 6 7 Memo 6 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide fa TRANSFERRING SCREENS h o display s
410. nated the Message Display may show nothing For example when the number of messages is 16 and only states 0 to 3 actually have a message registered designating states 4 to 15 displays only message frames 2 104 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS ramro Date Displays Date display data is created using the LT s internal calendar and formatted as February 11th 2001 or 01 02 11 however the date format can be changed E Date Display General Settings Attributes Enter Comment data here The currently se lected Part s image is displayed here Calls up the Part Shape Browser Parts can be se Date Dispaly Settings DD_0O01 Select the Data Format General Settings Description Character Size Co Jee F Border Color A O m O Elk L Text Color i a L a a e ol Plate Color IE _ i E ol Select the Border frame Text and Plate Browser lected directly from Pe J cres background the Browser Data Format colors The following display formats are available yy mm dd dd mm yy mm dd yy 20yy mm dd dd mm 20yy mm dd 20yy yy year mm month dd day Color The Date Display s border color character display color Text and interior color Plate can be selected here y Reference s 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors Character Size The label s Character Size
411. nd blinking if desired 2 120 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Drawing a Straight Line PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Line Poly line command or click on the icon 2 Set the attributes of a straight line to be drawn If necessary select the color and line type If an arrow is selected the ae Polyline E line s end point will become an ar ie H T_ Folyline a row ie SS SS Fo Pelee me MEMME O E 3 Move the cursor to the drawing area click on the In step 4 while holding the line s starting point and drag the mouse to the end key down a straight line at an angle point of either 0 45 or 90 degrees can also be drawn When using the keyboard to draw a straight line use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the start and end points and press the i d key to start and finish the line To cancel the placement click on the icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 4 Click again a straight line is drawn registered E Drawing Polylines When the Polyline check box is checked Polylines can be drawn Click on the starting point then drag the mouse clicking the left mouse button at each point of the desired directional change of the line and click on the right mouse button
412. nd Buzzer functions Bit Switch Settings BS O01 General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Option Interlock Address Buzzer Can be set at the x00000 al Dy Tre Shat momentary Touch available condition fp BtOn Bit Of Selects the Interlock function Interlock Only when a bit designated via Interlock Address is in a state that has been selected via Touch available condition the switch becomes effective Whether the switch is effective in ON state or in OFF state is selectable here Touch Available Interlock Address Touch Available Condition Status Not Available BItON Touch Available OFF Touch Not Available ON Touch Not Available BROT oF Touch Mallabi Buzzer Select ON or OFF for the buzzer sound When buzzer setting is enabled the buzzer sounds while the touch switch 1s being pressed One Shot Enable disable the One Shot feature This setting can be enabled only when Momentary mode is selected in the Function area in the General Settings tab When the One Shot feature is enabled the buzzer will sound briefly only at the moment the touch switch is pressed 2 18 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Bit Switch An example of how to place a Bit Invert switch is shown below LUO e OR First press of the Switch The next press resets M0016 sets M0016 PROCEDURE 1 Select t
413. ndloop Change as follows t 0000 100 Loop100 times loop t 0000 w LS 200 w LS 0100 Writes data to D0200 w LS0100 w LS0100 1 Increment LS0100 endloop w D0200 w LS 0200 Writes LS0200 data to D0200 a Important e Using loop or break a variable name for a D Script vari able will cause an error Statements Wet feo low aP break break Halts loop operation while the loop equa tion is being executed The break command can be used only in the section of loop LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 211 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script Math Operators Addition Adds the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a constant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded Subtraction Performs subtraction on the data in two word addresses or the data in a word ad dress and a constant Any overflowing dig its resulting from the operation are rounded Remainder Detects a remainder of a division per formed on the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant The operation result may depend on the sign of the left and right sides Multiplication Multiplies the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant Any overflowing digits resulting from the operation are rounded D
414. ndo This feature allows you to cancel the previously performed command and return to the previous condition PROCEDURE REMARKS When an alarm has been unintentionally deleted 1 Select the Edit menu Undo command or click Edited message characters cannot on the x icon be restored with the Undo com _ mand 1 somo o Bulletin Tank temperature UF 2 xo OoOO Summary Tank B temperature UP 0005 Summary Tank C temperature UP 4 x00052 Summary LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 9 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS E Adding Alarm Data Here you can add alarms for the specified number of bits or words from the line whose item is enclosed with dotted lines Addresses are automatically assigned to each alarm from the start address in series according to the designated address adding increment In addition when messages have been entered they are copied for all the alarms to be added When a variable Logic symbol is used as a start address set I the add offset to 0 Otherwise the correct addition will not be E importan performed Add Basic Alarm start Address 00000 I Fez Alarn Type i Alarm Message ows ooo Message Color Pririt Fo IPOs U e LI Tiaaen Tios Pintay es eee O E Ci Fint Fiecare Tines PROCEDURE 1 Select the address line where the specified number of addresses will be added Sho
415. need to be designated to transfer data to the LT s internal memory and backup SRAM Since only one filing data folder can be used on the LT at one time select which folder will be used e Multiple folders can be registered in both the LT s internal memory e Up to 64 folders can be registered in the LT s internal memory e Select a folder to be used on the LT e Only one folder of data can be transferred to the LT s backup SRAM LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 3 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 4 E Filing Data Registration Capacity When saving filing data up to 2 048 filing data files can be registered with up to 1 650 data blocks in each file and up to 10 000 pieces of data in each block However when the data format is 32 Bits only 5 000 data items can be registered Registration capacity however varies depending on the use of the backup SRAM or other settings Up to 59520 bytes of filing data can be stored in one folder in the LT s internal memory when storing only filing data to the backup SRAM SRAM Storage Capacity Calculation 1 file 96 Fixed value 32 2 or4x number of data pieces x number of data blocks Use 2 for 16 Bit devices and use 4 Total capacity of all files lt 59520 for 32 Bit device file calculation The following shows Storage Capacity when using 16 Bit Device Data Format No of data No ofdata Total
416. negative values Select Oct to process only 16 bit data and Float to process only 32 bit data IEEE754 format Errors may occur with the Float mode When Float is selected the Round Off option will round off the value according to the No of Display Digit setting When Float is not selected the all digits to the right of the specified digit will be discarded Example When Decimal Places is set to 2 Value 1 9999 When Round Off is selected 2 00 When Round Off is not selected 1 99 _ When using a Logic Symbol to Word Address or Trigger Bit Address select NSS 32 Bit data display format Relative 32 bit data can be processed Configure the Bit Length Data Display Format Input Sign and Code settings When Dec is selected putting a checkmark to the Code checkbox will enable the display of data with negative values 2 64 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS The Input Code can be selected from the following three types No Sign Processes data of positive numbers only 2 s complement numbers Negative values are processed with two s complement numbers MSB sign Negative values are processed with MSB signs When using Relative data the data written to the host PLC is converted automatically based on the Input Range settings Hast LT Input A data calculation program in the host PLC can be omitted
417. neral Settings Shape Color Label Extend Description Operation Bit Address E Enter the address data here Biionitar Bik daddies Function fo Bit Set E Momentary P Bit Invert Kote e The address to be entered varies depending on your LT and external device Note that the sample configuration in this manual is just an example Entering from a keyboard Click on the address entering field and the cursor will appear there which indicates data entry is now effective Then enter device and address data via the keyboard Entering from a pull down list Click on the I box next to the Address entering field and a pull down list appears including symbols and Logic symbols selected via the Symbol Editor and device comments together with corresponding Addresses Select ing a symbol Logic symbol or device comment from the list designates an Address Bit Switch Settings BS O01 Shape Color Label Extend Description Operation Bit Address 40071 00 Stop Line D 00101 Start Line a Monteras General Settings LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide pe Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 6 Entering from the Address Keypad Kote VN Click on the Address Keypad icon and the Address Keypad will appear allowing you to enter numeric data and addresses on the screen via the mouse When designating a variable for a logic program Logic symbol by bit
418. ng down the key Alarm Switch 7 Switch Production Ala Untitled Logilogo bmp Alarm File LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide T3 7 2 Transferring Data and Logic Programs Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS Setup Setup Automatic Setup Use Extended Program 2 Force System Setup im Simulation Do NOT Perform Setup Setup CFG file tl English i Japanese Selection C APROGRAM FILES PRO FACESLT protocol Automatic setup Set up operation is performed if necessary according to the LT s status Normally select this setup mode Force system setup Setup operation is performed every time screen data are transferred regardless of the LT s status Do not setup Setup operation is not performed and only screen data and logic pro grams are transferred Setup CFG file This is the file storing the setup information Normally you need not use this setup mode If you select English and perform setup the OFFLINE screen on the LT unit will be displayed in English if you have changed from Japanese to English or vice versa be E Important SUFE to force the system setup Use Extended Program When using the Simulation Function with the LT Type C you need to transfer a simulation protocol in advance Y Reference a 8 1 Overview 7 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and
419. ng data or set this backup memory unit s limit Please reduce item s backup setting to None this amount The area available for data sampling has been The storage address used exceeds 2031 Set exceeded Storage startaddress the number ofsampling Please re enter this item s settings data to less than or equal to 2031 The amount entered for the data sampling When 20 channels are preset the Add bution is feature is combined with the number of clicked in the data sampling seting list display Trend graph channels created and theirjdialog box Delete unnecessary setings so that combined total cannot exceed 20 the total of Trend Graph channel setings and the data sampling settings will be within 20 There are no screens created for this screen The screen that you attempt to open cannot be new screen The designated screen does not exist The screen that you attempted to open cannotbe rn found in this project Select a screen from different existing project This object has anon black background and If this screen is used as the screen for the may not display properly on the LT Also be background color be sure to align its center point sure that your loaded screen s center point is correctly with the destination screen aligned with the object loaded to screen s center point Unrecognizable Bitmap The selected bit map file is either corrupted or File may be corrupted unusable by this software LT Editor
420. nge will be copied position where another Mark Data in the specified range will be copied to the position has already been created the where you click new data will overwrite the existing data and the exist ing data will be deleted You can continue the copy mode until you click the right mouse but ton 4 To quit the copy mode click the right mouse button LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Deleting a Mark Delete the Mark or a partion of it PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Edit menu Delete command or click on the icon The procedures for deleting part of a Mark or deleting a whole mark are separately described Deleting Part of a Mark 2 Select Partial Clear and click on the oo but ton Clear Mark Screen s Partial Clear 9 Clear All 3 Specify the range to be deleted in the same manner as drawing a square rectangle LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen PROCEDURE 4 Click in the range to be deleted The specified range will be deleted Deleting the Entire Mark 2 Select Clear All 3 Click on the button to delete the entire Mark The entire Mark will be deleted LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS 3 1 Creating a Mar
421. ngs Total ling Tota gt E Alam Settings Display Style Mo of Display Digits Decimal Places Size Style Total Settings General Info Size S tyle Alarm Settinas Display Format No of Display Digits E Decimal Places jo Calor ettirig s M Display Color Fg BOO i am a No Bik I s BOOS SCORE nook Display Style Ci Shift Right JA Zero Suppress Preview shit Lett 00008 C Data Calculation Settings Select the desired calculation item from Total Average Maximum and Mini mum The calculation attributes can be set up for the entire Data row or Value column At this time the applicable column s attribute is Date Time or Char Col and the Data Calculation Set tings cannot be designated Data cal culation is performed via the 32 Bit for mat Display Format No of Display Digits Enter the number of display digits The numbers displayed after the decimal point is also included However the decimal point is not included itself Enter a value in a range from to 16 Decimal Places Enter the number of digits after the deci mal point in a range from 0 to 14 This setting 1s Enabled only when the Data Format is designated as Dec or BCD If the values after the decimal point are not displayed enter 0 Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink When the Alarm option is se
422. ngth e g When the No of Display Digits is 4 and 0 suppression is OFF value 25 appears as 0025 10 61 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES SX te Date Time and Value data except for text data is printed in the middle of a cell When the center point cannot be designated due to the number of characters text is shifted to right for one character When designating Char Col for Column Type data is printed being shifted left General Info Column Type Date Time Date Time Prints out Time and Date data Column Settings Data Format Size Style 1 Column Type 17 Value fy Date Time 2 Char Col 1 Border General Info Column Mo Date ppr mmidd laput ine Data Type Display Format Data Format Date Prints out date data i is a Time Prints out time data Display Fomat a Display Format Select the desired time date display format Ge re Date Time settings have two settings i e Date settings and Time settings 10 62 x Time data is printed out only via the 24 hour system e For date mm dd yy mm dd yy mm dd dd mm yy e For time hh mm hh mm ss Size Style No of Char Col Designates the cell size Enter a value from 5 to 16 digits Column Settings General Info Size Style Display Format No of Char Col Previews E Shii Fight M Zea Suppesa Display Style LT Editor Ver
423. nitial Screen Settings Initial Base Screen Ho Slarm Chara gter Size LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 7 Memo 9 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 ADVANCED FEATURES l he filing data recipe and logging functions are advanced features that increase the performance of your LT unit IOT EA E E Filing Data Recipe NZ EIEEEI E E TIEI IOE AE ETA Logging LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 1 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES UWAP Filing Data Recipe Setting data that you have created and stored on the LT can be easily trans ferred to the Device PLC whenever necessary using LT touch keys or by specifying bit addresses in the Device PLC Also Filing Recipe Data that has been transferred to the Device PLC can be then sent back to the LT edited and then transferred again to the Device PLC LT Device PLC Designated Word Address Copy the Filing data to the External Device E Overview 10 2 There are two methods of transmitting filing data to the Device PLC One is automatic transmission where filing data is sent to the Device PLC via a Device PLC trigger The other is manual transmission where data selected on the LT screen is sent to the Device PLC When using manual data transmission select the Filing Data Display from the Tool Box or Parts menus Filing data can be controlle
424. nits E g How to designate a Word Address using an external device When Word Address is set to When Word Address is set to test lt O gt Logic symbol 01 C00000 31 30 0100 31 30 0100 test lt 0 gt 31 to test lt 0 gt 00 01 C0000031 to 01 C0000000 lt High Low LSB lt High Low LSB In this case test lt 000 gt is In this case 01 CO000000 designated is designated LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 7 When a variable Logic symbol is used as an address an integer array must be designated For an integer array a size required Important for consecutive addresses needs to be allocated Enter a value of 2 or more to the No of Monitor Words field No of Monitor Words Here the number of words a Monitor Bit is assigned and entered Up to 100 words can be monitored E Alarm Summary Display Format Attributes Alarm Summary Settings AL_001 Designates the No Designates from General Settings Display Format Style Color of Lines ofa which existing message that can error message Display Start Line l r be displayed on will the display No of Display Lines N2 7 one screen begin No of Display Char 40 Designates the maximum No of Characters per line Display Start Line Among the messages whose Monitor Bit is turned ON the Start Line desig nates from which message the display starts Se When the Alarm Summary disp
425. nsion to lte PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 In the Project Manager such as A PLANT SYSTEM Ite select the Project menu s Backup Settings command 2 Put a check mark in the Backup Project File The option is enabled in the initial checkbox and click on the oK button settings Backup Setting M Backup Project File cr 3 Save a Project file To open and edit Backup files via The backup file A PLANT SYSTEM bak is created the Project Manger change the in the same folder in which the selected Project Man filename extension from bak to ager Example A PLANT SYSTEM Ite is stored te LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 13 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT we Rebuilding A Project Rebuild The Rebuild tool is used to both check the contents of the LTE files CPW files and MRK files created with LT Editor as well as to rebuild these files if they are damaged In the following cases use the Rebuild command to restore file data l Nn B W N Your personal computer is either reset or shut down while you are saving data The system crashed while you were saving data Your floppy disk or hard disk is damaged Your personal computer s disk drive is defective A system error an error not specified in the error message list such as a partition or checksum error occurs while a screen is being opened or tr
426. nt When creating a screen the drawing can be controlled so that any Fills used will either be displayed or not If the Fill check box is not checked all Fills are not shown Using this feature will help you to speed up screen redrawing time and thus speed up screen creation When the Fill check box ts not checked the actual screen shown on the LT unit may differ from the screen shown on your PC To be sure the display is correct check the Fill check box ON at least once to verify the screen before sending screen data to the LT Fill Point ot e When this feature is selected specified Fill points will appear with an X mark which is especially useful when selecting Fill points If the Fill Points are not displayed Fill cannot be performed while editing The X cursor position mark s color can be designated in the system s Color area Multiple Open with Next Prev When selecting Previous Screen Next Screen from the Screen menu or opening a screen with the Open Screen switch specify whether the next screen is opened with the currently active screen open or after that active screen is closed Up to 20 screens may be opened continuously Display in Load Screen Object You can specify whether Part addresses and ID numbers on a screen which has been called up using the Load Screen command are displayed or hidden Load Screen Double Click Specify an edit method f
427. nt refer to the Logic Pro You can insert a rung and instructions as well as set I O P i 7 i gramming Operation Manual configuration ea Logic Program Editor A Manufacturing System File Edit View Search Insert Data Controller Help Heh eA BE Ps eee eS ee 1002 F Pea ca een m o gt om ow ea ti This program runs atypical fast food restaurant soft dring dispensing machine a Sole OF Sole OF Power _On_pushbutton Power _Off_pushbutton 1 A Programming Mode l 1 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 2 From Start to Finish E Saving a Logic Program PROCEDURE 1 Select the Logic Program Editor s File menu Save s command or click on The logic program you are saving will replace the exist ing program E Closing a Logic Program PROCEDURE 1 Select the Logic Program Editor s File menu Exit command 2 The Logic Program Editor will close If you attempt to close an updated logic program with out saving it the system asks if you wish to save the current program If you click on the button the system saves the updated data If you click on the button the system closes the Logic Program Editor without saving the updated data C Program Files Pro face LT database A Manufacturing System Do you want
428. ntered the Alarm Editor data cannot be saved even if the bit addresses have been specified SP Editing Alarm Data This section describes how to use the Alarm Editor s editing commands E Cut Move Here you can delete the selected line of alarm data and store it on the clipboard PROCEDURE Enan the line of alarm data to be moved a eee eee temperature UP ES 20050 Tank BE temperature UP ZOOS1 4 0052 SUMIMAL y Tank temperature UP 2 Select the Edit menu Cut command or click on the g icon to import alarm data to the Clipboard The selected alarm data will be deleted and stored 5it Address Tyne tiessece Jxooso s Sem y B temperature UP eas TC temperature UP eect the insertion line Bit Address Type 2 xooso san ET E temperature UP es pe temperature UP SUMAT y 5 6 REMARKS If a message has not been entered Alarm Editor data cannot be saved even if bit addresses have been specified To select several lines drag the mouse between the target lines or click on the target line while holding down thel Shift or key To delete the selected line s per form steps 1 and 2 only LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the wii icon to paste alarm data to
429. ntrolAddress Settings Specify the Control Address to switch the tables He Text Table Editor A Manufacturing System lte File Edit View Help Bj lel i oo HE Hes to Elm 1 Tablet m Fort ASCII Code Page 850 F Setting Chdrdc Lines Message a In the Control Address store the Table No you want to display The default text table is displayed when 0 is stored To set up the default text table select Default Table Setup from the File menu on the Text Table Editor dialog screen lt Values stored in the Word Address gt Value in one Control Address Table No lt Initial character string table Table 1 Table 2 a ee ee oe Table 16 ot ote A table will not appear when you specify a table number for which nothing is set LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 51 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Table Name Up to 16 tables can be registered To change a table name display the table whose name is to be changed onto the Text Table Editor screen Next click Table Name Change on the File menu Enter the desired table name and click the OK button to change the table name E Font Settings Specify one font language for each table a table cannot contain more than one font language E Entering Messages On the Text Table Editor double click the column of the Index No you want to set up
430. nu Keypad Input Display command or click on the icon 2 Make the following settings on the General Settings tab When using the Pop up Keypad Place a check mark in the Use Pop up keypad box Keypad Input Display Settings KO_001 Ward Address pam FI Tagen Kikade O0000 When not using the Pop up Keypad Remove the check mark from the Use Pop up Key pad box and enter the word address and trigger bit address Keypad Input Display Settings KO_001 Description 2 70 Display Format Shape Color Alarm Settings Extend Word Address fg poos Fe Enter D00050 Trigger Bit Address fem jeooo Enter M0080 im Use Pop up Keypad REMARKS When Use Pop up keypad is se lected the Trigger Bit Address is disabled LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select colors from the Shape Color area and ing a Part Shape input the extension settings KD_3DG01 KD 3D004 KD 3D005 KD 3D006 Pats Fie Current PDB File c program files pro face It pdb pdb p Title KD_3D001 mi He 4 In the Display Format area specify the Data Dis play Format No of Display Digits and Decimal Places i e number of the digits after the decimal point to be used If desired select t
431. o be changed LTT Manufacturing System te EE Manufacturing System lke AE Production Process Ite eo chedule Control Ite Schedule Control Ite Save Save as type Windows Project Files Ite ig Cancel A Manufacturing System Typel W Device PLC Tope OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES ia File name Description Display Type 3 Click on the button to save the file If a project file with the same name exists LT Editor will ask if you want to replace overwrite the existing project file with the project file you are attempting to save If so click on the button If you do not wish to overwrite the existing project file click on the button C Program Files Pro FacesLT databaseS chedule Control lte already exists Do vou want to replace it A LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS The file name can contain up to 255 characters including the path name and extension Important Before changing the LT type check the preset data since the drawing area and func tions vary depending on the type of the LT unit 4 2 6 Changing a Project s LT Type A i Important Once the Device PLC is changed you must change the addresses of the Parts D Scripts and alarms and perform the LT system setup again 4 2 8 Changing Your Project s Device PLC To open another project file refer to 1 2 2 E Creating a New Project or W Selecting an Existing Pro
432. o locate the program s destination LT for the LT The LT s Setup cannot be performed setup Check the LT type setings and the LT type Selected Change the LT type ifneeded The currently selected Device PLC does not The currently selected Device PLC does not support the Simulation feature Supportthe Simulation feature This feature cannot be used with the destnaton LT Deselect this feature and re send the data This LT does not support Extended The destnaton LT does not support Extended Programs The LT s setup cannot be Features Either change the LT Type or send performed data thatis designed for the designated LT type Timeout Error Communication tmeout has occurred Reset the LT and re try data transfer W An error has occurred while reading the data to LT internal memory Re try data transfer If the error occurs again use the LT s selfdiagnosis feature and identify the problem If necessary contactyour local LT distributor E Project Compression and Execution Errors Lo Error Message Cause Solution Disk Error File Error During Read The fle cannot be opened The most probable Cause is Corruption of the fle or disk failure Solve the problem and try again to read the file Disk Error File Error During Write The disk is write protected Take off the write protection This error also occurs when the disk is defective Unable to open file A porton of the fle cannot be found To recover Would you like to try
433. o the instruction indicated on the screen When you enter initial characters of the keyword the topics specified with these initial characters are also automatically listed Help Topics GP PRO PBS for Windows 95 1 Type the first few letters of the word you re looking for 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display Change Project Manager Convert Address Copy Screen Delete Project Device Monitor GP PE communication New Project New Screen PC GP communication Preview E Calling up Help from a Dialog Box When you click on the button in the dialog box or press the F1 key during execution of a command a description of the currently executed command will be displayed Bit Switch Settings B5_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Description Operation Bit Address C Monitor Eionitar Bik Sadijes Furctior eh Bit Set 2 Bit Reset 2 Momentary 2 Bit Invert IA Viewing the Tips Screen To view the Tips screen select the Tips option from the Help menu on the Project Manager or the Screen Editor 1 28 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 6 3 Browsing the Home Page The procedure to connect to Digital Electronic Corporation s home page is described here To browse the home page you must have hardware environ J ment to access the Internet You also must have
434. ode the previously entered val ues are not cleared and newly entered values are added to those values To clear the previously entered values press CLR of the touch keyboard Auto Clear ON When the first character of a value is entered excluding moving the cursor entering ENT DEL and BS the pre viously entered value is cleared Input Style t Auto Clear OFF Auto Clear ON LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 51 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES EX re Date Time and Value data except for the text characters are centered Also Y a2 dot space is automatically inserted in the upper lower left and right sides 5 dots For example when the number of characters are 7 and the number of nu meric value s digits are 5 in a cell space for one character is saved on both left and right sides and displayed data is centered Alarm Settings Alarm Display On Off Column Settings Select this check box to display the Genel Data Fomat Ske Suiel Mom Salire Alarm display Alarm Range Min Value Max Value When the Alarm Type is set to Direct designate the Alarm Range When se lecting Relative value display the Dis play Range designated in the Data For mat tab is used as normal display s Min and Max Values automatically The possible Alarm ranges varies depend ing on the Data Format selected Alarm Color If the data exceeds the A
435. of the File Name Display and select a opera tion mode 2 1 13 File Name Display Data Logging Key This is a function switch corresponding to the Data Logging Display and is the same as the one that is automatically placed together with the Data Logging Display Designate the scroll direction and the number of lines being rolled up or down 2 1 14 Data Logging Display Off line When this switch is pressed the LT enters the OFFLINE mode E Function Switch Shape Color Attributes The Switch s color and pattern are selected here 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors The color and pattern settings available will differ depending on the switch shape E Function Switch Label Attributes Here the characters shown drawn on the Switch button face are entered 2 1 Parts Creating Labels LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Zo Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Function Switch Extend Attributes Here the interlock and the buzzer are set Function Switch Settings F5_001 General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Mkenge dajesz Select the Tayehy asalable candi Bit m epo Interlock function state Interlock Only when a bit designated via Interlock Address is in a state that has been selected via Touch available condition the switch becomes effective Whether the switch is effective in ON state or in OFF sate is selectable here Touch Available Interlock Ad
436. og box shown below will appear Set the Start Address and click on the button and the display will show from that address on Start Address Start Address Cok Enter the Start Address Cancel For the global cross reference s address map display the map display start address can be designated when toggling Bit and Word display When clicking on or Bit Address the following dialog box will appear After selecting Bit or Word designate the start address Then click on the button and the cross reference display will start from the designated start address Start Address fe Word a Bit Start Address Cancel Enter an Address LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques 2 7 8 Load Screen List The Load Screen List will be displayed on the currently edited screen With this list you can check the setting attributes of a screen to be loaded and also can change its loading location Usage Pattern When editing or deleting Load Screen Select a screen Edit or List tobeloaded gt Delete View gt General Load Screen Summary List Lists all the screens loaded on the currently open screen Select the desired screen to show its setting attributes Load Screen List base D Changes Load Click on to close Screen List the Load Screen Settings List screen ee ee ee Edit Pressin
437. ogramming three addresses occupy the same amount of memory as one Parts The maximum number of addresses available for a script is 255 However try to use the fewest possible addresses since the more devices that are used the slower the response e The Convert Address command in the Utility menu of the Project Man ager cannot convert addresses used in D Script Open the D Script Editor to change these addresses SGT 4 2 4 Converting Addresses and Device Codes e If you have changed the external device the addresses used by D Script will not be converted Be sure to use the D Script Editor to change these addresses LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2225 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script MOZAIK 4 2 8 Changing Your Project s Device PLC e The size of a D Script affects the Parts scanning time Note that using a large number of addresses may significantly degrade the performance of the program e Up to 9 levels of Functions can be called by a program Do NOT create more than that e Up to 254 Functions can be created e D Script operations activated by a trigger after the screen changes are as Trigger Conditions Direct Access Method Memory Link Method CurrentValue or Bit O Bit 1 FALSE TRUE Bit O Bit 1 FALSE TRUE mme eet eet ap UM e e ff A R Peeing xol xto Dewcingfse o x o x O Operation is performed right after the screen is
438. oints a and c are joined and the object is filled a About Filling a Polygon REMARKS Up to 100 corners faces can be created In step 4 holding the key causes lines to be drawn at exactly 0 45 or 90 degree angles To cancel the drawing click on the icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes When a polygon s segments overlap the filling alternates so that areas next to each other do not display the same pattern As a result areas without any fill white may develop inside the polygon If fill is desired in these areas as well click on the icon E e LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 131 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing To draw or create a Scale input the number of divisions desired and then left click the mouse s cursor to designate the scale s beginning and end points Scales can be either horizontal or vertical linear straight line or curved semi circle E Scale Attributes Scale ny Type Divisions e ect the E Curved Scale s type fe Linear Vertical Select the line type 5 Jee e E Drawing a Scale PROCEDURE 1 Select the Draw menu Scale command or click on the lava icon 2 Set the attributes of the divisions to be marked Select the Scale s colors line type and Scale type and in put
439. oll through all the objects originally in the multiple selection clicking on these arrow keys will change the selected item one at a time Clicking on the gt icon will select the next object and clicking on the lt 1con will select the previons object in the order that they were drawn To select an Object from over lapped Objects How to Select a Single Object 2 148 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE Selecting Objects by Type from a Multiple Selection 2 First make a multiple selection then click on the Selection Tool box s Typ2 icon Selection handles will appear for only one type of object here only square objects are selected while an outline remains around them all This will effectively de select any objects that are not the currently selected type R E aa 3 Use the lt and gt icons to select a different object type As you press either arrow key the selected object type will change REMARKS Objects are classified as follows Parts by each type Objects by each type Loaded Screens and Marks All as one type respectively To re select all the objects originally in the multiple selection click on the Selection Tool box s al button LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 149 Chapter 2 CREATING BAS
440. olor Text and background color Plate can each be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors 2 108 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Time Display The Time Display is placed using the following procedure Display the time PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Time Display command or click on the H icon 2 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select If desired select Colors and Character Size ing a Part Shape Shape Browser Cancel EDE TD_3D002 TD_30003 TO 30004 I TD 3D005 TD 3D006 Fasti Current POB File c program files pro facesltpdb pdb p Title TO_30001 i 3 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Time Display Part s outline will appear on the Base screen next to your cursor 4 Click on the point where the Time Display s top left To cancel the placement click on corner is to be placed the icon Change the size if necessary Regardless of whether the Time Display is scaled up or down the character size will not change To change the character size and position select the characters directly To change a Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down When scaling up or down the dis play area if the key is pressed simultaneously the characters are also scaled up or down together with the bo
441. ommand or click on the icon to start the Logic Program Editor Et Logic Program Editor A Manufacturing System File Edit View Search Insert Data Controller Help Fal 1x4 oa Fl Geel o Te P FS 6 1 00 F Pea Fea tee o gt o gt lm on eta i 1 2 START The Light remains on until the Power _Off_pushbutton is pressed The Power ON pushbutton starts the Sol OLY Fold OF O41 0 0 Power On pushbutton Power Off pushbutton Light 3 Of Of Of O11 0 0 Light Of 2 Select the Controller menu Write to Controller 7 2 2 Passwords command or click on the icon to send logic pro grams If a password has been registered enter the password Password Confirmation Enter password Logic programs alone are sent 7 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs E Receiving Logic Programs PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select Control menu Edi 1 2 3 Creating Ta Editing Saving a Logic Program tor command or click on the icon to start the Logic Program Editor 2 Select the Controller menu Read from Control ler command or click on the icon to receive logic programs MASAA 7 2 2 Passwords If a password has been registered enter the password Password Confirmation Enter passwo
442. ompt for filename when saving When the Screen to bitmap file command is executed the Save As dialog box will appear where you can specify the location and name of the file to be saved Automatically create file name When the Screen to bitmap file command is executed a file name will be created automatically and the file saved in a previously specified location Example If the No 1 screen of the Base B screen named Menu is converted into a bitmap file Screen type number BMP gt B1 BMP Screen type number screen title BMP gt B1 Menu BMP 2 178 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Converting a Screen into a Bitmap File PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Setting bitmap file option for the Screen to bitmap file command from the Edit menu 2 Select a method for saving the bitmap file and es tablish it by clicking on the button Setting bitmap file name i Prompt for filename when saving t Automatically create file name File Hame type fei Type Number BMP 2 Type Number Comment EMP Output Folder C PROGRAM FILES PRO FACESLTSD Ii 3 Select the Screen to bitmap file option for the Screen to bitmap file command from the Edit menu When a file name is created automatically the bitmap file is saved now 4 If Prompt for filename when saving was selected in step 2 specify a fil
443. on Guide APPENDICES Appendix 2 Troubleshooting 5 The message Select Type is displayed on the screen Select the model type and click the OK button Usually the system automatically selects the connected model However confirm the model type of the connected LT Select Type a Ifan improper model type is selected here before a forced trans E ankan fer the symptoms will recur 6 Check the LT type and click the OK button The system begins transfer ring the System Program Protocol Program and screen data The restoration is completed when the transfer is completed successfully In some cases the handshaking transfer to the LT unit with the LT may not be successful If handshaking is unsuccessful the system displays the following message on the screen to ensure successful handshaking with the LT LT not Responding Please turn on LT To re establish cormurnication Power the LT OFF and ON again The system will automatically resume the transfer Solution 4 Check whether an incorrect value has been entered into the LT in 9 or 14 of the System Data Area or an invalid Start Address has been as signed for the System Data Area LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 21 Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables APPENDICES w Address Conversion Tables Addresses can or cannot be converted depending on the address combina tion The combinations which cannot b
444. on a screen is shown below Reflection of device comment The device comment corresponding to an entered device address overwrites the Descrip tion field Changes Part s settings Deletes the selected Part Copies a Part Pastes a Part Stores the Parts list information as a CSV file Closes the current screen The Esc key can also be used Use this scroll bar to view all the data on along screen The tab width for each item can be adjusted by placing the mouse pointer on the border between items and then dragging it E Editing Items on the Part Reference List LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Part setting data can be changed directly on the Part Reference List Click on the left most number of a Part to be changed and it will be high lighted then click on the button and the Part s Dialog box will appear and its settings can be changed Setting items such as the Description and Address areas can be changed via the Part Reference List Also items displayed in gray can be changed in the dialog box by double clicking on the inside of their border Description Data Address Display M Data Format wo 001 OOU0 Abs Bin Can be edited by double clicking Can be edited directly 2 249 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 250
445. on field Expression too complex Simplify the D S criptexpression See HELP screens for assistance if expression requires a non empty An expression is required in in the if clause If statement no expression is specified the if clause is ignored notbe recognized error Illegal address The entered address seting contains an error Enable the syntax help in the option seting menu and enter the address by clicking the icon or enter itfrom the keypad Negative numbers not supported select A negative number cannotbe used as a constant correct data type Enter a positve number download Do you still want to register this Even if this scriptis registered the operation will data and quit the D S cript editor be not performed Ww WARNING Statement has no effect and has The entered instruction is ignored because tt will been removed notinfluence the expression These messages are displayed only when the syntax check in the option setting menu is selected OT fi script expression is not legal it will not The preset D Script expression has an error Appendix 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 1 Error Messages E Alarm Editor Errors Cause Solution Can t Add Messages Insufficient memory Memory is not suficient add the messages Quit other applicatons re allocate memory and try to add the messages again Can t import more alarm message summary During mes
446. on to specify detailed information of printing Base Screen Specify the printing items related to a Base Screen Prints a list of the screens loaded onto a specified poe screen Screen Hard Copy Prints a list of the i Parts List Information charactor Parts placed on Se es the Base Screen i Cross Reference List Select whether to L D Script print the sum Base Screen L Object ID No ol Device Address Information charactor size mary or details of E amal 2 Small the Part list Border ol Window Parts Prints the address Grid designation for state IOn Oi Parts sed F Only the preset addresses can be printed 2 7 7 Cross Reference Global Cross Reference List OF Cancel Help o He Prints the D Script settings Outputs screen hard copies The printing items can be specified Select Infor mation cahacter s printing size When select ing Small 1 4 sized char acters are used When making a screen hard copy The Parts ON OFF status can be specified The same status is specified for all screens to be printed Ee Note When the summary of the Part list is printed its right edge may get outside X the paper In this case open the Option dialog box by clicking on Options button in the Print tab and then reduce the left margin LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 9 3 9 1 Print Settings Chapter 9 PRINTING Window Screen Specify
447. one end s handle fixes the opposite end in place and releases the dragged end and allowing the line to pivot freely Multiple parts may be selected and then scaled up down However the following parts are not scaled up down but their positions are moved Half pie Graphs Pie Graphs Meters Trend Graphs Alarms Keypads and Picture Displays To move and scale up down an object designating its coordinates can be used 2 3 16 Changing Coordinates LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 151 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing 2 3 4 SCT Si Here the procedure for cutting an object deleting it and placing it on another screen is explained When an object is cut it is stored in the Clipboard E Cutting Moving an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object 2 3 1 Selecting Objects 2 Select the Edit menu Cut command or click on To cancel the Cutting click on the the icon e icon Then the selected object will be cut 3 Open the object s destination screen and select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Then the outline of the object cut from the previous screen will appear 4 Position the cursor and click on the point where the To cancel the pasting click on the object is to be placed ian The object that had been Cut from the previous screen will be pasted at the new location I
448. onment Options Initial Screen Settings 6 5 6 1 Menu Setting Items LT Setup 6 6 Extended Settings Font Settings Keypad Display Priority Settings Watchdog Monitoring Address and Time Settings System Setup A Manufacturing System_lte 10 Settings Mode Settings Estended Settings Communication Settings Communication Settings System Setup Initial Screen Settings Font Setting Online Error Display 8 European wi Delete Error Display E ae im Reset Display Unit On Data Write Error aIMANESE Chinese Dats Mode Kevpad Display Priority ont Lualty fo Standard i Standard Mm ReTy if High Error Handling Settings String Data Settings System Area Backup Cl Backup Settings Cl Backup Settings Settings Command Settings Watch Dog __Ssemdiew emiga Eee JL miea Wod Addr COO000 Tar H n Global window EE Time Area Settings Communication Settings Menu System Setup A Manufacturing System_lte f Mode Settings Communication Settings 170 Settings Extended Settings Transmission Speed 9600 System Setup Initial Screen Settings AS 2320 A5 422 fp AS 232C i 4 Line Data Length is 7 Bits i B Bits Busy Ready Control 2 0N OFF i DTA ER eter Settings Advanced Time Settings LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTINGS LT Inter
449. onnector E Precautions When using the Simulation function keep in mind the following restrictions e The Simulation function can be used only when the LT is Type C e When the external device is either THERMAC NEO Series Omron or Memory Link SIO Type the simulation cannot be performed e Simulations of logic program s variables Logic symbol cannot be per formed e To carry out a simulation you need to transfer a simulation protocol at the LT set up 8 1 2 Transferring Simulation Protocol e With a device specified in System Setup the simulation cannot be performed e If the backup function for the LS area is selected or if a D Script uses an LS area special relay for its start bit no LS device can be simulated 8 2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 SIMULATION 8 1 Overview e If the LS device is frequently written using the D script during the LS device simulation actions such as a slide transition will be slow e DO NOT specify System Setup Extended Settings tab Reset LT On Data Write Error e The screen on the LT panel cannot be changed e The simulation cannot be performed for any address greater than 32 768 8000h To perform a simulation for such an address temporarily change the address to 32 767 or lower e Do not press any touch panel switch on the LT unit before the simulation has begun Otherwise a system error will occur LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operatio
450. ontinuous Line PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the desired continuous line 2 3 1 Selecting an 2 Select Node Edit K from Edit E Object 3 Select the coordinate value that you want to edit 4 Click on the button 5 Enter the X Y coordinate values in the coordinate change dialogs Hode Edit x EA y fe Fi 6 Click on the button to run the coordinate TO cancel the coordinate change change Click on the button 2 174 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS yeep Convert Import Image This section describes how to convert image data bitmap BMP file and JPEG JPEG file created from other drawing software or imported from a scanner for use on a LT Image I screen For Image Conversion data refer to 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen E Converting and Placing an Image PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pull down Edit menu s Convert Image Once an image has been converted command it can be placed on a screen using the Load Screen function 2 Set all conversion settings and click on the Convert 2 2 10 Load Screen button For each setting Import Image item 3 5 Creating Image Data Source Etfects Destination o Image Image File Computer picture bomp Source Image Colors 256 Size bytes Before conversion the image dis C a ees played in the Import Ima
451. onverting and Placing a Bitmap 2 151 Converting Data DXF to PRW 2 230 Converting DXF File Data 2 234 Converting Placing a Bit Map 3 24 Converting Placing a Bitmap Source 3 24 Copy from Description 2 10 Copy to Off On state 2 10 Copying a Library Item 2 171 Copying a Part on the Parts List 2 222 Copying a Specified Range Duplication 3 15 Copying an Object 2 129 Copying Screens 4 3 copyrights 1 Cover Page Dialog Box 9 3 Creating a Dot 2 96 Creating a New Library File 2 160 Creating a New Project 1 2 1 5 1 10 Creating Labels 2 10 Creating Editing a Logic Program 1 10 Cross Reference 2 225 Cutting Moving an Object 2 128 Cutting a Library Item from a Library File 2 170 Cutting a Library Item from a Library File and P 2 170 Cutting a Mark 3 12 Qu D Script Settings Copy and Paste 2 182 D Script Tool Box 2 183 Data Display Format 2 51 Data Logging Display Color Attributes 2 69 Data Logging Display Data Type Attributes 2 68 Index 1 index Data Logging Display General Settings Attributes 2 67Extended Screen Count 4 36 Data Logging Display Switch Settings Attributes 2 70Extended Settings 6 6 Data Logging Display Switch Shape Color 2 70 Data Logging Flow 10 27 Data Storage Example 2 209 Data Transmission via Device PLC 10 15 Date Display General Settings Attributes 2 83 Decimal Places 2 52 Definition of Functions 2 181 Deleting a Home Page Address 1 29 Deleting a Library Item 2 169
452. op operation regardless of the logging frequency the data SS display row will be designated as only a single row 10 46 Settings Rows and columns can be selected to change their attributes Add Select a Data row or Value column and click on the Add button to create a new row or column Copy Copies the currently selected Data row s or Value column s data is copied to the Clipboard Paste Pastes data row or Value column data copied to the Clipboard with the Copy button in the desired position Cut Deletes the currently selected Data row s or Value column s LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging E When copying row or column data with the same attribute multiple times 1 Designate the No of Block Data and No of Char Col 2 Set the attributes for a row or column to create the original data for copying 3 Select that row or column 4 Click on the Copy button 5 Select the destination row or column to paste the copied data to When copying multiple times select multiple rows or columns 6 Click on the Paste button to paste the same attribute to all the selected rows columns 1 Item Name Settings Display E Enter Item Names Enter the Item Names for each cell aa c eet cur E Attribute Settings To change the Item Name attributes select the Item Name title area and click on the Sett
453. or down smaller Be sure the object s handles are displayed as E Scaling An Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Click on the object to select it The object s handles 2 3 1 Selecting will appear to show that it is selected Objects L Re sizing will depend on which handle is dragged 2 Place the cursor on an object s handle and after the double arrow cursor appears drag the handle to re Ex To scale a square up or down size the object Corner Handles proportionally Top Bottom handles vertically Right Left handles horizontally Place the cursor on one of the handles of the object When the cursor becomes use the keyboard s either or key to scale the object up or down in the unit of dot Jet To cancel the re sizing click on the ES icon ote When re sizing an object while holding down the Ctrl key lines will snap to X 45 degree intervals Rectangular and Scale Linear objects will become square shaped objects and ovals will become circles Also if the Shift key is held down all selected Lines Rectangles Ovals Scales Text and loaded Marks will scale up or down proportionately When scaling a Part with a Label holding down the Ctrl key causes the Label to scale up or down together with the Part When selecting an oblique line 8 handles will be displayed Click on the line again and 8 handles will change to 2 handles one at either end Click ing and then dragging on
454. or editing a screen that has been called up on another screen where the Load Screen command was executed or for editing a screen on the Screen List If Change Attribute is specified the Load Screen dialog box will be opened enabling you to select a screen to be called up screen number If Edit Screen is specified the screen that has been called up will be opened allowing you to edit the data LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Window Parts Designate whether the contents of the window part placed on the Base screen will be displayed or hidden Parts ID Designates whether or not a Part s ID number is displayed on the Base screen Device Address Designates whether or not Part Addresses are displayed on the Base screen Part Addresses appear below the ID number Information Data Size Selects the character size displayed from Standard half size and Minimized 1 4 size for ID No and Address Used Hairline Cursor Changes the arrow cursor to the hairline cursor Switch 17 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 245 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Setting Screen Property Color Select the Grid Fill Point and Screen Background colors here When the drawn image data s and system s colors are the same the screens will be hard to se
455. or in the LT unit s Setup mode Character sizes can be set to either x 1 x 2 or x 4 When the horizontal and vertical sizes are set to 1 x 1 an alphanumeric character occupies 16 x 8 dots and a Chinese character occupies 16 x 16 dots The Alarm Display and Alarm Message will display on the LT unit s panel screen as shown below Alarm Display Part Vake Alarm Valveo Alarm Alarm No Valet Alarm lt Right to left scrolling display Usage Pattern Select the alarm type Screen gt Alarm Editor Alarm Message Sum Setup or mary Click on Enter a Set up Alarm save the Alarm message Message Summary Editor 5 1 1 Alarm Editor Via the Alarm Editor messages and monitor bits are registered for each alarm type An example of an Alarm Message screen used for entering a message is as follows The tab width for each item in the Alarm Editor messages can be adjusted by positioning the mouse pointer on the border between items and then dragging it The changed size will be saved and used on the subsequently opened screens LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing E Alarm Message Summary Screen Here you can register the messages to be displayed as either Alarm Sum mary Alarm Display Part or as Alarm Message right to left scrolling di
456. or will be converted into Black E Line Type Conversion DXF Screen Each DXF file s line type will be converted as follows DISHED Broken ODN rake ne pier Sn The user defined line types will be converted into solid lines E Object Conversion DXF Screen The DXF file s objects will be converted as follows Colors and line types will be converted as shown above Tiling patterns will be converted into solid Fill Staghtine Tex DIMENSION dimension indicator Straightline Conversion breaks down complex objects into INSERT inserting object Component parts objects Conversion breaks down complex objects into Component parts objects POLYLINE polyline donut shaped Continuous straightline Oval polygon rectangle Vertex coordinates of a continuous straightline ATTRIB attribute Objects other than the above will not be converted LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 263 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Each object s elements other than colors and line types will be converted as follows POINT dot A dot s pattern will be converted into 0 point and its display size will be converted into 0 0 A dot will be converted to a straight line with the start and end coordi nates at the same point TEXT characters and signs A rotation angle will be converted into an angle closer to 90 180 270 or 360
457. ouble clicking on any object Q drawn on the screen automatically y7 calls up that object s attribute set 5 tings A 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 134 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 2 Drawing LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS AD Tet O Use your PC s keyboard to enter text and then place in on the screen with your mouse s cursor This software has two methods of placing text on the screen The first method defines the placement point and the second de fines the area where the text will be centered E Text Attributes Display a sample fe Direct 0 Index of the current text s attributes Enter the text used as direct text Selects the Selects the text s e Character Type display direction rection 2 aan A one Rotates the text tyle fi Normal Bold i Raised in 90 degree Specifies the ais increments character width Bx and height oP eee eo MECC ee coor and blinking Direct The text entered in the text entry field is placed directly as a fixed text string A maximum of 100 characters can be entered per line and 100 lines per screen Index Select and add the Index Text SEA 4 5 3 E Selecting the index character string Entering the index character string Font Size Clicking on the font size display area displays the current character size used after text is placed on the drawin
458. ows and Columns Up to 60 columns and up to 2100 rows of data can be entered However since the file capacity is approximately 58KB depending on the No of Block Name Rows and No of Char Name designated for the cells these column and row limits will decrease lt Row Column Settings gt OQOOOQOOQOO J OOOO J ONVN VD OIOVIVVD QQQQQ No of Block OOOQOOQOO J OVNVD OOOQOOQO OQOQQQOQO QQQQQ Names OOOQOOQOO J OOQOOQOOQO OOOQOOQOO OQOQQQOQ QQQQQ 1 to 3 39000 30000 29900 29900 o 00000 ala 29900 29900 29900 Mo areale 29900 inp 29900 a Ld No of Char Col No of Block Char Col 1 to 16 1 1 1 to 16 No of Data Col 1 to 60 Row Setting When Using Loop Operation When the loop feature is used regardless of the logging frequency the data display will always be only one row The display row settings used during loop operation are as follows Data Display Row Only Block Name Row Data Display Row Data Display 1 row Block Name Data Display 1 row Data Display Row T otal Row Block Name Row Data Display Row T otal Row Data display 1 row Block Name Total Row s 1 to 4 rows Data Display Row 1 row Total Row s 1 to 4 rows E g Display Settings 10 38 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging Row Setting Display When Using Loop Operation When using the loop feature the Data Logging Display i
459. ows but not supported by the LT unit This section describes only the commands supported by LT Editor for Windows For a description of other commands refer to your LT Editor User s Manual sold separately For individual settings of each external communication device network refer to the De vice PLC Connection Manual Setting commands Supported by Only the LT Unit Setting Date Time Self diagnosis command Font settings English Korean etc Commands Supported by Only LT Editor LT Settings Checksum Enables checksum verification LT Settings Screen Level Change Flow Used to switch screens in the hierarchical display mode LT Settings Change to Screen No Specify the number of the screen used to replace the current one after the preset standby time has passed If you enter 0 no screen will be displayed I O Settings Offline Mode Specify how to change from on line mode to off line mode I O Settings Printer Type Specify whether to use the LT s Tool Connector to perform print operations If you select Yes using the LT s Tool Connector con figure the printer type and detailed print settings If any font setting other than Japanese is selected Font Setting requires specifying whether alphanumeric characters and symbols are to be displayed at the high quality level 6 2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 6 LT INITIAL AND SYSTEM SETTIN
460. p drop operation 1 3 1 Screen Editor Item Names and Functions Extended Function of Keypad Input Display This function allows you to configure the interlock setting of the pop up keypad In addition this function enables extended display format allowing you to select the input style using alarm and barcode reader and display style including the Shift Left Shift Right and Zero Suppress modes 2 1 14 Keypad Input Display Extended Function of Numeric Displays This function allows you to select the display style of the Numeric display including the Shift Left Shift Right and Zero Suppress modes 2 1 21 Numeric Displays Extended Function of Trend Graphs This function displays the trend data stored in a sequence of contiguous word addresses on a single trend graph 2 1 12 Trend Graphs Keypad Parts Some new Keypad Parts have been added 2 1 13 Keypad Display Window Registration Function on Window Screen and Window Parts Windows registered on the Window U Screen can be displayed on the Base B Screen as a window The display can be selected from Local and Global modes Use Window Parts to call up a window 2 1 20 Window Parts 3 3 Window Display Window Screen Multi language Display Function The text display used for drawing Part s Label Message Display Alarm Display Index text can be switched while operating the LT by using the Index text registered via the Text Table Editor This function allows you to change the l
461. p to twenty alphanumeric B Symbol Editor l x File Edt View Help characters or up to ten Chinese EE characters Word Symbols ia TE TET are Tere The entered characters are not case sensitive Line E to 10 word TNODOD2 Line 11 to 5 Word TNOOOOS EEE You can perform the Delete or Copy and Paste commands af ter selecting multiple messages E Important The symbols and the key cannot be used in the Symbol Editor MUM 4 After all the necessary items are registered select the File menu Save command or click on the icon 4 24 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing E Importing Symbols and Device Comments The previously saved Symbol Editor data can be imported to and shared with the currently open Symbol Editor Files with the extension of LBE or CSV can be imported CSV files that have been created via a text editor Microsoft Excel or other applications can be used as symbol or device comment data via the Symbol La Editor after imported Note Logic symbols cannot be imported with the Symbol Editor NG Symbol data and device comment s CSV file formats are as follows lt Symbol Data CSV Format gt GP_SYMBOL Symbol Name Word Address lt Give one line feed between a word address and a bit address gt Symbol Name Bit Address Example GP_SYMBOL Line A 1 to 5
462. pecifies the Bit Length of all data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code With No Code selected only positive numeric data can be entered To enter negative numeric data select either 2 s Complement or MSB LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 47 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 48 E Meter Graph Graph Settings Attributes Meter Graph Settings MHT_001 General Settings Graph Settings Color Shape Alarm Setting Only when a graph type Select the which has Meter s data divisions is display selected will Direction this selection appear Display Direction Here the Meter s display direction either Clockwise or Counterclockwise can be selected Axis Divisions Here the Meter increments are entered If the number of Divisions 1s specified as 10 11 division lines are displayed When no divisions are necessary simply enter 0 E Meter Graph Shape Color Attributes Here a Meter s border color division color Axis Color and needle color Meter Color can be selected 2 1 Parts Selecting Colors E Meter Graph Alarm Settings Attributes If desired an Alarm s settings can be set here 2 1 Parts Setting Alarms LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Meter Graph The procedure for placing a Meter G
463. picture is not found when converting the INSERT and DIMENSION entities Add the preset composite picture data to the BLOCK section The reference layers of the composite picture are more than 10 layers A compound graphic with more than 10 layers cannotbe converted Correct the graphic data so that the number of layers will be 10 or less The output LT screen size afer conversion exceeds 16 K bytes The subsequent data cannot be converted The format of the LT data is notcorrect LT data which is not supported may be involved or the screen data is corrupt Use the Editor to save the screen again and retry conversion The checksum of the LT screen read is not correct The data may be corrupt Use the E ditor to save the screen again and retry conversion The screen being called is notfound in the project Create a destnaton screen or delete the data which calls the screen The mark screen being called is not found in the project Create the destnaton mark screen or delete the data which calls the mark LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 13 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES E DXF File Conversion Errors from previous page Code W Library Screen Type Error 0x The type of the screen used in the screen call menu is nota base mark image or a window screen LT data which is not supported may be involved or the screen data may be corrupt Use the Editor to save the screen again and retry con
464. pies the charac two states the i Direct T Index appropriate Label ters in the Descrip can be selected OFF Text non pea the with these buttons Tum Off abel for the se Cooler switched On Off lected state Copies the charac Select the Character Size m E Alignment ters to the label for character s size exe Fi the Off state OFF Text Color Selects the oie ee el er Settings required character s type t Bod Co eee only when the text Raised extends to more than one line Select the label s color here LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 11 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 12 Label Here you can type in the text displayed on a button When typing in text press the l key to move to a new line When the Tracking check box is checked fj enabled after the Part has been placed on the screen if the Label s size or position is changed for either state the alternate state s Label size and position will be also changed If however the Label s size and position need to be specified independently for each state DO NOT check this box 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Copy from Description The characters entered in the Description field are copied to the label in the selected state without changing the character size Copy to Off On state When the state is On the characters entered in the label are copied to the label in the Off state
465. play Format and Code settings LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging Size Style Display Format General Info Size Style Alarm Settings Display Forrniat No of Display Digits No of Display Digits Designates the number of digits for the display within the range of characters mk designated in the Display tab usually A See ae as 1 to 16 digits The length designated Don S a here includes digits after the decimal 3 Shift Rigt JF Zero Suppress E Shit Left point but not the decimal point itself Decimal Places Designates the number of digits dis played after the decimal point usually as 0 to 14 digits This setting is valid only for Dec and BCD formats Enter 0 when not displaying decimal place numbers Color Settings Select the desired colors for Fg fore ground Bg background and Blk blink When the Alarm option is se lected the color attributes designated here are used for normal display Display Style Shift Left Shift Right Select the display style from the Shift Left and Shift Right The data will ap pear starting from the side designated here Shift Left has been selected as the default setting Zero Suppress Check this check box to omit the lead ing zeros of display data e g When the Display Length is 4 and the Zero Suppress is NOT selected 25 appears as 0025 Input Style Auto Clear OFF In this m
466. play will not be sorted for each functions and screens but the address designation conditions will be displayed for the entire Project File Since to display the global cross reference address information for all the ay t screen will be acquired it can take a long period of time N The global cross reference does not display the condition of addresses that have been designated via LT System Settings E Cross Reference Local Data Sampling Global D script Usage Pattern Local Close Cross Refer or Select either st List gt Data Word or Bit Confirm or Sampling U s the Esc key or Global D script View gt An example of the Cross Reference List dialog box in the case of Local is as shown below Select whether to display by Bit Address or Word Address Cross Reference List Local J l Bit Address word Address Click to change the a_i lt Display Start Ad dress Addresses 9 Used Selects the Address Al Display condition LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 299 2 7 Efficient Drawing Techniques Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Global Cross Reference The global cross reference has two display methods 1 e list display same as the standard cross reference and address map display This feature enables you to go to the screen that uses the address you want to edit to convert addresses in one operation and to make a reference to an address
467. point shown here by a down you can draw an oval which contacts a specified area i e the side s of a square This function is useful when drawing an inscribed circle and can also be used in step 4 together with the key 4 As the cursor is moved the oval will expand or con To draw a regular circle hold the tract key down in step 4 Click on the point shown by b The drawn oval will be registered When using the keyboard to draw an oval use the arrow keys to move the cursor to the center point and then to the point which defines its lt gt circumference radius point press 4 ing the d key each time To cancel a drawing action click on the ja icon Double clicking on any object drawn on the screen automatically calls up that object s attribute set tings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 123 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing 2 2 5 ACCT Sa To draw an arc or pie a portion of a circle must be selected You will need to first draw a circle and then click on the arc s beginning and end points E Arc Pie Attributes Check this check box when drawing a Pie Displays the currently selected Select one of Arc Pie image the line border He types F M E Select the Color Ps M BK and Blink set tings if desired E Drawing an Arc PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Draw menu Arc Pie command or
468. press Project File file to be compressed or ai decompressed Click on or Ea A general description of the compression tool is as follows button am Pack Tool Action Help Displays the file name of the project to be compressed Fis Name fd decompressed Status Displays the status of the project file compression decom pression Displays the overall progress of the project file compres sion decompression LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 39 4 3 Project Compression Decompression Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 3 1 Compressing a Project File A Project file can be compressed to a smaller size At this time a large sized file can be divided into smaller files automatically according to the specified capacity After a project file is divided into several files during compression serial numbers are assigned to the first character of each file extension or assigned to the first and second characters 1f the file number has two digits Example Olt 11t 9lt 10t 11t Enter the file name of Used to locate the project file to be the project file compressed or selecta fie Nm OOOO Browse to be com desired file name from pressed the list by clicking on LH Separate File the Browse button p Pack Project File Used to select the file size The compressed project Cancel limit file is automatically divided into several files accor
469. printing Row Settings No of Data Rows Designates the number of rows in the data print area No of Calc Rows Designates the number of rows in the cal culation area Column Settings No of Data Col Designates the number of rows in the data print area Header Click on this button to display the header edit window Enter text on this window The maximum text entry size is 160 char acters for each row and the total of 40 rows Footer Click on this button to display the footer ed iting window Enter text in the footer sec tion The maximum entry size is 160 char acters for each row and the total of 40 rows Preview Click on this button to view the printing 1m age of the data header and footer areas Control Word Address When data is printed out for each block the printing starts with the Trigger Bit turned ON This setting designates that Word Address Control Word Address D 10 0 Reservation All OFF Trigger 1 Block No Trigger ON Print OFF Not Print LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging per Congas Sete Print Completed Bit Address riggerSetings Dienas Pint wrteSetmgs OOOO o Designates the Bit Address to be turned 4 Block Uni 2 Realtime opy from Displa 1 1 Block Unt Restime Copy homDipa ON at the end of printing when data is No ofDataRows 1e oDatac P printed out for each block After confirm a a oe oe
470. pt Data Format Constant Entry Min Value Binl6 Bin32 4294967295 BCD Of 999 BCD32 O 99999999 When a D Script s command follows another D Script s com L mand enter a space between these commands Important For example if the not command follows the and com mand spacing is needed between the commands andnot Incorrect The operation will not be per formed and an error message will display on the software screen and not Correct E Trigger These selections designate the type of trigger used to activate your program The possible options are Timer Bit Rising Bit Falling Expression becomes Non Zero and Expression becomes Zero Timer Settings When the designated time elapses the statements described in the Action area of your program are performed The timer duration can be set from 1 to 32767 seconds The timer restarts its counting when the designated time elapses Trigger FE Timer Duration 7 ON ox ift titer Bit Rising When the LT detects the designated bit change from 0 to 1 the statements described in the Action area are performed Bit Falling When the LT detects the falling edge of the designated bit the statements described in the Action area are performed Bit Dual Operation Trigger When the LT detects the rising or the falling edge of the designated bit the statements described in the Action
471. r ey 100 switch 2 192 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 4 Library Items Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Deleting a Library Item Here a registered Library item is deleted PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Library item to be deleted from the In order to call up a Library item Browser from a Library file which 1s differ ent from the currently displayed AJ roe swith file click on the icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files 2 Select the Delete command from the Library Browser s Edit menu A dialog box appears to confirm your command lt 2 Are you sure you want to delete Once an item is deleted it 3 Click on the button and the Library item C N0t be Undone will be deleted A 100 switch LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 193 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 4 Library Items E Cutting a Library Item from a Library File and Pasting Here a registered Library item is Cut and Pasted PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select a Library item to be cut out from the Browser In order to call up a Library item from a Library file different than a 100 switch the currently displayed Library file click on the icon 2 4 Libraries E Switching Library Files 2 Via the Library Browser select the Edit menu Cut command or click on the icon The selected Library will be cut A 100 swit
472. r Fg Message Colors Background color Bg Blink Blk 0 Notblink 1 Blink 2 Notblink 3 Blink 0 to LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide os ke 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS E Alarm Export Alarm data is saved as ALA or CSV files PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Alarm Editor s Alarm menu Export command 2 Click on the button Alarm Editor This operation may take a very long time for a lange number of messages Continue 3 Specify the file name and file type ALA or CSV with which the exported alarm data is saved and click onthe Save _ button Enter a comment if desired If the same ALA file name already exists the system asks if the existing file must be overwritten If it must be overwritten select Fives If it should not be over written select File name Alarm product 1 Save Save as type ala F EN Alarm Editor The source is of a different PLC type than the current project Imported addresses may be invalid Do vou want to continue 5 Click on the export mode 5 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing E Alarm Import Alarm data saved as a file is imported to the currently open Alarm Editor Files with the extension of ALA or CSV can be imported To import alarm data
473. r automatic data transmission is explained Previously entered filing data is transmitted to the Device PLC as shown below File No No of Data Blocks Description Heat Control No of Data Item Data Storage Start Address ooo o FEI Data Format jeer fF Display Format E Data Transmission via Device PLC Trigger Automatic Data Trans mission Block 1 s data is transmitted when the Control Word Address changes Filing Setting Write Settings From Filing Data to Filing ON OFF SRAM Write Settings From Filing Data To SRAM Control Word Address D00200 Banos aE Write Completed Bit Address M00001 PEENE eee F Device PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings External Device amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings Control Word Address D00201 e a somalia ilentS Transmit Completed Bit Address Control Word Address 00 0000 Pe eee M00002 Transmit Completed Bit Address qg onqo00 fe ieee AN When using multiple folders the Control Word Addresses will be D00200 to Note D00201 which overlap with the following Device PLC amp SRAM Direct Data Nel Transmission Settings Control Word Address D00201 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 15 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 16 E Filing Data Data Transfer LT Internal memory Filing data p Back up SRAM External Device Filing data SRAM When the 0 Bit of a data
474. r D window Parts E Setting up the Device Memory Even after the simulation function has been closed device information can be saved to the Project File Select the Options menu Device Memory Settings command When the Backup check box is marked device information is auto matically saved when the simulation function is quit When the simulation starts up again the same device status will be displayed Clicking on the Device Clear button resets all device settings to 0 Device Memory Settings 8 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 8 SIMULATION 8 1 Overview E Movement Settings LS devices can also be simulated in the range from LS0020 to LS2031 excluding the read in area Select the Movement Settings command from the Option menu If the LS Device check box is marked the Parts that use LS devices will be displayed when a simulation is executed Movement Settings T LS besite E Address Registration Simulation can be performed for any registered address not for each screen or function The simulation result is displayed by selecting the registered address from the display function pull down list s Address Registration To register edit an address select the Simulation menu Address Regis tration command or click on the icon Register Address Type Device Delete Edit Copy Faste OF Help se The addr
475. r as the compressed file 4 44 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 4 Information Display gt Information Display This section describes the types of screen and project information available 4 4 1 Project Information Project Information displays both the commands used to edit the current project and the date and time of its last revision To use this command select the Project menu Project Information command E Project Information SRAM Information 4 Manufacturing System Ite ice PLC Type OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Display Type ype Project Size 5579 Bytes Date amp Time wed Oct 09 10 08 56 2002 Size of Screen To Be Sent To dispaly unit t oO With Upload Info 11326 Bytes Without Upload Info 107 B Extended Screen Count w hes a Current Project Displays the file name of the currently selected project file Description Displays a comment about the current project Device PLC Type Displays the Device PLC selected in the currently opened project file Display Type Displays the LT type selected in the current project file Project Size Displays the data volume of the current project file If any Parts are placed in this file the file volume will be increased Date amp Time Displays the date and time when this file was saved last Size of Screen To Be Sent To LT Displays the total dat
476. r data block for the return value data See the figure below to send the filing data to and designate that block via the Control Word Ad dress File 0 E A Return Value B Return Value Manual Transmission type 2 Select the desired filing data via the screen s touch keys perform any data changes and then transmit the edited data to the Device PLC Use the Filing Data Display to transfer data to from the Device PLC using the LS Device PLC touch key and the Device PLC gt LS touch key LT 2 3 p LS Area Internal memory 1 Backup SRAM lt External Device Filing data 1 Device PLC Trigger 10 1 2 Filing Data Setting Control Word Address Filing Data gt SRAM 2 Screen touch keys 10 1 6 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 1 Writing filling data to SRAM LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 7 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 3 Screen touch keys 10 1 6 Manual Filing Data Transmission Example 2 5 LS Area to Device PLC E Filing Data Setup Procedure 1 Filing data registration 2 Enter Write Settings for sending Filing Data to SRAM 3 Enter External Device amp SRAM Direct Data Transmission Settings 4 Setup Filing Data Display and their Screen Placement 5 Setup Keypad Display and its Screen Placement Automatic Data Transmission Completed Manual
477. ransfer Settings Be sure to perform data transfer after the current data trans fer is completed e During the current data write the succeeding data write op eration cannot be accepted received E LS Area Filing Data Structure Designated address a A o Block Names 32 characters ee sO oo O at Data m 15 number of data pieces 16 Bit length Hm D 15 number of data pieces x2 32 Bitlength st Data transmitted between the backup SRAM and LS Area will overwrite the existing Block Name and Block data Data transmitted from the Device PLC to the LS Area overwrites only file data and preserves the Block Name LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 5 10 1 Filing Data Recipe Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Backup SRAM LS Area External Device Block Name Block Name _ lt q _ e When a device is used with a 32 Bit system start Address filing data cannot be transmitted to the Device PLC via the LS Area e Block Name text characters are stored in order of the character input LT Series User s Manual 6 3 2 Text Data Settings E Filing Data Transmission Methods Automatic Transmission Filing data is transmitted from the LT to the Device PLC via a Device PLC trigger Use the Control Word Address instead of using the Filing Data Display to transfer data between the LT and the Device PLC LT Device PLC Device PLC 3LT Internal memory 1 Backup SRAM
478. raph is as shown below Data stored in D00102 displays on the Tank Graph TTT gt When data 34 22h is stored in D00102 the Meter will appear as follows PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Meter Graph command or click on the E icon 2 In the General Settings area input the Word Ad dress and Data Format Meter Graph Settings MHT_001 General Settings Graph Settings Shape Color Alarm Settings E nte r Dseriptign i Absolute 9 Relative D001 02 Word Address a Ea I Display Mode Data Format D Om Select BCD i BCD 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Parts Select You can also use the Alarm Settings area to enter Alarm ing a Part Shape settings and select Colors if desired Shape Browser MT_3DO003 Parts File Current POE File c program files pro Face typdb Title MT_30001 F Hep LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 49 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 In the Graph Settings area input the number of The Axis Divisions will appear divisions and data display direction only when Absolute display is se Meter Graph Settings MT_001 x lected i Graph Settings Color Shape Alarm Setting Enter 10 Select Clockwise 5 After all of a Part s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button Th
479. rd Logic programs alone are received LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide iD 7 3 Options Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS In addition to transferring receiving screen data you can check the screen information on the connected LT Unit using the LT Editor program Usage Pattern Project Selecta Click on the Manger Transfer Option desired gt ok item or button Click on eh 7 3 1 LT Internal Screen Data Information LT internal information will be displayed here Functions such as Screen List Memory Info and LT Version are included E List Screens The screen name data volume and title of the screens stored in the LT unit are listed by screen type PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Options menu Screens List command Screens of the current project will be listed 2 After confirming the displayed information click on the button to close the screen list Upload Information Indicates if the upload infor mation has been transferred to the LT unit or not E itle B1 a0 Test Bits jez Bittle ct L Upload Information 7 16 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS E Memory Information 7 3 Options The LT unit s current memory capacity for a specified memory area bank is dis played Its maximum internal memory capacity is also displayed PROCEDURE 1 Select the Options menu
480. rder Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 109 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Yami Picture Displays Registered Library items are displayed according to Device PLC Word Address changes Parts and Tags however cannot be displayed in these displays Up to 16 different kinds of Library items can be displayed on a single Picture Display 2 4 Libraries With the LT Type C the Picture Displays will not be displayed on m the LT when transferred if the LT has not been communicating Important M with the external device E Picture Display Description Attributes Picture Display Settings LB_001 Enter the Enter Comment General Settings Library Image Address to be data here ar aa monitored BScCnplori Tess o z ate The currently selected Part State s image Selects the appears here Operation Mode Address Here either a Bit or Word Address is entered after first selecting a Type either Bit or Word Mode There are two methods used to switch the Library images displayed on the Picture Display one is Bit access and the other is Word access Select either of these Mode When selecting Bit Messages will change according to the specified Bit Address changes 2 110 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guid
481. re set up properly for data transfer and try again LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 19 Appendix 2 Troubleshooting APPENDICES Solution 3 If error pattern 3 4 or 5 has been observed or Solution 1 or 2 does not solve the problem perform a forced transfer from your PC Perform the transfer even if the buzzer is sounding Confirm that the cable and PC are config ured for successful transfers 1 Select Setup from the Setup menu on the Screen Transfer to display the Transfer Settings dialog box on the screen 2 Select Force System Setup from the Setup field and click the OK button Transfer Settings Send Information Communications Fort Upload Information COM F LI System Screen Baud Aate 115 2K bps wi z Control Data Pew Eai EH Transter Method Send All Screens f Automatically Send Changed Screens 9 Send User Selected Screens Use Extended Program fet Force System Setup ol Simulation a Do NOT Perfor Setup Setup CFG file fe English 2 Japanese 3 Select Screen Transfer from the Transfer menu and perform a forced transfer 4 When the message No System Program on the LT 1s displayed on the screen Click the OK button This message will not be displayed if the protocol has not been down loaded to the LT Force System Program Download Send System to LT Appendix 20 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creati
482. re stored in a Library file CPW file separate from Project LTE files When library data is a Mark it will be saved in a Mark Library MRK file Moving from one Library file to the other allows objects to be called up that were previously used in a variety of screens and Project files To call up an item from a Library or save an item to a Library either select one of the tool bar s icons or use the pull down menu s Library commands With both Base and Mark screens open when the Base screen where the Library Browser is remained open is changed to the Mark screen the Mark Library Browser cannot be open on the Mark screen When changing the screen first close the Library Browser and change the screen and then open the Library Browser on the newly opened screen Objects called up via the Load Screen or Load Mark or Window Parts W command as well as D script cannot be registered E Library Browser When either or icon is clicked on the Library Browser will appear Displays the currently selected item s registration number and title clicking on the triangle brings up a list of the items in the current library Men u Bar sal 0p5 obja cpw 3D template switch parts Tool Bar Reverse video Ale Edt View window Help indicates that roh this item is SW_3D001 ON 3 SW_3D002 OFF 4 SW_3D002 ON 5 SW_3D004 OF the differ currently se ent items lected i l either left l right u Displays
483. reen next to your cursor 2 Click on the point where the Part s top left corner is to be placed The selected Part will then appear on the screen Is Adjust the Part s size if desired ME 2 3 3 Scaling Up Click on the Part to select it and drag any one of the Down handles to change the size of the Part To change the size of a Part move the cursor to a Part handle and click then drag the handle to re size the Part and click again After placing the Part double clicking on it automatically brings up its Attribute Setting dialog box E ESEE EE EREE Seer METH 2 3 15 Changing Attributes ote Depending on the Part when scaling up or down one dot error may occur in XA the frame width E g LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 16 2 1 1 Bit Switches Here the creation of a touch panel switch used for turning a specified Bit ON or OFF is explained If the LT unit is Type C Bit Switches with the Monitor function selected will not be displayed on the LT unit after the Project Important File transferred unless the LT has been connected to a external device E Bit Switch General Settings Attributes Enter comment Bit Switch Settings F5_O001 data here Enter the Bit Genet n Shape Color Label Extend Switch Add ress oy Operation Bit Address oF Image of the iene
484. reen next to your cursor 5 Click on the point where the Alarm Summary dis To cancel placement click on the play area s top left corner is to be placed icon If desired use the Alarm Summary display handles to To change the Part alter its size When the Alarm Summary display is scaled size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up up or down the displayed character size will also change according to the border s size Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s Attribute Settings dialog box 2 3 15 Changing Attributes importa Be sure to use the Alarm Summary s display area only for displaying Alarm Mes sages i e never place over lap or overlay another Part or object in this area LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 81 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts 2 1 13 File Name Display Data registered in the Filing Data settings is displayed 10 1 1 Filing Data Recipe Function E File Name Display General Settings Attributes Enter a descrip File Display FO_001 tion if desired General Settings Display Style Color Switch Settings SwitchType Color Specify ee whether or not t Use LS A Enter the ID a e to use the LS ia for the Top White Word Address area He Name Ti Display and its pasooo Tz Enter the start word address of the LS area function switch External Device Transfer C Use Transter
485. reen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS lt When displaying the data using relative values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Enter the Pie Graph Settings PI_O01 data here General Settings Graph Settings Shape Colfr Alam Settings Word Ad Faaa dress to The currently E store graph selected Pie 7 Epo A FEE E Display Mode data Graph s image Bt Length fe appears here lnput Range Input Code Select the Min Vaue P Ef SNe ode desired Data Calls up the Part vex eS EN Gow Format Shape Browser D Parts can be Specifies the selected directly ise Input from the as w ode Browser Specifies the data s Specifies the data effective Bit Length Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address Data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used to store Pie Graph data Display Mode When this check box checked negative numeric data can also be dis played Bit Length Specifies the Bit Length of all data stored in the Word Address Input Range Specifies the data s Input Range Input Code With No Code selected only positive numeric data can be entered To enter negative numeric data select either 2 s Complement or MSB LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 31 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Pie Graph Gr
486. reen cannot be changed 3 Specify the start screen number at the destination and then click on the COo button 13 is specified here The difference between the start The specified number comes to the top and the subsequent screen number at the destination numbers are changed automatically with increments of off and that at the source is taken as an set values offset value Since the start screen Screen Change x number 1 IS to be changed to 13 se E wa here the offset value is 12 This SEER Cancel offset value is added to the subse quent screen number 2 and 5 which is then changed to 14 and 17 4 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 1 Screen Editing mera Copying Screens from Other Projects Screens created in any project file other than the currently open one and other settings can be copied to the currently open screen se e To copy a logic program from other project files import a logic program X file wll with the Logic Program Editor Logic Programming Operation Manual e The contents of Alarm Editor and Text Editor tables can be shared between Projects by importing exporting ALA alarm data only or CSV files 4 5 2 E Importing Exporting CSV files 5 1 4 Alarm Import Export E Specifying Items to Be Copied After selecting a project file as the copying source specify the items you want to copy such as t
487. ress 2 1 Parts Select ing a Part Shape 2 19 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 5 Click on the point where the Switch s top left corner To cancel the placement click on is to be placed the icon If desired use the Switch s handles to alter its size To change the Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s Attribute Setting dialog box 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 1 2 Word Switches Here a touch panel switch for setting data to a specified Word Address can be created E Word Switch General Settings Attributes Enter Comment Word Switch Settings WS 001 data here xl Enter the Word General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Address you T h W d Description Ward Address s or i o Doom A F T wish to use Switch s image Se appears here XJA 7 H i Enter the data Calls up the Part 18 Word Set for the Switch Shape Browser o to send to the Parts can be N Word Address selected directly from the Browser Select the Switch s Pee cma Hee function Word Address Here the desired Word Address is entered Constant Here number registered to the Word Address is input The data format is Decimal Base 10 and the input range is from 32768 to 32767 2 20 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 P
488. ress Offset 0 T Data Logging Address ponon Bit Length 1 16 ie Data stored in the Address entered in the Logging Address area is converted accord ing to the Input Range area s values and the converted numeric data is printed out Address Offset The Logging Address is changed by the offset value entered here For example when the number of logging words is 4 the offset value becomes from 0 to 3 Bit Length Enter the Enabled Bit length of data to be stored in the Logging Address Input Code Format No Code Displays positive values only 2 s Complement Uses 2 s complement to express negative values Code Check this check box when displaying negative values Only available when se lecting the Dec data format Round Up Round up displaying or printing values Input Range Min Value Max Value Designate the range of values stored in the Logging Address The possible ranges vary depending on the Input Code Format settings Input Code i No Code TA Code z i 2 s Complement L Round Up Display Range Min Value Max Value 10 60 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Column Settings General Info Data Format Size Style Absolute fe Relative Address Offset 0 Data Logging Address P 00000 Bit Length 1 16 16 Input Code t No Code I Code i 2 s Complement Jo Round Up Size Style Column Settings
489. ributes 2 58 Alarm Color 2 9 Alarm Export 5 13 Alarm Import 5 14 Alarm Message Summary Screen 5 3 Alarm Range 2 9 Alarm Settings 2 9 Alarm Summary Description Attributes 2 57 Alarm Summary Display Format Attributes 2 58 Alarm Type 2 9 Aligning Object Positions 2 141 Alignment Justification 2 11 Automatic Filing Data Transmission 10 12 Automatically create file name 2 154 aving a Library File 2 173 Bit Switch General Settings Attributes 2 14 Bit Switch Shape Color Attributes 2 15 Blink 2 8 Browsing Help Topics 1 27 Calling up Device Comments 4 26 Calling up Help from a Dialog Box 1 28 Canceling a Command Undo 3 21 Canceling an Action 2 157 CD ROM 1 CD ROM Usage Precautions 8 Change Order 2 220 Changing Alarm Attributes 5 10 Changing Attributes 2 147 Changing Display Addresses 2 227 Changing Screen Numbers and Titles 4 5 Changing the Data Sampling Setting Order 2 224 Changing the Library s Display 2 159 Changing the Order of Overlapping Objects 2 146 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter Breakdown 6 Character Size 2 11 2 52 2 111 Closing a Logic Program 1 11 Closing a Screen 1 16 Colors 2 7 Communication Port 7 5 Communication Settings Menu 6 6 Confirming Addresses 2 148 Connecting to the Home Page 1 30 Conversion between Instructions and Parts 2 131 Convert DXF Size 2 231 2 237 Converting a Bitmap 3 26 Converting a Screen into a Bitmap File 2 155 C
490. riginal Word Address the number of Addresses Example statement When copying data of WORD1O0 to WORD19 to WORD20 to WORD29 memcpy w WORD20 w WORD10 10 Merion Cop m Statements p Operators LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS lt Memory Copy memcpy gt e Original copy data will be read from the PLC only once when Important p r r required If a communication error occurs during data read the GP s internal special relay LS2032 s Bit 12 will be turned ON When data read is completed normally Bit 12 will be turned OFF e Although it will depend on the number of Addresses to be copied data will be read from the original copy data then divided into pieces and copied to the copy destination There fore even if a communication error occurs during data read data may be partially written Result of data write in the copy destination O Data write completed x No data is written lt Block Memory Copy gt Copy original data Result of data write in the copy destination rd Communication error lt Divided Memory Copy gt Copy original data Result of data write in the copy destination No communication error No communication error E e Oo Communication error x Communication error X en msrwrwraw gt dX e As the number of Addresses increases the more time Is re quired for writing data to t
491. rmation and fax it to your local Pro face service center Please include any relevant details including project data and or screens so that the problem can be duplicated We guarantee all this data will remain confidential Also please take the time to use the OSCHECK tool installed with your LT Editor software and include a printout of its result with your fax Using the OSCHECK Program This program after it completes its test produces a text file txt Please be sure to print out this data and include it with your Software Trouble Report 1 Click on the Windows main screen s Start button and then on the Run selec tion 2 Here use the Browse feature to find the OSCHECK EXE program located in your PC s LT Editor folder Once you find it click on OK to start the program 3 Designate the status report s Save folder and filename Click again on OK and the text file will be created e When inquiring be sure to write down your software s serial No Without your software s serial No your question s can Important not be answered e Understand that it may take some time for us to respond since your question must be carefully checked and recreated Pro face FAX and Email Information e Pro face Europe FAX No 31 0 20 6464 358 Email support proface com e Pro Face Korea FAX No 82 0 2 3664 6839 Email proface proface co kr e Pro Face Taiwan FAX No 886 0 2 8773 789
492. rogram SH ol B Q ala gt wi o Bl 7 3 c2 E j 1 20 20 na LT Type A 2 Select the Screen Editor Edit menu Copy com To cancel the Copying click on the mand or click on the icon icon The selected Part will be copied to the Clipboard 3 Select the rung where you wish to insert an instruc tion on the Logic Program Editor and then select Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Library Jelp j cu sa B Data Controller Help arate oe dek klixka ea ES Fe hR eA FS elle 100 We OM Ere e anne AE F Ps a mepo un ey EIES Wi Fe 6 wae sa machine e ee hae eee led OF led OF eee oe a ee eg F Power _On_pushbutton Power _Off_pushbutton Te a 3 a Off Off ee 0 0 Light 1 T of A f E 33 257 E Numeric DisplayIND O11 0 0 amp Ez E PEC 2 158 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Select an instruction to convert and determine by A list of instructions to which the double clicking on it copied Par
493. rogram Files Pro face LT datab To Project File C SProgram Files Pro faceSLT datab Option a tence nee 5 After all the attributes have been entered click on e button to registered the entered data Option DXF gt Screen Convert OF Size fe Use LIMMIN SLIMMAX i Use EXTMIN SET MAS Convert Screen Size 9 6404480 s 9 640x400 y 3 320240 9 00600 ENEA 6 Click on the Convert button to start conversion File Convert DXF gt Screen From DKF File C Program Files Pro face LT datab To Project File C Program Files Pro faceSLT datab Option Comet cce ree 7 After the conversion is completed click on the button The DXF lt gt LTE Converter dia log box will reappear File Convert DXF gt Screen From DF File D Program Files Pro face LT datab To Project File C Program Files Pro face LT datab Option Reading DF 530line Converting 10072 Writing Screen fobjects Complete cower Ce 7 Heb 8 Click on the ext button to quit DXF lt gt Screen Converter x DF Screen Screen gt DF REMARKS 2 8 1 Option DXF Screen If the designated screen number al ready exists a prompt will appear asking whether the new number should overwrite the old number When the button is clicked on the new nu
494. rsion error occurs It may also vary according to 6 Click on the OK button to exit the setting dia changes in the settings of other log box items PLC types are different Save As Ple Type different from previous type Address conversion may have produced Invalid addresses If a conversion error occurs 6 Detailed information on the conversion error is dis played Change PLC Type Ero Cannnot Convert Devices PA IDO OOOO OD neeeeemen OK The above converted errors were fou ok Are you sure to use this conversion Dev i ce add ress B screen Screen No 0 Esport Error Address ist lt Completing Convert Address gt Click on the oK button V 4 36 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS Click the oK button to exit the dialog box PLC types are different Save As Fle Type different from previous type Address conversion may have produced Invalid addresses lt Maintaining a history of conversion errors as text data gt Select the conversion error and click on the Export Error Address List button Change PLC Type Eror Cannnot Convert Device B 1 O00 Ho T OK The above converted errors were tourd ook Are you sure to use this conversion Cancel Export Emor Address List UU Designate the file name In the File nam
495. ry ist Po Information C Screen List Prints the list E Alarm List of setti ngs of LI System Setup List the item jm Data Sampling Settings List L Filing Data List marked with a check Gy Global D Script List LI D Script Function List jm Symbol List jm Global Cross Reference List Ci Data Logging Settings List Displays the currently selected item Details Click on the button to specify detailed information of printing Screen List Select the screen type to be printed Screen List Contents Sse cemeccemeecomeocameccomescome L Mark Screen D Image Screen Window Screen Date Sampling Settings List Select whether to print the summary or details of the data sampling settings Data Sampling Settings List ii Bengal is Detail T Cross Reference List 9 4 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 9 PRINTING E Printing Screen Tab Select the screen type and contents to be printed Print Select the screen type to be pri nted screen Type PEA Base Screen Detail Screen Hard Copy L Mark Screen L Image Screen go Window Screen Screen Range Specify the tp A fe Screens From To printing range using individual screen numbers When you select All all screens will be printed Details Print Project Information Screen 9 1 Print Settings Displays the currently selected item Click on the butt
496. s 1 1 1 Prior to Operating the LT Follow the procedure below to create projects for the LT unit 1 Preparation Before using the LT make sure that you have all the required hardware and have read all the specifications wiring and installation information LT Series User s Manual Chapter 2 Specifications and Chapter 3 Installation and Wiring 2 Design Screen Design a screen layout and create a logic program 3 Install the LT Editor Install the LT Editor on a PC SETTER LT Editor CD Jacket included with the LT Editor 4 Develop Logic Program Use the LT Editor to develop a logic program and set the operation mode LT Editor Operation Manual Logic Programming Guide 5 Create Screen Run Screen Setup Use the LT Editor to set up the screen and parts based on your screen design LT Editor Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 6 Transfer the Screen Data and a Logic Program Use the LT Editor on your PC to transfer the data and a logic program to the LT unit LT Editor Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 7 Monitor Logic Program Check the transferred logic program through the monitor feature of the LT Editor LT Editor Operation Manual Logic Programming Guide 8 Initialize the LT Initialize the LT based on how you will use it LT Series User s Manual Chapter 6 Initializing the LT and LT Editor Device PLC Connection Manual 9 Operation Run
497. s is 0 is 1 True Condition False Condition Process Do not Process LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 205 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 5 D Script Global D Script E Functions A D Script program can be created using Functions A program created as a Function can be used on the same screen or on other screens The Functions can be used commonly for D Script and Global D Script Functions 7 al G1 cr CD Call Select a Function name to be loaded and then click on this button After clicking on the Load button the called up Function name will be displayed in the formula area Edit Select a Function name to be edited and then click on this button Use the D Script Function dialog box to perform editing Delete Click on this button to delete a created Function First select a Function name to be deleted and then click on the Delete button Copy Any selected function can be copied Paste Use this command to paste a copied function Click on this button and the following dialog box will appear Then enter the name for the function to be pasted Duplicate D Seript Function Mame Please enter a new function name ee Eoee 2 206 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Definition of Functions When the Hew ear icon is Clicked on in the D Scrip Editor the D
498. s as follows E g When frequency is set to 4 Logging Data Backup SRAM data Pew mmf sor roofer a 3 so oy o Here the oldest acquired earliest logging data is displayed in the top most cell When a single cycle of data logging is completed from beginning to end data display rows will then shift upwards one row every time data is logged When using the loop feature the Total Total Average Max Min rows will disappear However these Total values will be the totals of backup SRAM data at that one pointing in time Therefore the new data that over writes the old data will not be included in the Total values LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 39 10 2 Logging 10 40 Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Print Print ON OFF E Ee Trigger Settings Display Print write Settings J PrintfON OFF Block Unit 2 Realtime Copy from Display Click a this check box to print out the Column Settings logging data Mo of Data Rows 2 No of Data Col BR Block Unit eaen el Header Footer Preview Logging data is printed in block units Control Word Address pogon f E Left Margin ca E Printing is started via the Control Word Print Completed Bit Address ooo Address Realtime Logging data is printed out each time it is logged Copy from Display Click on this button when the display for mat has already been set up to use that format for
499. s es When the value 34 22h is stored in D00102 the graph appears like this PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Pie Graph command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area input a Word Address and select a Data Format Pie Graph Settings PI_O02 General Settings Graph Settings i ShaperColor Alarm Settings E nte r D001 02 Description i Absolute 3 Relative h e re Word Address Bome FI im Display Mode Data Format Can Select BCD 3 Select a Part Shape from the Browser 2 1 Selecting a You can also use the Alarm Settings area to choose an Part Shape Alarm and select Colors if desired Shape Browser Cancel CG_3D001U CG 3D002U CG 3D003U I CG 3D004U ParsFie LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 39 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE 4 In the Graph Settings tab select the display direc tion and input the number of Axis Divisions Pie Graph Settings Pl_001 Enter 10 Select Clkws From Top 5 After all of the Graph s attributes have been entered or selected click on the button A Pie Graph s outline will appear on the Base screen next to the cursor 6 Click on the point where the Pie Graph s top left cor ner is to be placed If desired use the Pie Graph s handles to alter its size 2 40 2 1 Parts REMARKS
500. s of Mark Library are performed in the same manners as those of the standard Libraries 2 4 Libraries LT Editor has pre made MRK files in correspondence with the ISO7000 Series Marks and symbols Parts List Manual umer MAK Aleneme Tite number 0001 0200 0001 0200 0201 0400 0201 0400 0401 0600 0401 0600 0601 0800 0601 0800 0801 1000 0801 1000 1001 1140 1001 1140 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 2 Creating an Image the Image Screen wap Creating an Image the Image Screen When you convert image data bitmap BMP file and JPEG JPG file read with an image scanner into an Image screen for the LT series the image data can be displayed on the LT series panel Even though your original image file can be up to 256 colors since the LT can only display in 64 colors the file s colors will be converted to the LT s 64 colors You can load an Image screen onto a Base screen Trend Graph screen or Keyboard screen by selecting the Draw menu Load Screen command 2 2 10 Load Screens To convert image data into Image screen data for the LT series use the Utility menu Convert Image command Qe a e The Image Screen cannot be opened with the Screen Editor 2 e You can also perform the conversion in the screen editor by selecting the Draw menu Convert Image command 2 3 18 Convert Import Image e Image screens cannot be edited To edit
501. s polygon will not be con verted properly LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 267 2 8 DXF Conversion Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 268 E Option Screen gt DXF Here select and enter color and size data used when performing data con version Screen Size Option Screen gt DXF x Designates the LT prau screen size after conver N sion Conver OSF S p t St t 9 B40x480 arts State Wo a20 DXF size a Selects and enters the Part Designates the DXF 1 800600 State when converted screen size when Base screen data is converted into DXF file data Convert Screen Size The screen size of a LT unit specified in the Project File Convert DXF Size The DXF file size used after data is converted using data conversion 1s selected The default values are the same as the Screen Size values men tioned above Parts State Bit When Part display states ON OFF are specified that Part will be converted for each display state Word Picture Display and Message Display will be converted with the display state specified here E Color Conversion Screen gt DXF Base screen s drawing data colors will be converted as follows Black 250 gray Ble S blue Green 3 green 5 blue 3 Red tired Purple 6 purple White 7 white LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS
502. s the LT integrated development software providing both an LT Logic Programming environment and screen creation and editing capabili ties for creating LT display screens E Programming Functions Utilizing Window s easy to use interface you can quickly and easily de velop logic programs that conform to the IEC 61131 3 standard LT Editor provides I O drivers that can be selected according to the LT type Logic programs are developed with the LT Editor s Logic Program Editor For more information on the Logic Program Editor please refer to the online help Also the Logic Programming Operation Manual provides tutorials for learning logic programming procedures as well as providing lists of instructions and variables used in Logic Programs It also explains the operation of the LT main unit E Drawing Functions You can create a screen by drawing objects and placing Parts A large variety of pre made Parts and D Scripts allow you to quickly display various operations and objects A set of logic programs created with the Logic Program Editor and a Part s display function enable you to make a drawing that corresponds to logic program operations For example you can show the variables on the LT screen and set a value to the variable using a touch panel switch LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 1 Overview LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamental
503. sa 212 2 19 2 2 0 9 910 0 rin tey_ 2919 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 E Kl kl kK x Common Relay ol ojolojojo m x x x o o o ojojo M Kl kl kK x spxittely_ 2 2 2 2 0 9 9 0 0 0 0 Link Res ol ojolojojo m u olojolojo o rome feee ee e eee ma ee T T e leis k Kl x x rmereuens_ eeel er Kl Kl Kl Ki kK amp Kl Kl kK x Counter current 13 k x kK KI x x k Kl kK x Timer setup e gt k x x x KI x Kl Kl x x C ounter setup D Kl kl kK x warege 2 9 99 0 0 0 0 0 0 B Kl Kl kK x renegser_ 2 2 2 2 0 2 2 0 0 0 0 i k x x x J oint Register Z k kl kK x seneg 2 2 2 2 2 lelelelololo W Kl kl kK x ineregser_ 2 2 2 9 9 0 0 0 0 0 Kl kK kik System Area R Joint Register is only for FA M3 c 2 ho eb gt c O O ho O am a E Yokogawa M amp C UT100 Series Device D Register d LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 23 Appendix 3 Address Conversion Tables APPENDICES E Yamatake Yamatake SDC Series DMC10 Conversion E Rika Kohgyou CB SR Mini Series 00 w CFE before ww o o E Rika Kohgyou CB REX F LE100 Series Before Conversion E Omron THERMAC NEO Controller ater Conversion cofer cs afis Conversion Appendix 24 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Gui
504. sage import the number of alarm Alarm message summary limit has been message summary has exceeded the designated limit Delete the messages currently set and adjust the seting range so that the messages to be imported can be stored Data in Blocks 2 and 3 cannot be uploaded to Since the Block feature was turned OFF when this data was downloaded please delete Blocks 2 and 3 a L Quit other applicatons re allocate memory and paste the messages again Low Memory not all alarms were copied Memory is not sufficient to paste all the messages Try copying a smaller group Quit other applicatons re allocate memory and paste the messages again Not enough memory to perform undo Memory is not sufficient to undo the messages The Do you want to continue deleted message s cannotbe undone restored Not all alarms were saved Disk capacity is not enough to store the data Insufficient disk space Create more free disk space and store the data again Not all alarms were read Memory is not suficient to read the alarm Insufficient memory messages Quit other applicatons create more memory and read in the alarms again Some data is incorrect and all data cannotbe The format of CSV data to be imported is incorrect Data in and below the line with the incorrect data will not be imported Check Alarm data s CSV format LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 7 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES
505. same as background red magenta yellow and white will be displayed as white Fo ee ek Bo ee ek Color LT unit Bx BL OR CY ROIMO YE WH Black not White dis displayed played Monochrome LT unit 2 8 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Paris Kote D Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Blink When the Blink Blk Check Box checked w the color bar is displayed in a darker color and the specified Part will blink on the LT s screen Fo i Imi Ima Blink Check Box _ o e When either text characters or Mark backgrounds Bg are specified as Black and the Blk Blink feature is turned on they will become transpar ent so that even when overlaid on other objects the rear object s color is also visible This function is useful when overlaying text on Switches Lamps and other objects For example Label Switch Po M e oo Ree L E 1 Specifying a Label s However specifying the Label s background color as background color as Black and Black does not allow you turning on Blk blink causes to see the background the background color to be color come visible States Only Parts which can have two states are displayed with this feature Dis play colors for Parts can be specified separately for each state Click on either state button to select it and specify that state s color using the color bar LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen
506. screen shows the number of screen types alarm messages and channels contained in the current project Project Info Project Screen SRAM Information Humber of Screens Total Screens 1 Number of Basic Alarm Messages Eoo o Humber of Channels The number of channels and the screen number that are used in the project are displayed E SRAM Information The situation with the use of the backup SRAM in the current project is displayed on a function basis Project Screen i Available SRAM Size KBytes Data Sampling Trend Graph Bytes LS Backup Bytes Loging Data Bytes Filing Data Bytes Remaining SRAM Size 4 46 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 4 Information Display 4 4 2 Screen Information The Screen Information screen displays the settings for the currently open screen aS well as the date and time of its last revision To use this command select the Project menu s Screen Information command Screen Screen Information Screen Project Hame Factory B External Device Type OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Curent Screen Size 170 Bytes Project Name Displays the file name of the currently selected project file External Device Type Displays the external device selected in the current project file Current Screen Displays the screen type and screen number of the current screen Description D
507. select a font language from z Io n the right of the Font Settings field 5 Double click the index character string entry area Hi Text Table Editor A Manufacturing System_lte File Edit View Help mo F r Jumps to the po IE designated line ure 1 Tablet Font ASCII Code Page 850 Setting 6 Enter the desired Characters and Lines accord ing to the index character string LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS The table name can be modified by selecting File menu Table Name Change You can choose from the follow ing five selections e ASCII Code Page 850 e CHINA GB2312 e JAPAN JIS e KOREA KS C5601 e TAIWAN Big5 The number of characters used in the index character string is deter mined by Characters x Lines Max 1 200 Characters x Lines lt 1 200 Multiple display lines can be used for Character string and Parts La bel only For other features do not specify an index number for which multiple display lines are set If such an index number is specified only the first line will be displayed 4 53 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS 7 Enter the index character string 8 Click the ok _ button to confirm the charac ters 9 Repeat the same steps to set the index character strings for the other index numbers 10 Repeat the same steps
508. sh to Overwrite i Cancel LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS A comma cannot be used in a description After the screen is saved it will remain open If the screen is saved as a different screen number the screen of the up dated number will be displayed Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish E Closing a Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Screen menu Close command in the You can also close the screen by Screen Editor clicking on the x button at the up per right corner of the window 2 The screen will close drawing area If you attempt to close an updated screen without saving it the system asks if you wish to save the current screen When you attempt to save a new If you click on the button the system saves sereen the Save As dialog box ap ears the updated data If you click on the button P the system closes the screen without saving the updated 1 2 4 Saving a data Screen under a Different Name Drawing Board E Quitting the Screen Editor PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Screen menu Exit command or click on in the Screen Editor 2 The Screen Editor will close If you attempt to close the Screen Editor without first When you save a new screen the saving the currently edited screen LT Editor asks if you Save As dialog box appears wish to save the updated screen If you click
509. signated Word Address is displayed as absolute values from 0 to 100 with Display Mode selected 100 to 100 Word Address Enter the Word Address where the data will be stored Data Format Select the display data format from Bin and BCD Display Mode When this check box is checked and Bin data format is selected nega tive numeric data can be displayed 2 46 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS lt When displaying data in relative values gt Select Absolute or Relative display Enter comment Enter the data here Meter Graph Settings MT_001 Word Address Th tl Tenera Stings Graph Sang Shaper lam Satira used to store e currently Description Pads j selected Meter s DOO OOOO oaas aispiay nala image appears p owas here Bit Length jey f Select the ipa a e desired Data Calls up the Part _ EI M 7 2s complemen Format Shape Browser Parts Shapes Specifies the can be selected Hep data s Input directly from the Code Browser Specifies the data s Specifies the effective Bit Length data s Input Range Relative According to the Input Range designated for the Word Address Data the data is converted and displayed as relative values Word Address Here enter the Word Address used to store Meter data Display Mode When this check box checked negative numeric data can also be dis played Bit Length S
510. sion 2 0 hereinafter referred as this product LT Editor LT integrated development software made by Digital Electronics Corporation LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 5 PREFACE E Keyboard Compatibility List This manual uses the following symbols to indicate computer keyboard keys The key names used by your computer keyboard may differ Please use the chart below for reference symtat key _ 101 Keyboard a caf The LT Editor supports the following LT models Series Type Product Model Type Al GLC150B XY32SK GLC150 BG41 XY32SK 24V wee in Rote For the types of Device PLCs supported by the LT Editor please refer to the I Device PLC Connection Manual HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide PREFACE HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL E Structure of the Manual The LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide is the second in a Series of manuals for this product and explains how to use the LT Editor There are three other manuals in the series as well as online help Please refer to Chapter 1 LT EDITOR FUNDAMENTALS for an over view of this product 1 6 LT Editor Manuals and Help In addition to these manuals data files containing supplemental information on updated functions are also provided To read these additional data files click on the Start button in your Windows OS main screen and select the Progr
511. specifying their coordinates Check this check box to change the size Enter the object s left top coordi nates Enter the object s right bottom coordi nates E Using Coordinates to Change an Object s Position PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select a desired object 2 3 1 Selecting Objects w 2 Select the Edit menu Change Coordinates com mand 3 Enter the object s left top and right bottom coordi To change the size check the Change Position Ej Change size check box in step 3 mikara seg PA To cancel the coordinates change X Anis Y Axis click on the button To undo the coordinates change 4 Click on the button to execute the command Click on the x icon S LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 173 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing m Editing the Node of a Multi segment Line Creating Editing or deleting a node can be performed on a multi segment line and a filled polygon Node Edit The Node Edit dialog 7 Deletes the selected peak Adds a node The added displays zert in Front l zert in Back i node is the same as the selected node If the screen capacity is exceeded by the added value the Insert in Front and Insert in Back buttons are highlighted and cannot be specified If the node edit is selected the selected point in the displayed dialog is marked with a cross E Editing a Node on a C
512. splay The message can be registered up to 8999 lines Checks if the Auto matic Print F i Bm ic Address Address TE ol Tiiagen Tine oO Fieconeny Tine I HEHE ee OJ Automatic Address Increment erenieri Jumps to the designated line PX fu nction is SS NN N S l I O S N being used eit Tye Message oummary Text NS g Message Color Jump to the specified line Bit Address Specifies the monitor bit To specify the bit address for the Alarm Sum mary mode select a device that can be specified in Word units Device PLC Connection Manual Alarm Type The Alarm Editor provides two types of alarms Alarm Summary and Alarm Message The Alarm Summary mode lists messages specified by the Alarm Part The Alarm Message mode displays a scrolling message at the bottom of the LT s screen Up to 128 messages can be entered into the Alarm Editor Any message beyond this setting range will not operate on the LT unit s panel screen Message Enter your message here Up to 160 alphanumeric characters can be entered for one message Index Text can be used to switch messages YG 4 5 3 Entering Settings via the Screen Editor Selecting Alarm Editor Messages Pop up Keypad A pop up keypad is displayed allowing you to enter the bit address using the mouse Message Color Designates message s color Select the display color Fg and background color Bg and specify whether to blinking BIk is used or not
513. ssccecccccsssscececcocsssscececesssssseceeosoo 2 213 20E CS N e O EE a 2 213 Dh MING SAD ar E 2 213 Dad Cle PTOPCI SS a E E 2 215 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 15 PREFACE Di TEU E aanas E E EE A E O ten E eeveaaiu 2 219 i ES Soo Da E eee ee eee A A A A eee 2 219 2 1 3 Part Reference List x5t soscss 2ssaosue sone sectvoceeeascdocnae ateses cendeddadadedlenntcnteeceen ine v spissene 2 221 To Me SOMO E aca ce sce hess es eesmiascrsnts E 2 223 Dale A RCP eMe NGG LAS ea yatenash oaseo seu E EA EE AE 2 225 2d Load Screen Lisier ongia T a a EE Eaa 2 228 2 7 9 Display of Screen Level Change Structure seeesesessesssssssssssssssssssseeerrererresessssss 2 229 28 DAFConye SON aiseanna aiei 2 230 2 8 1 Conversion from DXF File to Base Screen DXF Screen woe cc ecceeeee ees 2 230 2 8 2 Conversion from Base Screen to DXF File Screen DXF woe ees 2 236 CHAPTER 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS CREATING and USING SCREENS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen u cccccccssssssssscccccccccsssssssscccssssessess 3 2 3 2 Creating an Image the Image ScCreen eccccccssssssececccossssscececcccssssececososssse 3 23 CHAPTER 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT RN Dren IIS oeer E EEE EEE 4 2 41 1 Listing Copying Deleting SCCM csi oiccassisscncsrsndccassdiensenideas earsasiaaitecsnalsencseveesteusieases 4 2 4 1 2 Copying Screens from Other Projects cccccssesssseeeecceecceeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaeaseeaseseeesee
514. ssword Password Entry Enter Password 3 After the transfer is completed select the Transfer menu Exit command or click on the icon REMARKS The LT unit must be set to Screen Transfer mode or Running mode LT Series User s Manual sold separately CHAP TER 6 INITIALIZE 7 2 2 Passwords If you enter an incorrect password three times or more data transfer can not be performed In this case repeat the transfer procedure from step 2 Invalid Password Please Retype password Cancel To cancel data transfer mode click on the icon Tal LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 7 TRANSFERRING SCREENS 72 Transferring Data and Logic Programs e a When Receiving Data From the LT Data stored in the LT unit can be received on a project file basis by the LT Editor To receive transferred data with the password registered password entry is required when receiving the data A Unless Upload Information is selected in the Transfer Set L tings dialog box when any data is transferred to the LT unit the Important data cannot be received from the LT unit PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu Transfer command or click on the icon Or via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Transfer command or click on the icon 2 Select the Transfer menu Receive command or click 7 2 2 Passwords o
515. steps used for the drawing of Arcs When using the same procedure to draw an Arc LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 127 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing To use the Fill command simply left click your cursor on top of an object s enclosed area The selected Fill pattern will then spread outward until it reaches a boundary A boundary can be any line or Fill that is the same color as that chosen for the Fill s foreground background or border 7 lt Cautions when Filling an Object gt important Be sure that the area to be filled is completely enclosed with solid lines Dotted lines can not be used as an enclosure A space of only one dot on the border of an enclosed area Is enough to allow Fill to leak into other areas of the screen Be especially careful when drawing polygon vertexes and filling an object while the display ts set to 50 DO NOT attempt to fill objects that have been designated as blinking When filling an image that uses an arc Fill may leak when that image is actually displayed on the LT panel display To prevent this use a line to connect any gaps in the image E Fill Attributes Displays the currently selected Select one of the Fill type tiling patterns Fo eo e B Bei ek Select a Color Bd ee vo ssi To select the background color for all the screens used use the Option Nel menu s Screen Settings command 2 7 2 Settings Scre
516. such as a bar graph for Window Registration on the Window Screen U on the Base Screen such as B2 Call up the window PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select Window Parts from the Parts menu or For Window Regis click the FE icon tration of parts on the Window Screen U refer to 3 7 2 Window 2 Select the window to be displayed on the Base Registration on the U Screen Screen B from the Window Number field Specify the Window Control Address as well Window Parts Setting W1 _001 Window Control Address Fi Bitd ON OFF Bit Display Order 3 Click the button after setting all at tributes The border of the window area is displayed on the drawing area 4 Click on the point where the Window Part is to When the specified area is over be placed lapped by objects on the Base Screen the object will be hidden while the window is displayed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 117 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 2 Drawing Straight lines rectangles and oval objects can be drawn using drawing tools An object s attributes such as line types and colors are designated in its dialog box After designating the object s attributes move the cursor and start to draw the object directly in the drawing area Usage Pattern Draw gt Selecta drawing _y Set any attributes gt Draw the object or command Select a desired drawing icon from the Draw Tool Bar
517. sult is true 1f N1 is equal to or smaller than N2 N1 lt N2 lt gt Not equal Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant The result is true if N1 is not equal to N2 N1 lt gt 4 N2 gt Greater than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant The result is true if N1 is greater than N2 NI gt N2 gt Equal to or greater than Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant The result is true 1f N1 is equal to or greater than N2 N1 gt N2 Equal Compares the data in two word addresses or the data in a word address and a con stant The result is true if N1 is equal to N2 N1 N2 2 214 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS Command tommand SSC Equal o lt T erm1 gt lt T erm2 gt Se ote For details about logical operations Na 3 1 6 Logical Operation Examples Constant Address D Script ToolBox Temp Address Functions Here a LT internal Address is specified Data Set that can be used with the program There Bit Address are 90 words from 0000 to 0089 avail Constant able for Temporary Work Address The Temp Address o Word Address Temporary Work Address s initial value is not fixed Bit Address Enter a bit address Word Address Enter a word ad
518. t e Shift Right Select the display style from the Shift Left and Shift Right The data will appear starting from the side designated here The Shift Left is selected by default e Zero Suppress Select this option to omit the leading zeros of display data E g When the Display Length is 4 and the Zero Suppress is NOT selected 25 appears as 0025 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 95 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts e Zero Display When this option is clicked and the host PLC data is 0 the value 0 will not display E Numeric Display Shape Color Attributes Here the Numeric Display area s border color value display color Number color and interior color Plate color are selected 2 1 Selecting Colors E Numeric Display Alarm Settings Attributes If desired specify a variety of Alarm settings 2 1 Setting Alarms E Placing a Numeric Display The procedure for placing a Numeric Display is shown below Data stored in the specified Word Address is displayed in the designated Numeric Display po0101 CH TT A When 32 bit data 65539 is The maximum number of stored in addresses D00100 digits is 10 with 2 decimal and D00101 places PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Parts menu Numeric Display com mand or click on the Ej icon 2 In the General Settings tab input the Word Ad dress used to store the display data Numeric Display Settings ND_ O
519. t and click on the Con button 3 Specify the Start Screen Number of the copy desti To select several screens simulta nation and copy count Then click on the OK neously dr ag the mouse down the buton list or click on the target screens u while pressing your PC s key The screen will be copied for the designated number ae key consecutively from the Start Screen No When selecting multiple screens si multaneously copy will be per formed only one time E Important Once the Copy command is performed it cannot be un done LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 3 4 1 Screen Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT E Deleting Screens This feature deletes a screen from the current project file PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Via the Screen Editor select the Screen menu Open Screen command or click on the E icon 2 Select a screen to be deleted from the list and click on the Delete button Project File Factory Akte Screen B Switch 1 To select several screens simulta neously drag the mouse down the Switch2 list or click on the target screens Alarme i i Switch 1 ag Z while pressing your PC s Shift key 3 or key D Preview Screen Type Base Screen i A Important Once the Delete command is performed it cannot be un done Open Screen Project File Factory Akte Screen E Switch 1 Alar
520. t bit length designated in D Script is 32 the copying will be as fol lows E g memcpy 100 WORD10 2 31 0 WORD10 1 100 11 2 101 102 103 E g memcpy WORD10 100 4 0 15 31 0 WORD10 11 e Ifthe original and destination data ranges overlap all overlap ping data will be rewritten as follows E g When copying D101 to D104 to D100 to D103 Data is copied to a smaller number Address Copy From Copy To 2 220 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E g When copying D100 to D103 to D101 to D104 Data is copied to a larger number Address Copy From Copy To E g When copying WORD11 to WORD14 to WORD10 to WORD13 Data is copied to a smaller number Address Copy From Copy To E g When copying WORD11 to WORD13 to WORD11 to WORD14 Data is copied to a larger number Address Copy From Copy To e Although this example s function designates 2 Addresses these Addresses will not be counted as D Script Addresses e When using device addresses for the Assign operation the write values will not be assigned immediately due to the LT to PLC transmission time The addresses entered below are just a few examples The actual address entry varies depending on your PLC type E g memcpy w D200 w D100 10 Copies D100 to D109 to D200 to D209 w
521. t can be converted will The instruction will be inserted appear ORLA EE dek ix BAr APO 2 A eale ho amp amp ar B F Pea Pea ten m o gt om fn ea i l oe e The Power OM pushbutton starts the soft drink machine Sobed OF File Edit View Search Inset Data Controller Help To cancel the Pasting click on the a icon E Mee AA E E opl OF M AAE e A 0 Fower_On_pushbutton Power _Off_pushbutton ee Sette ee 1 il Ot ORRESeePOCHD 233 140 S82 26 Numeric Display gt gt Reset_Counters lt lt z3 nix pecial Librar p Hel ETIE KK wee As OO Oy by i amp Logic Program Editor 4 Manufacturing System it View Search Inset Data Controller Help mer 5a 4 gt gt lt 24 oa Pe AF Foe 2 e elle 100 Eh ee et ae IF Peo lea xu gt ms on TE Parente Gate e F a The Power ON Pera See Sk pushbutton starts the pele os ek J soft drink machine SANs a eed ks Sole OF Sold OF See 0 0 ES Rae Ey cee bee c bee Power _On_pushbutton Power _Off_pushbutton Light T A ERANT A A AA AN A a SE a EN Gi of B
522. t file which are not dependent on any screen Also specify whether the settings existing in the current project file are deleted by overwriting them or merged added with additional settings without deleting them If Overwrite is specified the settings at the copying destination will be deleted and all the settings at the copying source will be copied If Merge is specified the settings at the copying source will be copied while those at the copying destination are left as far as possible When such a merge is made using Window Registry D Script Functions or Filing Data you will be prompted to confirm whether any identical existing number or function name is to be overwritten When the combina tion is made using Data Sampling or Global D Script all the settings will be merged E Copying Screens from Other Projects PROCEDURE REMARKS First open the copy designation project 1 Select the Project Manager s Utility menu Screen Copy command 2 Select the project file to be copied original project To select a screen located in a dif file from the screen list or enter the target project ferent folder you must change to name then click on the Den button that folder 1 2 2 Selecting an Existing Project Select The currently opened project can not be selected B Manufacturing System lte Files of type Windows Project Files te ance When you double click on the Description 4 Manu
523. t found in the system s directory Re install the LT s system starting from the master disk Send SIO Error Unable To Open aComPort The COM port cannot be used In the transfer seting menu s serial port seting specify the available serial port and retry data transfer Send File Error Bad File Data The data to be sent is not correct The data created in the temporary file cannot be read correctly Check that the disk has sufficient free Space and itis notcorrupt and retry file transfer Simulation data file cannot be found The CSV file is not stored in the directory as the execution file The simulaton information file may be deleted or the fle may have not been created Set the simulation feature when transferring the screen and retry data transfer Simulation data file read in error The CSV file cannot be read into the system The Simulation information fle may have been deleted or the fle may have not been created Set the Simulation feature when transferring the screen and retry data transfer Appendix 10 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 1 Error Messages E Screen Transfer Errors from previous page T Error Message Cause Solution The Extended Program cannot be found The Extended P rogram required for seting up the LT cannot be found Please check the CFG file s directory Also you may need to change the LT s ype The Extended Program cannot be found in Unable t
524. t screen number of them will be displayed Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Click on the button to open the screen The selected screen will open JS Drawing Board Factory A Screen Edit View Option Draw Parts Special Library Window Help o emjlaj jas lel e lssejls j onse Kx wwe IDERE mara E B13 Switch 1 w Parts i F 7 k j on fa g Changs ity I i E E Re ROCA VORP aaee 1 10 11 12 13 iz 14 15 bt 243 63 170041 Ready fi S E AN Up to twenty screens can be open at the same time lt Note To select several screens simultaneously while pressing the key click on a A screen and drag the mouse over desired adjacent screens or you can select screens individually by clicking on them while pressing the key Project File A Manufacturing Ite Screen B 1 Run Mode 2 Operation Monitor 4 Error Screen 11 Keypad Input Open Screen Type Base Screen ia I Diawing Board Factory A creen Edi View Option Draw Parts Special Library window Help smjajejaaj gt foe sae e290 well AOO amp be iti E AJO wi Ba paa i Al PME e Tel gt eeuveaceenr e 8 Ko_001 0000 10 11 V2 1 T2 w Parts ical Objects 1
525. temet browser The browser setings are not correct or the memory area for the browser is insufficient Check the setings of the startup browser If the browser setings are correct quit all other applications and restartthe browser Cannot read system file The program file data required for setup cannotbe opened or read or the file s data is not correct The file may be corrupt or a disk error may have occurred After solving the problem reinstall the file Cannot read the file s system information The project fle is corrupt Use LT Editor s rebuilding tool to repair the file Afer repair is completed read the file again Current C olor Depth Not Supported Only bit maps of 256 colors or less can be used Convert to 256 colors or less by this software Destination screen number is too high Set Copy source end number copy source B Reduce the number of destination or source start number gt 8999 copy destination start screens number Exceeds Data Backup Area Limit The backup setings backup area used cannot Please adjust your settings to fit this area s jexceed 2031 Set Backup start address the size limitations number of devices to less than or equal to 2031 Extemal Device File Type Error The External Device table file format is not the Same as the LT s or the file is corrupt Selectan External Device from the master disk and reinstall the file Grouping Nesting Limit Reached You are attempting to nest grouped objects
526. ter 8 SIMULATION 8 1 3 Performing a Simulation To perform a simulation first connect the LT unit to your personal computer using the Data Transfer Cable i e Before performing a simulation you must transfer the simula I tion protocol to the LT unit Important 8 1 2 Transferring Simulation Protocol e Be sure not to press the touch panel switch of the LT main unit before the simulation starts Especially be sure not to change the screen of the LT unit Otherwise a system error will occur PROCEDURE REMARKS Connect the LT unit to your personal computer with the Prior to starting simulation set the Data Transfer Cable LT unit to the RUN mode 1 Via the Project Manager select the Project menu If the simulation protocol has not Simulation command been transferred to the LT unit in step 1 the following dialog box will appear and the simulation can 2 Click on the button to begin communication with 2 not be started the LT unit The device information on the current LT panel screen 1S displayed AN The simulation protocol has not yet been transherred Please designate the protocol in the screen transher menu During communication the icon blinks like this You can check the LT panel operation by switching 8 1 1 General De screens or changing the device settings using the scription of the Simulation Screen or icon displayed in the Alter cell Also you can check the device status
527. ter a KD_2 will be highlighted and be ready to receive in Wait state in order from the lowest put ID number upwards After the first T value has been registered the next B52 value s display area will automati Wo cally be ready to receive input a 2 74 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E When using the Pop up Keypad The procedures for entering setting values via a Pop up Keypad on the LT screen are shown below KD_1 Word Address tm D00050 When the Keypad A Pop up Keypad will Input data Display is appear and can re from the touched ceive Keypad PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Here the Keypad Display KD_1 has been set on the For how to create LT screen a Keypad refer to 2 1 11 Placing a ID No Keypad Display 2 When the Keypad Display KD_1 is touched 3 A Pop up Keyboard appears At the same time the When the Keypad display is placed Keypad Display KD_1 s display reverses highlights the Pop up Keyboard will auto and waits for input matically be set The square box shown below represents the cursor s po sition In the following two cases the pop up keypad will disappear with no confirmation of the input during data input When the active Keypad Input Display is touched e When another Keypad Input Display is touched during data input only when the Use Pop up keypad feature is
528. tes the data of the selected screen and stores it in the clipboard The deleted screen can be moved to another screen but cannot be moved to the original screen The Cut command can be ex ecuted for the entire screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the original Mark screen to be cut This description assumes that several screens have al ready been opened 2 Select the Edit menu Cut command or click on To delete the Mark screen perform the icon to store the Mark data in the Clipboard steps 1 and 2 only Data of the original data screen will be cut I When the Copy or Cut command is executed the copied or cut data are temporarily stored in the clipboard When you execute the Paste command the data stored in the clipboard will be pasted to the selected position 312 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen PROCEDURE 3 Select the mark screen destination to which the se lected Mark screen will be pasted 4 Select the Edit menu Paste command or click on the icon Data of the Mark screen will be pasted M Untitled2 ili M1 valve o x LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide REMARKS 3 1 Creating a Mark the Mark Screen Chapter 3 DRAWING APPLICATIONS E Copying a Screen The selected screen data are copied
529. the LT by connecting it to an Device PLC LT Editor Device PLC Connection Manual 1 3 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish 1 4 From Start to Finish This section describes the LT Editor program s operation flow from start to finish Usage Pattern Create Select a Create Edit a Logic Program with the Logic Program Editor 1 2 1 Getting Started E Starting LT Editor The following explanation assumes your PC is turned on and the Windows desktop has appeared Create Edit a Save the project screen with the and quit the Screen Editor Project Manager Start project file with the gt Project Manager PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Click on the Start button and point to the If you double click directly on a Programs Pro face LT Editor menu Then previously made project file lte click on the 1 Project Manager command file in Windows Explorer LT Edi E tor will automatically start ACressores F 2 Rebuild StartUp J 3 Pack Tool EE MS DOS Prompt ReadMe Microsoft Vyord Ea Uninstall 8 Favorites aA Documents Settings Find Help 2 The Project Manager starts The Tips screen appears upon the startups This screen To hide the Tips screen remove the displays one point descriptions on the new features checkmark from the Show at Startup checkbox and click the Close button a Did you know that
530. the addresses all settings should be the same or down its interior characters are also scaled pia 2 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Using a Keypad to Input Values When not using the Pop up keypad The procedures for entering setting values via a Keypad on the LT screen are shown below KD KD When the Trigger doe as Bit M0080 turns can receive PROCEDURE 1 Here three Keypad Display have been set to share a common start bit ID No KD 2 2 Then when the PLC s internal Trigger Bit M0080 turns ON PLC a z II 3 First the Keypad Display KD_1 s display reverses highlights and waits for input The square box shown below represents the cursor s po sition UE LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Word Address oll Input data ON D0050 to D0052 from the Keypad REMARKS For how to create a Keypad refer to 2 1 13 Keypads For how to create a Keypad Display refer to 2 1 14 Key pad Display Placing a Keypad Display 2 73 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 Press the Keypad s keys to input the desired value 5 Press the ENT Key to register the value E 6 The registered value will then be stored in Word Ad Set value display areas having a dress D0050 which was designated in KD_1 Next common Trigger Bit will en
531. the destination from the Clipboard If the same number already exists the system asks if each file must be overwritten If you select the desired data will be overwritten If you eee the desired file will not be overwritten and the system will ask the same question for the next alarm If you select Yes to All all existing alarms will be over written If you select Notoal you will return to the menu screen Confirm Alarm Replace Alarm Mo 5 already exists Overste The selected alarm data is moved to the specified line Bit AGGEESS Type Hessece j20010 Sumecy S A stops i 5 Pon PJ a a am A Sire el p3 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 3 7 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS E Copy Copies the selected line of alarm data and stores it on the clipboard PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the alarm line to be copied Even if bit addresses have been lta line IMcaae Oe specified if message data has not 1 ooo Bulletin Tank A temperature UF been entered the Alarm Editor data rm ASO0050 Summary Tank B temperature UP cannot be saved 3 M 00051 Summary Tank C temperature UP 4 s 00052 To select several lines drag the mouse between the target lines or 2 Select the Edit menu Copy command or click click on the target line while on the licon to import alarm data to the Clipboard
532. the printing items related to a Window screen Window Screen Contents i Load Screen List L Farts List Information charcator D General 4 Detail L object ID No Ci Cross Reference List jm Da eed dde Information charactor size i amal Spall Border O Grid State 2 0n Off State W 9 6 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 9 PRINTING 9 1 Print Settings By selecting the Project menu Print Preview you can preview the screen image to be printed Setting items are the same as those of printing Instead of clicking on the button click on the Preview button E Print Preview Screen Starts Previews Previews Toggles between Scales up printing the next the previ previewing one page down the page ous page per screen and preview previewing two pages per screen Closes the print preview screen Print date and project file name System Setup List Anz 1009154 A Ha 1 System Setup Cheek Sum Touch Buzzer Sareen Ho Data Type creen Level Charge Flow Password Standby Mode Time Change To Sareen Ho Com Port Start up Display it Settings Offline Mode Top Left Comer On Contrast Adjustment Or Brightiess Adjustment Or Reverse Display OT Touch Input Hode 2 Point Use Touch Panel After Mo Refresh Rate 0 Print From Tool onne ctor Mot Use Mode Settings System Start Address O74 A O0000 Machine Humber 1 Reading Area Size Link Protos ol Type I
533. time printing if the Loop is not used the header is also printed when the first item of logging data is printed When the last item of logging data is printed the footer and total value s are printed Ste 2 e With both real time and block printing when the Loop is not used after the last item of logging data is printed page feed is performed e The maximum number of columns is 60 and the maximum number of rows is 4200 However since the setting data file capacity is approximately 58KB maximum the number of rows will depend on the No of Char Col to be designated for the number of borders and cells 60 columns 4200 rows 10 64 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging te e If the Windows system s font setting is either Korean Hangul Taiwanese N2 or Chinese image data is printed out e Regardless of the printer s color settings all data is printed in black and white e Alarm printing and screen hard copy commands are accepted even during real time printing Therefore during real time printing DO NOT enter other printing commands e While multiple lines of data are being printed if logging data is cleared data printing is interrupted Also if the LT s power is turned OFF during printing the remaining data will not be printed out even if the LT s power is turned ON again e The printing format consists of the three areas i e header
534. ting F Column Setting Mo of Data Rows 2 Mo of Data Col 2 No of Calc Rows i n See Header Footer Preview Control Word Address Doooon i ad Left Margin jo E Print Completed Bit Address Print Settings dialog box Border ee When using the Loop regardless of the logging frequency the data display row will be designated as a single row Settings To change row column attributes select the desired row or column and click on the Edit button Add Select a row or column and click on the Add button then one row or column is added Copy Copies the currently selected row or column data to the Clipboard Paste Pastes the copied row or column data to the desired position Cut Deletes the currently selected row s or column s are deleted 10 58 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES 10 2 Logging 1 Column Settings Print E Attribute Settings To set up column attributes select either a Ruled Line the Date Time or a String Char Col and click on the Settings button Print Settings Date Time lord General Info The General Info page provides informa tion about the current Column Settings in use Column Settings Data Format Size Style Column Mo 1 General Info Column Type fe Value Date Time 2 Char Col 2 Border Data Type Absolute DOO000 Display Format
535. to find it elsewhere divided files and recreate the original project file all the divided fles are required Unable to open file for reading The fle cannot be opened The file is corrupt or aborting the disk has a problem Afer correcting the problem re try opening the file The file named is inserted here E Rebuild Tool Errors ErrorMessage _ _ _ Cause Solution File version does not match The specifed fle contains setings for a version which is not supported by this rebuilding tool Re specify a projectfle LTE file Rebuilding the File has Failed Recovery of the file has failed This file is OS PRATER leapt ndcereit o S LTE header is destroyed The file header information is corrupt This file LP AI leeteretadcomateuse LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 11 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES E DXF File Conversion Errors The error messages generated during DXF file conversion are as follows xynn lt message gt line gt a Conversion direction 1 DXF LT 2 LT DXF y Procedure 1 Read 2 Conversion 3 Write nn Error code line Line No of the DXF file causing the error E DXF File Conversion Errors Code Error Message Cause Solution Length Over in 1 record line The single record length of the DXF file exceeds 256 characters Edit the error line so that the length is less than 256 characters
536. to save the changes to C Program Files Pro faceXLT database4 Manufacturing System LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals REMARKS After saving the program the Logic Program Editor remains open When saving a logic program vari ables registered with the Logic Pro gram Editor will be registered with the Symbol Editor as Logic sym bols 4 2 6 Symbol Editor impor When variables are used in a drawing be sure to make a drawing after saving a logic program REMARKS You can also close the logic pro gram by clicking on the x button at the upper right corner of the Logic Program Editor When saving a logic program vari ables registered with the Logic Pro gram Editor will be registered with the Symbol Editor as Logic sym bols 4 2 6 Symbol Editor E Important When variables are used in a drawing be sure to make a drawing after saving a logic program Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 2 From Start to Finish iz Opening Closing Saving a Screen To create a screen you must switch from the Project Manager to the Screen Editor and open a screen This section describes the procedures for opening closing and saving a screen E Opening a New Screen PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the Project Manger s Screen Setup menu When the Screen Editor has already Editor command or click on been started skip step 1 The Screen Edi
537. to show that it is selected _ A Part s Label can be selected in ig dependently from the Part Click on a Part to display its handles 2E and then on its Label to display the Label s handles After selecting the Selecting an Object by Dragging Label it can be moved or scaled in 2 Position the cursor near the object and hold the but dependently from the Part ton down then drag this is called Left dragging Numeric Display and text can also the mouse over the object As you do so a box be selected using the above men formed by a dotted line will expand to enclose the tioned steps object When the entire object is enclosed within the box release the mouse button handles display on the object to show that it has been selected You must Left dragging over only a part of the position the cursor relative to the object so that when Object will not select it The entire you Left drag over it the entire object will be en Object must be enclosed to select it closed within the box if it is not then the object will not be selected This method is most useful when selecting multiple objects described below When you wish to select another ob ject without de selecting the previ ous one hold down the key a while making the next selection eas eee N This can also be done continually y to select multiple objects Selecting an Object from Overlapped Objects 2 Whi
538. tor s opening screen will appear Screen Edit View i ane aa Pats Special Library Window Help 0 amp Bil e Ea gt CETERAE i TTE EA ee H fe a 10 wt Wz 13 14 1 oy 2 Select the Screen Editor Screen menu s New Selecting the Screen menu s command or click on Open command or clicking on and entering an unregistered 3 Select the screen type screen number can also be used to Open a new screen Screen Type n Enter the screen number and title when saving the screen 1 2 4 Saving a Screen under a Different Name Hark a Window Screen 4 Click on the button to create the desired Up to twenty screens can be simul type of screen taneously opened A screen corresponding to the designated LT type will Multiple types of windows can be appear opened on any one screen at the Peter Neg agree Smee ine S T Same time isule ale fe foo saeleacaso xz aaja el OO amp ie it eal Es eel g S OFF Ei I 1 TPI 2 i 4 E amp i y a B 10 11 T Parts FP Objects i Ghangeciy Teee Me a I Link Seect 4 Change Oier y 44 TAD Ready
539. tor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide ZOD Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts Word Address s setting items The Word Address setting items for Block Display is as follows The Offset setting is valid only when the PLC Word Address is used Without Offset Control With Offset Control 0 0 Cono 1 Data Count n 1 Data Count n 2 2 Offset m Data n units m Data n units m n 1 Control The role of each bit in the Control Status word is described in the following passages e To begin the graph display turn bit 00 ON Oe 02 01 Oo 18 Control Status STIU To clear the entire graph turn bit 01 ON Control T Oe 02 01 Oo antro Status e To clear the graph then re draw it turn both bit 00 and bit 01 ON 1 Oe U2 0 Q coto TS Data Count Defines the number of data values to display on the graph To display a graph like the one shown below set the Data Count to 7 2 54 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS e To display the graph delay Control Status setting by a time longer than the communication cycle time after storing the data important count and data values e After displaying the graph the Control Status resets to 0 To display the graph again store the data in the same Control Status word However be sure to delay at least 50 ms after the Control Status c
540. tore and store value of 0 value of 1 value of 1 Detects if bit Detects if bit address value address value changes from changes from 0 to 1 OFF to 1 to 1 ON to ON ON cannot detect bit rise LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 5 D Script Global D Script Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS As an example if the D Script touch timing is not used and only detection is performed the processing will be as follows Using an if statement to detect a trigger The if statement is used to detect when the bit is set using a touch Prior to performing the processing the value is read out and com pared Trigger Bit rising b LS203800 Execute if b LS010000 1 clear b LS010000 When this type of D Script is created even if touch input is done repeatedly the tag scan Is performed as shown in the following timing chart Here each tag scan value is read out the condition is compared and regardless of the previous value if it agrees with the condition the processing is performed D Script Processing Timing Chart Tag Scan Tag Scan Tag Scan Tag Scan Time Time Time Time LS010000 ee Condition during Trigger operatior b LS010000 b LS010000 b LS010000 Read out value Read out value Read out value is 1 is 1 is 0 True Condition True Condition False Condition Process b LS010000 Process b LS010000 Do not Process Read out value Read out value a
541. tributes Change Alarm Alarm Type Alarm Summary 2 Alarm Message Message Color Fo Lee Oe ee _ Bk PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the line of the alarm to be changed If several lines are selected the at In this example we will change an attribute of an item tributes of the selected lines can all in the alarm message alarm summary area be simultaneously changed eit Address a To select several lines drag the mouse 1 xomo Bulletin ank A temperature between the desired lines or click on 2 xo0050 a AAT the desired line while pressing the a Summary Tank C temperature LIP E Shift or Ctrl key 2 Select the Edit menu Change Attributes com mand or click on the Fa icon 3 After entering the necessary items click on the OOK button Change Alarm Alarm Type 3 Alarm Summary Parcel i Alam Message Messaae Color Fo eee C E C TE Bee LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 5 11 5 1 Alarm Creation and Editing Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS E Reflecting Device Comments This feature is used to reflect all the comment information corresponding to a se lected device in the Message field PROCEDURE 1 Select an alarm for which comment information is to be reflected on a row basis Here reflect the comment in the device for the alarm un cle summary rere oh YoOOLGL eatin 2 Select the Edit menu Apply D
542. trings Regis tration of the Index Text and setting the Control Address can be performed with the Text Table Editor Example Switching the display language for the label of a part Table 1 Table 2 Table 1 Table 2 Use the Text Table Editor to a Be Jis create the Index DEN NEXT Text in two languages PE When Table 1 When Table 2 Y is selected is selected MH Table is switched with the Control Address then a screen s text string is wo Z o changed Index No 1 Index No 2 Index No 1 Index No 2 4 48 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 5 Table Editor Character Strings e Switching tables uses the same process as switching screens Therefore some screen displays drawn with tags Important may not be able to be refreshed e The following character strings cannot be changed even when the tables are switched X tag character strings Filing Feature Logging Feature Precautions for switching tables with the Alarm function e When a table is switched while an alarm message Flow display is displayed the switched table is not used until the next message is issued Direction of the Japanese to it display flow English Switch the tables ENGLISH ENGLISH A PRESSURE ERROR Direction of the display flow e When the print setting is enabled for the Alarm Message Function Flow display the alarm message of t
543. ts PROCEDURE REMARKS 6 Click on the point where the Numeric Display s top To cancel the placement click on left corner is to be placed the lalicon If necessary use the Numeric Display s handles to alter its size after placement Regardless of whether the numeric data display area is scaled up or down the character size will not change To change the character size and position select the char acters inside the border directly To change a Part s size refer to 2 3 3 Scaling Up Down Pressing the key while re siz ing an area s border will also re size that area s characters Double clicking on any Part placed on the screen automatically calls up that Part s attribute settings 2 3 15 Changing Attributes 2 98 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS AR gt Message Display This display is used to show single line alarm messages in response to changes in External Device s Word Address data Select the message from Direct Text or Index Text E Message Display General Settings Attributes Select the Enter Comment Message Display Settings H _001 Word or Bit data here General Settings Messages Address to be Description Address mon ito red selected Part color Shape is dis played here Select the type of alignment Calls up the Part Character Size desired for the Shape Browser text of the Part Shapes can Display be sele
544. ttern Address Type i Bit Address fo Word Address Cancel Convert From Convert To Start Address Start Address 01 COO000 cae 00 0008 He End Address ocon E LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 4 33 4 2 Project Editing Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURE REMARKS The edited information is displayed in the Address Table of the conversion pattern PLE Type Change Convert From OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Convert To MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES Word Address 01 C00000 01 00010 00 0005 E a e a EA S o EA Save Pattens Save Patons _LoadPatems Load Patterns lt Deleting a conversion pattern gt Select the conversion pattern you want to delete from the Address Table and click on the Delet Pattern but ton PLE Type Change Convert From OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Convert To MITSUBISHI FREGROL SERIES Add Pattern Edit Pattern Load Patterns lt Saving a conversion pattern as a CSV file gt Select the conversion pattern you want to save from the Address Table and click on the Save Patten button PLE Type Change Convert From OMRON THERMAC NEO SERIES Convert To MITSUBISHI FREQROL SERIES 4 34 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 4 SCREEN AND PROJECT MANAGEMENT 4 2 Project Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS Designate the file name In the File name field enter the name of t
545. ttings Total Writes each column s total value for each block to the LS area The Total value is written to the LS area via the Control Word Address according to the Logging Settings Display Settings Perform Data Write On Off Designates whether or not the Total value is written to the LS area Control Word Address When writing the Total value to the LS area transfers the Total value data to the LS area by designating a Block No and turning the Trigger Bit OFF and then ON Control Word Address 7 1 0 0 Reservation All OFF Trigger 1 Block No Trigger ON Transmit OFF Not transmitted Write to LS Address Designates the LS Area Address used when writing data Write Complete Bit Address Designates a Bit Address to be turned ON when data write into the LS Area is completed After the Bit Address ON condition 1s detected turn it OFF via the Device PLC When there is no des ignated Block No the Perform Data Write Bit Address is not turned ON LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 10 43 10 2 Logging Chapter 10 ADVANCED FEATURES Data to be Written to LS Area Block and data structures to be transmitted to the LS Area are as follows Block Logging data 1 Logging data Be 15 0 See below oo S Year Stored lasttwo digits using a the BCD format 0 Logging data 2 1 2 3 Minute bn 4 Second EE x 5 See below o H See below NH N 48 Hn 6 Word D
546. upply is turned OFF the data Responding cable is unplugged or the LT may be in OFFLINE mode Check all these points When the LT main unitis in OFFLINE mode reset itto transfer mode Also check the serial port Invalid address substituted for unknown When using a symbolin the device address use aliases or invalid address error the symbol editor to enter the actual symbol addresses ERROR Out of Memory The LT s internal memory is full Delete any unnecessary screens LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Appendix 9 Appendix 1 Error Messages APPENDICES E Screen Transfer Errors from previous page Error Message Cause Solution Network C onnection Failed Connection to the specified party node is failed Check the PC network setings and the network cable connection If the problem sitll remains contactthe network manager No Upload Information in LT Data File Because the LT does not have the data required for sending the data to the PC the PC cannot receive the screen The screen originally may have been sent with the upload information set to Nottranster A screen that is not sent together with the upload information cannotbe received a PGO command failed The power supply to the LT may have been PLD command failed turned OFF or the cable has been un plugged Resetthe LT and the PC and retry data transfer Protocol file not found The External Device protocol file to be sent to the LT is no
547. ve Summary Display at 10 lines been assigned to bits M0800 to bv 30 characers oerdisnla M0896 in the Alarm Editor y pan Sa PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select the pon menu Alarm Display command or click on the g icon 2 In the General Settings tab input the Word Ad 2 1 12 Alarm dress No of Monitor Words and select one of the Summary Display Alarm Sum Show Border options mary Description Attribute Here since the Word Address range is from M0800 to Word Address M0896 enter 7 for the number of Monitor Words Alarm Summary Settings AL_001 General Settings Display Format Style Color Enter M0800 Description Word Address Border Type 3 No Border No of Monitor words z z 3 In the Display Format tab input the Display Start Line No of Display Lines and No of Characters In the Style Color tab select the Clear ing of Data Color if desired Enter 7 Select Border type Alarm Summary Settings AL_001 Display Start Line 1 General Settings Display Format Style Color Enter 1 Enter 10 Mo of Display Lines i 0 Mo of Display Char ad Enter 30 2 80 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS PROCEDURE REMARKS 4 After all of the Part s attributes have been entered and selected click on the button The Alarm Summary display area s border will appear in the Base sc
548. version W Screens Over Nesting Limit The screen calling layers are greater than 10 Screens with more than 10 layers cannot be converted Correct the data so that the number of layers will be 10 screens or less When writng the temporary file or output file the ka disk has become full Increase the amount of free disk space for the temporary file and outputfie Insufficient Memory The process is interrupted because of insufficient ka memory area during operaton Close all other applications and retry the operation User Abort The user has interrupted the operation during conversion E File Management Errors Error Message Cause Solution Cannot Write File The data cannot be written to the specified output fle name Check the amount of free disk or ifthe disk is write protected Output File Name Format Error The specified output fle name cannot be recognized by the editor Specify the correct file name Work Directory Not Found The folder in which the temporary file is created is not found Specify the existing folder using the environmentvariable TEMP TT C Input File Name Format Error The specified input fle name is different from the fle name created by the editor S pecify the correct fle name Input File Not Found The specified input file is not found Check the file PA aneadspecyteenttgte Appendix 14 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide APPENDICES Appendix 1 Error Messages
549. wing Periodic Trigger Control and Trigger Sampling Periodic No Trigger The host Device PLC data is imported at the setup intervals starting from when the LT is powered up Periodic During Trigger The host Device PLC data is imported at the setup intervals The data import start pause and clear commands will be performed according to changes to the corresponding bit in the specified Word Address Sample Only On Trigger The data is sampled at the desired tim ing setup Data import and data clear will be performed according to changes to the corresponding bit in the setup Word Address Sampling Time Specifies the sampling time in 1 sec ond units for the import of host De vice PLC data Word Address When Periodic During Trigger option is selected The 00 and O1 bits of the Word Address specified here will control the data im port start pause and clear operations 15 01 00 1 Data _ Pause With 0 1 1 Start data is cleared Word Address When Sample Only On Trig ger option is selected The 00 and 01 bits of the Word Address settings control the Data Read Start and Clear operations 15 01 00 1 1 Data clear Ch ise With 0 gt 1 ange ata Import data is cleared With 0 1 or 1 0 data is imported ok cares Hep 2 238 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 6 Data Sampling D e
550. witch 5 times in both the X and Y directions gt 2 Select the pull down Edit menu s Duplicate com mand 3 Enter the number of copies to make in the X and Y When duplicating an object posi directions spacing between copies tioning will be decided based on the If desired click on the Address Increment check box to top left handle of the copied mas increment addresses automatically ter object Enter 5 Enter 5 4 Click on the button to duplicate the object To cancel the duplication click on the icon To stop duplicating press the key LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 163 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 Object Editing may Delete Here the procedure for deleting an object is explained E Deleting an Object PROCEDURE REMARKS 1 Select an object 2 Select the pull down Edit menu s Delete command Instead of selecting the Delete or click on the icon command the computer keyboard s Delete key can also be used To cancel the deletion click on the icon 2 164 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 3 Object Editing Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 3 10 Here the procedure for aligning and centering object s are explained E Alignment Dialog Box Alignment Resets the X axis Shows the settings ne tali current align Cancel ment settings g KE Aligns above the X axis
551. without changing the character size When Off the characters are copied to the label in the On state State States are displayed only for Lamps and for those switches with two states ON and OFF The text displayed for each state can be specified indepen dently Simply click on either state button to specify its text and colors Character Size Specifies the size of character 2 2 9 Text Style Font Specifies the type of character Normal Bold Raised used in each Label 2 2 9 Text Text Color ON OFF Specifies Label colors The default settings are Fg White and Bg Transparent mode Black Blk Line space When the text extends to more than one line set the line space Alignment Justification When the text input for a Label exceeds one line the Alignment icons will appear Select Left or Right justification or Centering State OFF Test Tracking On or cel Character Size Alignment Spacing fisx16 E Left justified Centered Right justified LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E ID Numbers When creating a Part an ID number is automatically assigned to the Part before it is placed on the screen This number shows how many of that kind of Part were previously placed on the current screen When a Part is deleted from a screen all following Part numbers will be adjusted downwards Example of an ID number BS 010 Indi
552. wn here with a dot ted line around its border i a A 5 2 Select the Edit menu Add Alarm command or click on the icon 3 After entering the necessary settings click on the button If the same number already exists the system asks 1f each file must be overwritten If you select sired file will be overwritten If you select the desired file will not be overwritten and the system will ask about the next alarm If you select Yeste ai all existing alarms will be overwritten If you select Notoal you will return to the menu screen Add Basic Alarm Start Address O01 COO00000 p E Aam Tie Mumber of Bits to Add f Alarm Summary Cancel i Alam Message Add Offset C Message Message Color 5 10 Number of Bits todd f6 Alam Summary Cancel Add Offset i Help REMARKS If asymbol is specified for the start address the added addresses will be displayed as follows Example Assume that the start ad dress is TEST lt Symbol and that the number of added bits is 4 The addresses are consecutively added as shown below TEST TEST 1 TEST 2 TEST 3 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 5 CREATING AND EDITING ALARMS 5 7 Alarm Creation and Editing PROCEDURE REMARKS Confirm Alarm Replace Alarm No 5 already exists Oyvernyrite E Changing Alarm Attributes You can easily change any alarm s at
553. wn menu c appears c Pull down Menu When you select a desired menu from the menu bar the pull down menu appears This menu includes various commands d Tool Bar The Tool Bar provides icons representing such commands as Creating Editing a Logic Program and RUN STOP Clicking one of these icons performs that command The Tool Bar can either be hidden or displayed LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 4 Logic Program Editor Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals e Programming Area Creates a logic program The entire program may not display depending on the size of the window or program In such cases use the window s scroll bar to change the display area f Status Bar Displays information on the edited logic program and messages concerning the operation LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 1 21 Chapter 1 LT Editor Fundamentals 1 5 Screen Editor IE Screen Editor To create a screen start the Screen Editor via the Project Manager There are three types of screens used for different purposes Base Screen Mark Screen and Image Screen Screen Screen Maximum Size Contents Type Number per Screen This screen is displayed when the LT is in RUN mode Base B _ Shared drawings and Active images loaded on another Approx 16 KB Screen base screen can be used One partofa Base Screen can be registered as a window M ark Mlb Used to create marks and foreig
554. xt characters shown engraved on the Switch button face are input 2 1 Parts Creating Labels LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 21 Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 1 Parts E Word Switch Extend Attributes Here the interlock and the buzzer can be set as shown below Word Switch Settings 4S O01 General Settings Shape Color Label Extend Option Itech deals E Buzzer Z y Select the Tough avalable candikimn Interlock fe Bik Di i Bik DA nter oe function state Interlock Only when a bit designated via Interlock Address is in a state that has been selected via Touch available condition the switch becomes effective Whether the switch is effective in ON state or in OFF sate is selectable here Touch Available Interlock Address Touch Available Condition Status Not Available Touch Available OFF Touch NotAvailable ON JT ouch NotAvailable OFF Touch Available Buzzer Sets the buzzer to ON OFF 222 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide 2 1 Parts Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS E Placing a Word Switch An example of how to place a Word Set Switch is shown below A coo When the button is pressed 34 is sent to D00001 PROCEDURE 1 Select the Parts menu Word Switch command or click on the icon 2 In the General Settings area input the Word Ad dress and Constant data and select a function
555. ze used when converting data Ac cording to the specified DXF and Base screen size data will be relatively magnified or minimized when converted DXF size Selects a DXF file size Option DXF gt Screen x Convert Color g peee Data is converted as Convert DF Size colored i Use LIMMIN LIMMA i Use EXTMIN ETMA Convert Screen Size Screen Size i 640x480 A 5 640x400 y 9 320x240 i S00 600 Designates the screen size used after conversion Convert Color When this box is checked DXF file data is converted as colored When this box 1s not checked DXF file data is converted as monochrome E Color Conversion DXF Screen Convert DXF Size The DXF file data conversion range is selected When Use LIMMIN LIMMAX is selected data in the DXF file s maximum screen area X Y coordinate screen boundaries will be converted When Use EXTMIN EXTMAX is selected only data in the DXF file s object area will be converted Convert LT Size The Project File screen size LT screen size used after conversion is speci fied 2 262 LT Editor Ver 2 0 Operation Manual Screen Creation Guide Chapter 2 CREATING BASE SCREENS 2 8 DXF Conversion E Color Conversion DXF Screen When the Option dialog box s Convert Color Data check box is checked the DXF file s color data will be converted as follows Ted ese CRS The background col

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Hewlett Packard Enterprise DAT 160  User`s Manual - SmartChat  LG DLE2301R Accessories Catalogue  ご使用の前に 保証書 各部の名称 コードの接続 専用脚の使い方  Inverter Series - OPTI-UPS  Honeywell Thermostat TH1000 User's Manual  Mini componente MANUAL DE SERVIÇO    Optoma TX665UTi-3D  取扱説明書 - KDDI  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file